The County Durham Plan
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report
February 2016
Contents
DOCUMENT CONTROL SHEET 1. DOCUMENT CONTROL SHEET 3
REGION
1. INTRODUCTION 5
1.1 Overview of County Durham 8
2. STAGE A1: OTHER POLICIES, 13 PLANS AND PROGRAMMES
2.1 Key Messages 19
3. STAGE A2: BASELINE 30 INFORMATION
3.1 Social Welfare and 32 Communities 3.2 Health 33 3.3 Housing 34 3.4 Crime 35 3.5 Economic Vitality 36 3.6 Education and Skills 37 3.7 Access and Transport 38 3.8 Climate Change 40 3.9 Air, Water and Soil Quality 42 3.10 Biodiversity and 47 Geodiversity 3.11 Landscape 57 3.12 Heritage 67 3.13 Resource Efficiency 69 3.14 Likely Evolution of 71 Baseline without the Plan
4. STAGE A3: IDENTIFYING KEY 77 SUSTAINABILITY ISSUES
4.1 Discussion of Key Sustainability Issues at an Area 88 Level 4.2 Central Durham Area 88
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Contents
4.3 North Durham Area 101 4.4 East Durham Area 110 4.5 South Durham Area 122 4.6 West Durham Area 135
5. STAGE A4: DEVELOPING THE 152 SA FRAMEWORK
6. CONCLUSION AND NEXT 161 STEPS
APPENDICES
. APPENDIX A: REVIEW OF POLICIES, PLANS AND 163 PROGRAMMES
National 183 Sub-national / Regional 237 Local 253
. APPENDIX B: REVIEW OF 284 BASELINE DATA
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Document Control Sheet 1
1 Document Control Sheet
Prepared by
Nadia Wetherell - Sustainability Strategy Officer Claire Hattam - Sustainability Strategy Officer Dean Pearson - Sustainability Strategy Officer
Reviewed by
Stephen McDonald - Senior Sustainability Strategy Officer
Approved By
Steve Bhowmick - Environment and Design Manager
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 3 Introduction 1
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 4 Introduction 1
1 Introduction
1.0.1 This document is the Scoping Report for the Sustainability Appraisal (SA), (including the requirements for a Strategic Environmental Assessment) of Durham County Council's Local Plan. The National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) requires all councils to produce a Local Plan and keep it up to date. Since Local Government Review in 2009, Durham County Council have utilised saved policies from the old local plans produced by the former local authorities. Without an up-to-date Local Plan, the Council has much less influence over the location of new development and the provision of infrastructure. Not having an up to date Local Plan therefore creates uncertainty and makes it harder to resist inappropriate development and secure new infrastructure such as schools and health facilities. Consequently, the new Local Plan will provide the policy framework for managing development and addressing key planning issues within the county.
1.0.2 The preparation of a Local Plan is not a new task for the Council. The previous version of the Local Plan 'The County Durham Plan' commenced in 2009 culminating in April 2015 with the submission of the Plan to the Secretary of State for examination. The Plan was informed by Sustainability Appraisal at each stage of its development, commencing in 2009 with the production of a Scoping Report which was subsequently updated in 2012 to ensure that the information collected and reviewed was kept up to date rather than being merely a snapshot of the situation at a particular time.
1.0.3 Following stage 1 of the examination, the Inspector produced an interim report which has since been quashed through a legal consent order due to flaws with the Inspector's approach. As part of the consent order the County Durham Plan was withdrawn to be recommenced at an earlier stage.
1.0.4 Prior to undertaking assessment of the Plan it is necessary to undertake the first stage of SA known as Scoping. This Scoping stage aims to build upon previous evidence collated and determines whether the previous assessment framework established is fit for purpose. The production of this report also provides the statutory environmental consultees (Historic England, Natural England, Environment Agency) with an early and effective opportunity to express their opinion on the Scoping Stage and resulting assessment framework prior to the assessment of the new Plan.
Aims of the Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) and Sustainability Appraisal (SA)
1.0.5 The overall aim of Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) and Sustainability Appraisal (SA) is to help protect the environment and to promote sustainable development through the integration of social, economic and environmental considerations into the preparation of plans which are likely to have significant effects on the environment. Both SEA and SA are assessment tools required by European (i) and National law (ii)to consider the potential impact of a proposed plan (and its alternatives) on the social, economic and
i SEA Directive 2001/42/EC ii Section 19 of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 requires a local planning authority to carry out a sustainability appraisal of each of the proposals in a Local Plan during its preparation
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 5 1 Introduction
environmental characteristic of an area. Integrating the assessment with the development of a Plan enables its policies to be changed or modified to better reflect, promote and address sustainability objectives and issues.
1.0.6 The SA process can be undertaken to satisfy the requirements of the SEA directive through a single assessment process. For the sake of brevity the combined SEA/SA process will be referred to as Sustainability Appraisal, (SA), in this report. The SA process should:
Take a long-term view of how the area covered by the plan is expected to develop, taking account the social, environmental and economic effects of the proposed plan; Provide a mechanism for ensuring that sustainability objectives are translated into sustainable planning policies; Reflect global, national, regional and local concerns; Provide an audit trail of how the plan has been revised to take into account the findings of the SA, Form an integral part of all stages of plan preparation; and Incorporate the requirements of the SEA Directive.
1.0.7 The main objectives of this SA Scoping Report are to:
Ensure the new Local Plan is as sustainable as possible by integrating sustainable development into the Plan and policy making process; Achieve a high level of environmental protection and balance social, environmental and economic issues within the County Durham Plan; Identify the links to relevant policies, plans and programmes and indicate the implications for the Local Plan and the SA process; Update the sustainability baseline for County Durham; Review and identify any additional key sustainability issues within the County; Outline the environmental characteristics of the County and its delivery areas which may be significantly affected by the Plan; Review and revise where necessary the Sustainability Appraisal Framework to ensure that the key sustainability issues are taken into account throughout the SA process; and Facilitate meaningful engagement and continuing consultation with statutory agencies on the scope of the SA process.
The SA Process and Scoping Stage
1.0.8 Current Government guidance advocates a five stage approach to undertaking SA as outlined in the following diagram (iii)
iii Source: Planning Practice Guidance: Paragraph 013
6 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Introduction 1
Figure 1 The Five Stage Approach to SA
1.0.9 This report describes the first stage and associated tasks of the SA process, the SA Scoping Stage (A). An overview of Stage A and its component parts are set out in the following table.
Table 1 Stage A of SA
Stages and tasks Purpose
A1: Identifying other relevant policies, To ensure that the relationship of the PPP's with the plans and programmes (PPP's) and development Plan and their social, economic and sustainability objectives environmental objectives are taken into account throughout the development of the County Durham Plan and the sustainability assessment.
A2: Collecting baseline information To provide an evidence base for sustainability issues, effects predication and monitoring
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 7 1 Introduction
Stages and tasks Purpose
A3: Identifying sustainability issues and To help focus the SA and streamline the subsequent stages, problems including the setting of the SA Framework, prediction of effects and monitoring
A4: Developing the SA Framework To provide a means by which the sustainability of the Plan can be assessed
A5: Consult the consultation bodies on To consult with statutory bodies to ensure the Scoping stage the Scope of the sustainability appraisal identifies the key sustainability issues. report
What we need you to do
1.0.10 One of the main aspects of the SA process is to achieve and maintain effective consultation. This consultation is very important to us and will ensure that the SA process collects views and informed opinions over a wide range of issues. To gather your opinions on various issues, we ask specific consultation questions throughout this SA Scoping Report. Please consider replying to these questions in your response. Please note however, that we welcome any further comments you may have on any aspect of this report. The consultation questions are framed in yellow boxes throughout this document. An example is shown below:
Consultation Question 3a
Can you provide or refer us to any other supporting data to improve the baseline information?
1.1 Overview of County Durham
1.1.1 County Durham lies at the heart of the North East Region and is is the largest unitary authority in the region in terms of population, and the fourth largest in England. It is home to over half a million people, a fifth of the region's population. The County covers a significant geographic area, extending some 223,000 hectares (862 sq miles) from the North Pennines Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) in the west to the North Sea Heritage Coast in the East.
1.1.2 Although commonly regarded as a predominantly rural area, the County is far from the usual pattern of a single large town surrounded by a network of agricultural villages. It varies in character from remote and sparsely populated rural areas in the Durham Dales, to the larger villages located within the former coalfield communities. The key spatial legacy of the rise and fall of the mining, steel and other heavy industries is the dispersed or multi-centred settlement pattern of small urban areas separated from one another by tracts of open countryside.
8 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Introduction 1
1.1.3 Given the size and diversity of the County and the need for the SA process to identify and evaluate impacts of the Plan which may be felt differently in different parts of the County, five distinct areas with similar characteristics have been identified as depicted in figure 2. Figure 2 County Durham Areas
Central Durham
1.1.4 This area comprises approximately 20% of County Durham's population and includes some 30 plus settlements, from Lanchester in the west to Ludworth in the east to Sacriston in the north and to Coxhoe in the south. The area includes the historic Durham City which is the area's largest settlement. The City's unique character and setting, supporting the internationally renowned Cathedral and Castle World Heritage Site which forms one of the most stunning city panoramas in Europe, combined with the City's importance as an administrative, educational, employment, service and tourist centre belies its relatively small size. Outside the City, settlements range from large villages (many a product of the County's industrial past) with their own local centres to small agricultural hamlets with few facilities.
North Durham
1.1.5 The North Durham area comprises approximately 26% of County Durham's population which is mostly concentrated in the three major centres of Consett, Stanley and Chester-le-Street. The area adjoins the green belt of the Tyneside conurbation along its north eastern border, whilst to the south east lies the Cathedral City of Durham. Formerly,
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 9 1 Introduction
the area was dependent upon coal mining and steel making, with Consett Steelworks once the largest of its kind in Europe. The last deep mine in the area and the Consett Steelworks both closed in 1980 and since then the economy has undergone radical restructuring, albeit deprivation is still an issue that needs addressing. Chester-le-Street is one of the oldest market towns in County Durham, home to the Emirates Durham International Cricket Ground, with good access to the east coast main line railway and A1(M).
East Durham
1.1.6 The East Durham area comprises approximately 18% of County Durham's population with a mixture of urban and rural areas with two main towns, Seaham and Peterlee, and a number of former colliery and rural villages. The A19 trunk road forms the main route through the District linking it to Tyneside and Wearside in the north and the Teesside conurbation in the south.
1.1.7 Peterlee was founded in the late 1940's as a new town and is a significant employment base within the County accommodating considerable manufacturing employment on its large industrial estate. Seaham is located on the coast and following the closure of Seaham's last remaining collieries in 1992, the town has witnessed substantial levels of physical regeneration activity. However, as for North Durham, deprivation is still an issue that needs addressing across the area. The Durham coast is a unique asset in the East Durham area and forms part of the Durham Heritage Coast definition. The coast provides an attractive coastal landscape of magnesian limestone grasslands, cliffs and beaches in East Durham and includes three European Protected wildlife site designations relating to coastal bird species and vegetated sea cliffs. A further European Protected wildlife site designation exists in the area pertaining to ancient Yew woodlands.
South Durham
1.1.8 The South Durham area comprises approximately 30% of County Durham's population which is mostly concentrated across the dispersed main towns of Bishop Auckland, Newton Aycliffe, Shildon, Spennymoor and Crook described as follows:
Bishop Auckland has roman and medieval origins with an attractive town centre and market place as well as important historical buildings such as Auckland Castle. The town is the major service centre and hub for South Durham. Newton Aycliffe was one of the original new towns developed in the 1950s and is a reflection of the architectural style of that time. The town has become a major housing and employment centre in the area within close proximity of the A1(M). The town boasts the regionally significant Aycliffe Business Park which hosts more than 250 companies including the recently opened Hitachi plant, a major employer, employing 730 workers assembling high speed intercity trains. Shildon is a small town, steeped in history due to its past as a historic rail centre and the role it played in the birth of the railways. The town incorporates a regionally significant tourism attraction at 'Locomotion' (part of the National Railway Museum) and serves its local community by offering a range of shopping complementary to the more extensive offer in nearby Bishop Auckland. Spennymoor has benefited greatly from a number of initiatives aimed at developing and improving the Town Centre in recent years and it plays an important role in
10 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Introduction 1
providing a wide range of everyday good and services. The main attractions in Spennymoor are the local leisure centre, and Victoria Jubilee Park which was given to the people of the town by Queen Victoria to celebrate the jubilee of her reign, and is sited on land which was once part of the Whitworth Hall estate of the Shafto family. Crook is a historic market town and has close links to the surrounding villages and Weardale. The centre of Crook, a designated conservation area, features a good variety of shops and businesses. However, the town's population have a strong reliance on the nearby services and facilities within Bishop Auckland in particular.
West Durham
1.1.9 West Durham comprises, in simplistic terms, the area to the west of the A68. It contains a large proportion of the nationally important North Pennines AONB and four European Protected wildlife sites which hold much of the upland heathland of northern England, support the major area of blanket bog in England and the remaining UK resource of Mountain hay meadows in addition to breeding pairs of Hen harrier, Merlin, Peregrine falcon, European Golden plover, Dunlin and Eurasian curlew. The delivery area is characterised by attractive countryside and is relatively sparsely populated, comprising approximately 6% of County Durham's population. The area includes the attractive historic market towns of Barnard Castle, serving much of lower Teesdale, Middleton-in-Teesdale, serving upper Teesdale and Stanhope serving upper Weardale. Barnard Castle in particular is a significant heritage / tourism destination and is considered to be one of the top fifty most historically and architecturally important towns in Britain. Around Teesdale's and Weardale's larger settlements are numerous villages and hamlets with an agricultural and / or former mining heritage.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 11 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 12 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Background
2.0.1 Task A1 of the Scoping Stage requires a review of relevant policies, plans and programmes (PPP's). The purpose of the review (often referred to as a 'context review') is to ensure that the relationship of the PPP's with the development Plan and their social, economic and environmental objectives are taken into account throughout the development of the County Durham Plan and the sustainability assessment. The review, therefore helps to set the overall context in which the Plan is written and assessed and needs to be kept up to date. The review ensures compliance with Annex 1 (a) of the SEA Directive:
The Environment Report shall include information on (inter alia):
The relationship (of the plan or programme) with other relevant plans and programmes
Approach
2.0.2 There is no definitive list of plans, policies and programmes (PPP's) to be reviewed. This review does not attempt to list all relevant information to the Local Plan, but to establish relationships and common themes between plans and highlight the implications for the Plan and its assessment. The review has been categorised by the following topics:
Sustainable Development Climate Change and Adaptation Energy Air Quality Water Soil Minerals and Waste Biodiversity & Geodiversity Landscape Heritage Housing Health & Social Issues Economy, Education & Skills Transport and Accessibility Spatial Policy
2.0.3 In addition, the review has taken account of relevant PPP's established at the local to international level within each of the topics (where available) as required by Annex 1 (e) of the SEA Directive.
The Environment Report shall include information on (inter alia):
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 13 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
The environmental protection objectives, established at international, (European) Community or national level, which are relevant to the plan or programme and the way those objectives and any environmental consideration have been taken into account during its preparation.
List of Relevant PPP's
2.0.4 The following table provides an overview of the PPP's subject to review to inform this Scoping Stage.
Table 2 Policies, Plans and Programmes (PPP's) Reviewed
Author Title of Plan, Policy or Programme Reviewed Pub. Date
International/ European
United Nations World Summit on Sustainable Development, Johannesburg 2002
European Commission EC Directive 2001/42/EC on the assessment of the effects of certain plans and programmes 2001 on the environment
European Commission A Sustainable Europe for a Better World: A European Union Strategy for Sustainable 2001 Development reviewed 2009
United Nations COP 21 Paris Agreement 2015
United Nations United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change including the Kyoto Protocol 1992 and 2005
European Commission EU Roadmap for moving to a low carbon economy in 2050 2011
European Commission Renewable Energy Directive 2009/28/EC 2009
European Commission Ambient Air Quality Directive (2008/50/EC) 2008
European Commission EC Directive 2000/60/EC establishing a framework for the Community action in the Field of 2000 Water Policy (the Water Framework Directive)
European Commission Bathing Water Directive 2006/7/EC 2006
European Commission Soil Thematic Strategy (The Communication) 2006
European Commission Thematic Strategy on the Sustainable Use of Natural Resources 2006
European Commission Revised EU Waste Framework Directive (2008/98/EC) And related Directive: 1999 and 2008 EU Directive 1999/31/EC on the landfill of waste1999 (the Landfill Directive)
Parties signed up to the Convention on Biological Diversity: 2010 Nagoya agreement 2010 Convention on Biological Diversity
European Commission Our life insurance, our natural capital: an EU Biodiversity Strategy to 2020 2011
European Commission EC Directive 92/43/EEC on the Conservation of Natural Habitats and of Wild Fauna and Flora 1992 1992 (Habitats Directive)
European Commission EU Directive 2009/147/EC Birds Directive 2009 2009
European Commission Marine Strategy Framework Directive 2008/56/EC 2008
14 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Author Title of Plan, Policy or Programme Reviewed Pub. Date
Council of Europe European Landscape Convention 2000 – ratified by UK in 2006 2000
European Commission Europe 2020: The Strategic Framework for Education and Training 2012
European Commission White Paper on Transport: A Roadmap to a Single Transport Area, Smart, Mobility for People 2010 and Business
European Commission Europe 2020: A European strategy for Smart, Sustainable and Inclusive Growth 2010
United Nations UNESCO World Heritage Convention 1972
Council of Europe The Convention for the Protection of the Architectural Heritage of Europe 1987
Council of Europe The European Convention on the Protection of Archaeological Heritage 1992
National
Department for the Securing the Future: UK Government Sustainable Development Strategy 2005 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
HM Government Climate Change Act 2008
HM Government UK Low Carbon Transition Plan (National Strategy for Climate and Energy) 2009
HM Government The Carbon Plan: Delivering our Low Carbon Future 2011
Department for the National Adaptation Programme 2013 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
HM Government National Renewable Energy Action Plan for the UK 2009
Department for Communities House of Commons: Written Statement (HCWS42) 2015 and Local Government
HM Government The Energy Act 2013
Department for the Air Quality Strategy for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, 2007 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
Department for the Air Pollution, Action in a Changing Climate 2010 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
HM Government The Water Act 2003
Department for the Future Water – A Water Strategy for England 2008 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
HM Government Flood and Water Management Act 2010
Department for the Safeguarding our Soils: A Strategy for England 2009 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
Department for Communities Minerals Planning Practice Guide 2014 and Local Government
Department for Communities Planning for Hydrocarbon Extraction: Planning Practice Guidance 2014 and Local Government
Department for the Waste Management Plan for England 2013 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 15 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Author Title of Plan, Policy or Programme Reviewed Pub. Date
HM Government The Natural Choice: securing the value of nature - The Natural Environment White Paper 2011
Department for the Biodiversity 2020: A strategy for England's wildlife and ecosystem services 2011 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs
HM Government Marine Coastal Access Act 2009
HM Government Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Act 1990
HM Government Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act 1979
HM Government The Government’s Statement on the Historic Environment for England 2010
HM Treasury Fixing the Foundations: Creating a More Prosperous Nation 2015
HM Government The Care Act 2014
Department for Communities Planning Policy Guidance: Ensuring the Vitality of Town Centres 2014 and Local Government
Department for Communities Planning Policy Guidance: Health and Wellbeing 2014 and Local Government
Department for Communities Planning Policy Guidance: Open space, sports and recreation facilities, public rights of way 2014 and Local Government and local green space
Department for Communities Planning Policy Guidance: Duty to Co-operate 2014 and Local Government
Department for Communities Planning Policy Guidance: Rural Housing 2014 and Local Government
HM Treasury National Infrastructure Plan 2014
Department for Work and National Social Report 2012 Pensions
Department for Communities Planning Policy for Travellers Sites 2012 and Local Government
Department for Communities National Planning Policy Framework 2012 and Local Government
HM Government Health and Social Care Act 2012
HM Treasury & BIS The Plan for Growth 2011
Department for Communities Laying the Foundations: A Housing Strategy for England 2011 and Local Government
Department for Communities Planning for Schools Development Policy 2011 and Local Government
HM Government Localism Act 2011
Institute of Health Equity The Marmot Review: Fair Society, Healthy Lives 2010
HM Government Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004
Environment Agency Environment Agency Medium Term Plan 2015
HM Government UK Marine Policy Statement 2011
Department for Culture The Culture White Paper (DCMS 2016) 2016 Media and Sport
Historic England Historic England Good Practice Advice Notes in Planning 2015
16 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Author Title of Plan, Policy or Programme Reviewed Pub. Date
Historic England Historic England Advice Notes 2015
Sub-national / Regional
Sustaine North East England Climate Change Adaptation Study 2008
Department for the River Basin Management Plan: Northumbria River Basin District and Update 2009/2015 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs and The Environment Agency
Department for the Flood Risk Assessments:Climate Change Allowances 2016 Environment, Food and Rural Affairs and The Environment Agency
Durham Biodiversity County Durham Biodiversity Action Plan 2007 Partnership
Three Rivers Local Nature Objectives of the Three Rivers Local Nature Partnership - Partnership
Northern Upland Chain Objectives of the Northern Upland Chain Partnership - Partnership
Durham Heritage Coast Durham Heritage Coast Management Plan 2005 Partnership
North Pennines AONB North Pennines AONB Management Plan 2014-2019 Partnership
Natural England National Character Area Profile 10: North Pennines 2013
Natural England National Character Area Profile 22: Pennine Dales Fringe 2013
Natural England National Character Area Profile 16: Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe 2013
Natural England National Character Area Profile 14: Tyne and Wear Lowlands 2013
Natural England National Character Area Profile 15: Durham Magnesian Limestone Plateau 2013
Natural England National Character Area Profile 23: Tees Lowlands 2013
North East Combined Our Journey: A 20 Year Transport Manifesto for the North East 2015 Authority
North East Local Enterprise More and Better Jobs: A Strategic Economic Plan for the North-East, 2014-2024 2014 Partnership
North East Local Enterprise The North East Education Challenge 2014 Partnership
Association of North East North East Case for Culture 2016 Councils
English Heritage North East Rapid Coastal Zone Assessment Survey 2008
Local
County Durham Partnership The Sustainable Community Strategy 2014-2030 2014
County Durham Environment County Durham Climate Change Strategy 2015 Partnership
Durham County Council County Durham Surface Water Management Plan 2011
Durham County Council Waste Management Strategy Addendum 2010
Durham County Council County Durham Landscape Strategy 2008
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 17 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Author Title of Plan, Policy or Programme Reviewed Pub. Date
ONE North East Durham Cathedral and Castle World Heritage Site Management Plan 2006
Durham County Council Bishop Auckland Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2014
Durham County Council Eggleston Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2011
Durham County Council Lartington Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2012
Durham County Council Trimdon Village Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2012
Durham County Council West Auckland Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2010
Durham County Council Shotley Bridge Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2009
Durham County Council Seaham Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2007
Durham County Council Pittington, Hallgarth Conservation Area Character Appraisal 2009
Durham County Council Durham City Conservation Area Character Appraisal
Durham County Council Durham City Regeneration Plan 2014
County Durham Children & Children, Young People and Families Plan 2015-2018 2014 Families Partnership
Safe Durham Partnership The Safe Durham Partnership Plan 2014-2017 2014
Durham County Council The Joint Health and Wellbeing Strategy for County Durham 2015-2018 2014
County Durham Mental County Durham Mental Health Implementation Plan 2014-2017 2014 Health Partnership Board
County Durham Partnership The Sustainable Community Strategy 2014-2030 2014
Durham County Council Peterlee Regeneration Masterplan 2013
Durham County Council County Durham Cycling Strategy and Action Plan 2012-2015 2012
Durham County Council County Durham Green Infrastructure Strategy 2012-2030 2012
Durham County Council Regeneration Statement 2012-2022 2012
Durham County Council County Durham Tourism Management Plan 2012-2016 2012
Durham County Council Barnard Castle Development Framework 2012
Durham County Council Crook Masterplan 2012
Durham County Council Stanley Town Masterplan 2012
County Durham Economic Business, Enterprise and Skills Strategy 2011 Partnership
Durham County Council Local Transport Plan 3 2011-2021 2011
Durham County Council County Durham Sport and Leisure Strategy 2011-2014 2011
Durham County Council Durham Housing Strategy 2010-2015 2010
Durham County Council Older Person Accommodation Strategy 2010-2015 2010
Durham Cathedral/University Durham Cathedral and Castle World Heritage Site Management (Draft) 2016
18 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Author Title of Plan, Policy or Programme Reviewed Pub. Date
Sedgefield Town Council Sedgefield Neighbourhood Plan - Submission Stage 2016
Whorlton Parish Council Whorlton Neighbourhood Plan - Submission Stage 2016
Great Aycliffe Town Council Great Aycliffe Neighbourhood Plan - Pre-Submission Stage 2016
Witton Gilbert Parish Council Witton Gilbert Neighbourhood Plan - Pre-Submission Stage 2016
Consultation Question 1
Are there any other relevant policies, plans or programmes and sustainability objectives that will affect or influence the Local Plan and the SA process? If so what are they?
2.1 Key Messages
2.1.1 The review of PPP's enable the identification of key messages and common themes that should be taken into account throughout the development of the Plan and its assessment. The following table provides a condensed summary of the key messages identified at the 2009 Scoping stage, the 2012 update and this 2016 Report.
2.1.2 Whilst, in many cases the source of the key messages identified for the the 2009 Scoping stage have been superseded or updated (e.g. Planning Policy Statements have been replaced by the National Planning Policy Framework), the messages are still considered to be relevant as they are reflected within current PPP's.
Table 3 Summary of Key Messages
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Sustainable Development
Sustainable communities and The Plan and its The Plan should include policies National Planning sustainable patterns of assessment should which define what sustainable Policy Framework development must be incorporate the development looks like in County (2012) (Para 6-15) promoted. Economic, social principles of Durham and how developers can and environmental interested sustainable demonstrate their proposals must be advanced together development. contribute towards its and support each other. achievement.
Development should support Ensure development existing communities and is of high-quality contribute to the creation of design, safe, sustainable, liveable and locally-distinctive and mixed communities with good sustainable. access to jobs and key services for all members of the community.
Climate Change and Adaptation
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 19 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Spatial planning should Mitigate inevitable Contribute to the aims of the UK's The Carbon Plan: contribute to reducing increases in carbon Carbon Plans by supporting the Delivering our Low emissions and stabilising emissions as a result development of necessary Carbon Future (2011) climate change by influencing of development by infrastructure to enable the mass the location and nature of all reducing the energy deployment of low carbon new development and demand of technology. encourage new renewable development, improve energy development, including energy efficiency and decentralised renewable use of renewable and energy. low carbon technology within proposals.
Spatial planning should take Improve the County's In addition to carefully considering National into account the unavoidable resilience and ability the location of new development, Adaptation consequences of climate to adapt to Climate ensure the design and Programme change. Change by reducing construction of new buildings and (2013) flood risk and its infrastructure take account of the National Spatial planning should impacts on people and need to be resilient to future Planning Policy sustain biodiversity and in property ensuring that climate change e.g through Framework doing so recognise that the development is natural shading etc. (2012) (Para 94) distribution of habitats and located away from species will be affected by areas of flood risk. climate change.
Energy
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Energy efficiency should be Mitigate inevitable The Plan should set out a positive House of increased across all sectors increases in carbon strategy for improving upon Commons: and the use of fossil fuels in emissions as a result existing levels of energy efficiency Written energy production should be of development by and energy generation by low Statement reduced. reducing the energy carbon and renewable sources. (HCWS42) demand of Areas of opportunity for DCLG (June development, improve renewable energy should be 2015 energy efficiency and identified/allocated within the National use of renewable and Plan. Planning Policy low carbon technology Framework within proposals. (2012) (Para 97)
Air
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Development that may give Protect and improve Plan policies should aim to reduce Ambient Air Quality rise to pollution, either directly County Durham's and limit emissions to air, Directive (2008/50/EC) or indirectly needs to be resources by ensuring particularly in areas where poor appropriately located, and the sustainable and air quality exists or at the very other uses and developments efficient use of water least not exacerbate existing should, as far as possible, not (ground and surface), issues. Reducing emissions of be affected by major existing land and air. nitrogen dioxide from private car or potential sources of use will be key to this. pollution.
20 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
Sustainable travel Aim to improve the Plan policies on air quality and Air Pollution, Action in patterns/options need to be Durham City Air climate change should be a Changing Climate, promoted and encouraged to Quality Management integrated to maximise the Defra (2010) protect air quality, and improve Area. benefits of tackling both issues it where it is already a together. concern.
Water
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
The Water Framework Ensure that the scale The Plan should identify EC Directive Directive recognises the and location of new opportunities for enhancement of 2000/60/EC potential impacts on water development takes existing water quality and establishing a bodies from new development account of its impact infrastructure when considering framework for the as a pressure that must be on water resources sites for development. Community action in addressed. and water quality. the Field of Water Policy (the Water Framework Directive) 2000
Development that may give Protect and improve Policies on surface water Future Water – A rise to pollution, either directly County Durham's management should be included Water Strategy or indirectly needs to be resources by ensuring which amongst other things for England appropriately located. the sustainable and require the use of Sustainable (2008) efficient use of water Urban Drainage Systems. River Basin (ground and surface), Management land and air. Plan: Northumbria River Basin District (2009 and 2015 Update) County Durham Surface Water Management Plan (2011)
Ensure that current The Plan will need to include Marine Strategy water, sewerage, policies which aim to protect Framework Directive waste, mineral and County Durham's coastline and 2008/56/EC transport infrastructure marine waters from pollution from and its capacity is land based sources (e.g. such as taken into account run off and inadequate sewage when locating treatment infrastructure) development.
Soil
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016 Local strategic plans need to Protect and improve Encourage the use of brownfield The National Planning steer development onto County Durham's land, only where it is not of a high Policy Framework brownfield land, some of which resources by ensuring environmental quality. (2012) (Paras 17 and may be contaminated and the sustainable and 111) require remediation. efficient use of water (ground and surface), Encourage the remediation of Soil Thematic Strategy land and air. degraded / contaminated land and (COM (2006) 231) ensure that soils are managed properly during the construction
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 21 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
and/or operation of development and that following the cessation of working (e.g. Minerals working) soils are are restored to an equal or better condition prior to the commencement of development.
Ensure the protection of peat Soil Thematic Strategy across the County and recognise (COM (2006) 231) it's importance as a carbon store.
Ensure policies aim to protect soil The National Planning from pollution through for example Policy Framework reducing surface water run off (2012) (Paras 109,112) rates.
Need to safeguard and protect The National Planning better quality agricultural land. Policy Framework (2012) (Para 112)
Minerals and Waste
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Minerals planning should Ensure that current The Plan should promote the use Thematic Strategy on ensure, so far as practicable, water, sewerage, of materials that have a low the Sustainable Use of the prudent, efficient and waste, mineral and environmental impact. Natural Resources sustainable use of minerals transport infrastructure (2006) and recycling of suitable and its capacity is materials, thereby minimising taken into account the need for new primary when locating extraction. development.
Adequate and steady supplies The Plan should identify sufficient National Planning of minerals needed by society resource of minerals over the Policy Framework should be secured within the Plan Period taking into account (2012) (Par 142 and limits set by the environment. available quantities of secondary 143) and recycled materials.
The sustainable transport of The approach to hydrocarbon Planning for minerals by rail or sea should extraction should be made clear. Hydrocarbon be promoted. Extraction: Planning Practice Guidance (2014)
The protection and The Plan should ensure new National Planning enhancement of the quality of development has easy access to Policy for Waste (2014) the environment once waste and recycling services. extraction has ceased should be sought through high standards of restoration.
The use of high quality materials for the purpose they are most suitable should be encouraged.
Planning must ensure that coal extraction takes place in accordance with the best
22 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's balance of community, social, environmental and economic interests.
Waste management needs to be driven up the waste hierarchy, addressing waste as a resource and looking to disposal as the last option, but one which must be adequately catered for.
Sufficient opportunities for the provision of waste management facilities should be provided in appropriate locations including for waste disposal. Sites should be located and designed so as to minimise impacts to communities and the environment.
Biodiversity and Geodiversity
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
All potential impacts on the Protect, maintain and The Plan should set out a positive National Planning integrity of European sites of provide opportunities approach to protecting and Policy Framework a plan or project, either on its for the enhancement enhancing biodiversity and (2012) (Paras 109, 113, own or in combination with of biodiversity/ creating coherent and resilient 114, 117) other plans or projects need to geodiversity including ecological networks at a be identified and assessed designated and landscape scale, taking into through application of Habitats non-designated account cross boundary issues, Regulations Assessment. habitats and species. whilst at the same time making clear distinctions between the approach to protecting and enhancing different site and species designations.
Areas of Ancient woodland Ensure high-quality The Plan should locate new The Natural Choice: which do not have statutory green infrastructure is development to sites of least securing the value of protection should be identified incorporated within harm and set out the expectations nature - The Natural and policies to protect them new development, for developers to contribute Environment White from loss or deterioration which connects with towards achieving net gains. Paper (2011) included. existing areas of green infrastructure, to allow for safe wildlife movement, builds capacity for biodiversity to adapt to climate change and reduces pressure on designated wildlife sites.
Networks of natural habitats The Plan should set The Plan should recognise the Convention on should be conserved and out policies which value of ecosystem services. Biological Diversity: promoted through policies in contribute to the 2010 Nagoya development plans to guard integrated protection agreement
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 23 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
against habitat fragmentation and management of and reverse it where possible. Durham's coastline for biodiversity, Conservation of biodiversity landscape, water should not just be confined to quality, heritage and designated sites and areas. the public's Biodiversity should be enjoyment. promoted through conserving and enhancing sites and species through local development and planning, including the priority habitats and species in the County Durham Biodiversity Action Plan.
Identify important geological and geo-morphological sites in County Durham.
Landscape
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Ensure the conservation and Ensure development Plan policies to ensure the National Character enhancement of nationally is of high-quality appropriate conservation, Area Profiles protected and defined design, restoration and / or enhancement (Statements of landscapes within County locally-distinctive and of landscapes and mature Environmental Durham (i.e. North Pennines sustainable. features in County Durham, Opportunity) 2013: AONB and Durham Heritage having regard to the objectives 10: North Coast). and special characteristics of Pennines national and local landscape 22: Pennine character areas. Dales Fringe 16: Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe 14: Tyne and Wear Lowlands 15: Durham Magnesian Limestone Plateau 23: Tees Lowlands
The County Durham Plan Secure the protection Seek opportunities for landscape County Durham should have regard to the and enhancement of renewal to address mineral and Landscape Strategy Council's Landscape Strategy landscape and the waste legacies. (2008) regarding the factors historic and natural concerning the type and environment. The Plan should ensure that North Pennines AONB design of development that developers utilise the North Management Plan 2014 may be appropriate to different Pennines Planning Guidelines - 2019 areas and the North Pennies Building Design Guide.
Heritage
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
24 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
There should be a focus on Ensure development A positive strategy for the National Planning the local distinctiveness of the is of high-quality conservation and management of Policy Framework historic environment and how design, the County's heritage assets (2012) (Para 126) this can promote a sense of locally-distinctive and should be set out, recognising the place and be a stimulus to sustainable wider social, economic and inspire new buildings of environmental benefits that imagination conservation of the historic environment can bring and Protect and sustain the historic Secure the protection ensuring that all heritage assets environment and ensure its and enhancement of are afforded an appropriate level importance as an economic landscape and the of protection. asset is harnessed, realise it's historic and natural potential as a learning environment. resource and make it accessible to everyone.
Encourage the re-use of existing buildings and heritage assets
Housing
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Ensure that everyone has the Increase the supply Deliver a choice of decent, DCLG (2012) National opportunity of living in a and choice of well-designed housing across a Planning Policy decent home, which they can affordable and older range of types, sizes and tenures Framework: Delivering afford in a community where persons housing in of dwellings as well as size of a wide choice of high they want to live appropriate, integrated sites (e.g. small to large-scale quality homes and sustainable mixed development), which meet locations objectively-assessed needs for all residents and support independent living across the County.
Identify land to meet Ensure new homes plays a Durham County local housing and positive role in areas in need of Council, Durham pitch requirements for regeneration. Housing Strategy, the travelling 2010-2015 community Due to the rural nature of County DCLG (2014) PPG: Durham the Local Plan should Rural Housing give particular attention to helping to ensure the future vitality of local villages/ hamlets by supporting sustainable growth through policies and allocations.
Health & Social Issues
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Health inequalities between Ensure high-quality The Local Plan should ensure it The Care Act 2014 different parts of the County green infrastructure is meets the requirement to promote and different sections of the incorporated within wellbeing through the delivery of community should be reduced. new development, 'healthy' and sustainable places The gap in life expectancy which contributes to live and work, the provision of should be narrowed towards addressing easily accessible healthcare/ health issues support facilities and services,
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 25 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
The Local Plan should ensure that Durham County there is adequate capacity of Council, The Joint healthcare facilities to meet Health and Wellbeing existing and proposed population Strategy for County growth and change. Durham 2015-2018
Promote the creation of safe, County Durham healthy and inclusive communities Children and Families that are well-connected and in Partnership Children, sustainable locations. Young People and Families Plan 2015-2018'
Economy, Education & Skills
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Promote participation and Establish a clear Establish a clear strategy which DCLG (2012) National economic inclusion through strategy which seeks seeks to support the regeneration Planning Policy activity to help people to to maximise Durham of economically deprived areas , Framework: Building a contribute to and benefit from City's economic harness the economic value of strong, competitive economic growth performance. natural and built assets and economy deliver a low carbon economy
Develop,preserve and promote Protect and enhance Improve the skills-base and North East Local a healthy and vibrant cultural the viability and vitality education of the County's Enterprise Partnership climate that will facilitate of the County's city, workforce along with the quality, (2014), 'The North East improved economic town and village quantity and range of employment Education Challenge' performance centres to improve opportunities to support a resilient their sustainability and and diverse local economy and ability to support local reduce worklessness. residents, workers and visitors
Drive economic growth Promote County Deliver and safeguard a DCLG (2012) National through innovation, skills, Durham as a tourist wide-range of strategic and Planning Policy investment, enterprise and destination non-strategic sites for Framework: Building a competition employment, retail, tourism and strong, competitive recreation uses that support economy Promote the reduction of Improve access to and sustainable economic growth of adverse environmental impact develop new existing and new employment in pursuit of economic sustainable sectors development employment opportunities
Transport and Accessibility
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Reduce the need to travel, Ensure that current Encourage a resource-efficient European Commission promote sustainable transport water, sewerage, transport system which supports (2010), 'White Paper on and integrate different modes waste, mineral and a well-connected multi-modal Transport: A Roadmap of transport with spatial transport infrastructure network and promotes to a Single Transport planning proposals and its capacity is sustainable and energy-efficient Area, Smart, Mobility taken into account transport options for all users for People and when locating Business' development;
26 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes 2
Key messages previously identified Additional key messages Key sources (2016 following updated review of report) PPP's
Site development in areas that Reduce the need to Where large-scale residential DCLG (2012) National have good access by public travel through developments are considered, the Planning Policy transport, walking and cycling sustainable transport benefits of mix-development Framework:Promoting and that do not increase options and through should be explored (e.g. provide Sustainable Transport congestion the co-location of new opportunities to undertaken and existing facilities day-to-day activities, including and services; work, on-site).
Transport policies should take into DCC (2011) Local account the dispersed settlement Transport Plan 3 pattern of the County and issues 2011-2021 in rural communities.
Plan policies should support the DCLG (2012) National expansion of electronic Planning Policy communications networks, Framework:Supporting including telecommunications and high-quality high speed broadband communication infrastructure
Spatial Policy
2009 Scoping report 2012 Update 2016
Whilst the majority of new The Plan should Develop the Local Plan in DCLG (2012) National development should be incorporate the accordance with the National Planning Policy concentrated within main principles of Planning Policy Framework's Framework: Core towns, development that sustainable Core Planning Principles and Principles supports rural areas and development ensure it plans positively for regeneration should be growth and creates cohesive encouraged sustainable communities across the County.
Ensure the County Durham's Plan DCLG (2014) Planning does not have an adverse effect Practice Guidance: on strategic cross-boundary Duty to Co-operate matters. If issues are identified through the policy development process, seek to resolve them and/ or reach a compromise through on-going constructive engagement with neighbouring authorities under the 'Duty to Co-operate'.
Ensure that Plan policies are Localism Act 2011 produced with community and stakeholder involvement and depending on timescales involved, take into account the County's emerging Neighbourhood Plan priorities and allocations as part of the wider local development framework.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 27 2 Stage A1: Other Policies, Plans and Programmes
2.1.3 Appendix A provides a more comprehensive analysis of relevant policies, plan and programmes and key points. The continued challenge is for the Plan to incorporate these key principles and apply them to the County.
Consultation Question 2
Have we correctly identified the key messages from the PPP's? If not , what are they?
28 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 29 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Background
3.0.1 Task A2 of the Scoping Stage requires the collection and analysis of baseline information and trends. Establishing the economic, social and environmental baseline of County Durham provides the basis for:
An understanding of existing sustainability problems within specific areas in the County; Understanding 'business as usual' trends which may affect the implementation of the Local Plan; Formulating the SA objectives to reduce these problems; Suggesting alternative approaches; and Predicting the effects of the Local Plan; and Proposing suitable mitigation and monitoring measures
3.0.2 The collection and analysis of baseline information ensures compliance with Annex 1 (b), (c) and (d) of the SEA Directive:
The Environment Report shall include information on (inter alia):
'Relevant aspects of the current state of the environment and the likely evolution thereof without implementation of the plan or programme' and 'the environmental characteristics of the areas likely to be significantly affected' 'any existing environmental problems which are relevant to the plan or programme including, in particular, those relating to any areas of a particular environmental importance, such as areas designated pursuant to Directives 79/409/EEC (Birds Directive) and 92/43/EEC (Habitats Directive).
3.0.3 Substantial baseline data was collected to inform the 2009 County Durham Sustainability Appraisal Report and the 2012 update. The data collected established a comprehensive, consistent and spatially specific evidence base for the whole of County Durham. This report builds on this work.
Approach
3.0.4 In order to focus the baseline data collection stage, the following principles were considered:
Relevance – is the data helpful? Current – is it up to date? Availability – is the data easily assessable? Accessibility – is the data easily accessible? Interpretation – is it easy enough to understand?
30 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.0.5 Generally, if data did not fall within the above it was omitted. Throughout the previous SA of the County Durham Plan baseline information was collected and analysed under the following crosscutting themes which are also utilised within this report:
Social Welfare and Communities Health Housing Crime Economic Vitality Education and Skills Access and Transport Climate Change Air, Water and Soil Quality Biodiversity/ Geodiversity Landscape Heritage Resource Efficiency
3.0.6 For each theme, indicators have been collected and compared to targets, historical trends and/ or performance at the regional/ national level where this information was available. The following table provides the key to the indicator status:
Table 4 Indicator Key
Indicator Status
Indicator status unclear
Indicator for the County is significantly better than either comparators, targets and/or historical trends
Indicator for the County is better than either comparators, targets and/or historical trends
Indicator for the County is below either comparators, targets and/or historical trends are getting worse
Indicator for the County significantly below either comparators, targets and/or historical trends are getting significantly worse
↑ Trend is improving
<--> No change to trend
↓ Trend is declining
? Trend is unclear
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 31 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
3.0.7 In order to establish the baseline position for each theme, commentary has been provided on the direction of travel for each indicator and likely trends in the absence of the Local Plan. Please see Appendix B to view the indicators and their analysis. A summary of the findings and update on the baseline position is provided in the following sections.
3.1 Social Welfare and Communities
3.1.1 The County exhibits considerable diversity. It contains a mix of urban and rural settlements from the historic city of Durham to the new town of Peterlee from scattered colliery villages of the Durham Coalfields and peripheral small rural settlements such as Stanhope. Looking at population density there are three distinct patterns which follow closely the overall settlement structure. 90% of the population lives east of the A68 in 40% of the County’s area and are concentrated within the 12 main towns. More limited concentrations of population are distributed between the 300 smaller towns and villages, with the western dales being the most sparsely populated area of the county.
3.1.2 In relation to population change, the population has increased over the period between 2001 and 2014. Data shows County Durham as having a population of 518,000, nearly 20,000 more residents than in 2006. This rate of growth is above regional averages but below the national average. County Durham’s population change has been driven by a combination of natural change, internal and international migration. Natural change has historically contributed a relatively small amount to the annual growth in population but its influence has been mainly positive since 2005/06.
3.1.3 2.11 Internal migration (i.e. the exchange of migrants between County Durham and other parts of the UK) has had a consistently positive impact upon the County's population growth since 2001. However, international migration is estimated to have had the most significant impact upon population growth, particularly since 2004/2005 following the expansion of the European Union
3.1.4 In terms of population profile, the County has a high proportion of over 65's which has increased by 7.1% since 2007, with persons aged 85+ having increased by a significant 20.5%. This may impact upon the County with less residents being economically active. Comparatively there has only been a 3.5% increase of people of working age in the County.
3.1.5 The forecasted positive increase in population will require more housing to be designated in areas that are most in need. Due to the greater proportion of older people, an increased provision of older persons accommodation will be required, along with health and social care services.
3.1.6 In relation to the population centres across the County, the residential population of the main towns in the County has also generally increased. The biggest increase over the census period has been in Consett where an extra 8,000 residents now live. Bishop Auckland has also seen a large increase in population. Perhaps surprisingly, Durham City has only seen an increase of around 1200 persons and the projected level of increase in student numbers which can contribute significantly to term time populations in the City to 2020 is 359 based on Durham University estimates. Peterlee in East Durham has seen a decrease of nearly 2000.
32 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.1.7 Overall, Central and North Durham areas have experienced a higher percentage of population increase than the County average. It will be essential to plan appropriately for demographic change and to provide retail, employment, a mix of housing and social and green infrastructure in appropriate areas.
Consultation Question 3a
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.2 Health
3.2.1 The trend is generally one of improvement across a range of statistics over the period but most areas are still significantly worse than the national averages and there is significant variation in health inequality across the County as shown by the Index of Multiple Health Domain. There are specific issues as can be seen below in East Durham and parts of North and South Durham.
Figure 3 IMD Health Domain
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 33 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
3.2.2 Of particular concern is childhood obesity, especially in reception children. In 2010 the rate was on par with the national average but new data shows that the rate has increased significantly and is above the national rate. The obesity rate amongst primary school children in year 6 has improved since 2010/11, however, the rate is still above the national average. It is therefore vital that targeted programmes are continued as any discontinuation of services could result in obesity rates increasing.
3.2.3 Smoking prevalence has decreased significantly and is also below the regional level. However, the North East has the highest level of smoking in the UK. Therefore, any decrease should be seen as significant. National strategies as well as local services should continue to target those areas of high prevalence.
3.2.4 Mortality rates from both cancers and circulatory diseases are decreasing and in the case of circulatory diseases has decreased significantly to a point where the rate is now almost in line with the national average. Mortality cancer rates, whilst showing an improvement, are still significantly above the national average.
3.2.5 There has been no change in the life expectancy for males from the previous dataset. There has been a slight improvement in the life expectancy for females over the dataset period. The trends for both males and females are worse than the national average.
Consultation Question 3b
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.3 Housing
3.3.1 Good quality housing, available to all, is a basic necessity for quality of life and sustainable development. Planning for an adequate supply of housing is a key role of the planning system, and a critical one for County Durham. In terms of sustainability, the balance between planned employment development and housing growth and the infrastructure to support growth, is the most fundamental consideration.
3.3.2 The housing completion trend in 2014 was nearly half of the rate recorded in 2006 and lower than in 2011, with the South area recording the most completions and the West the least. House types across the County vary significantly, with the majority of dwellings being terraced and a relatively small number being detached, although this number is on the increase. The amount of affordable housing being delivered decreased in the year ending 2014, however this does coincide with a decrease in housing completions seen over this period also.
3.3.3 The number of owner occupiers in the County remains steady with a range of between 63.8% of residents owning their property in the South compared to 69.6% in the West. Generally this compares favourably when compared against both the regional and national picture. Of interest is the decrease in owner occupiers shown in the national trend over the period 2001 - 2011. This may be due to the economic recession and an associated
34 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
increase in the private rented sector. Comparatively, County Durham has one of the lowest average house prices in the UK and whilst this has risen since 2011, it has still risen at a lower rate than that of the North East.
3.3.4 The empty homes percentage is lowest in the Central area and highest in the west. This perhaps shows that the market is buoyant in the Central area, whereas in the more rural parts of the west it is less so.
3.3.5 In 2001, 40% of County Durham’s housing stock was made up of terraced housing which is roughly 10% higher than the regional average. Concentrations of terraced housing are particularly acute in Derwentside, Wear Valley, Easington and Sedgefield and areas of low demand housing continue to persist in the Durham Coalfield Communities area. In 2011, 40% of the County Durham's housing stock was still made up of terraced housing, with particular concentrations still apparent in most areas, but particularly around the former coalfield communities.
Consultation Question 3c
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.4 Crime
3.4.1 Crime rates across England and Wales have been declining since the mid 1990’s and crime in County Durham has generally followed this trend. Between 2009-2014 the downward trend has continued significantly, although 2014 showed a rise in the total reported crime in the Durham Constabulary area (also includes Darlington). As stated in the 2009 Scoping report there remains considerable local variations, with clear crime hotspots centred around town centres.
3.4.2 The domestic burglary rate in County Durham is lower than both the North East as a whole and England. Vehicular crime rates are also below the national rate but slightly higher than the regional rate. Both recorded offences and anti-social behaviour rates are better than the regional average and are generally on a downward trend. However, there has been little improvement in this indicators since 2012 and indeed a slight rise in total recorded offences in 2014.
3.4.3 Whilst the indicators only focus upon four crime issues, it must also be noted that issues such as rural crime and metal theft are becoming more prevalent. New development must link in well with existing communities and help to design out crime.
Consultation Question 3d
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 35 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
3.5 Economic Vitality
3.5.1 The trend across most indicators is one of improvement, despite the economic recession. There has been a steady increase in GVA per head in County Durham and the North East. However the gap between County Durham and the rest of the North East is quite stark with a difference of over £3000 workplace based GVA per head seen in 2013. The gap with the rest of the UK is even greater, at nearly £10,000.
3.5.2 The employment rate in County Durham and the North East has fluctuated from 67% in 2004 to a high of 72.1% in pre-recession 2007 to a low of 64.8% in 2012. Latest data suggests an employment rate of 66.8%. There is a similarity between data for the region, however there are significant variations in employment across the County as shown by the Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) employment domain. Both the County and the North East are below the national average.
Figure 4 IMD Employment Domain
The number of residents on benefits has reduced, but is again above the national rate. The number of residents claiming incapacity benefit has reduced significantly over the period 2000-2015 but it is slightly above the North East trend and significantly above the UK Trend. Weekly pay also increased but is below that of the North East. Of concern, however is household income, which has reduced significantly over the period across the County other than the West where it has stayed relatively stable.
36 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.5.3 There was a significant increase in the number of enterprises existing in County Durham in 2015, reflecting the overall picture in the North East. The distinctive physical assets of the County (i.e. its environmental and cultural assets) can help to differentiate it from other areas (The Tyne & Wear City Region) and act as an economic driver. There is a continued need to diversify the economy within County Durham with potential for focusing on high value manufacturing, tourism and renewable energy.
Question 7
Consultation Question
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.6 Education and Skills
3.6.1 The education and skills indicators show a generally improving trend over the period. The percentage of working age adults with no qualifications has reduced significantly since 2004. It is currently below the regional but above the national average, with significant progress made since 2012. The trend for 16-18 year olds not in education or training has improved and is also better than the regional average. The average for both level 2 and 4 qualifications amongst the working age population has significantly improved over the period, but is below both the regional and national average.
3.6.2 The attainment of pupils at GCSE has been steadily improving but, following two major reforms of the data and collection in 2013/14, the trend has worsened due to restrictions placed upon the number and type of qualifications counted as GSCE equivalents (Wolfe Review). It is therefore difficult to discern a trend at this stage but County Durham is slightly outperforming the region and nationally for the achievement of 5 or more A*-C GCSEs (inc English and Maths).
3.6.3 Improving the educational attainment and in particular the skill levels of the working age population is critical to contribute to economic prosperity of County Durham. Educational attainment has strong links with employment and wider quality of life aspects. In particular, the profile of educational attainment has consequences for the future employment profile and the occupational structure of the County. As for other social factors there are also inequalities in educational attainment across the County to address as shown by the Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) education domain.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 37 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 5 IMD Working age population: no qualifications
Consultation Question 3f
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.7 Access and Transport
3.7.1 Minimising the need to travel, and encouraging the use of sustainable transport modes are both key issues for County Durham. A lack of access to important facilities and services can have a strong negative impact on economic and social health. Similarly, using unsustainable methods of transport can have damaging economic, social and environmental implications.
3.7.2 Data provided by the Department for Transport (DfT) suggest that just over 50% of town centre users live within 15 minutes via public transport, walking or cycling. Whilst this trend is increasing it still leaves a large proportion of users unable to access services within 15 minutes via those methods.
38 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.7.3 On the whole, however, many Access and Transport indicators are showing negative trends across County Durham. Analysis of the Census data shows that the average distance that people travel to work has increased by 1.3km to 17.4km between 2001 and 2011 which is above both the regional (16.5km) and national averages (16.5km). While differences between regional and national levels can be explained due to geographical variances and the nature of County Durham's dispersed settlements, the trend within County Durham is of concern.
3.7.4 Similarly, when considering the DfT data, the number of bus passenger journeys per head of population is significantly lower in County Durham (44pj/h) than it is in the North East (71pj/h) and England (87pj/h). Again, these differences are generally explained by the rural, dispersed nature of populations in relation to others. However, the trend within County Durham has seen a reduction of bus passenger journeys per head of population between 2009-2015 which is likely to be due to a combination of factors including fare price, number and quality of services, and car ownership increases.
3.7.5 Negative trends are also evident in other sustainable transport methods including cycling and walking. Census data for the former shows that the percentage of residents using cycling as a mode of transport to work is considerably lower than the regional (-0.7%) and national average (-1.8%). Likewise, Census data for the latter shows us that the percentage of people who walk to work in County Durham is also lower than the regional (-0.3%) and national average (-0.5%).
3.7.6 However, in relation to levels of self containment (people who live and work in the same area) a relatively high level (approximately 71%) of County Durham’s labour force both lives and works within the County (Durham City has the largest draw), with 19% commuting out to five neighbouring areas and 10% commuting elsewhere. In terms of employment, the large majority of County Durham’s jobs are taken up by the local workforce (82%), with 7% of workers from Sunderland and Darlington and a further 10% from elsewhere. However, data from successive Censuses reveal that the number of available jobs in County Durham is smaller than its number of resident workers, resulting in an overall net out-commute from the County i.e. more people travel out of the County than in.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 39 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 6 Incoming and outgoing commuters to Durham City from County Durham
Consultation Question 3g
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.8 Climate Change
3.8.1 Carbon dioxide emissions have continued to decrease overall, over the period 2005-2013 (latest available data). The reduction in emissions from industry and domestic sources is thought to be due in part to the decrease in the use of coal and gas for electricity generation alongside the effects of the recession. The decrease in transport emissions is consistent with national trends, where transport emissions changed very little up to 2007 but have steadily decreased since, due in part to a reduction in emissions from passenger cars following efficiency improvements and incentives for low emission vehicles.
40 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.8.2 Analysis of data provided by the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC) shows that the greatest decreases on 2005 levels can be attributed to industry (375.1 kt / 23% decrease) followed by domestic sources (184.2 / 14% decrease) and transport (109.9 kt / 11% decrease). However, the rate of decrease has lagged slightly behind the regional picture by approximately 2% for industry, domestic and transport sources. This may be due to factors attributed to the recession and associated closure of industry, reductions in house building etc having a greater impact upon emissions at the regional scale as opposed to the local.
3.8.3 In relation to the proportion of emissions attributed to electricity, gas and other fuel use from both domestic and industrial sources, overall County wide emissions from electricity use are greater than gas use, which in turn produces greater emissions than other fuels. Average emissions from electricity use comprise 50% of the emissions total, whereas, gas use comprise 39% and other fuels comprise 11%. In terms of the split between domestic and industry sources, emissions from gas use (for heating) are higher than electricity or other fuel use within the domestic sector, whereas emissions from electricity use are higher than gas use and other fuels within the industrial sector.
3.8.4 Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry (LULUCF) activities are both a source and sink for atmospheric CO2. Currently, LULUCF activities are a net sink resulting in the removal of emissions from the atmosphere. The data for County Durham shows an overall increase in the removal of emissions since 2005 (2.3kt, 8.5% increased reduction). This performance betters the regional picture where the rate of reduction is decreasing overall.
Flooding
3.8.5 Flooding remains a key issue for many communities across the County. Whether from river flooding or from surface water flooding from periods of prolonged rainfall, flooding can and does cause significant damage to homes and businesses, affecting the economy and causing increases in insurance premiums. Whilst no indicators have been noted from the baseline information review, the original scoping report noted that the Council was preparing a Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA), this is now complete and is available on the Council's website. It is also noted however that the Environment Agency have published new climate change allowances in 2016, which impact upon the viability of sites within flood zones 2 and 3. It is understood therefore that the intention is to produce a new SFRA for publication alongside the County Durham Plan.
3.8.6 The current SFRA shows areas at risk and highlights remediation work that should be undertaken to reduce impact. The plan should take into account such areas of flood risk and aim to ensure that development does not contribute further to such occurrences and where possible mitigates impact through the use of Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SUDs). The plan should specifically limit development in flood risk areas in line with the most up to date Environment Agency advice. Durham Coast is also of particular concern, especially with regards to increased potential of coastal flooding due to higher sea levels, storm surges and extreme events. Coastal development should only be approved within a safe distance from the shore and should be adaptable to such occurrences.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 41 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Consultation Question 3h
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.9 Air, Water and Soil Quality
Air
3.9.1 Air pollution is a local, regional and international problem caused by the emission of pollutants, which either directly or through chemical reactions in the atmosphere lead to negative impacts on human health and ecosystems. Durham County Council regularly monitor emissions of Nitrogen Dioxide and data shows that emissions are decreasing and are below national objectives and limit values in the former districts of Sedgefield and Wear Valley. Where decreases in emissions are evident it is assumed that the rate of nitrogen dioxide reduction will slow in line with national trends.
3.9.2 However, air quality has deteriorated at certain hotspot locations within Chester-Le-Street and Durham City, requiring the declaration of an Air Quality Management Area (AQMA). In relation to an update on the previous reported baseline position, the need to declare an AQMA in Chester-le-Street is new and the AQMA in Durham City has been extended. Both areas are discussed in more depth as follows:
Chester-le-Street
3.9.3 Whilst average emissions at sites monitored are decreasing in the former district of Chester-le-Street, the assessment of specific monitoring locations to the west of Chester-Le-Street town centre have determined that levels of nitrogen dioxide exceed the long term national objective and EU limits for this pollutant. This is due to localised, street-canyon effects occurring near Menceforth Cottages due to the valley and narrow road setting. An Air Quality Management area (AQMA) was declared to the west of Chester-Le-Street town centre in May 2013 which was amended (reduced) in May 2015 to solely include Meceforth Cottages.
42 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Figure 7 Chester -Le-Street AQMA
3.9.4 Specific actions and measures will be identified in the Air Quality Action Plan to reduce emissions to within national objectives and limit values for Nitrogen dioxide within the AQMA. Therefore, it is anticipated that air quality at Menceforth cottages will improve.
Durham City
3.9.5 The average annual emissions across all sites monitored is increasing, with results between 2009 and 2012 close to the national objectives and air quality limit values. However, a number of individual monitoring sites through the City Centre (incorporating Highgate, Milburngate and the Gilesgate areas of the City) recorded exceedances of the annual mean objective leading to the declaration of an AQMA for Durham City in May 2011.
3.9.6 The outcome of the detailed assessment of air quality has determined levels of nitrogen dioxide in other areas of Durham City are above national and European air quality standards (an additional 16 locations). Therefore, the declared AQMA was extended in July 2014 to incorporate the western area of the city through the junctions at Crossgate Lights and Neville's Cross to the stonebridge roundabout together with sections of Claypath and New Elvet.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 43 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 8 Durham City AQMA
3.9.7 The greatest contributing source to the emissions are cars, as may be expected given they represent the greatest proportion of overall traffic flow. LGV's are not a major component of the total traffic flow and are predicted to contribute relatively little. The combined emissions from HGV's and buses are predicted to contribute approximately the same proportion as cars.
3.9.8 The required reduction in Road NOx emissions to meet the air quality objective is calculated to be up to 98%. However, such a large decrease is predicted to be restricted to a very small area, including a small number of properties near the Gilesgate roundabout, where queing traffic occurs on a steep hill. Elsewhere, reductions of up to approximately 20-25% would ensure no exceedances of the annual mean objective.
3.9.9 Durham County Council have prepared a draft air quality action plan to improve the air quality across the City. Some of the proposed actions include fitting systems to exhausts on buses with diesel engines to reduce emission on routes within the AQMA and promoting alternative forms of transport with businesses in the city, to encourage large employers to implement eco-friendly schemes like staff car sharing. Consultation on the draft action plan concluded in December 2015.
Water
3.9.10 The River Basin Management Plan 2015 for the Northumbria River Basin District, which covers County Durham, aims to identify and tackle pressures facing the water environment as required by the Water Framework Directive. Until the next version of the Plan is drafted it is not possible to update the 2012 baseline position in relation to the quality of surface and groundwater sources. The following sections, therefore, provide information on the existing baseline position for ease of reference.
44 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.9.11 The Water Framework Directive requires member states to aim to achieve good status for all water bodies by 2015. Where this is not possible and subject to the criteria set out in the Directive, member states should aim to achieve good status by 2021 or 2027. In relation to river and lake water bodies, the Plan identifies that whilst water quality is improving, only 29% of rivers and lakes in the Wear Catchment and 41% of rivers and lakes in the Tees Catchment will obtain good status by 2015. Lakes and rivers in the Tees catchment are improving faster than those in the Wear.
3.9.12 In relation to the Wear catchment, point source releases from sewage works and combined sewage outfalls are key reasons for failures in the catchment. Physical modifications that impede fish passage and water storage and abstraction also play a key role in determining the status of rivers and lakes. In relation to the Tees catchment discharges from sewage work and diffuse pollution from agriculture, along with physical modification for flood protection and water storage and supply are the key pressures that affect the status of water bodies in the catchment.
3.9.13 Steady improvements are likely to be made to the baseline condition for both catchments. However, achieving good status by 2027 is likely to continue to be a significant challenge. The County Durham Plan could contribute towards meeting targets by ensuring new development does not increase surface water run off and by taking opportunities to separate out combined sewer systems alongside new development.
3.9.14 In relation to groundwater quality, information shows little to no change in groundwater quality to 2015 and a very low proportion of groundwater bodies (33%) achieving good status. In relation to the Wear catchment, pressures are having an impact on the quality of the principle aquifer, namely the Magnesian Limestone. This aquifer is the sole supply of potable water for Hartlepool and it fails due to rising trends in sulphate. The Wear Magnesian Limestone groundwater body in particular has been classified as poor quantitative status due to abstraction pressures and reduced base flow to surface waters. This groundwater body is also at poor chemical status due to saline intrusions caused by historic coastal abstractions and also due to rising trends in nitrate. In relation to the Tees catchment, discharges from old workings in the Saltburn Gill causes the Tees Mercia Sandstone and Redcar Mudstone groundwater body to fail to meet good status.
3.9.15 Trends in groundwater quality may improve slowly as the Environment Agency continues to work with the Coal Authority (re mine water pollution), water companies to manage abstractions and local authorities, site owners and developers to prevent further land contamination and groundwater pollution. As for river and lake water bodies, achieving good status by 2027 is likely to continue to be a significant challenge.
3.9.16 In relation to bathing water quality, water is sampled at two locations along Durham's coastline, namely Crimdon and Seaham Hall Beach. Whilst water quality at both water sampling locations have declined since 2011, the regulations requiring that by the end of the bathing season in 2015 all bathing waters are classified as 'sufficient' is likely to be met.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 45 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
3.9.17 Bathing water at both water sampling points is subject to short term pollution. Short term pollution is caused when heavy rainfall washes faecal material into the sea from livestock, sewage and urban drainage via rivers and streams. At both sampling points, the risk of encountering reduced water quality increases after rainfall and typically returns to normal after 1-3 days.
3.9.18 In general, bathing water quality at Crimdon is better than that at Seaham. This is likely to be due to a higher concentration of population near to the Seaham Hall Beach sampling point and increased risks of sewage and urban drainage outputs washing into the sea during heavy rainfall events. In relation to future trends, population growth may increase the risk and frequency of reduced water quality. However, there is uncertainty as to whether water quality will fail the Bathing water regulations in future.
Soil
3.9.19 In relation to contaminated land, no further updates are available since the 2012 baseline review. There are still significant areas of contaminated land in County Durham due to its mining and industrial heritage. These include areas contaminated with tars, cyanides and other chemicals from old gas works; asbestos, oils, heavy metals and other chemical compounds from former factory sites; and mine tailings from former collieries.
3.9.20 As climate change occurs, increased winter rainfall will lead to some of this material leaching from contaminated sites or being eroded from sites adjacent to river banks due to increased winter flows through the river channel. Similarly, increased sea levels will increase the release of hazardous material from former landfill sites located along the coastal margin, presenting both public health and safety and environmental risks at the point of discharge and more widely when dispersed into the sea. However, it is assumed that remediation of land where contamination is presenting unacceptable environmental risks will continue in line with Council objectives.
3.9.21 In relation to agricultural land quality, there are no further updates available since the 2009 baseline review. Agricultural land quality is lower in County Durham than in the North East region or England. However, this statement masks significant differences within the county. The upland areas of the Pennines generally have very poor agricultural land quality, but the Tees and Wear lowlands have substantial areas of very good quality, and much of the eastern part of the county has good land quality.
46 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Figure 9 Agricultural land quality: proportion of land of different grades
Consultation Question 3i
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.10 Biodiversity and Geodiversity
3.10.1 County Durham continues to contain a rich variety of ecological habitats and species and many areas and features of geological interest that are subject to international, national and local designation due to their importance. However, biodiversity and geodiversity is subject to many pressures which threaten decline. The biodiversity in County Durham is subject to similar pressures as biodiversity elsewhere in the world, including but not limited to climate change, changes to air quality, illegal persecution, sources of disturbance and competing demands for land use. The following sections aim to provide an overview of the current status of biodiversity in County Durham.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 47 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 10 International, National and Local Biodiversity and Geodiversity Sites
3.10.2 Whilst a marginal improvement in the condition of component SSSI's is evident, there is a very low proportion of component SSSI's currently meeting the 2020 50% favourable condition target. However, data shows a high proportion of unfavourable sites in a recovering situation. This is likely to be due to the number of management agreements with landowners now in place. Despite this, the data also shows a slight decline in the proportion recovering since 2012. This is not reflected at the regional level where the proportion recovering has increased.
European Protected Sites
3.10.3 The cornerstone of Europe's legislation on nature conservation are the Birds and Habitats Directives. The Birds Directive (79/409/EEC) was adopted in 1979 and aims to protect all wild birds and their most important habitats across the EU. The Habitats Directive (92/43/EEC) was adopted in 1992 and introduces similar measures to the Birds Directive to protect Europe's wildlife but extends its coverage to a much wider range of rare, threatened or endemic species. At the heart of both Nature Directives lies the creation of a Europe-wide ecological network of nature conservation areas called the Natura 2000 network.
48 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.10.4 The Habitats Directive was transposed into UK law in 1994 and was consolidated by the Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations 2010 (as amended). The regulations provide for; the designation and protection of 'European sites' (which form part of the Natura 2000 network); the protection of 'European protected species' and the adaption of planning and other controls for the protection of European sites.
3.10.5 With regard to the designation and protection of European sites, the regulations require these to include both:
Special Areas of Conservation (SAC) designated as they are important for the conservation of species and habitats listed in the Habitats Directive occurring naturally in the territory; and Special Protection Areas (SPA) designated for species listed under the Birds Directive.
3.10.6 In County Durham's administrative boundary there are 6 whole or part SACs, divided between the western uplands and the coastline:
Durham Coast Castle Eden Dene Thrislington Moor House, Upper Teesdale North Pennine Dales Meadows North Pennine Moors
3.10.7 There are also 3 whole or part SPAs, divided between the western uplands and the coastline:
Northumbria Coast Teesmouth & Cleveland Coast North Pennine Moors
3.10.8 A sub-set of the coastline designated as SPA is also designated as an internationally important wetland under the Ramsar Convention of 1971 and receives the same level of protection as a European site.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 49 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 11 Map showing Location of SAC's within County Durham
50 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Figure 12 Map showing Location of SPA's within County Durham
3.10.9 The Habitats Regulations Assessment (HRA) of the Plan provides detailed information on each of the sites, their associated vulnerabilities and how they may be affected by proposals within the County Durham Plan. The following sections aims to provide an overview of the main issues associated with the sites.
Coastal Sites
3.10.10 The coastal overwintering bird studies undertaken to date in support of the HRA of the County Durham Plan indicate that away from one or two particular sites, the Durham Coast does not hold large population of wading bird populations and indications are that the Durham coast could fail to meet the national thresholds for designated species or indeed any other species.
3.10.11 The study surmised that the major factors that could account for the low number of birds and poor distribution are:
Poor quality habitat as a result of historical degradation and pollution due to previous industrial output, particularly the deposition of coal spoils on the intertidal areas High levels of human disturbance through increased recreation usage Changes in populations and distribution of birds due to climate change
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 51 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
3.10.12 A colony of Little Tern take up annual residence in Crimdon between May and early autumn. The Joint Nature Conservation Committee's (JNCC) Seabird Monitoring Programme Online Database indicates increased numbers of Little Tern apparently on nests from 84 in 2011 to 110 to 2012 (iv).
3.10.13 However, more than fifty eggs were stolen from breeding pairs on 19th June 2013 from the Crimdon colony. Despite about a third of the pairs abandoning the colony in the wake of the theft, the remaining birds produced about 30 chicks which should ensure the colony's survival. However, it is anticipated that it will take time for the colony to fully re-establish itself. 29 birds successfully fledged in 2015. Poor food availability coupled with adverse weather conditions soon after hatching resulted in many losses. The colony is currently wardened through a scheme run by the Industry Nature Conservation Association (INCA). In addition, boundary fencing is provided during the breeding season and 24 hour security is now provided.
3.10.14 As the habitat of Durham Coast SAC is generally located on steep slopes or dangerous cliff edges, the vegetated sea cliff features, though highly susceptible to trampling, are by their position relatively safe. There are some localities where the sea cliff plant community is adjacent to or even on the inland side of the coast path, such as Blackhills Gill, Horden, Beacon Point and Noses Point, but here there is a surfaced footpath that directs and in most parts, confines walkers to the route. There are however many other desire lines and footpaths, some linking back to the main towns along the coast, especially evident at Crimdon, Blackhall Colliery and Castle Eden Dene. Consequently, there is heavy and sustained walking pressure, especially along the coast path.
3.10.15 In addition to impacts associated with trampling, low nutrient sites, typical of many semi-natural habitats including limestone grassland, are especially susceptible to the addition of fertiliser. Sources include atmospheric deposition (mainly nitrogen and ammonia), agricultural run off or dog faeces and urine (phosphorus and nitrogen). The visitor surveys undertaken to support the HRA of the County Durham Plan indicate that dog walking is the main activity undertaken at the coast and the overwintering bird surveys confirmed extensive use of the coast by dog walkers.
3.10.16 In relation to trends, the pressures that currently exist and associated low number of birds are likely to continue without intervention to improve existing habitat and protect habitat and species from recreational disturbance, trampling and enrichment.
Castle Eden Dene SAC
3.10.17 Castle Eden Dene SAC is managed as a national nature reserve and existing management procedures and the nature of the SAC itself in limiting off-track activities helps to protect the site and associated habitat from the impacts of recreational pressure. However, critical thresholds of air pollutants (from a variety of sources) such as nitrogen and acid deposition are currently being exceeded. The impacts of which can affect soil processes, tree vitality and changes in ground flora. As Castle Eden Dene SAC is directly adjacent to the A19 and affected by emissions from regional traffic, air quality issues are likely to continue.
iv JNCC Seabird Monitoring Programme Online Database
52 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Thrislington SAC
3.10.18 Thrislington SAC is managed as a national nature reserve and existing management procedures do help to protect the site from the impacts of recreational pressure. However, the vegetation composition and structure is extremely sensitive to nutrient inputs (dog walking) and general trampling. The SAC is also very sensitive to changes to air quality and is currently exceeding critical thresholds in respect of nitrogen deposition. However, due to the lack of detailed surveys and monitoring there is uncertainty in relation to how nitrogen deposition is affecting the vegetation composition on site.
Western Upland Sites
3.10.19 The western upland sites hold much of the upland heathland of northern England. At higher altitudes and to the wetter west and north, the heaths grade into extensive areas of blanket bogs. The area is considered as supporting the major area of blanket bog in England. A significant proportion remains active with accumulating peat, although these areas are often bounded by sizeable zones of currently non-active bog, albeit on deep peat. The habitat supports breeding pairs of Hen harrier, Merlin, Peregrine falcon, European Golden plover, Dunlin and Eurasian curlew. In addition a series of isolated fields in the western upland area encompass the range of variation exhibited by Mountain hay meadows in the UK and contains the major part of the remaining UK resource of this habitats type.
3.10.20 Most species have been affected by excessive livestock grazing levels across the area. In places, the difficulty of reaching agreements on commons, which cover much of the site, means that successes are limited and continue to prevent restoration. Drainage of wet areas can also be a problem; drains have been cut across many areas of blanket bog, disrupting the hydrology and causing erosion, but in most parts these are being blocked and the habitat restored under agreements. Burning is a traditional management tool on these moorlands, which contributes to maintaining high populations of breeding birds. However, over-intensive and inappropriate burning is damaging to heath and blanket bog and further agreements are needed with the landowners to achieve sympathetic burning regimes. Restoration, to some degree, of a mosaic of more natural habitats across parts of the site is desirable. Acid and nitrogen deposition continue to have damaging effects on the site. Recreational activity may also be problematic.
3.10.21 The North Pennines AONB Management Plan 2014-19 also reports and confirms the following issues:
Artificial drainage systems occur across the AONB, from grips on the blanket bog and heather moorland to field drains in meadows and pastures. Such systems have reduced the value of wetlands and caused significant erosion. A comprehensive programme of grip blocking has been undertaken in recent years which is set to continue The populations of non-native species are steadily increasing. American mink for example, can pose a threat to qualifying species through the introduction and/or carriage of disease, competition for food and/or space and direct predation
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 53 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Despite the introduction of the Heather and Grass Burning Code, the burning of dwarf shrub communities continues to be an area of debate, as does burning blanket bog Stocking levels - blanket prescriptions will not bring about the right conditions for farming or conservation and an outcome focused approach is necessary The 'climate space' for some local species may disappear The populations of several species of bird of prey are artificially low, or unable to establish at all; the significant factor in this is still likely to be illegal persecution.
3.10.22 All sites are also currently exceeding critical thresholds for acid and nitrogen deposition.
Nationally Protected Sites
3.10.23 There are 96 Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) either wholly or partly within County Durham, covering 49,335 ha. A very low proportion of sites in County Durham are currently in favourable condition (14.53%) compared to the regional (23.87%) and national picture (37.54%). The proportion in favourable condition has also decreased slightly since 2009 although a similar rate of decline is reflected at the regional and national level. Most of the SSSI's in unfavourable condition are in the west of the County, with their poor condition generally due to overgrazing, moor burning, drainage and inappropriate management.
3.10.24 However, a high proportion of sites are now in a recovering situation (83.43%). This is likely to be due to the number of management agreements with landowners now in place. Unfortunately though, data also shows a slight decline in the proportion recovering since 2012 (2.68% or 1,322 ha of SSSI area). This pattern is not reflected at the regional level where the proportion recovering has increased. There have also been slight increases in the proportion of area with no change to their unfavourable condition and to those considered to be in a declining condition (i.e. An increase of 0.19% or 93.7 ha of SSSI area).
3.10.25 There is potential for the rate of recovery to decline further due to pressures on habitat and species such as climate change, recreational pressure, illegal persecution and levels of nitrogen and acid deposition affecting sites. It is also considered that County Durham is unlikely to meet the national 2020 50% favourable condition target.
3.10.26 Please note that a number of SSSI's within County Durham are also components of European Protected Sites and National Nature Reserves (NNR's). National Nature Reserves were established to protect some of our most important habitats, species and geology and to provide 'outdoor laboratories' for research. There are five NNR's in County Durham including:
Castle Eden Dene Derwent Gorge and Muggleswick Woods Durham Coast Moor-House Upper Teesdale; and
54 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Thrislington Cassop Vale
Protected and Priority Habitats and Species
3.10.27 The UK Government established the Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) and a Biodiversity Action Plan Steering Group in 1994 in response to the June 1992 Rio Convention for Biodiversity Conservation. Published in 1999, the first Durham Biodiversity Action Plan, 'Action for Wildlife' included a number of action plans to conserve and enhance identified priority habitats and species.
3.10.28 In relation to priority habitat, data shows that a significant proportion of the North East’s broadleaf woodland, upland hay meadows, upland calcareous grassland, blanket bogs and fen priority habitat occurs in County Durham. Lowland Acid grassland and reedbeds are rare priority habitats in the County.
3.10.29 In terms of trends for each habitat type in the BAP area; Broadleaf woodland cover is low; Wet woodland is rare and has declined through natural succession; Ancient woodland is widespread but fragmented; Lowland meadows are extremely rare and fragmented and upland hay meadows are still declining in terms of quality and extent. Lowland heath is rare and combined with upland calcareous grassland, blanket bog, fens and reedbeds are under threat from drainage, agricultural intensification and recreational pressures.
3.10.30 Threats to priority habitats such as agricultural intensification, drainage and recreational pressures are likely to continue to threaten the survival of priority habitats. In relation to priority species, the following table sets out the priority species in County Durham and trend information where this is available.
Table 5 Priority Species in County Durham
Species Trend
Mammals
Badger
Hedgehog
Water Vole Current population trend is uncertain.
Brown Hare Little information on population trends but believed to be widespread.
European Otter Widespread on the Derwent, Wear and Tees.
Bats Ubiquitous throughout the whole of the DBAP area.
Red Squirrel
Birds
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 55 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Species Trend
Skylark Numbers are down by about 38% since 1994 in the region as a whole.
Barn owl
Curlew
Lapwing
Nightjar
Linnet Very common and well distributed species.
Reed Bunting Declined nationally by over 60% since the 70’s but remains widespread in lowland areas.
Corn Bunting Have decreased by at least 95% in the North East since the 70’s.
Spotted Flycatcher In sharp decline.
Tree Sparrow Have decreased by at least 50% in the North East since the 70’s. Locally common but sparsely distributed in Durham.
Grey Partridge
Bullfinch
Black Grouse
Song Thrush Populations are fairly stable at low numbers. Suffered a slight decline since 2004.
Amphibians
Great Crested Newt Suffered a decline in recent years. Studies indicate a national rate of colony loss of approximately 2% over 5 years.
Invertebrates
Northern brown argus
Chalk carpet moth
White Clawed Crayfish Thought to have declined dramatically over recent decades in the DBAP area.
Round mouthed whorl snail
Locally Protected Sites
3.10.31 There are 379 Local Wildlife Sites in County Durham (an increase of 59 since 2009), the vast majority of which have been designated for their importance of habitats for either County or local interest. There are also 32 Local Nature Reserves’s (LNR's) in County Durham (an increase of 2 since 2009), 23 Durham Wildlife Trust Reserves and 18 Woodland Trust Woods. LNR's are statutory designations made by local authorities
56 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
due to the presence of wildlife or geological features. They allow people to study, learn or merely take pleasure in nature. The sites make an important contribution to the biodiversity of the region and contribute towards ecological networks. In terms of local sites in active management, the proportion has increased since 2008 and is expected to increase year on year. However, overall there is a low proportion of total sites that are in active management.
Consultation Question 3j
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.11 Landscape
3.11.1 County Durham's landscape is one of vast contrast and diversity. From its western boundary in the high summit ridges of the North Pennines through to the lowland plains and valleys of its major rivers and the limestone cliffs of the east. These have been classified using a Landscape Characterisation methodology based on national good practice, and the County Durham Landscape Strategy sets out the characteristics and assets of each landscape type, the key issues and threats they face, as well as strategies and objectives for their future conservation and / or enhancement. Their are six broad landscape types within County Durham which are broadly mirrored by Natural England's National Character Areas.
3.11.2 The majority of the western area of the County is nationally designated as part of the North Pennines Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty and the Durham coastland has been defined nationally as a Heritage Coast. Across all landscapes of the County are significant areas and sites which have International, national or local importance for their biodiversity value, and there are particular concentrations of internationally protected sites within the North Pennines AONB and the Heritage Coast area.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 57 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 13 Broad Landscape Types
North Pennines
3.11.3 The North Pennines National Character Area (NCA), at the northern end of the Pennine ridge, has a distinct identity, with its remote upland moorlands divided by quiet dales. It is characterised by a sense of remoteness, with few settlements, slow change and cultural continuity. It comprises some of the highest and most exposed moorland summits in England, with several major rivers, including the South Tyne, Wear and Tees, draining out to the north, east and south-east. It is bordered to the west by the Eden valley, to the north by the Tyne valley, to the east by the Durham lowlands and to the south by the Yorkshire Dales. There are dramatic and panoramic views both across the moorlands and outwards, especially towards the west. The area’s natural beauty is reflected in the fact that 88% of it has been designated as the North Pennines Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB). The North Pennines AONB is the second largest AONB in the United Kingdom covering almost 2,000 km2 and is widely considered as one of the most remote and unspoilt places in England.
Future trends and challenges:
Climate change could result in general shift of species northwards and to higher altitudes. Warmer summers could result in accelerating the move away from hay meadows and could cause the drying out of blanket bog and loss of montane
58 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
species. Wetter summers would increase the rate of soil erosion, reducing water quality and incur more frequent flooding of valley bottoms. Species-rich hay meadows will remain vulnerable to pressures to increase silage making in preference to hay making Changes in government policy may promote improved management of existing woodlands and increase woodland cover Likely to be a continuing lack of maintenance of dry stone walls Continuing need to understand and manage Phytopthora austrocedrae which affects Juniper Anticipated that populations of black grouse and certain birds of prey may remain low or continue to decline Pressure to restore, convert and extend traditional buildings is likely to continue. Recent improved building design guidance should influence the quality of development within the AONB Large-scale quarrying of sandstone, limestone and dolerite is likely to continue with pressure to extend the area and time limit of existing workings.
Pennine Dales Fringe
3.11.4 The Pennine Dales Fringe National Character Area (NCA) lies between the uplands of the Pennines to the west, and the Magnesian Limestone ridge and arable lowlands to the east. Almost 23 per cent of the area falls within the Nidderdale Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) and almost one per cent in the North Pennines AONB. The land has a varied topography of exposed upland moorland fringes and plateaux dropping to lower foothills, separated by major river valleys and incised by numerous minor tributary valleys. It is underlain by Yoredale rocks in the north (limestone, sandstone and mudstone) and Millstone Grit in the south. It is a transitional landscape between upland and lowland. Drystone walls are common in the west while hedges, often thick and tall with frequent hedgerow trees, are more prevalent at lower elevations in the east. Broad valleys, widening to the east, with their more fertile soils support arable crops. While steeper higher land in the west supports predominantly livestock farming. Broadleaved woodlands (many of them of ancient origin), coniferous and mixed plantations and numerous small woods and hedgerow trees all contribute to the well-wooded character of the area. Hamlets, villages and small market towns are particularly distinctive, with strong visual unity, being built in local Millstone Grit Group and Yoredale Group stone in the west and Magnesian Limestone in the east.
Future trends and challenges:
Climate Change is likely to result in more frequent and more extreme rainfall, leading to increased flooding and ‘flashiness’ of flows in river valleys, resulting in increased bankside erosion. Warmer winters will lead to increased tree growth and an increased suitability of new non-native species. Drying out and oxidation of peatland soils, possibly leading to both wind and water based erosion, loss of carbon stores and coloration of water.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 59 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
There is likely to be continued demand for sand, gravel and limestone. The NCA has good potential for new woodland creation. New woodland could strengthen the provision of a number of ecosystem services in the area.
Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe
3.11.5 The Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe National Character Area (NCA) is a transitional landscape between the North Pennines NCA to the west and the Tyne and Wear Lowlands NCA to the east. It is formed by a series of broad ridges, separated by river valleys, with a strong west–east grain. Some 3 per cent (2,252 ha) of the NCA lies within the North Pennines Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty, and 204 ha falls within the North Pennine Moors Special Area of Conservation and Special Protection Area, designated for its habitats (including dry heath, blanket bog and old sessile oak woodland) and upland breeding birds (including golden plover, curlew, dunlin, hen harrier and merlin).The west is more upland in character, with large, open, regular fields bounded by drystone walls or fences, and is primarily used for sheep and cattle grazing. In the east the farmed landscape becomes more mixed, with arable crops grown on the richer land, and more irregular fields divided by hedges rather than walls. Networks of hedges and strips of woodland in river valleys and alongside streams, combined with shelterbelts and large conifer plantations, give parts of the area a well-wooded appearance. A number of major rivers run through the area, including the Wear and Derwent, and their tributaries, Browney, Deerness and Gaunless.
Future trends and challenges:
Drier summers could lead to drought-stress for semi-natural habitats and agricultural crops. This in turn could lead to degradation and loss of certain habitats and species and increased abstraction of water for irrigation, with greater pressure on the Rivers Derwent and Wear, and the Kielder Water Scheme more widely. Increased levels of water abstraction and higher water temperatures could have negative consequences for water quality, fish and other aquatic species and may cause greater incidences of algal blooms. If summers become hotter and drier as predicted, this may lead to a drying out of peat soils beneath wetlands and moorland/heathland, which could lead to locally significant carbon loss (albeit from a relatively small area) as well as greater risk of wind/water erosion and colouration of drinking water supplies. Development pressure is likely to continue with demand for additional housing and commercial premises bringing increasing urbanisation to parts of the landscape. Activities such as vandalism, inappropriate use of motorbikes, graffiti and fly-tipping are a problem in some parts of the NCA. Lighting fires is a particular threat to heathland sites.
60 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Tyne and Wear Lowlands
3.11.6 Tyne and Wear Lowlands National Character Area (NCA) is an area of gently undulating or rolling land, incised by the valleys of the major rivers and their tributaries. It is densely populated and heavily influenced by urban settlement, industry and infrastructure. Between settlements there are wide stretches of agricultural land. The undulating land and broad valleys of the Tyne and Wear Lowlands are underlain almost entirely by Coal Measures rocks of Upper Carboniferous age. Mineral extraction has played a considerable role in the area and the legacy of coal mining remains evident in the landscape, although much restoration has occurred in recent years. Spoil heaps have been restored to pastures, mixed/coniferous plantations, amenity ponds and lakes (former open cast mines) and accessible green spaces such as country parks, and new networks of footpaths and cycle routes have been created along former wagonways
Future trends and challenges:
Climate Change is likely to have a range of impacts, including increased flooding events, changing agricultural practices and drought leading to the loss of certain habitats and landscape features. Industrial pollution of the rivers has reduced in recent years, although some remain polluted. The potential for further pollution from mine water, should the pumping of the deep mines cease, remains a potential threat. Improvements in upland land management practices in the North Pennines NCA may help to reduce run-off and this area is also a priority for woodland planting for reducing downstream flood risk. There has been a significant expansion of urban fringe areas around major settlements. The retention of the rural character of the countryside between settlements is important, and consideration should be given to the improvement of the urban fringe environment and the creation of new, accessible quality green spaces, particularly in urban areas. Securing and enhancing more green infrastructure including the urban fringe and good networks in and out of urban areas, will provide opportunities to deliver health benefits by improving accessibility to a high quality natural environment.
Durham Magnesian Limestone Plateau
3.11.7 The Durham Magnesian Limestone Plateau is an open, agricultural landscape with sharply defined boundaries in the form of a steep limestone escarpment to the west and a dramatic coast of limestone cliffs, headlands and bays to the east. The River Wear cuts across the north of the area, flowing into the sea at Sunderland, and the River Skerne drains into the Tees Lowlands to the south. The Magnesian Limestone aquifer that sits below the area is an important source of drinking water for surrounding urban areas. Rural land cover consists of arable land and grazing pasture, with small, isolated areas of wildlife-rich habitat such as Magnesian Limestone grassland and ancient woodland in the narrow valleys (or denes) running down to the coast. The coast is an important breeding and feeding area for migratory birds, and harbour porpoise frequents inshore waters. The area has been strongly shaped by its industry, with coal mining and quarrying in particular
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 61 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
leaving a very clear mark on local landscapes and identity. Settlements range from larger urban areas such as Sunderland to the north and ex-mining towns with their distinctive terraces to the south and east, to scattered traditional stone villages built around village greens on the plateau and ‘New Towns’ such as Peterlee and Newton Aycliffe. Local nature reserves and a good access network, particularly along disused colliery railways and the coast, provide local residents with good opportunities for outdoor recreation.
Future trends and challenges:
Climate Change is likely to have a range of impacts, including increased flooding events, changing agricultural practices and drought leading to the loss of certain habitats and landscape features. It will also lead to greater pressure on the Durham Magnesian Limestone Aquifer and the River Wear. Increased levels of water abstraction and higher water temperatures could have negative consequences for water quality, fish and other aquatic species and may cause greater incidences of algal blooms. Sea level rise and more frequent storm events may lead to increased rates of coastal erosion with sediment deposit dumped further down the coast. Impacts of this could include greater risk of contamination from landfill sites close to the coast, loss of rare coastal habitats, loss of property and erosion of coastal footpaths. Development pressure is likely to continue with demand for additional housing and commercial premises bringing increasing urbanisation to parts of the landscape. This would also present positive opportunities such as creation of new green infrastructure and installation of more permeable surfaces and sustainable drainage or rainwater harvesting schemes. Small and fragmented areas of semi-natural habitats are likely to remain at risk of neglect, if their management continues to be economically unviable. Scrub encroachment of Magnesian Limestone grassland is a particular risk. This combined with increased movement (and possibly local loss) of species and diseases, climate change and genetic isolation of certain species could represent a severe threat to some rare habitats. Coastal erosion and more frequent storm events are likely to be a threat to valuable coastal habitats, particularly the cliff-top habitats and Magnesian Limestone grassland that exist in narrow strips along the coast. Work to remove colliery waste from long stretches of coastline is continuing to have a beneficial effect on marine and coastal species. As marine habitat continues to recover, populations of marine species will continue to increase, with prey species having a beneficial effect on marine predators and some coastal species such as wading birds.
Tees Lowland
3.11.8 The Tees Lowlands National Character Area (NCA) forms a broad, open plain dominated by the meandering lower reaches of the River Tees and its tributaries, with wide views to distant hills. The area within County Durham is based in the South to the
62 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
east of Newton Aycliffe through to Sedgefield and south to the County Boundary. Approximately 90% of the NCA is not within County Durham. The large conurbation around the Lower Tees and Teesmouth contrasts with the rural area to the south and west, which is largely agricultural in character. The mosaic of intertidal and wetland habitats within the Tees Estuary are internationally designated as Teesmouth and Cleveland Coast Special Protection Area and Ramsar site, due to their importance for waterfowl. These areas are in close proximity to heavy industry, which has developed due to the estuary’s strategic location close to; mineral reserves, a network of main roads, railways and Teesport. Industrial installations form a dramatic skyline when viewed from the surrounding hills. Early successional grasslands and scrub have also emerged on previously developed land; these brownfield sites have significant biodiversity value.
Future trends and challenges:
Climate Change is likely to have a range of impacts, including increased flooding events, changing agricultural practices and drought leading to the loss of certain habitats and landscape features. It will also lead to greater pressure on the Durham Magnesian Limestone Aquifer and the River Wear. Increased levels of water abstraction and higher water temperatures could have negative consequences for water quality, fish and other aquatic species and may cause greater incidences of algal blooms. There is continued pressure for housing development on the urban fringe and often on greenfield sites, particularly in and around Sedgefield. Following on from the work of the Tees Forest, the Tees Valley Green Infrastructure Strategy and other borough-wide green infrastructure strategies have been prepared with the aim of creating a strategic network of green infrastructure corridors, providing links between green spaces for local communities.
Durham Heritage Coast
3.11.9 The United Kingdom’s Heritage Coasts are defined nationally in recognition of their national scenic importance as well as to conserve, protect and enhance heritage assets. Much of County Durham’s coast received Heritage Coast status in 2001. The Heritage Coast consists of three sections of undeveloped coastline covering almost 14km from Crimdon in the South to Salterfen Rocks in the City of Sunderland.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 63 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 14 Durham Heritage Coast
3.11.10 Durham Heritage Coast is an attractive coastal landscape of magnesian limestone grasslands, cliffs, pebble and sandy beaches stretching between the two main conurbations of Tyne and Wear and Teesside. This was one of the most heavily polluted coastlines in Britain, a legacy from over a hundred years of dumping colliery waste from its six coal mines along the beaches. It is now recognised as one of the finest coastlines in England. However, a continuing challenge for Durham's Heritage Coast as for other Heritage Coasts in the country is to effectively manage potential conflicts between improving the quality of access to the coast and managing users whilst protecting the landscape and historic sites and sensitive protected habitats and species. The following box provides a summary of some of the social, economic and environmental challenges that are to be addressed.
Future trends and challenges
64 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Economic pressures and impacts
East Durham and Sunderland’s industrial history leading to misconceptions about coast. Security, lack of amenities, low quality - unattractive to visitors. Lack of Interpretation and poor signage - lowers access and recognition and attractiveness for visitors. Poor state of some areas through littering - reinforces unattractiveness. Overfishing - Local economy suffers, ecological damage. Decommissioning - local economy suffers. Social and culture shifts - less interest in fishing as a livelihood. Lack of information regarding history of fishing - loss of cultural history.
Development Pressures and impacts
Poor transport provision for residents - limited access to employment and training opportunities. Poor access for tourists - restricts tourism development and economic regeneration. Dredging of Seaham port - smothering of seabed, increases in turbidity - Ecological impacts on seabed marine life and reduced light availability for marine life. Urban expansion - visual and habitat/ wildlife concerns. Offshore developments - visual impacts and wildlife/ environment concerns. Oil and gas exploration offshore - seismic disturbance, spillage, cables and pipeline laying.
Recreational Pressures and impacts
Conflicts between users - reduces use of area and creates conflict. Anti social use of pathways - negative perception of area, lowers usage. Bait digging - overexploitation of species and habitat disturbance. Impact of recreational activities on European protected wildlife sites and species.
Pollution pressures and impacts
Dog fouling - human health, unsightliness, user conflicts, unwanted enrichment of sensitive habitat. Litter - unsightliness on beaches and danger to wildlife. Antisocial activities e.g. burnout and flytipping - reinforces poor image of coast, wildlife conflict, risk of injury. Sewage effluent and related litter on shore - reduced bathing water quality, ecological impacts and unsightliness.
Green Belt
3.11.11 Whilst not a landscape designation, greenbelt designations aim to:
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 65 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Check the unrestricted sprawl of large built-up areas. Prevent neighbouring towns from merging into one another. Assist in safeguarding the countryside from encroachment. Preserve the setting and special character of historic towns. Assist in urban regeneration, by encouraging the recycling of derelict and other urban land.
3.11.12 To date detailed Green Belt boundaries have been designated around Durham City, North and East Durham. The Green Belt covers an area of over 11,000 hectares and their boundaries should only be altered in exceptional circumstances through the preparation or review of a Local Plan.
Figure 15 Greenbelt
Consultation Question 3k
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
66 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.12 Heritage
3.12.1 County Durham is an area steeped in history. With 226 Scheduled Ancient Monuments, over 3000 listed buildings, 93 conservation areas, 17 registered parks and gardens, 1 historical battlefield and a World Heritage Site, the historic environment has a vital role to play in the economy of County Durham.
3.12.2 Durham Cathedral and Castle was designated in 1986 as a World Heritage Site in recognition of its outstanding international importance. World Heritage Sites are places or buildings of outstanding universal value, ‘for whose protection it is the duty of the international community as a whole to cooperate.’
3.12.3 There are over 7,580 known archaeological sites in the County’s Historic Environment Record, of which 321 are Scheduled Ancient Monuments. These include ruined buildings, bridges, and archaeological sites. In some case scheduling as ancient monuments is additional to their status as listed buildings or structures.
Figure 16 Archaeological Sites and Monuments
3.12.4 County Durham also has a rich heritage of historic buildings and structures, many of which are included on Historic England's statutory list of special architectural and historic interest and are given legal protection by the Government under the Town and Country Planning Acts. These range from Anglo-Scandinavian times to more recent post war buildings.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 67 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Figure 17 Built Heritage
3.12.5 County Durham is fortunate in possessing a unique pattern of settlements; attractive small towns, villages and hamlets are set in fine industrial and agricultural landscapes which contain many clues to the fascinating history of the area. There are 93 Conservation Areas in the County of which, 42% have a management plan in place (an increase of 22% since 2009).
3.12.6 Historic England's 'Heritage at Risk' report, published annually, brings together information on all Listed Buildings and Scheduled Ancient Monuments known to be ‘at risk' through neglect and decay, or vulnerable to becoming so. Most of the buildings and structures are in poor to very bad condition, but a few in fair condition are also included, usually because they have become functionally redundant or are vulnerable, making their future uncertain.
3.12.7 Since 2009 the number of listed buildings "At Risk" has reduced marginally from 31 to 28. Whilst this is a positive trend, it must be recognised that it is likely that some of the buildings still at risk, may have worsened during this time period. In relation to scheduled monuments, there is variability in the data seen since 2009, for example the proportion of monuments "At Risk" has decreased by 4.8%, displaying a positive trend. However, between 2011 and 2015 there has been a 4% increase in the proportion of scheduled monuments on the "At Risk" register. A similar situation presents itself in relation to Conservation Areas. There has been a 3% reduction in the proportion of Conservation Areas on the 'At Risk' register since 2009 but an increase of 5% between 2011 and 2015.
68 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
There is therefore uncertainty in relation to whether the overall trend is one of improvement or decline. It is hoped that numbers on the register will decrease as solutions that have been agreed are implemented.
Consultation Question 3l
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.13 Resource Efficiency
3.13.1 Sustainable resource use involves using resources efficiently and reducing the negative environmental impact of the use of natural, finite resources (depletion of resources and pollution) while meeting economic growth and employment objectives. Pressures on the environment should be reduced at each stage of the life cycle of resources, which embraces their extraction or harvesting, use and ultimate disposal.
Water Resources and Use
3.13.2 The three major river catchments in County Durham are the Tees, Wear and Derwent. The total length of the main rivers in the County is 369.4km. The River Derwent straddles the northern boundary of the County whilst both the rivers Tees and Wear rise high in the North Pennines in the west, but joins the sea outside the County boundary. The only outfalls to the sea in the County are small streams associated with coastal denes. The hydrogeology of the County is particularly complex. Large parts of the County are underlain with porous rock, which holds water and acts as either major or minor aquifers. Many of the aquifers are important for agricultural, industrial and public water supply purposes.
3.13.3 The most important aquifer in the County is the aquifer in the east of the County comprising the Magnesian Limestone of the escarpment and the underlying Basal Permian Yellow Sands. This aquifer is extensively exploited for drinking water by Northumbrian Water Ltd. A number of minor aquifers also occur in the west of the County providing locally important sources of water. Where these aquifers outcrop springs are abundant. In the absence of springs, numerous private water supply boreholes have been drilled to access the aquifers, water quality being generally good.
3.13.4 There are 14 reservoirs in the County most of which can be used to replenish rivers as necessary. All of these supply drinking water except Cow Green and Tunstall which are now only used to help regulate flows in the Rivers Tees and Wear, respectively. The County’s reservoirs have a high amenity value and many are managed for the nature conservation value as well as having some recreational value.
3.13.5 Almost all of County Durham's water is supplied by Northumbrian Water. The 2009 Scoping Report suggested that consumption was rising slowly against the Government aim to reduce consumption to 130 litres per person per day. The level of consumption within County Durham has fluctuated between 138 and 150 litres per person per day and
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 69 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
whilst there has been a reduction in consumption since 2001, this is only by 2 litres per household per day. However, the most recent data for the County (144.93 litres 2012/13) is below the national average of 150 litres. The introduction of more stringent building regulations may help to reduce water consumption per person per day further.
Energy and Renewable Energy
3.13.6 Both domestic gas and electricity consumption have decreased over the period recorded. This is down to a number of factors including:
Improvements in energy efficiency of existing dwellings, through loft and cavity wall insulation assisting in reducing heating demand Increased awareness of gas and electricity prices, including price rises The recession has had the indirect effect of further highlighting energy use Increased use of renewable energy technologies, especially domestic systems offsetting consumption.
3.13.7 However, gas consumption per household per year in Durham was 2% higher than the national average. There has been a considerable reduction of electricity consumption in Durham. Domestic electricity consumption reduced by 14% between 2005 - 2013. Electricity consumption in Durham is slightly lower (-2%) than the north east but considerably lower (-16%) than the national average.
3.13.8 There has been a strong increase in renewable energy generation / capacity in County Durham. Generation capacity has increased by 84% between 2008 and 2015 contributing to an extra 179 MW of generating capacity. Wind power remains the most significant renewable energy source in County Durham. However, other forms such as biomass and solar PV are now contributing significantly to the overall energy capacity of the County. County Durham has adopted a pro-active approach to renewable energy planning, which was supported by the 2008 Regional Spatial Strategy with continued support through the NPPF. Further appropriate renewable energy development will be considered positively. However, due to recent changes in government policy wind energy development needs to have community support. General support for renewable technologies through the Feed in Tariff has also been scrapped.
Waste Management
3.13.9 The County has seen a reduction in residual household waste by 20% between 2010 and 2015. The amount of household waste sent for reuse, recycling and composting has also increased between 2008 and 2015 with 44% more being reused/ recycled/ composted over this period. However, this is still slightly below national averages and figures appear to be stabilising requiring changes to be made to for example waste collection services such as tackling levels of contamination of recyclable waste collected and/ or introducing the collection of additional materials to further improvements to the trend. Municipal Waste Landfill has dropped significantly between 2007 and 2015 showing a reduction of 98%. The reason for this large fall is that Durham has shifted its waste strategy towards energy from waste and away from landfill. The low levels landfilled are likely to continue as long as the Council retains its existing strategy and waste disposal contracts.
70 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
3.13.10 There has been significant investment in waste management within the County, including private investment at Chilton, which takes virtually all wood out of the waste stream and, through burning, converts it to electricity fed back into the national grid. There are also a number of anaerobic digestion plants, one of which is at Newton Aycliffe which takes food waste to produce a syn gas which is burnt to produce electricity and as a by-product heat which is used to heat nearby businesses, as well as reducing the amount of food waste going to landfill. The Council also runs a fortnightly waste/ recycling collection service, which has made significant contributions to reducing waste targets.
Consultation Question 3m
Can you provide or refer us to any additional supporting data to improve the baseline information?
3.14 Likely Evolution of Baseline without the Plan
3.14.1 The following table aims to summarise the likely evolution of County Durham's social, economic and environmental baseline without the implementation of the Local Plan. This information is useful when predicting effects as it helps to compare the impact of the proposals within the Plan against the 'Business as Usual' scenario. In order to complete this table information in the preceding sections has been drawn upon along with information from section 4 of this report which outlines the key sustainability issues and environmental characteristics of particular relevance at the Delivery Area level and Appendix B.
Table 6 Likely Evolution of Baseline
Theme Likely Evolution of Baseline
Social The majority of the population will continue to live to the east of the A68. The main Welfare and towns will continue to be the most densely populated and the western dales the Communities most sparsely populated. The population will continue to increase at a greater rate than the North East but at about half the rate of population growth across England Whilst the population is anticipated to increase overall, as the population ages, natural change is likely to revert to a net loss (births vs deaths). Internal and International migration are both expected to result in positive growth to the population with International migration contributing the larger of the two. Whilst there is likely to be an increase in the working age population, this will be less than the retired age population Population growth will continue to not be uniformly distributed across the County with growth in Durham City skewed due to student demand and future growth anticipated in towns such as Consett and Seaham. Conversely, population decline in areas such as Peterlee, Horden and Ferryhill due to net-out migration is likely to continue.
Health There is likely to be a continuing trend of improvement against health indicators but the gap between the County and national performance will be difficult to close Health inequalities across the County are likely to persist with higher levels of health deprivation in East Durham and parts of South and North Durham.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 71 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Theme Likely Evolution of Baseline
Housing Relatively low levels of housing completions likely to continue with variation in numbers completed across the County with West Durham experiencing the lowest overall housing growth Low market demand housing areas continue to persist in the Durham Coalfield communities Delivery of affordable and older persons housing along with student accommodation is likely to continue to be challenging. Pockets of poor quality housing in parts of Central, North, South and East Durham, predominantly associated with the former coalfield areas is likely to persist. Whilst less of an issue in West Durham a large proportion of the traditional stone walled housing stock can be and will continue to be described as 'hard to heat.'
Crime Crime rates will continue to decrease and be lower overall than regional and national averages. However, there will continue to be crime hotspots around town centres.
Economic The distinctive physical assets of the County (i.e. its environmental and cultural vitality assets) can help to differentiate it from other areas (The Tyne & Wear City Region) and can continue to act as an economic driver. Whilst improving, closing the economic performance gap between County Durham, the North East and the UK will continue to be a significant challenge Unemployment rates will continue to vary across the County, with higher levels in East Durham and parts of North and South Durham Associated with the ageing population is the shrinking workforce and the loss of skills and experience from the workforce as retirement commences. The economic under-performance of Durham City in regional and national terms will prevail The need for economic diversification in rural parts of the County and the retention of young people will prevail
Education There is likely to be a continuing trend of improvement against education and skills and skills indicators but variation in achievement across the County will persist with anticipated higher levels of persons without qualification in East Durham and parts of North, South and Central Durham. There is likely to be a net loss of skills and experience from the County and workforce as the population ages. The retention of qualified / skilled persons of working age will therefore be a key challenge.
Access and High levels of self containment and access to services and facilities by sustainable Transport modes is likely to persist. However, there will continue to be high dependency on private car use on the rural west and bus passenger journeys per head of the population may continue to decline against a rise in car ownership and predicted demand in car travel. Despite overall high levels of self containment, more people will continue to travel out of the County than in due to a lack of available jobs and close proximity of nearby settlements such as Newcastle, Sunderland and Darlington. Durham City will continue to draw a greater proportion of commuters from within the County for employment purposes.
72 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Theme Likely Evolution of Baseline
Climate Emissions from all sources may continue to decrease, however, this may be Change dependant upon County Durham's economic recovery and whether a low carbon economy will be pursued. Flooding will continue to be a key issue for many communities across County Durham and the frequency of extreme weather events is likely to increase as a consequence of climate change, impacting upon for example, human health, delivery of services, economic productivity, habitat and species populations, distribution and composition, rate of soil erosion etc.
Air, Water Air Quality in areas subject to an AQMA (Durham City and Chester-Le-Street) is and Soil likely to improve on implementation of Air Quality Action Plans. However, under the Business as Usual scenario, demand in car travel and associated emissions is likely to increase which may impact upon the effectiveness of the action plans. Air Quality across the rest of the County is likely to be good, albeit levels of nitrogen deposition may continue to be exceeded in relation to sensitive habitats in upper Teesdale / Weardale and at Castle Eden Dene in East Durham. Steady improvements to water quality in both the Tees and Wear catchments will continue to be made, however achieving good status will continue to be a significant challenge. Groundwater quality may improve slowly as the Environment Agency continues to work with the Coal Authority (re mine water pollution), water companies to manage abstractions and local authorities, site owners and developers to prevent further land contamination and groundwater pollution. Net population growth may increase the risk and frequency of reduced bathing water quality. However, there is uncertainty as to whether water quality will fail the Bathing water regulations in future. Significant areas of contaminated land will remain. However, it is assumed that the remediation of land where contamination is presenting unacceptable environmental risks will continue in line with Council objectives. Agricultural land quality remains lower in County Durham than in the North East or the County. However, there is varying levels of land quality across the County, with better quality land in the Tees and Wear lowlands and poorer quality in upland areas of the County.
Biodiversity Changes to populations and distribution of species and habitats is likely to occur and as a result of climate change. Geodiversity SSSI's will continue to be in a recovering condition, however this depends upon the reason for the designation. Coastal European Protected sites and species will continue to be threatened by recreational pressure such as trampling and enrichment of habitat and direct disturbance, predominantly from dogs. This could also impact upon SSSI's designated for bird interest. Whilst improvement in condition is occurring, western upland European Protected sites and species will continue to be threatened by excessive livestock grazing, drainage of wet areas, over-intensive and inappropriate burning, creation of access tracks, acid and nitrogen deposition, illegal persecution of birds of prey and populations of non native species. Threats to priority habitats such as agricultural intensification, drainage and recreational pressures are likely to continue to threaten the survival of priority habitats and species. Whilst increasing, a low proportion of locally protected sites will be in active management.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 73 3 Stage A2: Baseline Information
Theme Likely Evolution of Baseline
Landscape A number of factors are likely to act cumulatively to result in landscape change to the North Pennines, these include for example; climate change resulting in a shift of species northwards; disrepair of dry stone walls; disease affecting habitat (juniper); continuing pressures to restore; convert and extend traditional buildings and large scale quarrying. The Pennine Dales Fringe is likely to suffer from more frequent and extreme rainfall (as a result of climate change), leading to increased flooding and ‘flashiness’ of flows in river valleys, resulting in increased bankside erosion. Warmer winters will lead to increased tree growth and an increased suitability of new non-native species. Drying out and oxidation of peatland soils, possibly leading to both wind and water based erosion and a loss of carbon stores and coloration of water. There is also likely to be continued demand for sand, gravel and limestone, whilst new woodland provision could also be created. The Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe is likely to be affected by a number of factors, many of which are likely to be a result of increased urbanisation. Development pressure is likely to continue with demand for additional housing, commercial premises and associated infrastructure impacting upon landscape. Activities such as vandalism, inappropriate use of motorbikes, graffiti and fly-tipping are a problem in some parts of the National Character Area. Lighting fires is a particular threat to heathland sites. Within the Tyne and Wear Lowlands there has been a significant expansion of urban fringe areas around major settlements. The retention of the rural character of the countryside between settlements is important, and consideration should be given to the improvement of the urban fringe environment and the creation of new, accessible quality green spaces, particularly in urban areas. Improvements in upland land management practices in the North Pennines may help to reduce run-off, whilst the area is also a priority for woodland planting. The Durham Magnesian Limestone Plateau faces a number of pressures, including: Sea level rise and more frequent storm events resulting in increased rates of coastal erosion which could result in a greater risk of contamination from landfill sites close to the coast and a loss of rare coastal habitats, loss of property and erosion of coastal footpaths; Development pressure is likely to continue with demand for additional housing and commercial premises bringing increasing urbanisation to parts of the landscape. Small and fragmented areas of semi-natural habitats are likely to remain at risk of neglect, if their management continues to be economically unviable. Whilst the Tees Lowland NCA is relatively small in County Durham it still faces a number of key issues including, an increase in levels of water abstraction and higher water temperatures which could have negative consequences for water quality, fish and other aquatic species and may cause greater incidences of algal blooms. There is continued pressure for housing development on the urban fringe and often on greenfield sites, particularly in and around Sedgefield. A continuing challenge for Durham's Heritage Coast will be to effectively manage potential conflicts between improving the quality of access to the coast and managing users whilst protecting the landscape and sensitive protected habitats and species.
Heritage County Durham's heritage assets will continue to play a significant role in attracting tourists and will continue to be of intrinsic value to 'sense of place' and cultural identity. The condition of heritage assets across the County will vary, with some falling into disrepair due to lack of management/ resources and others improving as solutions that have been agreed are implemented.
74 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A2: Baseline Information 3
Theme Likely Evolution of Baseline
The impact of climate change could increase the rate of decay of the fabric of heritage assets. The impact of development proposals upon heritage assets will continue to be assessed against saved Local Plan policies and the National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF).
Resource The introduction of more stringent building regulations may help to reduce water Efficiency consumption per person per day. Gas and electricity consumption is likely to continue to decrease in line with trends. However, overall gas consumption may remain higher than the national average. It is likely that renewable energy capacity will continue increasing. However, the rate of increase may be less than previous years due to cuts to subsidies and new Government guidance relating to wind energy. Due to the high proportion of wind energy development within the County it is likely that renewable energy output will continue to vary depending upon climatic conditions. However, a larger proportion of Solar PV has and will continue to assist in increasing output significantly. It is likely that the proportion of waste reused/ recycled/ composted will remain stable at around 43%/ 44%, requiring changes to be made to for example waste collection services such as tackling the levels of contamination of recyclable waste collected and/ or introducing the collection of additional materials for further improvements to occur. The proportion of waste sent to landfill is likely to remain low due to existing long term contracts in place to send the majority of County Durham's non recyclable/ compostable waste to an an energy from waste plant in Teesside.
Consultation Question 4
Have we correctly identified the 'Business as Usual' scenario against each theme for the County? Is there anything further to add?
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 75 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 76 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Background
4.0.1 Following the identification of objectives from relevant plans and programmes (stage A1) and collection and analysis of social, economic and environmental data (stage A2) it is possible to identify the key sustainability issues pertaining to County Durham. This feeds into the development of the SA objectives and Framework which helps to focus the assessment. The key sustainability issues and problems for County Durham were first identified as part of the 2009 Scoping stage and were verified as part of the 2012 update.
Approach
4.0.2 The following table sets out those key issues, initially identified within the 2009 Scoping stage that are still considered to be key issues for the County. The table also sets out new or additional issues identified by this most recent Scoping Stage. Justification for the removal of key issues, identified at the 2009 Scoping stage is provided within table 8.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 77 78 4 Sustainability
Table 7 Key Sustainability Issues Stage
No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed
Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to A3: Issue identified? issue Identifying Social Issues Appraisal 1 Continued high 2009 Health inequalities between different parts of The trend across most economic, health and Countywide, but Continued high levels of Scoping the County and different sections of the educational indicators is one of improvement. with specific levels of deprivation with Report community should be reduced. The gap in life However, in some cases indicators are preforming issues most deprivation economic, health expectancy should be narrowed. better than regional averages but worse than national prevalent in with economic, and education Promote participation and economic inclusion averages. certain areas of health and Key Scoping disparities through activity to help people to contribute to East, South and education
between the and benefit from economic growth. North Durham. disparities Sustainability County and the Improve the skills-base and education of the between the North East. County's workforce along with the quality, County, the quantity and range of employment north east Report opportunities to support a resilient and diverse region and/or local economy and reduce worklessness. the Nation
2 Persistent social, 2009 Health inequalities between different parts of Despite improvements, disparities prevail as shown Specific variations No changes (2016)
economic and Scoping the County and different sections of the by the index of Multiple Deprivation against a number for example proposed Issues physical disparities Report community should be reduced. The gap in life of domains such as income, education, employment between West between parts of expectancy should be narrowed. etc. Durham, the core the County Establish a clear strategy which seeks to of Central Durham including particular support the regeneration of economically and East Durham concentrations of deprived areas. and pockets within poor quality Ensure new homes plays a positive role in Central, North and housing,degraded areas in need of regeneration. South Durham. environments, poor health and unemployment.
3 An ageing 2009 The Local Plan should ensure that there is The County still has a high proportion of retired Countywide but No changes population, with Scoping adequate capacity of healthcare facilities to persons and those aged 85+ which has increased issue most proposed but uncertainty about Report meet existing and proposed population growth significantly since 2007. This is likely to lead to a prevalent in additional whether their and change. shrinking workforce, loss of skills and experience from Central and West issue added to needs will be Increase the supply and choice of affordable the workforce and increased pressure on health and Durham. reflect adequately met. and older persons housing in appropriate, social services coupled with increased demand for economic integrated and sustainable locations. older persons accommodation. consequences of an ageing workforce No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue
(Please see issue 8)
4 Persistent poor 2009 Ensure that everyone has the opportunity of living in There continues to be pockets of poor quality housing Countywide but Pockets of quality housing Scoping a decent home, which they can afford in a community and weak housing markets across the County, mostly with specific poor quality with continued Report where they want to live. related to former coalfield area. This is less of an variations in housing with deterioration of issue for West Durham, but in this delivery area a certain delivery risk of further low demand large proportion of the housing stock can be described areas. deterioration housing areas. as 'hard to heat.' in associated low demand housing areas
5 Deficit in the 2009 Increase the supply and choice of affordable There continues to be a need to meet affordable Countywide but No changes
provision of certain Scoping and older persons housing in appropriate, housing needs and there has been a decrease in with specific proposed Stage Sustainability types of housing Report integrated and sustainable locations. delivery over recent years. In some areas there is a housing that meet social, Deliver a choice of decent, well-designed shortage of family sized homes and meeting the challenges in economic and housing across a range of types, sizes and accommodation needs of older persons and students Central Durham A3: demographic tenures of dwellings as well as size of sites will continue to be a challenge. and West characteristics of (e.g. small to large-scale mixed development), Durham. the County's which meet objectively-assessed needs for all Identifying existing and future residents and support independent living residents. across the County. Appraisal
Economic Issues
6 A continued focus 2009 Deliver and safeguard a wide-range of strategic and Despite the economic recession County Durham has Countywide, but No changes Key on a narrow Scoping non-strategic sites for employment, retail, tourism shown some improvement in employment rates and with specific proposed Scoping economic base Report and recreation uses that support sustainable GVA and salary. However, the employment rate is issues relating to Sustainability with particular economic growth of existing and new employment below the regional and national average and there is certain areas dependencies on sectors. a continued need to diversify the economy within declining County Durham with potential for focusing on high economic sectors. value manufacturing and tourism. Report 7 Declining rural 2009 Transport policies should take into account the As the County by it's nature is predominantly rural, Countywide, but No changes service centres Scoping dispersed settlement pattern of the County and the challenges that face rural areas still need to be West Durham has proposed
and a declining Report issues in rural communities. addressed including but not limited to: acute rural issues. Issues rural economy. (2016) 79 4 80 4 Sustainability
No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Stage Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue A3: Plan policies should support the expansion of Access to services and facilities. electronic communications networks, including Retaining services and facilities. Identifying telecommunications and high speed Affordability of housing. Appraisal broadband. Retention of young persons. Diversification of the rural economy. Protect and enhance the viability and vitality of the County's city, town and village centres Protection of higher quality environments. to improve their sustainability and ability to support local residents, workers and visitors. Key Scoping
Due to the rural nature of County Durham the Sustainability Local Plan should give particular attention to helping to ensure the future vitality of local
Report villages/ hamlets by supporting sustainable growth through policies and allocations.
(2016) 8 The demographic 2016 Not applicable. Associated with the ageing population is the shrinking Countywide. Not applicable profile of the Scoping workforce and the loss of skills and experience from - newly Issues County will lead to Report the workforce as retirement commences. There will identified issue a shrinking Update be a need to retain and possibly encourage the inward workforce and loss migration of skilled working age persons in order to of associated skills underpin the economy. and experience from the workplace.
Environmental Issues
9 Increased car 2009 Site development in areas that have good There continues to be strong commuting patterns Countywide but No changes traffic and Scoping access by public transport, walking and cycling from north Durham to Newcastle, Gateshead and with specific proposed congestion with Report and that do not increase congestion. Sunderland and South Durham exhibits strong issues around continued strong Transport policies should take into account the connections to Darlington. Durham has a Durham City in commuting dispersed settlement pattern of the County and socio-economic hinterland with particularly strong terms of patterns to major issues in rural communities. links with North Durham and continues to be the main congestion. conurbations. draw from eployment within the County. Trends in increasing car ownership are likely to continue as are peak hour congestion issues. No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue
10 Climate change: 2009 Mitigate inevitable increases in carbon Whilst carbon dioxide emissions have continued to Countywide. No changes by the 2050s: Scoping emissions as a result of development by decrease over the period 2005-2013, tackling climate proposed increase in Report reducing the energy demand of development, change and its impacts continue to be a key average annual improve energy efficiency and use of challenge. temperature of renewable and low carbon technology within around 1.8oC; proposals. average reduction in annual rainfall of In addition to carefully considering the location 4-5%; and sea of new development, ensure the design and level rise of about construction of new buildings and infrastructure 30 cm. take account of the need to be resilient to future climate change e.g through natural shading etc. Stage Sustainability 11 Accelerated 2009 Spatial planning should sustain biodiversity and in The Environment Agency have not recommended East Durham. No changes erosion of Scoping doing so recognise that the distribution of habitats that Durham's coastline should incorporate coastal proposed
coastline, affecting Report and species will be affected by climate change. defence measures to reduce the rate of erosion. A3: internationally Therefore other than at Seaham (where defences
protected maritime exist) there is likely to be a continuation of erosion Identifying grassland and and natural retreat affecting protected coastal species. other habitat Ensuring that new development does not contribute
Appraisal towards coastal squeeze will be necessary to ensure the avoidance of negative cumulative effects.
12 Increased 2009 Improve the County's resilience and ability to adapt Tackling climate change and its impacts continue to Countywide but No changes Key frequency and Scoping to Climate Change by reducing flood risk and its be a key challenge. Ensuring new development with specific proposed severity of floods Report impacts on people and property ensuring that passes the sequential test in terms of flood risk and issues in flood Scoping affecting development is located away from areas of flood risk. that development does not contribute to an increase prone and key Sustainability settlements, water in flood risk in other areas will be key. Potential surface water risk systems, opportunities to reduce flood risk through new areas. economy, development should also be sought. transport, habitats
Report and built heritage. Issues (2016) 81 4 82 4 Sustainability
No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Stage Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue A3: 13 Unclear effects on 2009 The Plan should set out a positive approach Biodiversity in County Durham continues to be subject Coutywide with Continued biodiversity: Scoping to protecting and enhancing biodiversity and to similar pressures as biodiversity elsewhere in the specific issues need to probably an Report creating coherent and resilient ecological world, including but not limited to climate change, pertaining to protect and Identifying
Appraisal improvement in networks at a landscape scale, taking into changes to air quality, illegal persecution, invasive European enhance the condition of account cross boundary issues, whilst at the species, sources of disturbance and competing protected sites. biodiversity some Sites of same time making clear distinctions between demands for land use. including Special Scientific the approach to protecting and enhancing reducing Interest, but different site and species designations. Differences in the condition of sites/ habitats/ species sources of possibly a are variable depending upon the specific pressures harm / Key Scoping deterioration Conservation of biodiversity should not just be that they face. pressures not elsewhere due to linked to confined to designated sites and areas. Sustainability development, land Biodiversity should be promoted through climate management conserving and enhancing sites and species change to practices, climate through local development and planning, better Report change and other including the priority habitats and species in facilitate background the County Durham Biodiversity Action Plan. adaptation of trends. habitats and species
(2016) Spatial planning should sustain biodiversity
Changes in and in doing so recognise that the distribution Issues distribution of of habitats and species will be affected by protected species climate change. and loss of some sites due to climate change and development.
14 Continued loss or 2009 A positive strategy for the conservation and It is anticipated that the condition of heritage assets Countywide. Continued deterioration of the Scoping management of the County's heritage assets across the County will vary, with some falling into need to historic Report should be set out, recognising the wider social, disrepair due to lack of management/ resources and protect and environment and economic and environmental benefits that others improving as solutions that have been agreed enhance heritage assets, conservation of the historic environment can are implemented. The impact of development heritage both designated bring and ensuring that all heritage assets are proposals upon heritage assets will continue to be assets, and afforded an appropriate level of protection. assessed against saved Local Plan policies and the recognising non-designated, There should be a focus on the local National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF). Once that the due to lack of distinctiveness of the historic environment and adopted, the County Durham Plan will have a vital County's resources for how this can promote a sense of place and be role to play in setting out a positive strategy for the heritage protection and enhancement of heritage assets. No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue
management and a stimulus to inspire new buildings of assets are an policy to link imagination. irreplaceable conservation, Encourage the re-use of existing buildings and resource that enhancement and heritage assets. should be access with new enjoyed and development. conserved in a manner appropriate to their significance
15 More likelihood of 2009 Plan policies to ensure the appropriate It is uncertain as to why it was considered in 2009 Countywide with Continued inappropriate Scoping conservation, restoration and / or enhancement that there would be a greater likelihood of specific need to development Report of landscapes and mature features in County inappropriate development affecting the character implications in protect and
affecting the Durham, having regard to the objectives and and quality of the landscape. The saved policies and relation to the enhance the Stage Sustainability character and special characteristics of national and local NPPF ensure the poretction of the landscape from protection of the distinctive quality of landscape character areas. innapropritae development in the absence of an up North Pennines character and landscape, Ensure development is of high-quality design, to date Plan. However, the issue of ensuring the AONB and quality of A3: including protected locally-distinctive and sustainable. protection and enhancement of the landcsape and Heritage Coast County landscape. Seek opportunities for landscape renewal to landscape chracter is still a key sustainability issue, Durham's address mineral and waste legacies. particularly given the diversity of the landscape and landscape Identifying its high value in many parts of the County.
Appraisal 16 Improvements in 2009 The Plan should identify opportunities for Steady improvements are likely to be made to the Countywide. No changes water quality from Scoping enhancement of existing water quality and baseline condition for both the Tees and Wear proposed implementing Report infrastructure when considering sites for catchments. However, achieving good status by 2027
River Basin development. is likely to continue to be a significant challenge. In Key Management The Plan will need to include policies which relation to groundwater quality, information shows Plans, but aim to protect County Durham's coastline and little to no change in groundwater quality to 2015 and Scoping Sustainability increased threat marine waters from pollution from land based a very low proportion of groundwater bodies (33%) from intense sources (e.g. such as run off and inadequate achieving good status. Population growth may rainfall events sewage treatment infrastructure). increase the risk and frequency of reduced bathing causing leaching Policies on surface water management should water quality. However, there is uncertainty as to from contaminated be included in the Plan which amongst other whether water quality will fail the Bathing water Report sites and overflow things require the use of Sustainable Urban regulations in future. from sewerage Drainage Systems. systems. Issues (2016) 83 4 84 4 Sustainability
No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Stage Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue A3: 17 Increased demand 2009 The Plan should identify opportunities for Ensuring the sustainable and efficient use of Countywide. No changes for water and need Scoping enhancement of existing water quality and resources continues to be a key sustainability issue. proposed. for waste water Report infrastructure when considering sites for development. Timely investment in waste water infrastructure is Identifying
Appraisal treatment from likely to be required to serve new development new households proposed by the County Durham Plan. and development.
18 Increased 2009 The Plan should set out a positive strategy for Capacity and production of renewable energy has Countywide. No changes
production of Scoping improving upon existing levels of energy efficiency increased substantially, from 35MW in 2008 to proposed Key Scoping renewable energy Report and energy generation by low carbon and renewable 214MW in 2015. However, current national policy but unclear sources. Areas of opportunity for renewable energy means that further large renewable energy Sustainability direction for future should be identified/ allocated within the Plan. development is unlikely, especially wind, and whilst development: in capital costs of many technologies have reduced, so particular major have the financial incentives offered by government. Report wind development.
19 Unclear trend in 2009 Waste management needs to be driven up the waste Data indicates a lower amount of residual household Countywide. Reducing but domestic waste Scoping hierarchy, addressing waste as a resource and waste is produced per household than there was in high levels of (2016) production: more Report looking to disposal as the last option but one which 2009. However, while there has been a reduction in household Issues households, but must be adequately catered for. County Durham, it is still significantly higher than the waste and possible national average. The amount of waste being sent stabilising continuing for reuse, recycling or composting has stabilised at reuse, reduction in waste around 44%. recycling and produced per composting household. activity
20 Richness of 2009 Minerals planning should ensure, so far as The County continues to contain nationally and Countywide where No changes minerals Scoping practicable, the prudent, efficient and regionally important minerals resources. The impact minerals occur. proposed resources and the Report sustainable use of minerals and recycling of of minerals working activities on the communities and impact of minerals suitable materials, thereby minimising the need the environment is therefore still a key sustainability operations on for new primary extraction. issue for the County. communities and the environment. Adequate and steady supplies of minerals needed by society should be secured within the limits set by the environment. No. Key When was Associated Key Messages from Stage A1 Commentary Geographic Proposed Sustainability this issue Prevalence Changes to Issue identified? issue
21 Good air quality 2016 Plan policies should aim to reduce and limit emissions Air quality has deteriorated at certain hotspot locations Countywide but Not applicable Countywide but Scoping to air, particularly in areas where poor air quality within Chester-Le-Street and Durham City, requiring with specific - newly with poor quality Report exists or at the very least not exacerbate existing the declaration of an Air Quality Management Area issues highlighed identified key hotspots in Update issues. Reducing emissions of nitrogen dioxide from (AQMA). In relation to an update on the previous in AQMA'a in sustainability Durham City and private car use will be key to this. reported baseline position, the need to declare an Durham City and issue Chetser-le-street. AQMA in Chester-le-Street is new and the AQMA in Chester-le-Street. Durham City has been extended.
22 Significant areas 2016 Encourage the remediation of degraded/ 7000 potentially contaminated land sites have been Countywide. Not applicable of contaminated Scoping contaminated land and ensure that soils are managed identified across the DCC area. The sites have been - newly land in County Report properly during the construction and/ or operation of prioritised using a dedicated contaminated land data identified key Durham remain Update development and that following the cessation of management system and priority given to those sites sustainability due to its mining working (e.g. Minerals working) soils are are restored considered to be the greatest risk to human health. issue and industrial to an equal or better condition prior to the
heritage. commencement of development. Stage Sustainability A3: Identifying Appraisal Key Scoping Sustainability Report Issues (2016) 85 4 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.0.3 The table below highlights those key issues which were identified within the 2009 Scoping report which are no longer considered to be key sustainability issues for the County.
Table 8 Issues no longer considered to be key sustainability issues
Key Issue Justification
Lack of direction for location of new The lack of direction for location of new waste management waste management facilities and facilities is no longer a key issue. This is due to County Durham minerals operations: increasing securing a long-term waste incineration contract at Teesside likelihood of adverse environmental Energy from Waste Plant, which will last until 2025. The impacts. incineration plant is a waste-to-energy plant which provides 29.2 MW of power to the grid.
While the mid to long term direction for waste management facilities has been secured, Durham County Council should still aim to address the long-term challenge of waste management within County Durham.
Lack of coordination of development The National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) requires new with sustainable transport and development to be approved only if it is considered to meet the accessibility principles. 'presumption in favour of sustainable development.' This includes considering the accessibility of applications to relevant services and facilities including sustainable transport modes.
Lack of planned approach to Project work on mitigating flooding impacts especially, in key risk adapting to inevitable effects of areas and other climate related impacts is ongoing, through a climate change. partnership approach.
Continued need for minewater This is an issue that is being addressed by the Environment pumping to protect surface and Agency and the Coal Authority ground water quality.
Unclear changes in energy use: more Both domestic gas and electricity consumption have decreased households, but possibly less energy substantially since 2005 by 25% and 14% respectively. This is use per household as energy down to a number of factors including: conservation and renewable energy Improvements in energy efficiency of existing dwellings, measures are further adopted. through loft and cavity wall insulation assisting in reducing heating demand. Improvements to building regulations affecting new development. Increased awareness of gas and electricity prices, including price rises. The recession has had the indirect effect of further highlighting energy use. Increased use of renewable energy technologies, especially domestic systems offsetting consumption.
86 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Key Sustainability Issues for County Durham 2016
4.0.4 Following the review of the issues identified in 2009 along with associated changes to key messages from Policies, Plans and Programmes and the underpinning baseline information, the following issues are considered to be the key sustainability issues for County Durham. Please note that whilst the issues are numbered, they are not in order of priority:
1. Continued high levels of deprivation with economic, health and education disparities between the County the north east region and/ or the Nation. 2. Persistent social, economic and physical disparities between parts of the County including particular concentrations of poor quality housing,degraded environments, poor health and unemployment. 3. An ageing population, with uncertainty about whether their needs will be adequately met. 4. Pockets of poor quality housing with risk of further deterioration in associated low demand housing areas. 5. Deficit in the provision of certain types of housing that meet social, economic and demographic characteristics of the County's existing and future residents. 6. A continued focus on a narrow economic base with particular dependencies on declining economic sectors. 7. Declining rural service centres and a declining rural economy. 8. The demographic profile of the County will lead to a shrinking workforce and loss of associated skills and experience from the workplace. 9. Increased car traffic and congestion with continued strong commuting patterns to major conurbations. 10. Climate change: by the 2050s: increase in average annual temperature of around 1.8oC; average reduction in annual rainfall of 4-5%; and sea level rise of about 30 cm. 11. Accelerated erosion of coastline, affecting internationally protected maritime grassland and other habitat. 12. Increased frequency and severity of floods affecting settlements, water systems, economy, transport, habitats and built heritage. 13. Continued need to protect and enhance biodiversity including reducing sources of harm/ pressures not linked to climate change to better facilitate adaptation of habitats and species. 14. Continued need to protect and enhance heritage assets, recognising that the County's heritage assets are an irreplaceable resource that should be enjoyed and conserved in a manner appropriate to their significance. 15. Continued need to protect and enhance the distinctive character and quality of County Durham's landscape. 16. Improvements in water quality from implementing River Basin Management Plans, but increased threat from intense rainfall events causing leaching from contaminated sites and overflow from sewerage systems. 17. Increased demand for water and need for waste water treatment from new households and development. 18. Increased production of renewable energy but unclear direction for future development: in particular major wind development.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 87 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
19. Reducing but high levels of household waste and stabilising reuse, recycling and composting activity. 20. Richness of minerals resources and the impact of minerals operations on communities and the environment. 21. Good air quality Countywide but with poor quality hotspots in Durham City and Chetser-le-Street. 22. Significant areas of contaminated land in County Durham remain due to its mining and industrial heritage.
Consultation Question 5
Have we correctly identified the key sustainability issues? If not, what is incorrect and what have we missed?
4.1 Discussion of Key Sustainability Issues at an Area Level
4.1.1 In order to give a more focused definition of the key sustainability issues for the County and how they manifest themselves geographically across County Durham, they are discussed in relation to the five distinct areas described in section 1 of this report and depicted in figure 2. This is considered essential to the Sustainability Appraisal process in County Durham, given the size and diversity of the County and the need for the SA process to identify and evaluate impacts of policy options and preferred policies, which may be felt differently in different parts of the County.
4.1.2 In addition, one of the requirements of the Strategic Environmental Assessment Directive is the identification of the environmental characteristics of areas likely to be significantly affected by the Plan. The discussion of issues at the delivery area level provides a more focused picture of environmental characteristics of relevance to each delivery area.
4.2 Central Durham Area
High levels of deprivation
4.2.1 Deprivation is not as concentrated in the Central Durham Area as it is in some other areas of the County. A lower percentage of the population in the Area Action Partnership (AAP) areas associated with the area are living in the top 10% and top 30% most deprived areas nationally, when compared with the whole of the County and England. However, pockets of high deprivation persist in wards containing the following, mostly ex-mining settlements:
Brandon Ushaw Moor Bearpark West Rainton Coxhoe
88 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Kelloe The Sherburn Road area to the east of Durham City
Degraded urban environment
4.2.2 Degraded urban environment is not so much of an issue in Durham City itself, where care has been taken to conserve the historic character of the conservation area and the local retail economy is relatively vibrant, albeit the North Road area of the City could benefit from regeneration. The North Road Redevelopment project which aims to to relocate the bus station and improve the associated Highway and public space should assist with regeneration of the North Road Area and, has now progressed through design and consultation phases. There are however, areas to the east of Durham City, including Sherburn Road estate and in the ex mining settlements to the immediate west, including Brandon, Ushaw Moor and Bearpark which would benefit from regeneration.
Poor quality housing and meeting housing needs
4.2.3 Poor quality housing is not so much of an issue in Durham City itself. There are however areas to the east of Durham City, including Sherburn Road estate and in the ex-mining settlements to the immediate west, including Brandon, Ushaw Moor and Bearpark where housing quality is an issue.
4.2.4 The County Durham Strategic Housing Market Assessment identified that the supply of open market dwellings is sufficient for overall demand in Central Durham but there remain imbalances in some property types and sizes. In relation to affordable housing need, Durham City due to its role as an employment centre and because of the University remains popular for buyers from both inside and outside the area. The average house price to earnings ratio in Durham City is above the regional average and properties within a mile of the City Centre command some of the highest prices in the County. Consequently, demand for affordable and family housing is high. Conversely, the market in the surrounding areas of Durham is weaker and predominantly attractive to buyers who live in these settlements. As discussed below, the increasingly ageing population is also like to increase demand for older person properties.
Ageing population
4.2.5 There has been an average 26% increase in the 85+ population in the AAP areas associated with the Central Durham area since 2005 (AAP profiles). This represents the greatest increase across the County. In terms of population change the greatest increase in persons aged 85+ have occurred within Langley Moor, Neville's Cross, Belmont, Carville and Lanchester. The greatest increase in retired persons (65+) have also occurred within Brasside, Carville, Langley Moor and Neville's Cross. Central Durham, as per other areas face a significant increase in the dependency ratio (working age population: retired population) over coming years.
Poor levels of health and health inequalities across the County
4.2.6 The Central Durham area generally has better health levels than other areas with the exception of West Durham which has a marginally lower proportion of its population considered to be within the top 10% deprived against health indicators. Whilst there is
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 89 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
significant variation in premature all-cause mortality within County Durham, the 2014 Joint Strategic Needs Assessment shows that the mortality rate for the geographic area most closely aligned with the Central Durham area is one of the lowest in the County. All middle super output areas (MSOA's) covering the area also have higher life expectancies when compared to the County average with the exception of females in the 'Brandon' MSOA who have a slightly lower life expectancy than those in the County and 'Gilesgate Moor' MSOA which has a relatively lower life expectancy when compared to both the County and England averages.
4.2.7 The following table shows the prevalence of health issues in the two AAP areas in the Central Area.
Table 9 Health inequalities
AAP Area Top 10% Top 30% County Wide County Wide (10%) (30%)
Durham 4.5 36.9 27.5% 71%
Mid Durham 0 45.1
Need for economic diversification and more employment opportunities
4.2.8 The economic performance of County Durham has been modest over the last 10-20 years. As a result, the County is falling further behind the North East and UK with respect to key indicators of economic performance. However, Durham City as the administrative and employment centre of the County and the Central Durham area, has performed, in economic terms, relatively well when compared with other parts of the County. This is reflected in the extent of economic activity within the city which contains 20% of the County’s businesses and 33% of its employment. Durham City is recognised as ‘one of the Region’s major assets with its Cathedral and Castle World Heritage Site; a university with an international reputation for research; a retail centre serving the surrounding settlements; a popular tourist destination in its own right; and a service sector including important public sector employers.
4.2.9 However, Durham City is currently performing, in overall terms, only slightly better than other parts of the wider County rather than performing well in regional and national terms and remains in the bottom half of the UK competitiveness index (2013) (ranked 348/379). Key stakeholders have highlighted a perception that Durham City is constrained by the following factors:
Challenge of providing viable development sites and due to topography, heritage, and green belt constraints. Over reliance on public sector employment that is vulnerable to spending cuts. The lack of a Central Business District and defined offer to present to the business market. Insufficient housing provision, leading to lower levels of in-migration. The challenge of competing with nearby Enterprise Zones. Exaggerated seasonal fluctuation in turnover in the retail and wider business sector as the student population is a significant component of the City's population base.
90 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.2.10 Outside the City there are a number of successful key employment sites, notably at Belmont Industrial Estate, Bowburn and Meadowfield and average household income is higher than the County average at £29,500 compared to £24,500. Employment levels in the Central Durham area are higher than the County average and are higher than those in the South, East and North Durham Areas as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation employment domain. However, higher levels of unemployment exist within the Gilsegate Moor, Bearpark and Witton Gilbert, Brandon, Esh Winning and Ushaw Moor West areas, as per the proportion of Job Seekers Allowance claimants (three year average).
Educational attainment
4.2.11 The Central Durham area has relatively high levels of educational attainment compared to North, South and East Durham as measured by the Index of Multiple deprivation education domain. However, there is variation regarding attainment within the area. For example, a higher proportion of pupils attending school in the area achieved 5 or more A*-C GCSE's, including English and Maths than those in the County and England, but areas falling below the County's average attainment of 60% include Bowburn, Esh Winning and Ushaw Moor West. Whilst the proportion of 16-18 year olds who were not in education, employment or training is below the County average and is falling in part of the area, the proportion of residents who have no qualifications is higher than both the County and national average in the Deerness Valley, Brandon, Gilesgate and Sherburn areas.
4.2.12 In relation to educational infrastructure in the area, there is limited spare capacity in primary school provision in Durham City
Access to services
4.2.13 The Central Durham area is better served in this respect than other areas of the County. Due to the size of Durham City itself and the range of services, facilities and employment it offers, as well as the above average public transport system, this is not considered to be a key issue for the area itself.
4.2.14 The network of public rights of way is well developed, particularly around former mining settlements and older villages. The area is particularly well served by the network of former railways and wagon ways, many of which have been converted to cycleways and bridelways. Ongoing investment in walking and cycling infrastructure in Central Durham is occurring through a number of specific schemes as part of Local Transport Plan funding. In recent years, their has been improvements of an improved cycle route at Franklands Lane in the North of the City, alongside the A167 between the Cock of the North roundabout and the Honest Lawyer near Croxdale in the West of the City and on the A690 between West Rainton and Carville in the East of the City. These works have contributed to work to deliver the Great North Cycle Way in this part of County Durham. Current schemes of note include improvements to the walking and cycling access to Durham Train station and improved cycle parking at Durham Train Station and the rerouting of the National Cycle Network (NCN) through Durham City.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 91 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Congestion
4.2.15 The Draft Sustainable Transport Strategy for Durham City suggests that there is a high level of daily commuting into Durham City from within the Central Area, wider County and further afield for educational and employment purposes. Commuter inflows into Durham City are far greater than outflows. Including residents who live in the City, Durham City has over 40,000 people travelling to work in the City. 31,175 commuters travel into the City from outside the City with only 7,599 leaving the City for work. The City therefore has a net in commuting figure of around 23,000 trips and a high level of self containment (residents who live and work in the same place) which is only surpassed by Barnard Castle in the West Durham area.
4.2.16 However, due to the high level of in-commuting the highway network currently experiences congestion and delay especially in the peak hour periods as vast amounts of traffic seek to cross the constrained City Centre. This has led to the dominance of the car traffic on key routes through the City, particularly the A167 and Milburngate Bridge. The Draft Sustainable Transport Strategy for Durham City identifies the competition over limited space as the principal challenge in providing enhanced support for walking, high quality public transport and encouraging a step change in cycling. Traffic on the key routes and approaches into the City at peak periods can be congested from the outlying villages in the Central Durham area such as Brandon, Ushaw Moor, Bearpark, Pity Me and Witton Gilbert.
Climate change mitigation and adaptation
4.2.17 There is a need to increase the production of electricity and heat from renewable sources - thereby reducing the reliance on fossil fuel for these purposes and reducing carbon dioxide emissions. Durham City currently accommodates a 100 kilowatt micro-hydro scheme on the River Wear and has the potential to accommodate further schemes, subject to undertaking necessary environmental assessments. Heat mapping work has also identified that Durham City has potential to support a district heating scheme due to the large number of large institutions in relatively close proximity and their demand for heat and electricity.
4.2.18 In relation to wind energy, the Central Durham Area has a substantial installed and operational wind energy capacity. There are 39 operational, individual wind turbines in the area, across 13 sites. Nine commercial scale schemes currently operate in this area. These are at Tow Law, West Durham, High Hedley and High Hedley II, Holmside, Langley, Trimdon Grange, Hare Hill and Broom Hill. Together these schemes along with smaller individual wind turbines provide a total of 58.7 MW of operational capacity in this area. In relation to solar power, solar energy schemes continue to be developed on a micro scale.
4.2.19 There is also a need to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the need to travel and increasing the use of sustainable transport modes. Durham City has been the County's main target for measures to achieve these aims, being the major residential areas as well as the destination of many commuter journeys and a centre for shopping and other services. There are good bus and rail stations in the City Centre and the Park and Ride scheme in combination with car parking charges contributes to ensuring that
92 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
some of the traffic which previously entered the city is kept on the outskirts. Although, successful in this regard, the extent to which the Park and Ride reduces carbon dioxide emissions from traffic in the area and the consultation on the draft air quality action plan identifies that further work to reduce nitrogen dioxide (a greenhouse gas) from buses is required. As commented, car use and congestion is problematic in the area and further improvements to public transport, cycling and walking networks should help to reduce emissions from private car use and increased emissions as a result of congestion.
4.2.20 In relation to carbon sinks in the area, deciduous woodland in the area occurs mainly along the banks of the rivers Wear and Deerness, and to a lesser extent the Browney. The County Durham Landscape Strategy identifiers large areas of the area that would benefit from additional native woodland planting to enhance the landscape as well as contribute to increased carbon absorption and improved habitat networks.
4.2.21 In common with all areas, the Central Durham area will have to adapt to the implications of climate change. The Durham and Browney sub-area is the notable flood risk hotspot in the Environment Agencies' Wear Catchment Flood Management Plan (CFMP), where the policy option is to “Take further action to reduce flood risk”. The CFMP infers that between 200 and 1,000 properties are currently at risk in this sub-area, notably at Lanchester and Durham City.
4.2.22 The large urban area of Durham and associated hard standing in addition to a combined sewage system mean that surface water flooding from intense rainfall events and the capacity of the storm drain system is a particular issue to take into account. The 2011 Surface Water Management Plan identified broad location which are considered to be more vulnerable to surface water flooding, called Surface Water Risk Area's (SWRA). These were then prioritised in terms of their relative risk. In the Central Durham Area the areas at greatest risk, in common with the CFMP, were identified as being Durham City and Lanchester. Other SWRA's of lower priority include Esh Winning, Langley Park, Witton Gilbert, Sherburn and Bowburn.
4.2.23 The River Wear has flooded at different times in and around Durham City, including in 2009 when a large channel of field was washed away near Houghall. This stretch of the Wear (upstream of the City / to the south and east) is particularly prone to flooding and has significant areas of flood risk. A study was undertaken by the Environment Agency and Durham County Council to explore whether allowing water to access the extensive floodplain upstream of Durham City centre earlier would reduce flooding to many areas in Durham. However, it was concluded that optimising floodplain storage alone would not be effective and local defences would also be required.
Diversity in landscape and unique sense of place
4.2.24 The landscape in the Central Durham area falls into the Wear Lowlands Landscape Character Area (the area to the immediate north, east and south of Durham City) and the West Durham Coalfield (areas to the west of the City) as defined by County Durham's Landscape Strategy 2008. These areas are replicated by Natural England' National Character Area's 14: Tyne and Wear Lowlands and 16: Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 93 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Many of the types of features of the landscape which contribute to its quality and character (biodiversity, geology and historic environmental features) are discussed under separate headings below.
4.2.25 The strategy for the Wear Lowlands Character Area is:
To conserve the character of the valley landscapes of the Wear while enhancing those areas which have been most affected by development, accommodating the needs of nearby urban populations while maintaining a strong rural identity to the countryside between towns and villages. A key component of this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages.
4.2.26 The strategy for the West Durham Coalfield Character Area is:
To enhance the landscape where it has been degraded by mining or development while conserving what is most distinctive and valued about its character, including its rural identity, its upland fringe qualities and its strong cultural associations with the coal and steel industries. A key component of the strategy for this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages.
4.2.27 Much of the lower reaches of the coalfield valleys to the west of Durham City, as well as the Wear Lowlands to the north, south and east are defined as Areas of High Landscape Value. In the County Durham Landscape Strategy 2008, the majority of the land around Durham City is identified as a “Landscape Conservation Priority Area”, with smaller pockets - mainly around former mining settlements - being identified as a “Landscape Improvement Priority Area”.
4.2.28 The built environment of some former mining settlements is of a poor quality and some have run down commercial centres. Settlement edges are abrupt or poorly defined and fringed with allotments, pony paddocks and industrial land. The dereliction left by the coal mining and associated industries has been largely reclaimed, although some small areas remain. Reclaimed land is often of poor agricultural quality and lacking in mature landscape features. The pressures of urban populations on the surrounding countryside leads in places to problems such as vandalism and fly-tipping.
4.2.29 There are no nationally designated landscapes in the area, but the Durham Cathedral and and Castle World Heritage Site is an international designation that requires the protection of both the site itself, its outstanding universal values and its setting. Whilst not a landscape designation, a Green Belt encircling Durham City was established in the 1999 County Durham Structure Plan and finalised in the 2004 City of Durham Local Plan. The purposes of green belt designations are:
To check the unrestricted sprawl of large built-up areas. To prevent neighbouring towns from merging into one another. To assist in safeguarding the countryside from encroachment.
94 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
To preserve the setting and special character of historic towns. To assist in urban regeneration by encouraging the recycling of derelict and other urban land.
4.2.30 Interpretation of the fifth purpose of Green Belt was an important aspect of the development strategy for the former City of Durham District, established in the City of Durham Local Plan (2004). This development strategy was fundamental to the Plan, which confirmed that the most appropriate location for new development that could not be located in Durham City and was in the larger surrounding villages where urban regeneration could be promoted.
Richness of the historic environment
4.2.31 The Central Durham area is particularly rich in historic environmental assets and this is the key factor in Durham City’s status as one of the region’s main visitor centres. The area as a whole contains archaeological remains from the Neolithic period onwards, many of which are recorded in the Durham Sites and Monuments Record (SMR) / 'Keys to the Past' website. Scheduled Monuments include a large number of medieval features – bridges, monasteries, chapels and hospitals as well as prehistoric features. Overall, there are 19 Scheduled Monuments, three of which are on Historic England's “Heritage at Risk” register (an increase of one from 2009).
4.2.32 Durham Cathedral and Castle and their setting are designated internationally as a World Heritage Site whose outstanding universal values must be protected. Older villages in the area (e.g. Esh, Shincliffe, Satley, Lanchester, Sunderland Bridge), together with the city centre of Durham, are designated as Conservation Areas, giving a total of 16 in the area. The area is also relatively rich in Listed Buildings – including domestic and ecclesiastical buildings and castles. Overall, there are 623 listed buildings in the area and four of these are Grade 1 or 2* buildings on Historic England's 'Heritage at Risk' register (a reduction of three from 2009). Three of the seven historic parks and gardens in the area (Brancepeth, Burn Hall and Croxdale) are on Historic England's Register of Parks and Gardens of Special Historic Interest. There is one listed Historic Battlefield at Neville’s cross at the edge of Durham City.
Table 10 Heritage at Risk: Central Durham
Heritage Asset Condition Reason
Church, near Croxdale Hall, Scheduled Monument and Severe damp: rising damp in floor an Croxdale Listed Building, Grade I walls and penetrating damp over chancel arch. Poor
Durham Prison Officers’ Listed Building, Grade II* Roof, stonework and close-studded upper Club – “The Tithe Barn” – floor in poor condition. Durham Fair
Prebends’ Bridge, Durham Scheduled Monument Masonry of eastern arch deteriorating to point of concern. Fair
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 95 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Heritage Asset Condition Reason
Sherburn House Bridge, Scheduled Monument Tree growth and water ingress is pushing Sherburn out masonry and there are pronounced Very bad gaps running throughout the structure.
Grange and Chapel, Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability is from vandalism. Bearpark Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems
Former Junior Seminary Listed Building, Grade II* The roofs have been maintained in good Chapel of St Aloysius, condition but the interior and glazing are Ushaw College Poor damaged.
Ushaw Home Farm, main Listed Building, Grade II* General deterioration to most external block and wall attached elements. Poor
Croxdale Hall Registered Park and Garden, Maintenance of the gardens has fallen Grade II* back in recent years and the waterbodies are in a poor and deteriorating condition. Generally unsatisfactory with The notable 'cranked' walls flanking the major localised problems orangery are in an advanced state of decay.
Bowburn, Conservation Area Deteriorating trend, no reason provided. Cassop-cum-Quarrington Very bad
Richness of ecological and geological assets
4.2.33 There are no internationally designated nature conservation sites in the area, but there are nine nationally designated Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI's). The sites are predominantly located to the east of the area, associated with past and present quarry working and are mostly designated due to the presence of magnesian limestone grassland. Two of the sites are designated for their geological importance. Further detail is provided as follows.
Table 11 SSSI Condition
Name Reason for Designation Condition
Brasside Pond The two large ponds in the north of the site occupy flooded clay 100% favourable workings and comprise one of the largest expanses of unpolluted open water in County Durham, other than in reservoirs. They are the most important breeding site for wildfowl in County Durham.
Butterby Natural succession - development of swamp, fen and fen-carr 100% unfavourable Oxbow communities in areas formerly of open water. recovering
96 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Name Reason for Designation Condition
Pittington Hill Although part of the site has been quarried in the past, Pittington 100% unfavourable Hill supports one of the most extensive areas of Magnesian recovering Limestone grassland in County Durham, whilst scrub and neutral grassland add to the biological diversity of the site.
Sherburn Hill A large part of the Magnesian Limestone escarpment of County 100% favourable Durham has been affected by quarrying and an intensification of agriculture, with the result that Sherburn Hill is one of the few surviving sites on the escarpment supporting semi-natural Magnesian Limestone vegetation.
Crime Rigg This working quarry displays probably the most important site in 100% favourable and Sherburn the Lower Permian Yellow Sands, overlying Marl Slate and Lower Hill (a) Magnesian Limestone. Large faces in the quarry show the complex, interdigitating cross-bedding typical of the Yellow Sand. This has been interpreted as Seif dune deposits which were aligned north-east–south-west, parallel to the dominant wind direction. The crests of these dunes show soft sediment deformation structures comparable to those of the Weissliegender of the southern North Sea.
Cassop Vale Cassop Vale supports a range of grassland, scrub, woodland 57% favourable, and wetland communities which make it the most diverse site on 36% unfavourable the Magnesian Limestone in County Durham. recovering, 7% declining
Town Kelloe Town Kelloe Bank contains one of the most extensive areas of 71% favourable, Bank primary Magnesian Limestone grassland in Britain. 29% unfavourable recovering
Raisby Hill This working quarry exposes a section through the Ford and 100% favourable Quarry(b) Raisby Formations and the Marl Slate of the Upper Permian. The site is of particular importance for displaying the type section of the Raisby Formation (the carbonate unit of the first sub-cycle of cycle 1 of the English Zechstein sequence in NE England (EZ1 Cala). It is also of interest in that the rock is predominantly limestone rather than the usual dolomite, and that it contains rather a fuller and more diverse fauna than usual. A key section in the Marine Permian of NE England.
Raisby Hill Raisby Hill Grassland comprises a small abandoned quarry, an 100% favourable Grassland area of wetland, the embankment of a tributary of Coxhoe Beck and part of the original land surface of Raisby Hill. This last area is of particular importance, since it is here that examples of primary Magnesian Limestone grassland survive. a. This site has been identified as of national importance in the Geological Conservation Review b. This site has been identified as of national importance in the Geological Conservation Review
4.2.34 The area also contains one National Nature Reserve, managed by Natural England (Cassop Vale), eight Local Nature Reserves, numerous Local Wildlife Sites, mostly ancient woodlands and four Local Geological Sites demonstrating meltwater channels, sub-glacial channels the Wear River Gorge and strata of interest at an abandoned quarry.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 97 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.2.35 Semi natural habitats occupy a relatively small proportion of Durham City and its locality. The majority of grasslands are improved with scattered patches of semi-improved pasture. The woodland network is more robust with fairly well-connected riparian corridors of woodland along the Wear and its tributaries, and areas of heavily wooded estate landscapes. Early successional brownfield land occurs in both isolated pockets and in linear corridors following former rail and waggonways. Wetland habitats occur generally as thinly scattered and isolated features on the floodplain. The quality of some tributary streams is affected by mine-water pollution which affects their value as networks for many species. The overall pattern of habitat distribution closely reflects the topography, with most semi-natural habitats found along the incised corridors of rivers and streams separated by extensive areas of farmland or built development.
4.2.36 Many hedgerows and hedgerow trees have been removed in the past or have declined through neglect. Changing practices in agriculture have led to an increase in arable cropping in previously pastoral areas, improvement of older, more diverse grasslands and conversion from haymaking to silage production. Many semi-natural heaths have been lost in the C20th to development, agricultural improvement and opencast mining. Those that remain are in decline through a combination of neglect and abuse.
4.2.37 Ancient semi-natural woodlands vary in condition. Some have been modified by the planting of exotics and a number were felled and replanted with conifers in the 1950s. Some receive little active management. Some rivers and streams remain polluted by mine water or groundwater from colliery tips. The potential for further damage from minewater in the event of the pumping of the coal measures ceasing remains a potential threat.
Water quality
4.2.38 There are two surface waterbodies in the Central Durham Area forming part of the Wear Catchment which in turn forms part of the wider Northumbria River Basin District Catchment, including the:
Browney Wear Lower and Estuary
4.2.39 There are 3 waterbodies in poor, 4 in moderate and 2 in good ecological status across the Browney Catchment, which includes much of the Central Durham area. One water body currently fails chemical status, whilst 8 are classified as good. The Wear Lower and Estuary catchment has 4 waterbodies in poor status, 15 in moderate and 3 in good, with 1 failing its chemical status and 21 achieving good.
4.2.40 However, the current and predicted chemical quality for the River Wear is 'good' The fish populations of the River Wear and its tributaries are generally of a high quality, with a good distribution of salmon and trout, and coarse fish in the lower and middle reaches. Eel and Lamprey are also present and would also need specific consideration.
4.2.41 In relation to groundwater, the Wear catchment contains two groundwater bodies. The Wear Magnesian Limestone groundwater body (which has recently been split into, the Wear Magnesian Limestone (northern section) and Skerne Magnesian Limestone (southern section)), has been classified as being at poor chemical, due to nitrate impacts,
98 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
primarily in the Haswell area, but good quantitative status. The Wear Carboniferous limestone and Coal Measures groundwater body has been classified as being at poor chemical, due to mining impacts, but good quantitative status. The legacy of the mining industry is still impacting on the quality of the groundwater across the County, with coal and metal mines both contributing high concentrations of metals into ground and surface waters.
Land quality
4.2.42 There are pockets of contaminated land left from coal mine spoil areas and industrial activities. Information was gathered by the former district councils to develop 'Contaminated Land Registers' containing lists of sites of potential concern where the current use or history of the site suggest that contamination might be present.
4.2.43 According to the district council information, there were the following number of “sites of potential concern” in the former district area of Durham City, which makes up the area:
Durham City: 1,402
4.2.44 Comparatively, the Central Durham area was recorded as having a higher number of 'site of potential concern' than North, East and West Durham.
4.2.45 In relation to agricultural land quality, there are areas of Grade 2 (very good) agricultural land along the floodplain of the River Wear. Elsewhere agricultural land is largely Grade 3 (moderate and good) with pockets of Grade 4 (poor) or 5 (very poor) in steep sided valleys and where it has been affected by mining or land reclamation.
Air quality
4.2.46 The average annual emissions to air across all sites monitored in Central Durham is increasing, with results between 2009 and 2012 getting close to the national objectives and air quality limit values. A number of individual monitoring sites through the City Centre (incorporating Highgate, Milburngate and the Gilesgate areas of the City) recorded exceedances of the annual mean objective leading to the declaration of an Air Quality Management Area for Durham City in May 2011.
4.2.47 The outcome of the detailed assessment of air quality has determined levels of nitrogen dioxide in other areas of Durham City are above national and European air quality standards (an additional 16 locations). Therefore, the declared AQMA was extended in July 2014 to incorporate the western area of the city through the junctions at Crossgate Lights and Neville's Cross to the stonebridge roundabout together with sections of Claypath and New Elvet.
4.2.48 The greatest contributing source to nitrogen dioxide emissions are cars, as may be expected given they represent the greatest proportion of overall traffic flow. LGV's are not a major component of the total traffic flow and are predicted to contribute relatively little. The combined emissions from HGV's and buses are predicted to contribute approximately the same proportion as cars (AECOM 2012, Local Air Quality management - Durham City further assessment)
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 99 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Waste
4.2.49 The amount of waste landfilled has significantly reduced since 2009 across the County, with the amount also going to Energy from Waste, as opposed to landfill increasing to 98% of all municipal waste. There are 24 closed landfill sites, no active landfill sites and three household waste recycling centres in the Area.
Minerals
4.2.50 Mineral extraction (specifically coal) has been very important to the development of the part of this area outside Durham City. Many of the settlements were originally formed in the 19th century around collieries, now all closed, creating a scattered, semi-rural settlement pattern. In the post war years the exposed coalfield has also seen extensive opencast coal extraction.
4.2.51 Historically, the area has not been as affected by minerals extraction activity as some other parts of the County, although there has been significant opencast coal extraction in the area to the west of Durham City and sand and gravel extraction in the River Wear Valley. Current activity predominantly relates to the quarrying of Magnesian Limestone to the east of the Area.
Central Durham: Environmental Characteristics of Particular Relevance
The World Heritage Site and its setting, including protection of the greenbelt where it plays a role in preserving the setting of the World Heritage Site
Richness of the historic environment including many listed buildings (particularly in Durham City), conservation areas, archaeological sites and monuments, historic parks and gardens and an historic battlefield
High number of nationally important wildlife sites, magnesian limestone grasslands, ancient woodlands and numerous local wildlife sites
Large parts of the area were previously defined as an Area of High Landscape Value
Some run down and degraded settlements
Good access to services and high levels of self containment but traffic growth and road congestion on key routes through Durham City
Declaration and extension of an Air Quality Management Area (AQMA) in Durham City owing to high nitrogen dioxide emissions
High priority surface water risk areas and likely increase in intense rainfall events
Poor groundwater quality and poor-moderate ecological quality of rivers
100 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
High but decreasing numbers of potentially contaminated sites
Potential opportunities for hydro power and district heating schemes
Consultation Question 6
Have we correctly identified the environmental characteristics of the Central Durham Area? If not, what is incorrect and what have we missed?
4.3 North Durham Area
High levels of deprivation
4.3.1 Deprivation is of concern in the area. However there is much variance between specific areas and communities. The Stanley AAP area has 5.1% of the population in the top 10% most deprived nationally, whilst both the Derwent Valley and Chetser-le-Street (CLS) AAP's have 2.9% in the top 10% nationally. Also of concern is that 70% of the Stanley AAP area are within the top 30% most deprived nationally. At a ward level, Stanley Hall West and Chester Central are the only two wards in the most deprived 10%. However, many areas are within the top 20 and 30% including:
Annfield Plain Catchgate Central Chester-le-Street Craghead Moorside Pelton Fell Pelton Sacriston South Moor Stanley
Degraded urban environment
4.3.2 Degraded urban environments remain a concern in many areas which have suffered from lower design standards and/or physical degradation and as such could benefit significantly from regeneration. Stanley town centre is such an area and whilst having a masterplan for regeneration, development has been slow and has suffered setbacks e.g. Tesco pulling out of planned store in town centre.
4.3.3 In common with South and East Durham, the quality of the urban environment is poor in many neighbourhoods. There is an abundant supply of previously developed land and buildings within many neighbourhoods, towns and villages. Putting brownfield land and buildings back into productive use removes the negative effects of abandonment
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 101 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
whilst reducing pressures on the countryside for more development. The sensitive refurbishment and re-use of existing buildings wherever possible contributes to sustainable development in conserving energy and materials as well as in preserving and enhancing local distinctiveness and heritage. Good design policy and guidance is needed to steer development in a more sustainable direction by making the most of existing buildings and ensuring both new buildings and refurbishments contribute to local distinctiveness.
Poor quality housing and meeting housing needs
4.3.4 Poor quality housing is an issue remaining in some communities. However there has been significant improvement in social housing meeting decency standards, with only 2.5% of residents expressing dissatisfaction with the quality of housing in North Durham(v). The County Durham Strategic Housing Market Assessment 2013 Update identified that there is a strong market in North Durham. However, demand currently exceeds supply and that an imbalance exists in terms of property type and size, with North Durham in particular having a lack of detached properties. There is a ratio of 68% of owner occupiers within the area, bettered only by the those in the West. However, there remains a significant need for affordable and family housing in the area.
Ageing population
4.3.5 There has been an average 18.6% increase in the 85+ population in the AAP areas associated with the area since 2005, with the greatest increase in the Derwent Valley area of 22.6%. In terms of population change the greatest increase in persons aged 85+ have occurred within Delves Lane and Leadgate, CLS, Craghead and South Stanley, Beamish, Ousten and Urpeth, and Medomsley and Shotley Bridge. The highest increase in the retired population (+65) occurs in CLS, Beamish, Ousten and Urpeth.
Poor levels of health and health inequalities across the County
4.3.6 The area has specific issues. However, the general health and well being of residents in the area has improved since 2005 but remains worse than the national average. Of specific concern are areas including Annfield Plain and Dipton, South Moor, Craghead and South Stanley, Pelton and Grange Villa, all which have a high prevalence of obese children, adults and people who smoke (although smoking in general is following the national decreasing trend) and a low percentage of healthy eating adults. The following table shows the prevalence of health issues in the three AAP areas in the area.
Table 12 Health inequalities
AAP Area Top 10% Top 30% County Wide County Wide (10%) (30%)
Derwent Valley 7.6% 60.8% 27.5% 71%
Stanley 5.1% 80.2%
Chester-le-Street 9.6% 53.6%
v County Durham 2013 Update Strategic Housing Market Assessment (July 2013), DCC
102 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Need for economic diversification and more employment opportunities
4.3.7 The trend across most indicators is one of improvement, despite the economic recession. However, all the towns in the North provide key hubs for employment, services and facilities. Many employment sites in the north are experiencing high vacancy levels and whilst some towns, in particular Chester-le-Street, are well located in relation to the strategic road network, other towns such as Consett, are not within that strategic transport corridor and as such can find it more difficult to attract investment. Many areas within the area out commute to the Tyne and Wear region, due to the lack of jobs in certain sectors, such as a business districts. Many parts of North Durham still have a large manufacturing sector and as such have an overreliance on a narrow employment base, which can leave the area vulnerable to global market changes and economic downturn.
4.3.8 The majority of businesses in all three AAP areas are classed as small with 10 or fewer employees. However, from 2005 to 2009 there was an increase in the number of businesses overall with Stanley AAP area showing a 0.3% rise, whilst CLS and Derwent Valley had a 7.5 and 7.6% rise respectively. Household income is of particular concern in all areas showing a reduction in income of over £1000 per household from 2013 to 2015.
4.3.9 The numbers of residents claiming job seekers allowance (JSA) differs substantially across the area. Across the Derwent Valley area there has been a 6.9% reduction in claimants with a big 18.1% decrease seen in the Leadgate North/Consett East area. In CLS there has been a rise of 2.6% in claimants. However, some areas have seen nearly 30% reductions in claimants (CLS South), whilst others have seen a 25% increase (Pelton/Grange Villa). Stanley has seen similar fluctuations. However, the 11% increase in claimants is the third highest rate across all AAP's. Overall therefore the North area has seen a 2.2% increase in claimants, which is less than the County Durham average increase of 5%
4.3.10 The employment rate in County Durham and the North East is generally static between 73% and 75%, although the region generally outperforms the County. Both the County and and the North East is below the national average.
Educational attainment
4.3.11 The attainment of pupils has been steadily improving. However, following two major reforms of the data and collection in 2013/14, the trend has worsened, due to restrictions placed upon the number and type of qualifications counted as GSCE equivalents (Wolfe review). As of data collected in 2011, CLS and Derwent Valley had a percentage attainment rate of 5 or more A* - C GCSE grades of 65.5% whilst Stanley attained 54.7% giving a rate of 61.9% across North Durham, this followed a period of consecutive improvement.
4.3.12 There appears to be a social gradient between the percentage of pupils attaining Key Stage 2 English and Maths L4 and above and % pupils eligible for free school meals in primary schools i.e. areas with higher numbers of free school meal pupils tend to have lower levels of attainment. There is also a correlation with AAPs with higher levels of deprivation and child poverty. The five AAPs with the highest levels of FSM eligibility are
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 103 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
also the AAPs with the highest proportions of children in families in poverty and local populations living in the top 30% most deprived areas nationally. In North Durham the Stanley AAP area has 35.9% of all primary school pupils eligible for free school meals.
4.3.13 The proportion of residents (aged 16-18) not in Education, Employment or Training (NEETs) fell in the county by 10.1% between April 2011 and April 2012. This suggests that increasing numbers of young people (aged 16 to 18) are entering further education and apprenticeships as there are fewer job opportunities in the county. In North Durham there was a small reduction in CLS of 3.2%, a 27.8% reduction in Derwent Valley and 13.5% reduction in Stanley.
4.3.14 School absences remained generally static between 2008 and 2011 with a 0.5% reduction in North Durham.
Access to services
4.3.15 Access to services, transport, jobs and leisure opportunities is generally not an issue in North Durham, especially around the main towns of Consett, Stanley and Chester-le-Street. However, there are large rural areas to the west and the north, which have particular difficulties in accessing such services and in some cases travel is highly dependant upon the private car. There are also particular instances of poor access in Edmondsley and Ebchester and Hamsterley, due to their relative distance away from the main towns. North Durham has a very dense network of footpaths and is also well served by a network of cycleways, following the old railway lines and connects the three main settlements in North Durham, whilst also supplying a link to Tyneside and Wearside. There are also strong public transport connections between the main towns and outlying towns and villages and also to the main settlements of Durham, Newcastle, Gateshead and Sunderland. The long term aim will be to achieve a balance between employment and housing in each main town, reducing the need to commute.
4.3.16 Within the County 22% more residents in 2010 than in 2005 are able to access services and facilities by public transport, walking and cycling. However, of significant concern is the reduction in bus passenger journeys per head of population in County Durham from 2009 - 2014. It is also significantly lower than the regional average. However, this is likely to be down to a number of issues including in the main the general rural nature of the County and lack of large city, which assists in improving passenger numbers, fare price, number and quality of services and car ownership increase.
Congestion
4.3.17 There are some key hotspots of traffic congestion at local junctions, especially at peak times however recent investment in capacity improvements at Northlands roundabout on the A167 at Chester-le-Street have addressed previous concerns in the area. The main issue within County Durham remains within Durham City and the routes in and around the area which has knock on impacts for residents and commuters within North Durham.
104 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation
4.3.18 Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC) emissions data shows that the greatest decreases on 2005 levels can be attributed to industry (375.1 kt / 23% decrease) followed by domestic sources (184.2 / 14% decrease) and transport (109.9 kt / 11% decrease). However, the rate of decrease has lagged ever so slightly behind the regional picture by approximately 2% for industry, domestic and transport sources. This may be due to factors attributed to the recession and associated closure of industry, reductions in house building etc having a greater impact upon emissions at the regional scale as opposed to the local.
4.3.19 Whilst there is no local emissions data information available, households across North Durham do have a higher total consumption of gas and electricity than the County or regional average, with the Derwent Valley having the highest consumption of any AAP area with a total of 19.2MWh p/a. There is thus a need to highlight such differences and work to reduce emissions where there is the greatest differential. Building sustainable communities, with reduced need to travel, high specification broadband will also be vital in reducing transport emissions, particularly in rural areas.
4.3.20 Renewable Energy development has been varied in North Durham with few successful wind turbine applications, due in part to the area of high landscape value along the Derwent Valley. There are currently 9 operational wind turbines with a generating capacity of 15MW. These are, however, mainly single medium/ small scale individual turbines. There is limited scope for hydro along the River Derwent. However, there may be scope along the Wear at Chester-le-Street.
4.3.21 There have been large reductions in energy consumption across most areas including in particular industry that may be a result of the economic downturn and reduction in manufacturing, which traditionally uses significant amounts of energy.
4.3.22 North Durham is particularly highly wooded and as such is a significant carbon absorption asset. This is particularly evident in the Derwent Valley, with large swathes of deciduous woodland and conifer plantations.
4.3.23 There are specific resilience issues (pertaining to flooding) in certain areas as defined in the County Durham Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA). Of particular concern is flooding at Chester-le-Street, which is likely to become more susceptible to flooding instances due to climate change. Strategic catchment scale mitigation schemes are essential in order to increase resilience to extreme events. This should include a range measures including tree planting in upland areas, de-culverting of existing water courses and site specific barriers.
Diversity in landscape and unique sense of place
4.3.24 County Durham has a highly diverse landscape character. North Durham is classified as the West Durham Coalfields in the County Durham Landscape Strategy. The strategy within the area is:
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 105 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
To enhance the landscape where it has been degraded by mining or development while conserving what is most distinctive and valued about its character, including its rural identity, its upland fringe qualities and its strong cultural associations with the coal and steel industries. A key component of the strategy for this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages.
4.3.25 The national character areas define the area as the Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe and add that the area is improving with only 1 ha in decline. However, with 317 ha in unfavourable recovering status there is still much to do.
4.3.26 Large areas of North Durham including the Derwent Valley are classed as areas of high landscape value (AHLV) and whilst this is not a statutory designation it highlights the quality of the landscape in North Durham and therefore where development should be more considerate to landscape issues. The development of the 'Land of Oak Iron Project' within the Derwent Valley highlights the specific landscape and industrial heritage of the area and aims to restore and reinstate natural and historic features of the area.
4.3.27 The built environment of some former mining settlements is of a poor quality and some have run down commercial centres. Settlement edges are abrupt or poorly defined and fringed with allotments, pony paddocks and industrial land. The dereliction left by the coal mining and associated industries has been largely reclaimed although some small areas remain. Reclaimed land is often of poor agricultural quality and lacking in mature landscape features.
Richness of the historic environment
4.3.28 North Durham contains remains from the Neolithic period onwards, many of which are recorded in the Durham Sites and Museum Record (SMR). Scheduled Monuments range from roman roads, forts (like Binchester, Lanchester and Ebchester) and aqueducts to medieval chapels and manor houses and industrial features like Causey Arch, the world’s oldest surviving single arch railway bridge and Derwentcote Steel furnace.
4.3.29 Many of the older settlements in North Durham are designated as conservation areas. The wider landscape contains a wide range of listed buildings from mediaeval manors and castles to industrial buildings and structures. There are also a large number of parklands, some of which survive only as relics. Significant parkland areas at Lumley and Lambton are on English Register of Parks and Gardens of Special Historic Interest.
4.3.30 In North Durham, the coalfield contains a number of minor parklands – most of which no longer function as such. Many hedgerows and hedgerow trees have been removed in the past or have declined through neglect. In the upland fringes grazing regimes have become more extensive and field boundaries have been abandoned. Many hedges are reduced to lines of thorns and many dry stone walls are derelict. Features of the industrial landscape have largely been removed in land reclamation and opencast mining. Those that survive – small spoil mounds, coke ovens and waggonways - are often undervalued and neglected.
106 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.3.31 Sites within North Durham that are listed within the Historic England - Heritage at Risk Register 2015, include:
Hamsterley Hall - Grade ll* Medieval House Medieval Chappel at Harbour House Farm, Plawsworth - Grade ll scheduled monument Lambton Castle - Iron gates and railings Lambton Castle - Lamb Bridge Derwentcote Steel Furnace Lanchester Roman Fort - Longovicium
4.3.32 Conservation areas at Annfield Plain and Chester-le-Street are also classed as deteriorating.
Richness of ecological and geological assets
4.3.33 In North Durham, there are no internationally designated nature conservation sites and very few Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI). Fragments of heathland and woodland at Greencroft and Annfield Plain, and a significant area of heathland at Waldridge Fell are designated as SSSI. By contrast, there are a large number of County Wildlife Sites representing a range of habitats including lowland heath, semi-natural woodland, wetland, semi-improved pasture and early successional brownfield land.
4.3.34 There are a wide variety of species and habitats known to occur in North Durham, which must be considered in planning policy and these are listed in the Durham Biodiversity Action Plan.
4.3.35 In North Durham, the Greencroft Heath SSSI near Annfield Plain is in a condition of “Unfavourable – No Change” due to inappropriate scrub control and undergrazing.
4.3.36 There are a number of local Geological / Geomorphological Sites including geological exposures in river sections and glacial features, including sub-glacial channels at Sacriston.Semi-natural habitats occupy a relatively small proportion of the area of North Durham. The majority of grasslands are improved with scattered patches of semi-improved pasture and heath. The woodland network is more robust with fairly well connected riparian corridors of woodland – particularly along the Derwent and localised areas of heavily wooded estate landscapes. There are substantial gaps in the woodland habitat network and many woods have been re-stocked, which can affect their value as networks for some species, as a consequence of their generally modest scale.
4.3.37 Early successional brownfield land occurs in both isolated pockets and in linear corridors following former rail and wagonways. Wetland habitats occur generally as thinly scattered and isolated features, although there is a more robust corridor of wetlands in old gravel pits along the Wear floodplain. The overall pattern of habitat distribution closely reflects the ridge and valley topography, with most woodland and wetland habitats found along the incised corridors of rivers and streams, and heathlands found on the higher ridges. There is generally poor connectivity between them other than locally in valley heads. Ancient, semi natural woodlands are found in many coalfield valleys in steep sided denes and along rivers and streams. Notable areas include the valleys of the Pont Burn, the River Derwent, the River Wear, Cong Burn and Stanley Burn
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 107 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.3.38 The dereliction left by the coal and steel industries has been largely reclaimed although some remains. Reclaimed land is often of poor quality and lacking in mature landscape features like hedges and trees. Some rivers and streams remain polluted by mine water or groundwater from colliery tips. The potential for further damage from mine water if the pumping of the coal measures ceases remains a potential threat.
4.3.39 Many hedgerows and hedgerow trees have been removed in the past or have declined through neglect. In the upland fringes grazing regimes have become more extensive and field boundaries have been abandoned. Many hedges are reduced to lines of thorns.
4.3.40 Many semi-natural heathlands have been lost in the C20th to development, agricultural improvement and opencast mining. Those that remain survive as isolated fragments and some are in decline through a combination of neglect and abuse. Woodland cover is generally low on the coalfield although some areas are heavily wooded. Ancient, semi-natural woodlands tend to occur as isolated, often small, fragments along rivers and streams. A number were felled and replanted with conifers in the 1950s. DCC have recently implemented a new management protocol for woodlands to bring them back into active management.
Water Quality
4.3.41 In North Durham, water quality in the Wear and Derwent and many of their tributaries is good. In some tributaries, quality is only fair, poor or locally bad as a result of discharges from mine workings, sewage treatment works, storm sewage overflows and surface water drainage from industrial and agricultural activities. The catchments of these tributaries are designated as Nitrate Vulnerable Zones. Whilst water quality is improving, only 29% of rivers and lakes in the Wear Catchment will obtain good status by 2015.
4.3.42 Trends in groundwater quality may improve slowly as the Environment Agency continues to work with the Coal Authority (re mine water pollution), water companies to manage abstractions and local authorities, site owners and developers to prevent further land contamination and groundwater pollution.
Land Quality
4.3.43 There are pockets of contaminated land left from coal mine spoil areas and industrial activities. Information was gathered by the former district councils to develop “Contaminated Land Registers” containing lists of sites of potential concern where the current use or history of the site suggests that contamination might be present.
4.3.44 According to former district council information, there were the following number of “sites of potential concern” in the former district areas of Derwentside and Chester le Street:
Derwentside 57 Chester le Street 134
4.3.45 As a comparison the Western and Eastern areas have many more contamination issues:
108 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Wear Valley 532 Easington 358
4.3.46 There is a need to ensure sites are safe for any proposed after-use, and also to guard against the leaching of contaminants to other areas, particularly in the light of increased episodes of intense rainfall which are expected as a result of climate change.
4.3.47 In North Durham there are parts of the Wear floodplain with land of Grade 2 (very good) quality. In the rest of the lower reaches of the valleys, the Grade is generally 3a (good) and Grade 3b (moderate), though locally Grade 4 (poor) or 5 (very poor) where it has been affected by mining or land reclamation. The higher ridges and valley heads of North Durham are predominantly Grade 4, locally Grade 5 on acidic peaty soils and land affected by mineral working.
Air Quality
4.3.48 There is one new Air Quality Management Area in North Durham at Chester-le-Street. The A1 cuts through the area at Chester-le-Street and as such air quality in the proximity of these roads is likely to be worse than elsewhere. In addition, there are local hotspots of traffic congestion at peak times in and around some of the main towns. The deterioration of air quality at these points at peak times is not sufficient to justify the declaration of Air Quality Management Areas at the moment, but any future development should be planned so as to maintain the good air quality and relatively freely-flowing traffic which is enjoyed in the area.
4.3.49 Whilst average emissions at sites monitored are decreasing in the former district of Chester-le-Street, the assessment of specific monitoring locations to the west of Chester-le-Street town centre have determined that levels of nitrogen dioxide exceed the long term national objective and EU limits for this pollutant. This is due to localised, street-canyon effects occurring near Menceforth Cottages due to the valley and narrow road setting. An Air Quality Management area (AQMA) was declared to the west of Chester-le-Street town centre in May 2013 which was amended (reduced) in May 2015 to solely include Menceforth Cottages.
4.3.50 Across Consett and Stanley and the rest of the North Durham area, average emissions at sites monitored have increased since 2010 and annual mean nitrogen dioxide concentrations have been below national objectives and limit values at all sites monitored.
Waste
4.3.51 The amount of waste landfilled has significantly reduced since 2009 across the County, with the amount also going to Energy from Waste, as opposed to landfill increasing to 98% of all municipal waste.
4.3.52 There are a now two civic amenity sites across North Durham at Annfield Plain and Hett Hills (Chester-le-Street). The dispersed settlement pattern of the area, along with the increasing need to transport waste to different facilities for recycling, disposal etc, means that the transport of waste is an important issue to consider in assessing impacts on communities and on carbon dioxide / greenhouse gas emissions.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 109 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Minerals
4.3.53 Mineral extraction has been very important to the development of this part of the County. Many of the settlements in this area were originally formed in the 19th century around collieries, now all closed, creating a scattered, semi-rural settlement pattern.
4.3.54 In the post war years the exposed coalfield in North Durham, where the coal measures are near the surface, has also seen extensive opencast coal extraction. Since 2000, the level of opencast activity has been at a historical low. There is also a proposed open cast site at Bradley, east of Leadgate, for which approval has been granted, following a public Inquiry.
4.3.55 Glacial lake clay is also extracted on the northern border at Birtley and is used at the Union Brickworks in Gateshead.
4.3.56 Sand and gravel has been worked in this area in the past, in particular from along the River Wear. Glacial deposits of sand & gravel have also been worked elsewhere, although no sand and gravel is currently extracted anywhere from North Durham.
North Durham: Environmental Characteristics of Particular Relevance
Greencoft Heath and Waldridge Fell SSSI Sites of geological / geomorphological importance at Sacriston Historic environmental assets across the area, including Roman remains at Lanchester and Ebchester and Industrial heritage Traffic growth and congestion at some junctions on the A1 and between towns in North Durham Poorly designed and / or degraded nature of some urban environments Poor quality of the urban fringe environment around settlements Flood risk and likely increase in intense rainfall events.
Consultation Question 7
Have we correctly identified the environmental characteristics of the North Durham Area? If not, what is incorrect and what have we missed?
4.4 East Durham Area
High levels of deprivation
4.4.1 The former Durham coalfield areas face unique economic challenges. Settlements grew up around the coals mines across the area and were historically reliant on the coal mining industry for their employment. The East Durham area, together with North and South Durham, covers the vast majority of the County's coalfield. Although East Durham
110 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
has experienced fundamental restructuring over the last 20 to 30 years, parts of it continue to suffer from problems of severe economic decline. Substantial parts of the area are in need of improvement and major investment.
4.4.2 Deprivation is a major issue throughout most of East Durham, as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) 2015. A larger proportion of the population in the Area live in the top 10% (29.0%) and top 30% (73.9%) most deprived wards when compared with the County (11.4% and 45.4% respectively) and England. A higher percentage of the population in the Area live in the top 10% and top 30% most deprived areas across all of the categories except the housing and living environment domains.
4.4.3 In the area of Easington, around 40% of the population live in the top 10% of deprived areas nationally, and around three quarters live in the top 30% of deprived areas. It is the same parts of the County Area that suffer from major problems of economic inactivity/ joblessness, health related issues and also poor levels of educational attainment and skills. These different factors combine to give the high overall IMD scores.
Degraded urban environment
4.4.4 Despite having a range of listed buildings and conservation areas, the quality of the urban environment is poor in many neighbourhoods within this part of the County. There is a supply of previously developed land and buildings within many towns and villages. Putting brownfield land and buildings back into productive use removes the negative effects of abandonment whilst reducing pressures on the countryside for more development.
4.4.5 The sensitive refurbishment and re-use of existing buildings wherever possible contributes to sustainable development in conserving energy and materials as well as in preserving and enhancing local distinctiveness and heritage. Brownfield land should provide the majority of locations for future housing and employment land opportunities and supply, however land must also be deliverable and viable. Some brownfield land areas can be particularly rich in biodiversity and this should be taken into account in decisions regarding the location of development, biodiversity conservation and provision of open space.
Poor quality housing and meeting housing needs
4.4.6 Improvements to the housing stock is needed in some areas. There is a high proportion of terraced housing in former mining settlements in general, and is part of the 'character' of the area. However, some settlements would benefit from a greater diversity in the housing stock as part of a wider strategy for regeneration. The blending of old and new styles and designs, as well as decisions on the location of new housing needs to be done sensitively as it has major implications for the character and sense of place of settlements. Peterlee new town is one area with pockets of particularly low housing demand. Previous regeneration programmes specifically developed new housing of a different style to the traditional mining towns.
4.4.7 Despite East Durham having the lowest house prices in the County, the availability and delivery of affordable housing for rent and sale remains a major concern. A lack of housing which residents can afford to buy or rent has negative implications for communities
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 111 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
by contributing to excessive commuting and unsustainable travel, loss of workers from an area, overcrowded housing, high dependency and pressure on social housing and housing benefit, homelessness and associated health and well-being problems.
4.4.8 The Strategic Housing Market Assessment for County Durham update carried out in 2013 identifies a significant need for additional affordable housing across the County in order to cater for the proportion of households that cannot afford to purchase or rent housing in current market conditions. It suggests a need for additional affordable housing units for East Durham of around 150 per year over 2013/14 to 2017/18. The review of market demand and supply suggested that there was a significant lack of flats in East Durham compared to the demand for them. Despite this, the dwelling vacancy rate for East Durham is the highest in the County at 4.8%, compared to 4.5% for the County as a whole. Data indicates that households in East Durham (7.3%) were more likely to express dissatisfaction in the quality of their accommodation. The proportion of occupied households who are social renters is highest in East Durham (22.8%).
4.4.9 The number of households in need can be defined as: ‘The quantity of housing required for households who are unable to access suitable housing without financial assistance’. The proportion of households in need is highest in East Durham (7.4%). This may be a reflection of the fact that average weekly incomes are the lowest in East Durham.
4.4.10 The 2012 Household Survey identified that around 2,709 households across County Durham were living in overcrowded conditions. Analysis was based on the number of bedrooms the household had access to, compared with the number required according to the Bedroom Standard Model. The proportion of households who were overcrowded averaged 1.2% across County Durham and was highest in East Durham, where 2.1% of all households were overcrowded.
Ageing population
4.4.11 East Durham saw the smallest increase in population between 2005 and 2010 of 2.1%, compared to the County average of 3.1%. The retired population increased by 4.3%, less than the County average of 7.1% and compared to a working age population increase of 3.4% in East Durham, broadly similar to the county average. The over 85 population increased by 21.6%, above the County average of 20.5%. East Durham still has one of the highest dependency ratios in the County and these trends suggest that they could increase further.
Poor levels of health and health inequalities across the County
4.4.12 The East Durham area has the worst health in County Durham, as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation Health domain. There are large areas of East Durham which are in the top 5% of the most health-deprived areas nationally. This includes areas around the main settlements of Peterlee and Seaham, as well as the smaller former mining communities in the more rural parts (e.g. Wingate, Thornley, Shotton Colliery, Haswell, Station Town, Trimdon Colliery).
112 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.4.13 There are 9 out of 13 Middle Super Output Areas that have life expectancies below those of the County and England based on a four year average of the period 2006-2010. In 2010, around two thirds (67%) of East Durham residents regarded their health as either good or very good. This is lower than the rest of County Durham (74%).
4.4.14 The provision of high quality accessible open space and sporting facilities can contribute to a better quality of life for residents. This is particularly important within the east of the county where communities are dominated by high density terraced housing without gardens and where participation in physical activity can contribute to improving poor health.
Need for economic diversification and more employment opportunities
4.4.15 The towns provide key hubs for employment, services and facilities for surrounding smaller settlements. Many parts of East Durham still have a large manufacturing sector and there are some areas, such as Seaham and Peterlee, where there is still a gap between local and regional productivity levels contributing to below average levels of household income. In addition, an over-reliance on a narrow employment base leaves these areas vulnerable to global market changes and an economic downturn. Since the global financial crisis of 2008 and subsequent UK recession, this has become increasingly evident with numbers of people claiming job seekers allowance rising significantly as the national economy shrank.
4.4.16 Some employment sites in parts of East Durham such as Seaham and Peterlee are experiencing high vacancy levels. Recent studies have shown that the commercial property market within this part of the County still remains characterised by market failure. The towns of Peterlee and Seaham are well located in relation to the A19 strategic corridors and, although there are some issues with junction capacities, they should still offer attractive locations for economic investment. East-west road links across this area of the County are less well developed, with poor linkages between the A19 and A1(M).
4.4.17 The majority of businesses in East Durham are classed as small with 10 or fewer employees. There has been a rise of 9.7% in the number of businesses in the area between 2005/07 and 2007/09, better than seen across the County and England & Wales. There has been a small increase of 1.6% in the number of people employed by businesses in the Area between 2005/2007 and 2007/2009.
4.4.18 There are high levels of unemployment in the East Durham area, largely following the pattern of related deprivation issues (health, crime, educational attainment) concentrated around the former mining settlements. About half of the East Durham area is in the top 5% of deprived wards nationally for employment. In East Durham there were also 3,652 people claiming Job Seekers Allowance (JSA) in June 2012 (ONS). This is equivalent to 6.1% of the working age population (aged 16 to 64). A higher proportion of the working age population were claiming JSA over the last 3 years than in the County, region or England & Wales. East Durham has seen a 20.0% rise in the number of people claiming JSA, compared to the 5.0% rise in the County and 8.3% rise in the region since July 2009.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 113 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.4.19 A higher proportion of the population in East Durham are claiming across all key benefits than in the county, region and England & Wales based on data from 2011.This includes significantly higher incapacity benefits and Disability Allowance claimant rates of 9.6% and 10.6% respectively compared to County rates of 6.5% and 7.9%. However, the Area has seen a small decrease of 0.5% in the proportion of the working age population claiming out of work benefits in 2011 since 2009 compared to the rise experienced by the county, region and England & Wales.
Educational attainment
4.4.20 Key Stage 2 achievement levels for pupils attending primary schools in East Durham were lower than the county and England except for pupils achieving English L4+, which was similar to the county figure but lower than England averages. A high proportion of pupils attending primary schools in the Area were eligible for free school meals (27%) than in the County (23%) or England (19%).
4.4.21 For secondary school children, a higher proportion of pupils in East Durham had special educational needs or were on School Action Plus (16.1%) compared to the county (12.6%) and England (8.5%). A higher proportion was also eligible for free school meals (26.3% verses 20.6% for the county and 15.9% for England). The percentage achieving 5+ A*-C grades including English and Maths was 54.7%, lower than the County (60.2%) and England (58.7%).
4.4.22 Total absences from schools in the Area are slightly higher than the county, region and England. Absences from schools across the Area have fallen by 0.9% over the last 3 years which is more slowly than across the county, region and England. A higher proportion of all children in 2009 were deemed to be in poverty in East Durham (28.2%) than across the county (22.8%), region (24.5%) or England (21.3%).
4.4.23 The proportion of 16 to 18 year olds in East Durham who were not in education, employment or training is above the county level and has risen by 2.6% since April 2011. In line with other measures of deprivation, there are significant areas (about half the total area) of East Durham where over 40% of the working age population have no qualifications. Within this there are significant areas around Peterlee, Easington and Seaham, as well as some of the more rural parts inland where the level is over 50%.
Access to services
4.4.24 Public transport connections are generally good between main towns and the main conurbations of Tyne & Wear, Durham City and Teesside, meaning that these major service centres can be reached effectively from most areas.
4.4.25 Connections between main towns in the North Durham area and main towns in the East Durham area are not as good, requiring changes in Durham City or Sunderland. These issues mean that specific journeys for people without a car can be difficult, but in general a range of services can be reached fairly easily.
4.4.26 People living in smaller settlements away from the main towns are generally not as well-served by public transport, although most settlements have direct services to Durham City and / or one of the local main towns. Although commuting into the Tyne &
114 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Wear conurbation exists, the distances involved are still relatively short. However, the long term aim will be to achieve a balance between employment and housing in each town in East Durham and thereby reduce the need to commute, particularly by private car. In the interim commuting into the conurbation is likely to continue. In order to ensure that this is by sustainable means, improvements to public transport and other measures to encourage the use of public transport are required.
4.4.27 Access to services, transport jobs and leisure opportunities is not as significant an issue in East Durham as it is in West Durham, particularly in areas around the main towns. The East Durham area has a well-developed network of public rights of way associated with older agricultural villages and later mining settlements. Some areas of the Clay Plateau, which historically were less densely settled, are poorly accessed. Major recreational paths include the Haswell to Hart and Castle Eden walkways, both developed from abandoned railway lines, and the new coastal footpath.
Congestion
4.4.28 There are some hotspots of traffic congestion at key local junctions at peak times, and it will be important that new development in the area does not exacerbate problems at these points. A key hotspot is the A19 / B1320 junction, Peterlee.
Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation
4.4.29 There is a need to reduce greenhouse gas emissions across sectors (Domestic, Industrial, Transport, Agricultural). Whilst new development will be influenced by more stringent Building Regulation standards on energy efficiency, the energy efficiency of existing buildings remains a significant issue. Average domestic energy consumption in East Durham was similar to the county, region and England & Wales. A higher proportion of assessed households in the area have a lower energy efficiency (10.3%) rating than in the county (4.9%). The proportion of households assessed in East Durham having a high energy efficiency rating is similar to the county as a whole.
4.4.30 There is a need to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the need to travel and increasing the use of sustainable transport modes. Building sustainable communities focused around meeting local needs locally – particularly concentrating on the main towns should help to reduce the need to travel overall. Combining this with improved public transport services and sustainable transport networks would give people broader choice in their travel decisions. The provision of services by ICT also supports a reduced need to travel and can make a great deal of difference to the level of accessibility to services – particularly in remote rural areas.
4.4.31 There are only 10 operational wind turbines in the area, with the majority in the North (South Sharpley) and the West (Haswell), with an operational capacity of 15MW. Constraints mean that further large scale developments are unlikely in the east. However, smaller farm-scale turbines may be acceptable in some areas.
4.4.32 In East Durham, areas of deciduous woodlands are less frequent in the landscape, mainly occurring in the denes extending inland from the coast are the main locations, along with valleys and slopes at the edges of the limestone escarpment. The County
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 115 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Durham Landscape Strategy identifies large areas of East Durham area that would benefit from additional native woodland planting to enhance the landscape as well as to contribute to increased carbon absorption and improved habitat networks. The County Council is investigating the potential to grow short rotation coppice as an energy fuel on appropriate areas of reclamation land in its ownership.
4.4.33 In common with all areas, the East Durham area will have to implement adaptations to climate change, and planning needs to be aware of the key issues. The results of the Strategic Flood Risk Assessment will be key to this. Changes in winter rainfall, extreme rainfall events, mean sea levels and surges will place increasing pressure on existing flood and sea defences, and cause more frequent flooding. The standard of service provided by existing defence structures, where present, will reduce over time. The East Durham coast is particularly vulnerable to the effects of flooding and rising sea levels, being as it is composed of soft limestone cliffs which erode very easily. Without improved defences, the cliffs will be eroded back from their present position at an increasing rate, causing loss of the habitat behind which includes sand dunes as well as rare magnesian limestone grassland of international importance to biodiversity. The loss of land area compounds competition between different land use interests in the coastal zone.
Diversity in landscape and unique sense of place
4.4.34 Currently four Conservation Areas have been designated. They include the collection of farmsteads and cottages at Hawthorn; the ancient church and older buildings arranged around the expanse of village green at Easington; the scattering of development across the parkland landscape created by the Burdon family at Castle Eden and the Seaham Harbour Conservation Area focused on the buildings, Victorian Terraces and the 'seaside' green.
4.4.35 The East Durham Area is classified as the East Durham Limestone Escarpment. Significant areas of land along the Coast and on the limestone escarpment of East Durham are designated as Areas of High Landscape Value in Local Plans. The strategy for this area is
"to enhance the landscape where it has been most affected by mining, quarrying and industrial development while conserving and restoring those local landscapes which contribute most to its quality and distinctiveness – the coast, the limestone denes, the escarpment spurs and vales and the older meadows and pastures of the plateau. A key component of the strategy for this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages."
4.4.36 The built environment of some former mining settlements is of a poor quality and some have run down commercial centres. Settlement edges are abrupt or poorly defined and fringed with allotments, pony paddocks and industrial land. The dereliction left by the coal mining and associated industries has been largely reclaimed although some small areas remain. Reclaimed land is often of poor agricultural quality and lacking in mature landscape features. Opencast coal extraction affects large areas of land, and historically
116 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
has been responsible for the loss or deterioration of many landscape features in East Durham. In light of this history, the recent renewed commercial interest in opencast coal extraction demands planning to take a carefully considered approach towards landscape conservation and enhancement.
4.4.37 In the eastern part of the County there are significant areas of largely undeveloped coastline and sandy beaches. The quality of the coastal environment was greatly improved through the ‘Turning the Tide’ Millennium programme. The programme culminated in the national recognition of the area as a Heritage Coast for its scenic value and underlies the creation of a tourist industry within this part of the County.
4.4.38 The condition of National Character Areas at Durham Magnesian Limestone Plateau trend is one of improvement with 500 ha of land recovering but still in unfavourable status. If development is permitted in areas that could impact detrimentally upon the NCA, it could reverse the current positive trend.
Richness of the historic environment
4.4.39 The East Durham area contains archaeological remains from the Neolithic period onwards, many of which are recorded in the Durham Sites and Monuments Record (SMR). Features from most periods are concentrated along the coast and the limestone escarpment. Scheduled Monuments include a large number of deserted medieval settlements.
4.4.40 Some of the older settlements of the East Durham plateau are designated as Conservation Areas. The landscape is not particularly rich in listed buildings but contains a wide variety, from mediaeval park walls to colliery buildings. There are a small number of relic historic parks and gardens. Parkland at Castle Eden is included on English Heritage’s Register of Parks and Gardens of Special Historic Interest as is small modern urban parkland in Peterlee new town.
4.4.41 In East Durham, an increase in the extent of arable cropping has led to a loss of old pastures and meadows, along with hedgerows, hedgerow trees, field ponds, rigg and furrow and other archaeological features. Parts of the landscape have become very open with large fields and few mature features. There are a small number of relic ornamental parklands on the Limestone Plateau. Surviving features like parkland trees are in progressive decline and are likely to disappear without positive management and some degree of restoration.
Richness of ecological and geological assets
4.4.42 In East Durham, most of the coast and coastal margin along with Castle Eden Dene National Nature Reserve is designated as a Special Area of Conservation (SAC) under the European Habitats Directive. Some of the Durham Coast is also included in the Northumbria Coast Special Protection Area (SPA) and Teesmouth and Cleveland Coast SPA designation for its importance to bird species populations of European importance. The area contains a relatively large number of Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) including magnesian limestone grasslands, abandoned limestone quarries and ancient
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 117 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
ash and yew woodlands. A large number of similar habitats are designated as Local Wildlife Sites – many of them disturbed sites of old quarries and mine workings, railway lines and clay pits.
4.4.43 There are a number of Geological / Geomorphological Sites of Special Scientific Interest and Local Geological / Geormorphological Sites in East Durham. These include natural and man-made exposures of the limestones and sands on the coast and in quarries, road and railway cuttings, together with glacial features including kames and melt-water channels.
4.4.44 In East Durham, semi natural habitats occupy a relatively small proportion of the area. The majority of grasslands are improved with scattered patches of magnesian limestone grassland associated with limestone outcrops or old quarries. There is a more continuous, though often very narrow, corridor of semi-natural grassland along the coast. The woodland network is heavily fragmented with woods largely confined to incised coastal denes, which are isolated from each other, and occasional steep slopes on the escarpment. Notable ancient ash, or ancient ash and yew woods occur in some of these places. Many woods have been re-stocked, which can affect their network value for some species – as can their generally small scale.
4.4.45 Early successional brownfield land occurs in both isolated pockets and in linear corridors following former railways. Wetland habitats occur generally as small and isolated features. The poor condition of some wetlands – notably stocking with fish – affects their network value for some species. The overall pattern of habitat distribution closely reflects the topography, with most semi-natural habitats found along incised denes, coastal slopes and escarpment spurs, separated by extensive areas of intensive farmland or built development.
4.4.46 Flower –rich limestone or neutral pastures and meadows have declined with agricultural improvement, or the encroachment of scrub. Old grasslands are now rare and survive only as isolated fragments. Some of the species found there are now genetically isolated.
4.4.47 An increase in the extent and intensity of arable cropping has led to a loss of old pastures and meadows, along with hedgerows, hedgerow trees, field ponds, rigg and furrow and other archaeological features. The hedgerow network that remains is heavily fragmented in places and continues to decline through removal or neglect. In arable areas hedges tend to be cut frequently and low, reducing their landscape and wildlife value.
4.4.48 The area is very sparse of woodland, with ancient semi-natural woods occurring only in denes and on occasional steep slopes. These areas of woodland vary in condition. Dutch Elm disease has altered the structure of many woods, with sycamore often replacing elm in the canopy. Some have been modified by the planting of exotics and a number were felled and replanted with conifers.
118 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.4.49 In relation to European Protected Sites, The coastal overwintering bird studies undertaken to date in support of the HRA of the County Durham Plan indicate that away from one or two particular sites, the Durham Coast does not hold large wading bird populations and indications are that the Durham coast could fail to meet the national thresholds for designated species or indeed any other species.
4.4.50 The study surmised that the major factors that could account for the low number of birds and poor distribution are:
Poor quality habitat as a result of historical degradation and pollution due to previous industrial output, particularly the deposition of coal spoils on the intertidal areas. High levels of human disturbance through increased recreation usage. Changes in populations and distribution of birds due to climate change.
4.4.51 As the habitat of Durham Coast SAC is generally located on steep slopes or dangerous cliff edges, the vegetated sea cliff features, though highly susceptible to trampling, are by their position relatively safe. There are some localities where the sea cliff plant community is adjacent to or even on the inland side of the coast path, such as Blackhills Gill, Horden, Beacon Point and Noses Point, but here there is a surfaced footpath that directs and in most parts, confines walkers to the route. There are however many other desire lines and footpaths, some linking back to the main towns along the coast, especially evident at Crimdon, Blackhall Colliery and Castle Eden Dene. Consequently, there is heavy and sustained walking pressure, especially along the coast path.
4.4.52 In addition to impacts associated with trampling, low nutrient sites, typical of many semi-natural habitats including limestone grassland, are especially susceptible to the addition of fertiliser. Sources include atmospheric deposition (mainly nitrogen and ammonia), agricultural run off or dog faeces and urine (phosphorus and nitrogen). The visitor surveys undertaken to support the HRA of the County Durham Plan indicate that dog walking is the main activity undertaken at the coast and the overwintering bird surveys confirmed extensive use of the coast by dog walkers.
4.4.53 In relation to trends, the pressures that currently exist and associated low number of birds are likely to continue without intervention to improve existing habitat and protect habitat and species from recreational disturbance, trampling and enrichment. Both the Northumbria Coast SPA and Durham Coast SAC 2015 data shows a slight decline in condition since 2013. However, the condition status of the component SSSI's currently exceeds Government targets.
4.4.54 Castle Eden Dene SAC is managed as a national nature reserve and existing management procedures and the nature of the SAC itself in limiting off-track activities helps to protect the site and associated habitat (ancient Yew woodland) from the impacts of recreational pressure. However, critical thresholds of air pollutants (from a variety of sources) such as nitrogen and acid deposition are currently being exceeded. The impacts of which can affect soil processes, tree vitality and changes in ground flora. As Castle Eden Dene SAC is directly adjacent to the A19 and affected by emissions from regional traffic, air quality issues are likely to continue. The 2015 data shows no change in condition since 2013 and the majority (93%) of the SAC is in unfavourable recovering condition.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 119 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.4.55 The Teesmouth and Cleveland Coast SPA 2015 data shows a decline in the condition of component SSSI's since 2013 with a 4% increase in the proportion declining and a 5% decrease in units considered to be favourable. There is potential for further decline to occur as a result of, for example, recreational pressure.
Water Quality
4.4.56 The limestone of the East Durham plateau is a principal aquifer providing drinking water for communities in East Durham and Sunderland to the north. Much of the area is designated as a Source Protection Zone. Water quality in most of the watercourses is poor as a result of discharges from mine workings, sewage treatment works, storm sewage overflows, and surface water drainage from industrial and agricultural activities. Parts of the area are designated as a Nitrate Vulnerable Zone.
Land Quality
4.4.57 There are pockets of contaminated land left from coal mine spoil areas and industrial activities. Information was gathered by the former district councils to develop “Contaminated Land Registers” containing lists of sites of potential concern where the current use or history of the site suggests that contamination might be present. This responsibility now falls to the County Council. According to the district council information, there were 358 “sites of potential concern” in the Easington area.
4.4.58 There is a need to ensure sites are safe for any proposed after-use, and also to guard against the leaching of contaminants to other areas, particularly in the light of increased episodes of intense rainfall which are expected as a result of climate change. Agricultural land in East Durham is for the most part Grade 3a (good) and 3b (moderate) with small pockets of Grade 2 (very good).
Air Quality
4.4.59 There are no Air Quality Management Areas in East Durham. The A19 trunk road traverses the area and air quality in the proximity of this roads is likely to be worse than elsewhere. In addition, there are local hotspots of traffic congestion at peak times in and around some of the main towns. The deterioration of air quality at these points at peak times is not sufficient to justify the declaration of Air Quality Management Areas at the moment, but any future development should be planned so as to maintain the good air quality and relatively freely-flowing traffic which is enjoyed in the area.
Waste
4.4.60 Household waste recovery and recycling rate is lower than the national and regional averages. There is a need to move away from landfill in order to increase the rate. The council has refined collection systems in order to improve the situation. New waste management facilities will be needed to deal with the County’s waste in an appropriate way that achieves progress towards recycling and recovery targets. Some landfill activity may still be needed to deal with residual waste left after recycling / recovery / other processes have been utilised.
120 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.4.61 In East Durham, there is one operational landfill at Crime Rigg quarry on the western extremity of the area, near to Durham City. This site only takes inert waste. The major aquifer in the East Durham area is highly sensitive to the liquid pollution which can leach from landfill sites taking biodegradable or other potentially hazardous waste, and is protected by a Source Protection Zone which makes it a highly unsuitable area for locating this type of landfill facility.
4.4.62 There are a number of civic amenity sites across East Durham associated with the towns of Seaham and Peterlee. There are also waste transfer stations near Peterlee (at Thornley). The dispersed settlement pattern of the area, along with the increasing need to transport waste to different facilities for recycling, disposal etc, means that the transport of waste is an important issue to consider in assessing impacts on communities and on carbon dioxide / greenhouse gas emissions.
Minerals
4.4.63 Mineral extraction has been very important to the development of this part of the County. Many of the settlements in this area were originally formed in the 19th century around collieries, now all closed, creating a scattered, semi-rural settlement pattern. In East Durham the coal measures area overlain with magnesian limestone, making opencasting for coal unviable, but providing another economic mineral resource. The magnesian limestone is worked at various sites at the western edge of the area near the border with Durham City and its locality, as well as sites in the South Durham area.
4.4.64 The area has also been an important source of clay and other brick making raw materials, the fireclays of the Durham Coalfield being recognised as an important source of fireclay for use in local brick factories and elsewhere. Although production of fireclay is now dependent on the level of opencast activity, which has declined in recent years with a resultant decline in fireclay availability. Sand and gravel has been worked in this area in the past, in particular from along the River Wear. Glacial deposits of sand & gravel have also been worked elsewhere, although no sand and gravel is currently extracted anywhere from this area.
In addition, there are parts of East Durham which have the potential to be significantly affected by minerals development, depending on the policies developed and set out in the County Durham Plan. This mainly applies to areas on the magnesian limestone adjacent to the Central Durham Area which historically has been exploited for the limestone resource it contains.
East Durham: Environmental Characteristics of Particular Relevance
Existence of Durham Coast Special Area of Conservation (SAC) Existence of Castle Eden Dene Special Area of Conservation (SAC) / National Nature Reserve Existence of Northumbria Coast Special Protection Area (SPA) Existence of Teesmouth and Cleveland Coast Special Protection Area (SPA) Existence of Horden Dene Local Wildlife Site (with ancient woodland)
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 121 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Existence of Horden Grasslands Local Nature Reserve and other areas of magnesian limestone grassland Existence of coastal Local Nature Reserves National Heritage Coast listing for scenic qualities of the Durham Coast included Sites of geological / geomorphological importance A conservation area at Easington Village and a number of listed buildings Large numbers of archaeological sites and monuments and a scheduled monument (relic mediaeval village of Yoden) Potential for currently unknown historic environmental assets Traffic growth and congestion at some junctions on the A19 at peak times (in particular the A19 / B1320 junction) Existence of the East Durham Limestone Aquifer and associated Source Protection Zones Poorly designed and / or degraded nature of some urban environments, notably Peterlee town centre. Poor quality of the urban fringe environment around settlements Flood risk and likely increase in intense rainfall events. Coastal erosion
Consultation Question 8
Have we correctly identified the environmental characteristics of the East Durham Area? If not, what is incorrect and what have we missed?
4.5 South Durham Area
High levels of deprivation
4.5.1 The former Durham coalfield areas face unique economic challenges. Many settlements built up around the coal mines and were historically reliant on the coal mining industry for their employment. The South Durham area along with North and East Durham covers the vast majority of the Durham coalfield. Although South Durham has experienced fundamental restructuring over the last 20 to 30 years, parts of it continue to suffer from problems of severe economic decline. Substantial parts of the area are in need of improvement and major investment.
4.5.2 Deprivation is a major issue throughout a large part of the South Durham Area, as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD). In the area of Bishop Auckland and Shildon, around a third of the population live in the top 10% of deprived areas nationally, and around 70% live in the top 30% of deprived areas; in the area of Ferryhill and Chilton, around 9% live in the top 10% of deprived areas and around 63% in the top 30%; in the area of Newton Aycliffe, 11% live in the top 10% of deprived areas and 42% in the top
122 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
30%; in the area of East Durham Rural Corridor, none of the population live in the top 10% of deprived areas and 41% live in the top 30%; in the area of Spennymoor, 8% live in the top 10% of deprived areas and 39% live in the top 30%.
4.5.3 It is the same parts of the County (largely within the North / East and South Durham areas) that suffer from major problems of economic inactivity/ joblessness, health related issues and also poor levels of educational attainment and skills. These different factors combine to give the high overall IMD scores
4.5.4 In South Durham, the towns in the regeneration areas, Newton Aycliffe, Spennymoor, Shildon, Bishop Auckland, provide important local facilities, services and employment. It is important that the function and vitality of these towns are supported, so that they can continue to meet the local shopping, recreational and community needs of the communities which they serve.
Degraded urban environment
4.5.5 The character of the towns and villages of South Durham varies considerably. Bishop Auckland has Roman and medieval origins with an attractive town centre and market place as well as important historical buildings such as the Bishop’s Palace. Shildon has a rich industrial history based on its past as centre for the railways. Newton Aycliffe was one of the original new towns first developed in the 1950s. Its town centre is a reflection of the architectural style of that time and is need of major redevelopment. Sedgefield is a small rural town of historic character and there are other more rural villages such as Bishop Middleham and Trimdon. Many other settlements are more typical former colliery towns and villages of various sizes, including Spennymoor, Ferryhill, Chilton and Fishburn.
4.5.6 In common with North and East Durham, the quality of the urban environment is poor in many neighbourhoods. There is an abundant supply of previously developed land and buildings within many neighbourhoods, towns and villages. Putting brownfield land and buildings back into productive use removes the negative effects of abandonment whilst reducing pressures on the countryside for more development.
4.5.7 In terms of public perception of where they live, a 2010 Area Action Partnership Residents’ Survey indicated that people in South Durham are as satisfied as or slightly more satisfied across the broad indicators than the rest of County Durham. Despite this, the area seems to perform slightly worse than the County average for feelings of safety and security in their local neighbourhood at night; although percentages were still better than national levels.
Poor quality housing and meeting housing needs
4.5.8 A lack of housing which residents can afford to buy or rent has negative implications for communities by contributing to excessive commuting and unsustainable travel, loss of workers from an area, overcrowded housing, high dependency and pressure on social housing and housing benefit, homelessness and associated health and well-being problems.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 123 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.5.9 The 2013 Strategic Housing Market Assessment Update assessed the supply of houses across South Durham as being sufficient to meet demand across all dwelling types. The 2013 SHMA assessed the Dales and South Durham together as part of its anticipated need for affordable housing and found an excess supply of 33 per year for 3+ affordable homes over 2013/14 to 2017/18 with a small excess supply of 1 per year for smaller properties. South Durham has the second lowest house prices in the County behind East Durham and below that of the County average.
4.5.10 The number of households in need can be defined as: ‘The quantity of housing required for households who are unable to access suitable housing without financial assistance’. The proportion of households in need is higher in South Durham (7.1%) than the County average (6.7%).
4.5.11 The 2012 Household Survey identified that around 2,709 households across County Durham were living in overcrowded conditions. Analysis was based on the number of bedrooms the household had access to, compared with the number required according to the Bedroom Standard Model. The proportion of households who were overcrowded averaged 1.2% across County Durham and was second highest in South Durham, where 1.4% of all households were overcrowded.
Ageing population
4.5.12 In line with all other parts of the County, the size of the retired population increased in every area in South Durham between 2005 and 2010. In some areas, there was a decrease in the size of the working age population over the same period. The result is that the dependency ratio has increased and this trend has important implications for the local economy and the delivery of services over coming years. There was variation in different parts of South Durham with the proportion of retired people growing faster than the County average in some areas and slower than the County average in others.
Poor levels of health and health inequalities across the County
4.5.13 Health levels, as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation health domain, vary widely across South Durham. There are two major areas where health levels are in the lowest 5% of wards nationally: in the western part of the area in and around Bishop Auckland, Coundon and Shildon; and in the eastern part in the settlements around and the Trimdons. Both Spennymoor and Newton Aycliffe also have small areas where health levels are acutely low (lowest 5% nationally), and Chilton and Ferryhill also standout as pockets in the most deprived bracket for health.
4.5.14 Areas adjacent to the above places tend to have only slightly higher health levels (lowest 10 – 5% nationally) e.g. Cornforth and other parts of Spennymoor, Bishop Auckland and Newton Aycliffe. The more health deprived areas mentioned are all settlements which were previously dependent on coal mining and they include the main centres of population in the South Durham area. There are large rural areas towards the middle and south of the area where health levels are relatively high.
124 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.5.15 Looking at the area as a whole, around three quarters of residents considered their health to be good or very good this proportion is just above the County average. However, obesity rates for adults are slightly above the County average in most areas of South Durham. Other indicators vary above and below county averages in different parts of the area. Generally, a higher proportion of the working age population in South Durham were claiming incapacity benefits in November 2011 than in the County, region and England & Wales averages.
Need for economic diversification and more employment opportunities
4.5.16 In South Durham, the towns in the Regeneration Areas, Newton Aycliffe, Spennymoor, Shildon, Bishop Auckland, provide important local facilities, services and employment. It is important that the function and vitality of these towns are supported so that they can continue to meet the local shopping, recreational and community needs. They also have links to the conurbation and main settlements where a broader range of facilities, services and employment opportunities are provided.
4.5.17 The South Durham area can contribute to the wider regeneration of the Tees Valley City-Region. Aycliffe Industrial Park is home to 250 companies employing 8,000 people in mainly manufacturing employment. There is a need to continue to develop this industrial park, and the adjoining employment site at Heighington Lane West, to help firms to retain their competitiveness. These two industrial sites represent a significant step in restructuring the economy following the closure of coal mines.
4.5.18 NetPark at Sedgefield aims to provide a regionally significant location for science and technology businesses, and to be a unique combination of University Research Centres, spin-out businesses and high tech companies with knowledge based business support.
4.5.19 The South Durham area has good transport connections with its proximity to the A1(M), A19 and the A167 and rail connections on the East Coast Main Line with stations at Newton Aycliffe and Bishop Auckland. The Bishop Auckland to Darlington railway line is an asset which requires investment. The line runs through a commercial corridor containing the main towns of Bishop Auckland, Shildon and Newton Aycliffe. It also provides a key gateway to the Durham Dales with potential for tourism growth and connections to the major Eastgate Renewable Energy Village in Weardale and Locomotion at Shildon.
4.5.20 Between 2005 and 2009 the number of businesses increased in all areas of South Durham but at a slower rate than the County average. Some areas, such as East Durham Rural, Spennymoor and Ferryhill and Chilton saw falls in the number of employees in businesses greater than the County average over the period. Across the area the percentage of the working age population claiming Job Seekers Allowance and other key benefits was generally greater than County average.
4.5.21 In common with the former mining settlements of North and East Durham, there are parts of the South Durham Area that have very high levels of unemployment, as measured by the IMD. Wards in and around Bishop Auckland in the west, Trimdons in the east, Spennymoor in the north and Newton Aycliffe in the South are in the top 5% of
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 125 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
deprived areas nationally for employment. Chilton also stands out as being in this bracket for unemployment. Significant areas adjacent to these are in the top 10 – 5% and 10 – 20% of deprived areas nationally for unemployment.
Educational attainment
4.5.22 There are areas around Bishop Auckland and Coundon in the west and Wheatley Hill and the Trimdons in the east where over 50% of the working age population have no qualifications. Areas around Spennymoor and at Ferryhill and Chilton also have a significant pockets of qualification deprivation. Adjacent to these areas and at Newton Aycliffe there are significant pockets where over 40% of the working age population have no qualifications and areas where between 30 and 40% have no qualifications.
4.5.23 Key Stage 2 achievement levels for pupils attending primary schools in South Durham were generally lower than or similar to the County and England except for pupils in East Rural Durham, who achieved higher rates than the County average. For secondary school children, a higher proportion of pupils in South Durham had special educational needs or where on School Action Plus compared to England. A higher proportion was eligible for free school meals than the County and nationally in all areas of South Durham apart from East Durham Rural.
4.5.24 The percentage of pupils achieving 5+ A*-C grades including English and Maths was lower than the County apart from East Durham Rural as well. The proportion of 16 to 18 year olds in South Durham who were not in education, employment or training is above the County level in all areas apart from East Durham Rural.
Access to services
4.5.25 The South Durham area has good north / south road connections with its proximity to the A1(M), A19 and the A167. It also has rail stations at Newton Aycliffe and Bishop Auckland which connect with the East Coast Main Line at Darlington. The Bishop Auckland to Darlington railway line is an asset which requires investment. The line runs through a commercial corridor containing the main towns of Bishop Auckland, Shildon and Newton Aycliffe. It also provides a key gateway to the Durham Dales with potential for tourism growth and connections to Weardale and Locomotion at Shildon.
4.5.26 In common with North and East Durham, bus connections are relatively good between the main towns and Durham City and / or major conurbations to the south – Darlington and Stockton. Bus journeys from Bishop Auckland and Spennymoor are much quicker to Durham than they are to Darlington. However, bus journeys from Newton Aycliffe take significantly longer to get to Durham than they do to get to Darlington. Bus journeys from Sedgefied take a comparable time to Durham or Darlington. Connections between settlements within the area are variable.
4.5.27 Access to services, transport jobs and leisure opportunities is not as significant an issue in South Durham area as it is in West Durham, particularly in areas around the main towns. However, there is a large rural area between Bowburn and Spennymoor,
126 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
including Sunderland Bridge, Hett and Croxdale, which is in the top 10 – 5% of deprived areas nationally under the IMD “barriers to housing and services” domain. It includes the conservation area around Croxdale Hall and contains a number of very small settlements.
4.5.28 The footpath network is variable in its coverage. In the northern part of the area, there is a pattern more consistent with East Durham, with generally good connections between settlements along historic routes and footpaths that linked to colliery and minerals sites. In the southern part of the area there are some local well-developed networks of paths associated with older villages but with poorly accessed tracts of land in between, particularly in the flat carr landscapes. There are few strategic recreational paths or long distance trails apart from National Cycle Network Route 1 which travels north / south along the Castle Eden Walkway from Peterlee to Stockton, and two routes north out of Bishop Auckland – the Bishop to Brandon Railway Path (which forms part of the National Byway) and the Auckland Way between Bishop Auckland and Spennymoor.
4.5.29 There are strong commuting patterns from the South Durham area into Darlington and the Tees Valley conurbation, as well as to Durham City. The Newton Aycliffe and Heighington Lane industrial estates are also key journey attractors, and Netpark at Sedgefield will be further developed into a major employment site. The long term aim will be to achieve a balance between employment and housing in the main towns of South Durham and thereby reduce the need to commute, particularly by private car. In the interim commuting into the conurbation is likely to continue. In order to ensure that this is by sustainable means, improvements to public transport and other measures to encourage the use of public transport are required.
Congestion
4.5.30 There are some hotspots of traffic congestion at key local junctions at peak times, and it will be important that new development in the area does not exacerbate problems at these points, however recent investment in capacity improvements at Rushyford and Thinford roundabouts on the A167 have addressed have addressed previous concerns in the area.
4.5.31 The bulk of congestion in County Durham remains on the routes in and out of Durham City at peak times. This can be an issue for people travelling in and out of Durham City.
Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation
4.5.32 There is a need to increase the production of electricity and heat from renewable sources – thereby reducing the reliance of fossil fuels for these purposes and reducing carbon dioxide emissions. There is also a need to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the need to travel and increasing the use of sustainable transport modes. Building sustainable communities focused around meeting local needs locally – particularly concentrating on the main towns should help to reduce the need to travel overall.
4.5.33 The area has 33 operational wind turbines, delivering 48MW of operational energy with the most in the east of the area around Butterwick Moor on the Tees Plain. There are also operational turbines in the North West near to Tow law. The South also has the
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 127 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Dalkia Biomass facility at Chilton producing 17MW of electrical energy for the grid and an Anaerobic Digestion plant at Newton Aycliffe Industrial Estate, which is supplying heat to business premises from waste food.
4.5.34 There is very little ancient woodland in the South Durham area and woodland cover in general is particularly sparse. There area areas, in particular in the north and west of the area around the main towns which the County Durham Landscape Strategy identifies would particularly benefit from the additional planting of native woodland, as well as along the main transport corridors through the area.
4.5.35 In common with all areas, the South Durham area will have to implement adaptations to climate change, and planning needs to be aware of the key issues. Flood incidents have been experienced at Bishop Auckland and Witton le Wear in 2003 and at Bishop Auckland after intense rainfall in 2009 when the storm drainage system could not cope with the volume of run off from built areas. There are also areas around Trimdon Colliery in the east of the area, and Mordon near Newton Aycliffe that the Environment Agency identifies as being at particular risk of flooding. The SFRA suggests that development at Woodham Burn, Newton Aycliffe and Demon’s Beck at Aycliffe Village may be constrained due to flood risk.
Diversity in landscape and unique sense of place
4.5.36 County Durham contains a diversity in landscape character and local distinctiveness which needs to be taken into account in decisions and guidance on the location and design of development. The County Durham Landscape Strategy identifies two main landscape character areas which occur in the South Durham Area. The bulk of the area is covered by the Tees Lowlands, and the strategy for that is
"to conserve the existing rural character of the landscape while enhancing those areas affected most by urban and industrial development and agricultural intensification."
4.5.37 Areas in the north and west fall into the West Durham Coalfield landscape character area. The strategy for this is
"to enhance the landscape where it has been degraded by mining or development while conserving what is most distinctive and valued about its character, including its rural identity, its upland fringe qualities and its strong cultural associations with the coal and steel industries. A key component of the strategy for this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages."
4.5.38 Some of the east of the area falls into East Durham Limestone Escarpment landscape character area .The strategy for this area is
128 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
"to enhance the landscape where it has been most affected by mining, quarrying and industrial development while conserving and restoring those local landscapes which contribute most to its quality and distinctiveness – the coast, the limestone denes, the escarpment spurs and vales and the older meadows and pastures of the plateau. A key component of the strategy for this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages."
4.5.39 Bishop Auckland is particularly important to the history of County Durham, and has a unique character because of its historic connections and built environment. A key issue is how development might take place to improve local quality of life, without undermining the special qualities which make the place unique and interesting. Tracts of the Wear Valley north of Bishop Auckland and Spennymoor are designated as Areas of High Landscape Value in Local Plans, along with a section of the limestone escarpment that extends into the South Durham area from the east.
4.5.40 The built environment of some former mining settlements is of a poor quality and some have run down commercial centres. Settlement edges are abrupt or poorly defined and fringed with allotments, pony paddocks and industrial land. The dereliction left by the coal mining and associated industries has been largely reclaimed although some small areas remain. Reclaimed land is often of poor agricultural quality and lacking in mature landscape features.
4.5.41 The trend for the National Character Area Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe, which partly covers South Durham, is one of improvement with only 1 ha in decline and 317 ha in unfavourable recovering status. The trend for the National Character Area Tyne and Wear Lowlands, which also partly covers South Durham, is one of significant improvement with no areas declining but with the majority of areas recovering. The National Character Area Tees Lowlands trend is one of improvement but there are still 77 ha of land in decline. If development is permitted in areas that could impact detrimentally upon the NCAs, it could reverse the current positive trends seen across most of the Area.
Richness of the historic environment
4.5.42 The landscape contains archaeological remains from the Neolithic period onwards, many of which are recorded in the Durham Sites and Monuments Record (SMR). There are particularly strong concentrations around the historic settlements of Sedgefield and Bishop Auckland. A number of these monuments are designated as Scheduled Monuments – mostly mediaeval features ranging from deserted villages to bridges and manorial settlements, but also include Binchester Roman Fort at Bishop Auckland.
4.5.43 A number of the older villages in the area are designated as Conservation Areas, and also parts of Bishop Auckland. The Windlestone Hall estate, the Hardwick Hall estate and the parklands around Auckland Castle are all on the Historic England Register of Parks and Gardens of Special Historic Interest and the first two have also been given Conservation Area Status.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 129 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.5.44 In total there are1686 archaeological sites and monuments, 13 scheduled monuments, 391 listed buildings, 24 conservation areas and 6 historic parks and gardens (including three listed by Historic England as being of historical importance.
4.5.45 An increase in the extent and intensity of arable cropping has led to a loss of old pastures and meadows, hedgerows, hedgerow trees, field ponds, rigg and furrow and other archaeological features. Parts of the landscape in the south of the area have become very open and featureless. The enlargement and amalgamation of arable fields has lead to heavy fragmentation of the hedgerow network in places.
4.5.46 Hedgerows tend to be cut frequently and low, reducing their vigour as well as their wildlife and landscape value. Hedgerow trees are particularly important features, helping to articulate space in the open, often relatively flat landscapes in the south. Many are senescent or suffering from the effects of close cultivation, and there are low levels of recruitment of young trees to replace those that die. Successive drainage schemes in the Carr landscapes have lowered water tables and the area of wetland and wet pasture has been significantly reduced.
4.5.47 Some historic parklands survive only as relics, others are positively managed. Surviving features like water bodies and veteran trees in relic parklands are in progressive decline and likely to disappear without intervention and some degree of restoration.
Table 13 Heritage at Risk: South Durham
Heritage Asset Condition Reason
Remains of Stockton and Scheduled Monument Some sections slowly deteriorating such as Darlington Railway, Etherley Gaunless Bridge abutments, or overgrown, Very bad such as the cutting with stone revetment between North Leazes and St. Helen’s Auckland
West Mural Tower at Auckland Listed Building Grade I Requires urgent remediation work as there Castle is immediate risk of loss of historic fabric Very Bad
Clock Tower, Windlestone Listed Building Grade II* Stonework repairs needed. Clock face has Hall, near Coundon been stolen Poor
Windlestone Hall, near Listed Building Grade II* Lack of maintenance with some internal Coundon water ingress Poor
Richness of ecological and geological assets
4.5.48 There is one internationally designated nature conservation site in the South Durham Area – Thrislington Plantation Special Area of Conservation (SAC) just to the west of Ferryhill next to the A1. It is also a National Nature Reserve. Thrislington falls into the northern part of the area (on the limestone escarpment), which also contains a number
130 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
of nationally designated Sites of Special Scientific Interest including magnesian limestone grasslands and abandoned limestone quarries. There are also two small wetland SSSIs at Pike Whin Bog and Railway Stell West. A number of Local Wildlife Sites have been designated in the area, many on disturbed sites of old quarries and mine workings, railway lines, road verges, clay pits, as well as small areas of woodland and wetland.
Habitats
Table 14
Ancient semi natural woodland Wood pasture Lowland heath
Other broadleaved woodland Floodplain grazing marsh Lowland meadows and pasture
Native hedgerows Lowland fen habitats Road verges of conservation importance
Parkland Pragmites australis reedbed Waxcap grasslands
Veteran trees Rivers and streams Wet woodland
Scrub Ponds Early successional brownfield land
Magnesian limestone grassland CG8 Grassland
Species
Table 15
Badger House sparrow Starling Salmon
Bats Lapwing Tree sparrow Trout
Brown hare Linnet Yellow wagtail Dingy skipper
Harvest mouse Redshank Adder Green haristreak
Hedgehog Reed bunting Common lizard White-letter hairstreak
Otter Skylark Grass snake Black poplar
Water vole Snipe Slow worm Juniper
Barn owl Song thrush Great crested newt Curlew
Spotted fly-catcher Eel Small pearl bordered Pale bristle moss fritillary
Redshank Nightjar Cistus forester (moth) Chalk carpet moth
Grayling Glow worm Northern brown argus Dark green fritillary
Least minor (moth) Common lizard Sanderling Corn bunting
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 131 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.5.49 The South Durham area is sparsely distributed with areas of Semi Natural Ancient Woodland, with the most significant areas being found in denes and valleys of the river Wear system north of Bishop Auckland. A few other smaller areas are found in steep sided denes further east. There is a single example of wet woodland – Carr Wood, near Bishop Middleham.
4.5.50 There are a number of Geological / Geomorphological Sites of Special Scientific Interest and Local Geological / Geormorphological Sites in South Durham associated with the limestone escarpment. These are mainly focused on natural and man-made exposures of the limestones in quarries, road and railway cuttings.
4.5.51 In South Durham, the Railway Stell West SSSI near Newton Aycliffe is in a condition of “Unfavourable – Recovering”. The Bottoms SSSI near Thornley is in a condition of “Unfavourable – No Change” due to inappropriate scrub control and inappropriate weed control. Thrislington SAC is currently in favourable condition and it is likely that the stable conditions will persist owing to management of the site as a National Nature Reserve.
4.5.52 Semi-natural habitats occupy a very small proportion of South Durham. The majority of grasslands are improved with scattered patches of semi-improved or wet pasture and magnesian limestone grassland associated with limestone outcrops and old quarries. The woodland network is heavily fragmented with woods largely confined to heavily wooded, but isolated, estate landscapes and on occasional steep slopes of the limestone escarpment. Many woods are plantations or have been re-stocked which affects their network value for some species – as does their generally small scale. Wetland habitats occur as small isolated features with some concentration on the flat Carrs of the Skerne and the Langley Beck. The overall pattern of habitat distribution is ‘patchy’ with localised pockets of semi-natural habitats separated by extensive areas of intensive farmland or built development.
4.5.53 An increase in the extent and intensity of arable cropping has led to a loss of old pastures and meadows, hedgerows, hedgerow trees, field ponds, rigg and furrow and other archaeological features. Parts of the landscape in the south of the area have become very open and featureless. The enlargement and amalgamation of arable fields has lead to heavy fragmentation of the hedgerow network in places.
4.5.54 Hedgerows tend to be cut frequently and low, reducing their vigour as well as their wildlife and landscape value. Hedgerow trees are particularly important features, helping to articulate space in the open, often relatively flat landscapes in the south. Many are senescent or suffering from the effects of close cultivation, and there are low levels of recruitment of young trees to replace those that die.
4.5.55 Successive drainage schemes in the Carr landscapes have lowered water tables and the area of wetland and wet pasture has been significantly reduced.
Water Quality
4.5.56 Water quality in the River Wear and many of its tributaries is good. In some tributaries it is only fair, poor or locally bad as a result of discharges from mine workings, sewage treatment works, storm sewage overflows and surface water drainage from
132 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
industrial and agricultural activities. In the River Skerne, water quality is only fair or poor as a result of low flows and discharges from treatment works, storm sewage overflows and surface water drainage from industrial and agricultural activities. Most of the South Durham area, apart from the extreme west, is a Nitrate Vulnerable Zone, and numerous Source Protection Zones also extends significantly into the area across the Magnesian Limestone aquifer
Land Quality
4.5.57 There are pockets of contaminated land left from coal mine spoil areas and industrial activities. Information was gathered by the former district councils to develop “Contaminated Land Registers” containing lists of sites of potential concern where the current use or history of the site suggests that contamination might be present and in a quantity and or location which is cause for concern. This responsibility now falls to the County Council.
4.5.58 According to council information, there were 3079 “sites of potential concern” in the former district areas of Sedgefield (which covers most of the South Durham area) and 532 in the Wear Valley, which covers only a small part of the South Durham area).
4.5.59 There is a need to ensure sites are safe for any proposed after-use, and also to guard against the leaching of contaminants to other areas, particularly in the light of increased episodes of intense rainfall which are expected as a result of climate change. Sedgefield has a very high number of identified sites compared to other districts.
4.5.60 The vast majority of the agricultural land in South Durham is Grade 3a (good) or 3b (moderate). There are some areas of Grade 4 (poor) on the flat, poorly drained land of the Skerne Carrs.
Air Quality
4.5.61 There are no Air Quality Management Areas in the South Durham area. The A1 and A19 trunk roads both traverse the area (although the A19 only partially), and air quality in the proximity of these roads is likely to be worse than elsewhere. In addition, there are local hotspots of traffic congestion at peak times in and around some of the main towns. The deterioration of air quality at these points at peak times is not sufficient to justify the declaration of Air Quality Management Areas at the moment, but any future development should be planned so as to maintain the good air quality and relatively freely-flowing traffic which is enjoyed in the area.
Waste
4.5.62 The amount of waste landfilled has significantly reduced since 2009 across the County, with the amount also going to Energy from Waste, as opposed to landfill, increasing to 98% of all municipal waste. In South Durham, there are operational landfill sites at: Old Quarrington, Aycliffe Quarry and Bishop Middleham Quarry, taking only inert construction and demolition waste.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 133 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.5.63 There are civic amenity sites situated near to the main towns of Bishop Auckland, Spennymoor and Newton Aycliffe. There are also waste transfer stations near to the main towns and the landfill sites in the area. The dispersed settlement pattern of the area, along with the increasing need to transport waste to different facilities for recycling, disposal etc, means that the transport of waste is an important issue to consider in assessing impacts on communities and on carbon dioxide/ greenhouse gas emissions.
Minerals
4.5.64 The north eastern part of the South Durham area is on the magnesian limestone escarpment and has been worked for magnesian limestone at various places upon the escarpment.
4.5.65 Magnesian limestone varies in nature and quality in different locations. The “Raisby Formation” of magnesian limestone at Thrislington is noted by the British Geological Survey as being “ a major source of high grade dolomite for steel making”. As such it has a high value and is of national importance as a resource.
4.5.66 To the west, places in the exposed coalfield south and west of Spennymoor have been worked for opencast coal and fireclay, in common with other areas of the coalfield. There is also a similar history in relation to deep coal mining and the evolution of settlements in this part of the area. Brick Shale is extracted at Eldon near Bishop Auckland to supply the brick-making plant there. A significant extension to the quarry at Eldon has been permitted in order to assist the long-term security of the plant. In addition to the 2,330,000 tonnes of brick making materials, 55,000 tonnes of coal will also be extracted as a secondary product.
4.5.67 Historically, the southern part of the area has not been important for mineral working. The Tees Lowlands are formed by thick layers of drift deposits which overlay the magnesian limestone in many places. The only active quarry within the southern part is at Aycliffe, extracting magnesian limestone, although in the past several sites within this area have been worked for sand and gravel.
4.5.68 Due to the location and value of the magnesian limestone in the area, it tends to be the same areas that have been affected by minerals extraction and transport from sites over the years. Transport impacts of heavy goods vehicles can be significant on the narrow rural roads The issue of cumulative impact, is therefore one to be considered when considering policies concerning new minerals extraction.
South Durham: Environmental Characteristics of Particular Relevance
Large number of archaeological sites and monuments, particularly in the Bishop Auckland area, but also in the Spennymoor area. Implications for development sites and currently unknown historic environmental assets. Potential to harness conservation measures for Listed Buildings at Risk. Some listed buildings, particularly in the Bishop Auckland area Poorly designed and / or degraded town centres (e.g. Spennymoor and Newton Aycliffe)
134 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Poor quality of the urban fringe environment Loss of landscape features and quality through mining, quarrying and agricultural intensification Existence of Thrislington Special Area of Conservation Significant area covered by Rosa Shafto and Cow Plantation Local Wildlife Sites in the area of Spennymoor. Contains significant area of ancient woodland. Existence of The Moor Local Nature Reserve near Newton Aycliffe Flood risk in river valleys and from run-off (e.g. in Bishop Auckland) Traffic growth and congestion at peak times at the Thinford roundabout on the A167 from traffic travelling east-west / west-east
Consultation Question 9
Have we correctly identified the environmental characteristics of the South Durham Area? If not, what is incorrect and what have we missed?
4.6 West Durham Area
High levels of deprivation
4.6.1 The two AAP areas of Teesdale and Weardale, which cover the West Durham area, have the lowest deprivation levels in the County, as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation. They are also lower than the England and Wales average for deprivation. In Teesdale, 0% of the population live in the top 10% of deprived areas nationally, and 10.3% live in the top 30% of deprived areas nationally. In Weardale, 0% live in the top 10% of deprived areas and 2.1% live in the top 30% of deprived areas nationally.
4.6.2 The higher levels of deprivation in Teesdale is likely to be due to condition in some of the former coalfield settlements – e.g. Cockfield and Evenwood – that are located in the south eastern part of the area.
Degraded urban environment
4.6.3 This is not such an issue in the West Durham area, apart from the eastern area of Teesdale mentioned above where there are similar degraded urban environments around settlements as experienced elsewhere in former coalfield communities.
Poor quality housing and meeting housing needs
4.6.4 This is not such an issue in the West Durham area, apart from the eastern area of Teesdale mentioned above where there are similar housing conditions as experienced elsewhere in the coalfield. However, please note that due to the rural nature of the area, a high proportion of the housing stock is of stone built, solid walled construction and is not connected to the gas network, increasing the likelihood of fuel poverty in the area.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 135 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.6.5 The County Durham Strategic Housing Market Assessment shows that the rural settlements to the west of the County show strong clustering of highest quartile house prices and are amongst the most desirable residential locations in the County with the highest demand. The average house price to earnings ratio in Teesdale, for example, is above the national average, whereas in Durham City and Chester-Le-Street the ratio is above the regional average. Therefore the need for affordable housing is an acute issue in West Durham which can be compounded by the purchasing of lower end properties as holiday homes. Second home ownership is also notably higher in West Durham than the national average. As discussed below, the increasingly ageing population is also like to increase demand for older person properties.
4.6.6 In terms of housing stock, West Durham has the highest proportion of detached 4+ bed properties and the oldest housing stock. 395 of housing in Teesdale, in particular was constructed pre-1900.
Ageing population
4.6.7 There has been, on average, a 12% increase in the 85+ population in the AAP areas associated with the area since 2005. This represents the lowest increase in this specific age group across West Durham. However, the increase in retired persons (65+) in the area represents the greatest increase in this specific age group across the County, with the exception of Central Durham which West Durham equals in relation to proportional growth of this sector.
4.6.8 The greatest increase in retired persons (65+) have occurred within the Multi Super Output Areas of Bowes and Middleton-in-Teesdale and Stanhope and Wolsingham. West Durham, as per other areas faces a significant increase in the dependency ratio (working age population: retired population) over coming years.
Poor levels of health and health inequalities across the County
4.6.9 West Durham generally has better health levels than other areas in the County, albeit pockets of health deprivation exist within Cockfield and Evenwood. Whilst there is significant variation in premature all-cause morality within County Durham, the 2014 Joint Strategic Needs Assessment shows that the mortality rate for West Durham is one of the lowest in the County. All middle super output areas (MSOA's) covering the area also have higher male and female life expectancies when compared to both the County and national average.
4.6.10 The following table shows the prevalence of health issues in the two AAP areas in West Durham.
Table 16 Health inequalities
AAP Area Top 10% Top 30% County Wide County Wide (10%) (30%)
Teesdale 4 35.1 27.5% 71%
Mid Durham 2.1 61.4
136 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.6.11 In relation to health services, West Durham is more remote and often health care facilities are less accessible to members of the public. However, there is a primary care hospital at Stanhope and there are no major concerns about the level of service in rural West.
Need for economic diversification and more employment opportunities
4.6.12 Employment opportunities outside traditional rural activities such as agriculture, forestry and quarrying are mostly within the main centres, with Barnard Castle having a highly self-contained labour market. The largest employer of national significance within the area is the pharmaceutical company Glaxo SmithKline located at Barnard Castle. This plant specialises in new product development and is the key component of the economic well being of Barnard Castle. Therefore, it's reliance represents a significant risk to the economy in the event of large-scale job losses due to potential global restructuring.
4.6.13 The North Pennines part of the area is a recreational resource of regional significance, linked to the attractiveness of its countryside and villages. Tourism is increasingly important to the local economy, with facilities at Killhope Lead Mining Museum, Weardale Railway, Bowlees Visitor Centre and attractions like High Force together with a range of opportunities for active and passive recreation. There is a well developed network of public rights of way in this part of the area – many with a legacy of the mining industry – and quiet minor roads, which make it very accessible to walkers and cyclists. It is crossed by national trails including the C2C and the Pennine Way, and regional trails like the Weardale Way and the Teesdale Way. In the Dales Fringe around Barnard Castle, tourism is also increasingly important, with key visitor attractions being the town of Barnard Castle itself, Bowes Museum and Egglestone Abbey.
4.6.14 However, the tourism potential of the area should not be solely relied upon to bring about economic diversification and rural diversification projects should be supported along with improvements in transport accessibility and broadband provision to bring about a range of employment opportunities.
4.6.15 In relation to income, average household income is higher than the County average at £26,650 compared to £24,500. Employment levels in West Durham are higher than the County average and are higher than those in all other areas as measured by the Index of Multiple Deprivation employment domain. However, higher levels of unemployment exist within the Cockfield and Evenwood wards as per the proportion of Job Seekers Allowance claimants (three years average).
Educational attainment
4.6.16 West Durham has relatively high levels of educational attainment compared to all other areas as measured by the Index of Multiple deprivation education domain. However, there is variation regarding attainment within the area. For example, educational attainment in secondary schools in Teesdale pertaining to the achievement of 5 or more A*-C GCSE's, including English and Maths, is higher then the average County and national attainment at 72% but Weardale falls below both the County and national averages at 55%
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 137 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.6.17 Additionally, whilst the proportion of 16-18 year olds who were not in education, employment or training is below the County average and is falling in of the area, the proportion of residents who have no qualifications is higher than both the County and national average in Evenwood Ward.
4.6.18 In relation to educational infrastructure, with the exception of some of the more populated centres such as Middleton-in-Teesdale and Wolsingham, pupil numbers are projected to reduce in many areas. There are more surplus places in this part of the County due to it’s rurality and a commitment to keep primary schools open so that pupils do not need to travel too far to attend a school.
Access to services
4.6.19 Reliance on private car use is a particular characteristic of this area as a result of the difficulty of serving dispersed and relatively remote communities by public transport. It is therefore critical that existing local services, including community run services are protected and enhanced where possible to prevent the increased travelling that would result if they were lost.
4.6.20 Rail services in the West are limited to mainly heritage trips and occasional freight. The passenger emphasis is now on the heritage operation two days per week between April to October with an enhanced service at holiday times and special Christmas operations. Though regular through working from upper Weardale to Shildon and Darlington is now less likely in the medium-term, the chain of attractions comprising the Head of Steam museum at Darlington North Road, National Railway Museum’s Locomotion facility at Shildon and the Weardale Railway heritage operation can still be marketed as a very strong tourism attraction and economic driver originating and destined for West Durham.
4.6.21 The Weardale Railway is in private ownership. Open cast coal was transported from a terminal in Wolsingham until recently. Other markets (stone and aggregates) have been explored but to date no contracts have been signed.
4.6.22 In relation to access to broadband to allow, for example, e-business home working, the Digital Durham project supported by the Department for Culture, Media, and Sport, local authorities and British Telecom will enable most areas within West Durham to experience an improvement in the quality and speed of Broadband Services through the roll out of fibre services. However, some remote / isolated areas may require alternative solutions.
4.6.23 There is a well developed network of public rights of way in this part of the area – many with a legacy of the mining industry – and quiet minor roads, which make it very accessible to walkers, cyclists and horseriders. It is crossed by national trails including the Coast to Coast and the Pennine Way, and regional trails like the Weardale Wayand the Teesdale Way. Extensive tracts of open moorland are designated as open access land. However, the rights of way network in this area is much more important as a recreational resource than a utility one, given the significant distances involved in travelling between settlements.
138 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Congestion
4.6.24 Barnard Castle has a relatively self-contained employment area showing the lowest out-commuting statistics from any of the study areas. While it has limited flows to other settlements such as Crook, West Auckland, Bishop Auckland, Spennymoor, Newton Aycliffe and Durham City, it very much remains a local employment area which is exemplified by having the lowest proportion of people out-commuting from the area (43.1%) and the lowest proportion of people leaving County Durham (20.9%). None of the most acute congestion hotspots identified are in the West Durham area. However, traffic from this area travelling at peak times (e.g to and from Durham City and east through Bishop Auckland) will contribute to the congestion experienced at hotspots on local networks in those areas. Also, local traffic issues for example, relating to the impact of HGV's upon traffic flows, local amenity and historic fabric through Barnard Castle persist.
Climate Change Mitigation and Adaptation
4.6.25 There is a need to reduce greenhouse gas emissions through improving the energy efficiency of buildings and increasing the production of electricity and heat from renewable sources. As discussed earlier, there is a higher proportion of solid walled properties and those not connected to the mains gas network in West Durham. In addition, there are a high number of listed properties and Conservation Areas, some of which are also located within the North Pennines Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB). These factors together have implications for the type of energy-saving and carbon dioxide emission reduction measures that can be carried out on the existing housing stock and within new development.
4.6.26 In relation to wind energy, there are a total of 46 individual turbines across 45 sites, mostly serving individual farms, with an operational capacity of 0.8MW. Of the 0.8MW, 0.5MW is generated by the only operational commercial wind energy scheme operating in West Durham at Glaxo SmithKline in Barnard Castle. The potential expansion of commercial scale renewable energy schemes in the area, particularly large scale wind energy, is significantly constrained by the North Pennines AONB.
4.6.27 In relation to hydro power, West Durham provides the majority of the County's current hydro energy capacity, principally at reservoir locations. Northumbrian Water Ltd owns and operates six drinking water reservoirs in Teesdale, West Durham. Cow Green is the largest but is located in European Special Area of Conservation and has no link to the electricity distribution network. Currently, Derwent reservoir has 90kW installed, there are three small hydro-electric schemes operating at Cow Green, Grassholme and Hury reservoirs, each rated at 35kW, with smaller schemes at Lartington and Burnhope.
4.6.28 There are also potential opportunities to capture hydro power on the River Wear and Tees which flow through the area and have a potential capacity of up to 1MW on the River Wear, which together with the River Tees, which has a higher flow rate, could generate nearer 2MW. Solar and biomass energy schemes continue to be developed on a micro scale.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 139 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.6.29 There is also a need to reduce greenhouse gas emissions by reducing the need to travel and increasing the use of sustainable transport modes. However, the dispersed nature of the settlement pattern causes specific difficulties in the provision of conventional public transport services. The low population of many rural settlements and subsequent small numbers willing to use public transport to travel long journey distances makes bus services unviable. Innovative community based sustainable transport schemes along with improving broadband connection and encouraging new development to contribute towards the enhancement of existing community services and facilities may help to reduce the need to travel and associated emissions.
4.6.30 In relation to carbon sinks, the valleys in the fringes of the North Pennines and the river valleys of the Tees and Wear which penetrate the uplands contain significant pockets of ancient woodland. The County Durham Landscape Strategy identifiers that additional woodland planting would benefit many parts of these valleys as well as contribute to increased carbon absorption.
4.6.31 Hamsterley Forest is a major commercial plantation (coniferous) in West Durham. As such it is a major sink of carbon dioxide, as well as being an important visitor attraction – particularly for cyclists. There are no other major coniferous plantations in the area, but various smaller coniferous woods including the Stang Forest, south of Barnard Castle on the North Yorkshire border and the Weardale Forest around Killhope in upper Weardale.
4.6.32 The large areas of blanket bog in the North Pennines are major sinks of Carbon Dioxide which is dissolved in the water of the bogs. Land management practices aimed at draining and drying out bogs result in this carbon dioxide being released to the atmosphere as well as destruction of the important blanket bog habitat. The conservation of blanket bogs therefore has multiple benefits, and is being encouraged through the work of the North Pennines AONB Partnership and landowners / tenants etc.
4.6.33 In common with all areas, West Durham will have to adapt to the implications of climate change. West Durham falls within the Environment Agency's Upper and Mid Wear sub-area (of the Wear Catchment Flood Management Plan (CFMP)) and the Tees Catchment Flood Management Plan. The Mid Wear sub-area provides a natural storage area for flood waters reducing the risk of flooding downstream. The key flood risk areas in the Tees CFMP fall outside West Durham and County Durham.
4.6.34 However, the 2011 Surface Water Management Plan identified broad locations which are considered to be more vulnerable to surface water flooding, called Surface Water Risk Area's (SWRA). These were then prioritised in terms of their relative risk. A SWRA following the River Wear from Irehopeburn in Weardale to Blackets Gill has been prioritised in West Durham.
4.6.35 This SWRA has experienced 26 known flood incidents the cause of which is a mix of highway issues, overland flow from local fields and overland flow after heavy rainfall from upland areas. The railway and the A689, B6278 and B6296 are at risk from flooding. 384 properties fall within the Environment Agency’s Flood Map for Surface Water for the 200 year event. Average Annual Damages have been estimated at £368,000.
140 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.6.36 If developed, it is essential that new housing and employment sites in St John’s Chapel and Westgate should consider implementing source control measures such as storage areas, swales and green roofs to help manage the risks of surface water flooding.
Diversity in landscape and unique sense of place
4.6.37 The majority of landscape in the West Durham area falls into the North Pennines Landscape Character Area as defined by County Durham's Landscape Strategy 2008 and replicated by Natural England's National Character Area 10: North Pennines. The strategy for this area is simply:
To conserve and enhance the natural beauty of the landscape
4.6.38 The area to the south and east around Barnard Castle falls into the Dales Fringe Landscape Character Area as replicated by Natural England's National Character Area 22: Pennines Dales Fringe. The strategy for this area is:
To conserve the character of the landscape and restore it where it has been weakened
4.6.39 A strip of West Durham running north-south along the west side of the A68 is included in the West Durham Coalfield Landscape Character Area (National Character Area Profile 16: Durham Coalfield Pennine Fringe. This includes the former mining settlements of Evenwood and Cockfield amongst others. The strategy for this area is:
To enhance the landscape where it has been degraded by mining or development while conserving what is most distinctive and valued about its character, including its rural identity, its upland fringe qualities and its strong cultural associations with the coal and steel industries. A key component of the strategy for this settled landscape is the improvement of the countryside around towns and villages.
4.6.40 A small part of the area, east of Barnard Castle and bordering Darlington falls into the Tees Lowlands Landscape Character Area (National Character Area Profile 23: Tees Lowlands). The strategy for this area is:
To conserve the existing rural character of the landscape while enhancing those areas affected most by urban and industrial development and agricultural intensification.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 141 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.6.41 Over half of the area is designated as part of the North Pennines AONB which also extends into Cumbria and Northumberland. The North Pennines AONB is a nationally recognised and protected landscape and has its own management plan, setting out policies and actions needed to meet its objectives, and overall aim. The objective pertaining to landscape is:
To ensure that the distinctive character and qualities of the North Pennines landscape are understood, conserved, enhanced and restored.
4.6.42 The lower dales and moorland areas in the south and east of the area lying outside of the AONB are defined as Areas of High Landscape Value (AHLV). The greater part of the Dales Fringe area around Barnard Castle and the Tees Lowlands east of Barnard Castle to the border with Darlington is also defined as an AHLV.
Richness of the historic environment
4.6.43 West Durham is rich in archaeological remains from the Neolithic period onwards, many of which are recorded in the Durham Sites and Monuments Record (SMR) / 'Keys to the Past' website. Scheduled Monuments range from bronze age ritual landscapes and cairn fields, mediaeval sheilings, iron workings, fortified dwellings and abbey remains to industrial remains from the lead industry.
4.6.44 Many of the settlements of West Durham are designated as Conservation Areas – these include villages of essentially agricultural origins and later settlements that developed with lead mining and quarrying. The landscapes of the West Durham area are particularly rich in listed buildings, principally farmsteads, field barns and industrial buildings and structures as well as domestic buildings in historic market towns and villages, monastic buildings, castles and country houses.
4.6.45 In the North Pennines part of West Durham, historic parks and gardens are scarce, but in the Dales Fringe around Barnard Castle there is a notable number of these assets, four of which (Raby, Rokeby, Lartington and Bowes Museum) are on Historic England's Register of Parks and Gardens of Special Historic Interest. Other large areas of parkland of local historic interest occur, some only as relics.
4.6.46 In total, the West Durham Area contains 7,641 archaeological sites and monuments, 196 scheduled monuments (by far the greatest of the five areas), 1572 listed buildings (by far the greatest of the five areas), 39 conservation areas and 10 historic parks and gardens, four of which are listed by Historic England as being of historical importance (see above).
4.6.47 In relation to heritage at risk, there are five listed buildings at risk (an increase of 1 since 2009), 19 scheduled monuments (a decrease of 4 since 2009) and 2 Conservation Areas (an increase of 2 since 2009). The following table provides further detail.
142 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Table 17 Heritage at Risk: West Durham
Heritage Asset Condition Reason
Dovecote south of Gainford Hall Listed Building Grade II* Slow decay, no solution
Poor
Gainford Hall, Gainford Listed Building Grade I Defective roof valley and localised structural deformation Poor of walling
Gateway, Mortham Tower, Listed Building Grade I Structural movement in Rokeby gateway Poor
Church of St Mary and St Listed Building Grade I Deep pockets of erosion to the Stephen, Wolsingham north west buttress of the Poor tower, areas of cracking, open joints and loose pointing, some internal water ingress
Westgate Primitive Methodist Listed Building Grade II* Under repair but no user Chapel, Westgate identified; or under threat of Fair vacancy
Middle Level Lead Mine, Scheduled Monument Extensive flood damage and Greenlaws, Daddry Shield erosion problems Very bad
Barnard Castle: ringwork, shell Scheduled Monument Deterioration, in need of keep castle, chapel and dovecote management Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems
Cairn, carved rock and rubble Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant bank, south west corner of Scale growth Knoll Allotment, Barningham Moor Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems Declining
Cairnfield partly enclosed by a Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant bank on the east side of growth Woodclose Gill, Scale Knoll Generally satisfactory but with allotment, Barningham Moor, 550 significant localised problems Stable metres south of Hurst Hill, Barningham
Ring cairn east of Haythwaite, Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant Barningham Moor growth Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 143 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
Heritage Asset Condition Reason
Carved rock and cairn in Rowley Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant Intake, Barningham Moor growth Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Prehistoric enclosure and rubble Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant bank east of Haythwaite, growth Barningam Moor Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Unenclosed settlement south east Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant of Cowclose House, Barningham growth Moor Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Carved rock and boulder walling, Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant south wall of Scale Knoll growth Allotment, Barningham Moor Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Enclosures and industrial Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – shrub / workings on Cockfield Fell tree growth Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Packhorse Bridge, Headlam Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – in need of management Generally satisfactory but with major localised problems Declining
Area of carved bedrock, south of Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – the Rigg, Lartington Extensive natural erosion Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Two romano-british hut circles and Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – plant three sheilings on Holwick Scars, growth Holwick Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems Declining
Four areas of carving on a rock Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – outcrop south west of the Rigg, Extensive natural erosion Lartington Generally unsatisfactory with significant localised problems Declining
144 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Heritage Asset Condition Reason
Roman period native settlement Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – Scrub at Calf Holm, Dine Holm Scar, / tree growth Forest and Frith Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems Declining
Carved bedrock with cups and Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – grooves south east of the Rigg, Extensive natural erosion Lartington Generally unsatisfactory with major localised problems Declining
Cup, ring and groove marked rock Scheduled Monument Principal Vulnerability – south west of East Loups’s, Moderate natural erosion Cotherstone Moor Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems Stable
Pike Law Lead Hushes and Scheduled Monument Principal vulnerability – animal Mines, Forest and Frith burrowing Generally satisfactory but with significant localised problems Declining
Harperley Working Camp, WWII Scheduled Monument Completion of urgent works to Prisoner of War camp, other buildings required Wolsingham Very Bad
Cockfield Conservation Area Deteriorating trend, no reason provided Poor
Middleton-in-Teesdale Conservation Area No significant change in condition, no reason provided Poor
Richness of ecological and geological assets
4.6.48 West Durham contains significant areas of international importance for nature conservation. Large tracts of the Pennine Moors area (approximately 65,600 hectares) are designated as a Special Protection Area (SPA) under the Birds Directive and Special Area of Conservation (SAC) under the Habitats Directive. The western upland sites hold much of the upland heathland of northern England and juniper scrub in the UK. At higher altitudes and to the wetter west and north, the heaths grade into extensive areas of blanket bogs. The area is considered as supporting the major area of blanket bog in England. A significant proportion remains active with accumulating peat, although these areas are often bounded by sizeable zones of currently non-active bog, albeit on deep peat. The habitat supports breeding pairs of Hen harrier, Merlin, Peregrine falcon, European Golden plover, Dunlin and Eurasian curlew. In addition a series of isolated fields in the western upland area encompass the range of variation exhibited by mountain hay meadows in the
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 145 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
UK and contains the major part of the remaining UK resource of this habitats type. These grasslands are dependent upon traditional agricultural management with hay-cutting and no or minimal use of agrochemcials.
4.6.49 Most species have been affected by excessive livestock grazing levels across the area. In places, the difficulty of reaching agreements on commons, which cover much of the site, means that successes are limited and continue to prevent restoration. Drainage of wet areas can also be a problem. Drains have been cut across many areas of blanket bog, disrupting the hydrology and causing erosion, but in most parts these are being blocked and the habitat restored under agreements. Burning is a traditional management tool on these moorlands, which contributes to maintaining high populations of breeding birds. However, over-intensive and inappropriate burning is damaging to heath and blanket bog and further agreements are needed with the landowners to achieve sympathetic burning regimes. Restoration, to some degree, of a mosaic of more natural habitats across parts of the site is desirable. Acid and nitrogen deposition continue to have damaging effects on the site. Recreational activity may also be problematic.
4.6.50 All the SAC and SPA moorlands and hay meadows are also designated as Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI's) with a total of 29 component SSSI's. In relation to condition a very low proportion (just over 10%) of the component moorland SSSI's are in a favourable condition but the majority of units are in a recovering status. However, the majority of the component hay meadows SSSI's (79%) are in a favourable condition. This may be due in part to projects such as the 'Hay Time' project lead by the North Pennines AONB partnership which aims to enhance and restore upland hay meadows. The Moorhouse and Upper Teesdale National Nature Reserve (NNR), one of England's largest NNR is also designated in this part of upper Teesdale. The site is actively managed and is particularly well known for the plants that originally colonised the North Pennines after the last Ice Age. The NNR is also designated as an International Biosphere Reserve.
4.6.51 Outside of the areas designated as a SAC, SPA (and their component SSSI's) or NNR a further 18 SSSI's and 25 local wildlife sites are designated in the area. These are largely designated for their wetlands, old quarries and ancient woods in gills and ravines. There area a number of geological/geomorphological sites ranging from quarries and lead mines, caves and other limestone features to glacial features including drumlins and melt water channels.
4.6.52 The overall pattern of habitat distribution closely reflects the topography in West Durham, with most woodland habitats found along the incised corridors of rivers and streams, and heath, bog, mire and grassland habitats on the higher ridges with often poor connectivity between them. In the lowland parts of the area to the east and in the Dales Fringe around Barnard Castle, there is a much lower frequency of semi-natural habitat and higher frequency of improved agricultural land and semi improved pasture.
4.6.53 Semi-natural woodlands occur as isolated features. Many have little active management and area often grazed through by livestock which inhibits natural regeneration. Juniper woodland is locally diminishing in its extent under grazing pressure.
146 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
4.6.54 Hedgerows are unmanaged in places, and in particular in the upland fringes and lower dales, and are locally in progressive decline. The diversity of grasslands has diminished under the impacts of re-seeding, conversion from hay to silage and increased stocking densities.
Water Quality
4.6.55 There are six surface waterbodies in West Durham forming part of the Northumbria River Basin District and Wear and Tees Catchments, including the:
River Wear River Tees River Greta River Gaunless Clow Beck Langley Beck Sudburn Beck
4.6.56 The waterbodies are predominantly either of moderate or good ecological potential and the available predicted chemical quality for the stretches of River Tees and Wear in the area is good. In relation to the Tees Catchment (the Wear catchment is discussed in the Central Durham sections) there are two major waterfalls on the River Tees, at High Force and Cauldron Snout. No migratory fish can pass High Force.
4.6.57 The River Tees is a high quality and nationally renowned coarse fishery with a wide diversity of fish species, including pike, bream, roach and chub, grayling and wild brown trout. Salmon and sea trout are now returning to the River Tees and although their numbers are currently low, they are increasing.
4.6.58 The Tees catchment contains three groundwater bodies, two of which are within the West Durham area. These being, the Tees Carboniferous Limestone and Millstone Grit and the Tees Sherwood Sandstone. The Tees Sherwood Sandstone groundwater body has been classified as being at good chemical and quantitative status. The Tees Carboniferous Limestone and Millstone Grit has been classified as good quantitative status but poor chemical status due to numerous metal mine discharges in parts of the upper catchment, primarily in Harewood Beck, Hudeshope Beck and Egglestone Burn.
4.6.59 The West Durham area also contains a number of reservoirs taking their water from extensive moorland catchments and serving settlements in the lowlands to the east through water abstraction from the lower reaches of the Tees, Wear and Derwent.
Land Quality
4.6.60 There are pockets of contaminated land left from metal mine spoil areas in the North Pennines and from coal minining in the extreme east of West Durham. Information was gathered by the former district councils to develop 'Contaminated Land Registers' containing lists of sites of potential concern where the current use or history of the site suggest that contamination might be present.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 147 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
4.6.61 According to the district council information, there were the following number of “sites of potential concern” in the former district areas of Teesdale and Wear Valley, which together cover the vast majority of the West Durham area:
Teesdale: 2 Wear Valley: 532
4.6.62 There is a need to ensure sites are safe for any proposed after-use, and also to guard against the leaching of contaminants to other areas, particularly in the light of increased episodes of intense rainfall which are expected as a result of climate change. The very low number of sites in Teesdale may reflect the isolated nature of sites such as metal mine tailings which are significantly contaminated but unlikely to affect “receptor” sites due to their isolated location. The cumulative impact of them leaching into water courses is, however, a cause for concern. Comparatively, West Durham was recorded as having a higher number of 'sites of potential concern' than North Durham only.
4.6.63 In relation to agricultural land quality, land in the dales of the North Pennines is generally Grade 4 (poor) with pockets of Grade 3b (moderate) on the floors of the lower dales. The poorer soils of the moors and moorland fringes are generally classified as Grade 5 (very poor). On the lower lying areas of the Dales Fringe around Barnard Castle, land is mainly Grade 3a (good) or 3b (moderate) with some significant pockets of Grade 2 (very good) land around Staindrop and Gainford near the border with Darlington.
Air Quality
4.6.64 There are no Air Quality Management Areas in the West Durham area. Some of the upland habitats, protected for their nature conservation value, are sensitive to the deposition of nitrogen oxides out of the atmosphere, which increases the fertility of soil and reduces the relative viability of some sensitive species. Nitrogen oxide levels in the air can be affected by pollution from diffuse and distant sources.
Waste
4.6.65 The amount of waste landfilled has significantly reduced since 2009 across County Durham. The reason for this large fall is that Durham has shifted its waste strategy towards energy from waste and away from landfill. Whilst the amount of household waste sent for reuse, recycling and composting has increased, figures are below the national average.
4.6.66 There are 21 closed landfill / tip sites and two operating household waste recycling centres in the area. There are no operational landfill sites in the West Durham area at the moment although there are two sites where Northumbrian Water Ltd dispose of sludge from water treatement processes – at Lartington and Wearhead in Teesdale and Weardale, respectively. The largest community based composting scheme 'Rotters' in the UK operates from Teesdale.
148 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues 4
Minerals
4.6.67 Historically, the North Pennines has been very important for mineral extraction and a wide range of minerals have been worked from within this area including carboniferous limestone, igneous rock (dolerite), high silica sandstone (ganister), silica sand (also known as moulding sand) and vein minerals from the North Pennines ore field including barytes, flurospar, lead and zinc. In addition, limited deposits of sand and gravel and coal have been worked from sites within this area. Modern day mineral working is, however, more limited in extent:
Igneous rock (dolerite) is currently extracted at Force Garth Quarry. In addition, Teesdale also contains several dormant igneous rock quarries including Park End, Middleton and Crossthwaite Quarry; Carboniferous limestone is currently extracted at Heights Quarry and at Broadwood Quarry. In addition as part of works to restore Newlandside Quarry, historic stockpiles of carboniferous limestone are being worked. The area also contains a number of carboniferous limestone quarries which have now been restored including Selset Quarry and Eastgate (associated with cement manufacture at Eastgate Cement Works). Harrow Bank Quarry and Ashy Bank Quarry also lie within this area. Both of these quarries are currently inactive but are known to contain reserves of carboniferous limestone; Sandstone is currently extracted at Baxton Law Quarry, Cat Castle Quarry, Dead Friars Quarry, Dunhouse Quarry, Windy Hill and Shipley Banks Quarry;and High silica sandstone (Ganister) is still worked, in small quantities, at Harehope Head Quarry. This material is suitable for use in forming refractory products, but is now only used for building stone purposes.
4.6.68 Various measures and approaches are possible through planning to avoid or minimise the adverse impact of minerals operations on the environment and communities. In particular, policies will be needed which recognise the status afforded to specific areas because of environmental designations and constraints and which provide them with appropriate protection.
4.6.69 The positive reclamation or restoration of disused sites can also make a positive contribution to the environment through creating or recreating appropriate landscape features and habitats, and in some cases through providing a resource to divert flood water and alleviate flood risk.
West Durham: Environmental Characteristics of Particular Relevance
Richness of the historic environment including many listed buildings, conservation areas, archaeological sites and monuments, historic parks and gardens and agricultural and industrial heritage.
A high proportion of Conservation Areas to settlements recognises the value of the historic groupings in their landscape setting.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 149 4 Stage A3: Identifying Key Sustainability Issues
West Durham's rich biodiversity is of international, national and local significance e.g. a third of the area has a nature designation, whilst recovering, a low level is in a favourable condition.
West Durham's rich geo-diversity is of international, national and local significance e.g. Geopark.
High quality and character of landscape e.g. 70% of the area has a landscape designation, AONB.
Excellent air quality but levels of nitrogen deposition are impacting upon sensitive upland protected wildlife sites.
Good water quality.
Relatively low levels of renewable energy generation and 'hard to heat' homes.
Dependency on private car use.
Consultation Question 10
Have we correctly identified the environmental characteristics of the West Durham Area? If not, what is incorrect and what have we missed?
150 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework 5
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 151 5 Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework
5 Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework
Background
5.0.1 In order to assess the previously withdrawn County Durham Plan's contribution towards addressing the key sustainability issues identified, a Sustainability Appraisal Framework was established and utilised to undertake the assessment of Plan objectives, options and policies. The SA Framework is central to the SA process and consists of the SA objectives and more detailed decision making criteria.
5.0.2 In order to formulate the objectives to include in the Framework, account was taken of the topics the SEA Directive requires to be taken into account throughout the SA, these include:
Biodiversity Population Human health Fauna Flora Soil Water Air Climatic factors Material assets Cultural heritage, including architectural and archaeological heritage Landscape
5.0.3 In addition to the SEA Directive topics, the key sustainability issues that were identified as part of the 2009 Scoping stage were also taken into account in the preparation of the objectives. The identified key sustainability issues were verified at SA workshops, with the draft range of objectives prepared so workshop stakeholders could discuss them and amend as necessary.
5.0.4 The following figure shows the process followed in the development of the sustainability objectives. The link to the earlier Stage A1-A3 tasks and the sustainability workshop is shown.
152 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework 5
Figure 18 Sustainability Objectives Process
5.0.5 The Framework was reviewed as part of the 2012 Scoping Stage Update and was found to be fit for purpose.
Approach
5.0.6 In order to determine whether the original SA Framework is fit for purpose to assess the new Local Plan, it is necessary to establish whether it addresses the 22 key sustainability issues that have been identified as part of this Scoping Stage. The following table shows the SA objectives, more detailed decision making criteria and which key issues they relate to.
Table 18 SA Framework and associated Key Sustainability Issues
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives
1. To provide Ensure the requirement for affordable 2.Persistent social, economic and everybody with housing is met across a range of physical disparities between parts of the opportunity tenures? the County including particular to live in a Decrease the number of vacant concentrations of poor quality decent and properties and properties that don’t housing,degraded environments, poor affordable home meet the decent homes standard? health and unemployment. Site new housing in deliverable locations linked to identified need? 4.Pockets of poor quality housing with Ensure that a mix of housing type and risk of further deterioration in size is available in the county? associated low demand housing areas. Improve energy efficiency and reduce fuel poverty? 5. Deficit in the provision of certain types of housing that meet social, economic and demographic characteristics of the County's existing and future residents.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 153 5 Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives
2. To promote Enhance a sense of safety and 1. Continued high levels of deprivation strong, secure security? with economic, health and education communities Deter / prevent crime? disparities between the County the Reduce the adverse impacts of traffic north east region and/or the Nation. (including HGVs) on communities? Encourage a sense of community or 3. An ageing population, with wider engagement in community uncertainty about whether their needs activities or local democracy? will be adequately met. Promote mutual understanding of different ethnic and cultural groups? 9. Increased car traffic and congestion with continued strong commuting Help cater for the needs of an ageing patterns to major conurbations. population? Increase cultural awareness through enhancing and promoting the local historic environment?
3. To improve Increase the quantity or quality of 1. Continued high levels of deprivation education, education, training opportunities or with economic, health and education training and facilities? disparities between the County the life-long Improve access to education or training north east region and/or the Nation. learning, and opportunities? maintain a Promote lifelong learning? 8. The demographic profile of the healthy labour Raise educational and employment County will lead to a shrinking market aspirations? workforce and loss of associated skills and experience from the workplace.
4. To reduce Contribute to promotion of healthier 1. Continued high levels of deprivation health lifestyles and healthy leisure with economic, health and education inequalities and opportunities? (e.g. cycling and disparities between the County the promote healthy walking) north east region and/or the Nation. lifestyles Improve access to public open space / multi-functional green infrastructure? 2.Persistent social, economic and Reduce health inequalities? physical disparities between parts of Improve access to healthcare? the County including particular concentrations of poor quality housing,degraded environments, poor health and unemployment.
5. To reduce the Reduce the need for travel / transport 7.Declining rural service centres and need to travel (e.g. by ensuring local needs are met a declining rural economy. and promote locally or by telecommunication)? use of Help people to access jobs, services 9. Increased car traffic and congestion sustainable and facilities easily? with continued strong commuting transport Protect / increase the range of shops, patterns to major conurbations. options services, amenities and employment opportunities in town and village centres? Promote / widen opportunities for ‘greener’ modes of travel (walking, cycling public or shared transport)?
154 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework 5
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives
Ensure development is served by an appropriate level of transport infrastructure including public and sustainable transport networks? Move freight from road to rail / sea?
6. To alleviate Help those on lower incomes? 1. Continued high levels of deprivation deprivation and Contribute towards local regeneration with economic, health and education poverty initiatives, or benefit areas suffering disparities between the County the from economic deprivation? north east region and/or the Nation. Improve economic, social and environmental conditions in the most 2.Persistent social, economic and deprived areas and for the most physical disparities between parts of deprived groups? the County including particular Improve physical access to jobs? concentrations of poor quality Help reduce unemployment? housing,degraded environments, poor health and unemployment. Encourage higher incomes?
7. To develop a Safeguard employment or create new 6. A continued focus on a narrow sustainable and employment opportunities? economic base with particular diverse Promote business expansion / dependencies on declining economic economy with development? sectors. high levels of Promote growth in key economic employment sectors? 7.Declining rural service centres and Encourage clean technologies to locate a declining rural economy. in the area? Reduce road congestion and help 8.The demographic profile of the reduce journey times to key County will lead to a shrinking employment sites? workforce and loss of associated skills and experience from the workplace. Encourage young people to stay in the area? 9.Increased car traffic and congestion Encourage the use of local labour, with continued strong commuting goods and services? patterns to major conurbations. Improve the diversity / resilience of the economy? Help realise the economic potential of the County’s natural and historic assets in a sustainable way?
8. To reduce the Reduce the demand for energy or 9.Increased car traffic and congestion causes of increase energy efficiency of buildings, with continued strong commuting climate change transport or industry? patterns to major conurbations. Minimise greenhouse gas emissions from waste management? 18. Increased production of renewable Contribute to the development / wider energy but unclear direction for future use or renewable energy sources? development: in particular major wind Contribute to the absorption of carbon development. dioxide?
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 155 5 Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives
9. To respond Minimise the risk of/ from flooding or 10. By the 2050s; limit the increase in and enable coastal erosion? average annual temperature of around adaptation to Help to cope with climate extremes, 1.8oC; average reduction in annual the inevitable e.g. design of buildings and urban rainfall of 4-5%; and sea level rise of impacts of areas? about 30 cm. climate change Allow for habitats or species of biodiversity importance to adapt to 11. Accelerated erosion of coastline, climate change? affecting internationally protected maritime grassland and other habitat.
12.Increased frequency and severity of floods affecting settlements, water systems, economy, transport, habitats and built heritage.
13.Continued need to protect and enhance biodiversity including reducing sources of harm/ pressures not linked to climate change to better facilitate adaptation of habitats and species.
10. To protect Protect or enhance internationally 11. Accelerated erosion of coastline, and enhance designated wildlife/ geological sites? affecting internationally protected biodiversity and Protect or enhance nationally maritime grassland and other habitat. geodiversity designated wildlife/ geological sites and protected species? 13.Continued need to protect and Protect or enhance UK and Durham enhance biodiversity including reducing Biodiversity Action Plan priority habitats sources of harm/ pressures not linked and species? to climate change to better facilitate Protect or enhance other areas of local adaptation of habitats and species. importance for biodiversity or geodiversity (LNR’s, CWS, CGS, semi-natural ancient woodland)? Prevent deterioration and fragmentation of habitat and establish and maintain sustainable habitat networks? Improve access to or understanding of local biodiversity/ geodiversity resources? Ensure adequate and appropriate mitigation for any biodiversity loss which may occur as a result of development? Create new areas or sites of biodiversity/ geodiversity value?
11. To protect Protect and enhance designated 2.Persistent social, economic and and enhance protected landscape areas (i.e. AONB, physical disparities between parts of the quality and Durham Heritage Coast)? the County including particular character of
156 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework 5
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives landscape and Protect and enhance local landscape concentrations of poor quality townscape character and quality? housing,degraded environments, poor Protect and maintain the openness of health and unemployment. the green belt? Ensure that new developments reflect 7.Declining rural service centres and the distinctive character and a declining rural economy. appearance of the local area? Encourage good quality design in new 13. Continued need to protect and development? enhance biodiversity including reducing Protect and enhance the vitality and sources of harm/ pressures not linked viability of the county’s town centres to climate change to better facilitate and main village centres? adaptation of habitats and species. Protect and improve the quality of 14.Continued need to protect and public areas/ discourage fly tipping and enhance heritage assets, recognising reduce litter? that the County's heritage assets are Help regeneration of degraded built an irreplaceable resource that should environments? be enjoyed and conserved in a manner appropriate to their significance.
15. Continued need to protect and enhance the distinctive character and quality of County Durham's landscape.
12. To protect Protect and enhance the character, 14.Continued need to protect and and enhance appearance or setting of designated enhance heritage assets, recognising cultural heritage and non-designated heritage assets? that the County's heritage assets are & the historic Reduce the number or severity of an irreplaceable resource that should environment designated and non-designated be enjoyed and conserved in a manner heritage assets at risk? appropriate to their significance. Protect and enhance locally and regionally important designated and 15. Continued need to protect and non-designated heritage assets? enhance the distinctive character and Realise the economic and educational quality of County Durham's landscape. potential of designated and non-designated heritage assets and help make them accessible? Recognise the contribution of conserving and enhancing existing buildings and other heritage assets to local distinctiveness, sustainable resource use and climate change mitigation? Ensure the recording and appropriate protection of undiscovered archaeological features in areas of potential development? Promote the maintenance, sensitive adaptation and re-use of buildings?
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 157 5 Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives
13. To protect Protect and improve local air quality? 16. Improvements in water quality from and improve air, Protect and maintain or improve implementing River Basin Management water and soil surface & groundwater quality or the Plans, but increased threat from resources physical integrity of aquifers? intense rainfall events causing leaching Reduce the amount of water used? from contaminated sites and overflow Keep water consumption / emission from sewerage systems. within local carrying capacity limits? Improve areas of historic land 17. Increased demand for water and contamination and prevent need for waste water treatment from contamination to new areas? new households and development. Encourage the location of development 21. Good air quality Countywide but on previously developed land, while with poor quality hotspots in Durham taking account of biodiversity value that City and Chetser-le-Street. may be present? Minimise the loss of better quality 22. Significant areas of contaminated agricultural land to development? land in County Durham remain due to Promote good soil management in land its mining and industrial heritage. reclamation?
14. To reduce Encourage an increase in the 19. Reducing but high levels of waste and reduction, re-use, recycling and household waste and stabilising reuse, encourage the recovery of energy from waste recycling and composting activity. sustainable and (progress away from landfill and up the efficient use of “waste hierarchy”)? materials Encourage the use of recycled / reused materials? Minimise the use of new non-renewable resources? Reduce the adverse impacts of waste management facilities to acceptable levels? Encourage the community to take responsibility for reducing its own waste? Promote the maintenance, sensitive adaptation and re-use of buildings?
15. To improve Help meet an identified need for 20. Richness of minerals resources the sustainability minerals? and the impact of minerals operations of minerals Reduce the adverse impacts of on communities and the environment. extraction and minerals processing and extraction to use and reduce acceptable levels? adverse impacts Reduce the energy used in minerals on communities extraction, processing and transport? and the Ensure the efficient use of minerals environment resources? Avoid the sterilisation of economically important mineral resources? Promote good practice in land reclamation having regard to
158 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Stage A4: Developing the SA Framework 5
Sustainability Criteria: Will the County Durham Plan… Key Sustainability Issues Appraisal Objectives
sustainable after-use appropriate to the locality?
5.0.7 As all the key sustainability issues identified can be addressed by the original SA Framework it is considered that the SA Framework is still fit for purpose and no changes to the objectives or more detailed decision making criteria are purposed.
Consultation Question 11
Do you have any comments on the suitability of the SA Framework? Is there anything that should be changed or added?
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 159 Conclusion and Next Steps 6
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 160 Conclusion and Next Steps 6
6 Conclusion and Next Steps
6.0.1 As a result of undertaking a review of other policies, plans and programmes and the underpinning social, economic and environmental baseline data, it has been possible to verify, amend and add to the key sustainability issues for County Durham. In turn, the compilation of an updated list of key sustainability issues has provided the means to determine whether the original SA framework established is still fit for purpose. This report concludes that it is fit for purpose, subject to obtaining the opinion of Historic England, Natural England and the Environment Agency on this matter and all other aspects of this report (Stage A5: Consulting on the Scope of the Report).
6.0.2 Following the receipt of comments, this Scoping report and the associated SA Framework will be revised as necessary. The SA framework will then be utilised to assess the objectives, reasonable alternatives and preferred policy approaches of the new Local Plan as required by Stage B of the SA process.
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 161 Appendix A: Review of Policies, Plans and Programmes
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 162 Appendix A: Review of Policies, Plans and Programmes
International / European
Table 19 Sustainable Development
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal Appendix
World Summit on Global governmental declarations to: The SA should assess The principles of Sustainable Advance and strengthen 3 pillars of sustainability (economic policies for their impact sustainable development Development, development, social development and environmental protection) against social, economic should be clearly
Johannesburg (2002) at all levels. and environmental factors embedded throughout the A: Sustainability Protect biodiversity. including for example, Plan in order to create and Review Tackle underdevelopment through education, training and biodiversity, education, shape sustainable technology transfer. deprivation, resource use, communities across Tackle global poverty. health care and climate County Durham.
Change consumption and production patterns change. of
Conserve natural resources. Policies, Appraisal Tackle climate change. Bring health care to basic minimum standards.
EC Directive The objective of this Directive is to provide for a high level of The SA will need to fulfil the The Plan should be subject Plans
Scoping 2001/42/EC on the protection of the environment and to contribute to the integration legal requirements of the to Sustainability Appraisal assessment of the of environmental considerations into the preparation and adoption SEA Directive. incorporating Strategic
effects of certain plans of plans and programmes with a view to promoting sustainable Environmental Assessment and and programmes on development. at each stage of plan
the environment (2001) The environmental assessment referred to in Article 3 shall be development. Programmes Report carried out during the preparation of a plan or programme and before its adoption or submission to the legislative procedure. Where an environmental assessment is required under Article (2016) 3(1), an environmental report shall be prepared in which the likely significant effects on the environment of implementing the 163 164 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal plan or programme, and reasonable alternatives taking into Review account the objectives and the geographical scope of the plan or programme, are identified, described and evaluated. The environmental report prepared pursuant to paragraph 1 shall of include the information that may reasonably be required taking Scoping into account current knowledge and methods of assessment, Policies, the contents and level of detail in the plan or programme, its stage in the decision-making process and the extent to which certain matters are more appropriately assessed at different Report levels in that process in order to avoid duplication of the Plans assessment. The Environmental Assessment of Plans and Programmes and (2016) Regulations 2004 transpose this Directive into National Law.
A Sustainable Europe The strategy identifies the following unsustainable trends on which The SA will be required to Plan policies should aim to Programmes for a Better World: A action needs to be taken: establish sustainability address in particular the European Union trends for County Durham. unsustainable trends Strategy for Climate change and energy use. identified. Sustainable Production and consumption rates. Development Natural resource use. Public health, poverty and social exclusion. (2001 and 2009 Review) Economic and social implications of an ageing society. Global commitment to sustainable development.
The 2009 review identified that a number of trends require urgent action. Significant additional efforts are needed to:
Curb and adopt to climate change. Decrease high energy consumption in the transport sector. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Reverse the current loss of biodiversity and natural resources. Shift to a sustainable low-carbon and low input economy.
Table 20 Climate Change and Adaptation Appendix Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the A: Sustainability Sustainability
Appraisal Review
The Paris The Paris Agreement is an agreement within the UN Framework Convention The SA will need to The Plan should support the Agreement on Climate Change. The agreement was adopted in December 2015 but assesses the Plan's reduction of greenhouse gas (December 2015) at the time of writing (January 2015) has not yet entered into force. The contribution towards and emissions, particularly through of
stated aim of the agreement is to: 'hold the increase in the global average encourage energy the delivery of energy Policies, Appraisal temperature to well below 2 degrees C above pre-industrial levels and to efficiency, renewable efficiency and low carbon pursue efforts to limit the temperature increase to 1.5 degrees above energy, carbon capture technologies in buildings, pre-industrial levels. protection of the industry, waste management
County's carbon sinks, and transport. The promotion Plans United Nations Each Party included in Annex I, in achieving its quantified emission use of accredited or protection of sites of value Scoping Framework limitation and reduction commitments under Article 3, in order to promote sources of timber, and for their ability to absorb
Convention on sustainable development, shall: the reduction, reuse and carbon dioxide can also be and Climate Change recycling of waste. encouraged through the Plan.
(1992), including Implement and/or further elaborate policies and measures in accordance Programmes Report the Kyoto Protocol with its national circumstances, such as: (2005) Enhancement of energy efficiency in relevant sectors of the national
(2016) economy. 165 166 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of greenhouse gases not controlled by the Montreal Protocol, taking into account its commitments under relevant international environmental agreements; promotion of sustainable forest management practice, afforestation of Scoping and reforestation. Policies, Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture in light of climate change considerations. Research on, and promotion, development and increased use of, Report new and renewable forms of energy, of carbon dioxide sequestration Plans technologies and of advanced and innovative environmentally sound technologies. and (2016) Progressive reduction or phasing out of market imperfections, fiscal incentives, tax and duty exemptions and subsidies in all greenhouse gas emitting sectors that run counter to the objective of the Convention Programmes and application of market instruments. Encouragement of appropriate reforms in relevant sectors aimed at promoting policies and measures which limit or reduce emissions of greenhouse gases not controlled by the Montreal Protocol. Measures to limit and/or reduce emissions of greenhouse gases not controlled by the Montreal Protocol in the transport sector. Limitation and/or reduction of methane emissions through recovery and use in waste management, as well as in the production, transport and distribution of energy. Cooperate with other such Parties to enhance the individual and combined effectiveness of their policies and measures adopted under this Article. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
EU Roadmap for Prior to 2050 the EU has committed to three targets for 2020: The SA will need to The Plan should support the moving to a low assesses the Plan's move towards a low carbon carbon economy in 1. To reduce emissions by 20% on 1990 levels (could be increased to contribution towards and economy and what this 2050 30% if other major economies agree to do their fair share of a global encourage the move entails. For example: reduction effort). towards a low carbon Low energy, low Appendix 2. Produce 20% of total energy from renewables. economy. emission buildings. 3. Increase energy efficiency by 20% from 2007 levels. Further development of electric and hybrid cars,
Beyond the short term 2020 targets EU leaders have endorsed an 80-95% carbon capture and A: Sustainability reduction in emissions by 2050 (40% by 2030 and 60% by 2040). storage and associated infrastructure. Review Increased development of renewable sources of
energy. of Policies, Appraisal Table 21 Energy
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan
Programmes and SA might be taken on board throughout Plans
Scoping the Sustainability Appraisal
Renewable Energy The Directive sets an overall EU community target for The SA should assess the Plan's The Plan should encourage the and Directive 2009/28/EC 20% of energy and 10% of transport fuels to be contribution towards improving upon uptake and use of a range of Programmes
Report produced from renewable sources by 2020. Each existing levels of energy generation by renewable energy technologies (2009) Member State has its own legally binding individual renewable sources. and set criteria by which renewable targets in order to contribute to this based on existing energy proposals will be renewable capacity and relative GDP per capita. The determined. (2016) UK's target is to produce 15% of energy requirements from renewable sources by 2020. 167 168 Sustainability
Table 22 Air Quality Appendix
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes to plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal Ambient Air Quality sets legally binding limits for concentrations SA should include objective for air The Plan should aim to reduce and limit Review Directive in outdoor air of major air pollutants that quality and ensure that the requirements emissions to air. Policies should take (2008/50/EC) impact public health such as particulate of the Directive are reflected in the account of areas across the County where
matter (PM10 and PM2.5) and nitrogen dioxide framework. poor air quality exists and aim to address this issue or at the very least not of (NO2). Also aims to maintain air quality where Scoping it is good. exacerbate existing issues. Policies,
Table 23 Water Report Plans Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken
on board throughout the and (2016) Sustainability Appraisal Programmes EC Directive The purpose of this Directive is to establish a framework for the The SA will need to assess the The Plan will need to take into 2000/60/EC protection of inland surface waters, transitional waters, coastal impact of Plan policies upon account the current status of establishing a waters and groundwater which: water quality and supply. County Durham's water bodies framework for the Opportunities for enhancement and minimise the risk of pollution Community action Prevents further deterioration and protects and enhances the to water quality should be and damage to surface, ground in the Field of status of aquatic ecosystems and, with regard to their water sought and recommended. and coastal waters and where Water Policy (the needs, terrestrial ecosystems and wetlands directly depending possible seek opportunities for Water Framework on the aquatic ecosystems. water quality improvements Directive) 2000 Promotes sustainable water use based on a long-term through new development. protection of available water resources. Aims at enhanced protection and improvement of the aquatic environment, inter alia, through specific measures for the progressive reduction of discharges, emissions and losses of priority substances and the cessation or phasing-out of discharges, emissions and losses of the priority hazardous substances. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Ensures the progressive reduction of pollution of groundwater and prevents its further pollution. Contributes to mitigating the effects of floods and droughts and thereby contributes to:
The provision of the sufficient supply of good quality surface water and groundwater as needed for Appendix sustainable, balanced and equitable water use. A significant reduction in pollution of groundwater. The protection of territorial and marine waters. A: Sustainability
The WFD requires that all inland and coastal waters within Review defined River Basin Districts must reach at least good status by 2015 and defines how this should be achieved through the
establishment of environmental objectives and ecological of targets for surface waters. Policies, Appraisal
Bathing Water Bathing water policy is one of the success stories in EU water policy As run off and insufficient As run off and insufficient Directive and important to protect human health and the environment. The sewerage infrastructure can sewerage infrastructure can 2006/7/EC Directive requires member states to monitor and assess the bathing contribute to pollution of contribute to pollution of bathing Plans
Scoping water quality for at least two parameters of bacteria. The quality of bathing and coastal waters, the and coastal waters the Plan will water should be classified as either excellent, good, sufficient or SA should have regard to need to ensure that waste water poor. In addition they must inform the public about bathing water waste water capacity and capacity is sufficient to deal with and quality and beach management through bathing water profiles. areas of surface water flood growth and that Sustainable Programmes
Report risk throughout the Urban drainage systems are The Bathing water regulations 2013 implement the Directive assessment. required. and require that by the end of the bathing season in 2015 all bathing waters are classified as 'sufficient' (2016) 169 170 Sustainability
Table 24 Soil Appendix
Plans, Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Policies and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the A: Appraisal Sustainability Appraisal Review
Soil Thematic Soil degradation is a serious problem in Europe. It is driven or exacerbated by The SA should assess the The Plan should seek Strategy human activity such as inadequate agricultural and forestry practices, industrial Plans' contribution opportunities to remediate (COM (2006) activities, tourism, urban and industrial sprawl and construction works. These towards soil remediation, degraded/ contaminated land of Scoping 231) activities have a negative impact, preventing the soil from performing its broad restoration and protection. through the allocation of sites Policies, range of functions and services to humans and ecosystems. This results in for development, ensure Plan loss of soil fertility, carbon and biodiversity, lower water-retention capacity, policies address the disruption of gas and nutrient cycles and reduced degradation of contaminants. restoration of mineral sites Report
and protect soil such as peat Plans Soil degradation has a direct impact on water and air quality, biodiversity and which acts as a carbon sink. climate change. It can also impair the health of European citizens and threaten
food and feed safety. and (2016)
The overall objective of the Soil Thematic Strategy is the protection and Programmes sustainable use of soil, based on the following guiding principles:
Preventing further soil degradation and preserving its functions. When soil is used and its functions are exploited, action has been taken on soil use and management patterns. When soil acts as a sink/receptor of the effects of human activities or environmental phenomena, action has to be taken at source. Restoring degraded soils to a level of functionality consistent at least with current and intended use, considering the cost implications of the restoration of soil.
The Commission on 30 April 2014 took the decision to withdraw the proposal for a Soil Framework Directive, opening the way for an alternative initiative in the next mandate. The Commission remains committed to the objective of the protection of soil and will examine options on how to best achieve this. Table 25 Minerals and Waste
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Thematic Strategy This strategy sets out the guidelines for European Union (EU) action The SA will assess The Plan should include policies on the Sustainable up to 2031 aimed at more effective and sustainable use of natural how far Plan policies which promote the reduction in use
Use of Natural resources throughout their life cycle. contribute to this of primary resources through the Appendix Resources (2006) objective. use of secondary or recycled The aim of the strategy is to reduce the negative environmental impact materials in development. Where of the use of natural resources (depletion of resources and pollution) primary materials are required these while meeting the economic growth and employment objectives of the should be from either a sustainable A: Sustainability Lisbon European Council. The strategy aims to reduce the pressures or local source. Materials promoted
on the environment at each stage of the life cycle of resources, which should have a low environmental Review embraces their extraction or harvesting, use and ultimate disposal. It impact in use and be able to be therefore seeks to integrate this concept of life cycle and impact of re-used or recycled at the end of resources into the associated policies. their original purpose. of Policies,
Appraisal Revised EU Waste Provides the overarching legislative framework for the collection, The SA should assess The Plan should encourage the Framework transport, recovery and disposal of waste. It sets out Member States’ Policies against their reduction, reuse and recycling of Directive obligations to: ability to reduce waste waste through its policies and
(2008/98/EC) and encourage the ensure new development has easy Plans Encourage the prevention or reduction of waste production and sustainable and access to waste and recycling Scoping And related its harmfulness. efficient use of services. The Plan should also
Directive: Encourage the recovery of waste by means of recycling, re-use materials. consider the targets in the Landfill and or reclamation or any other process with a view to extracting Directive and determine whether
EU Directive secondary raw materials. alternative waste treatment capacity Programmes Report 1999/31/EC on the Encourage the use of waste as a source of energy. exists. landfill of waste Take the necessary measures to ensure that waste is recovered (the Landfill or disposed of without endangering human health and without (2016) Directive, 1999) using processes or methods which could harm the environment, and in particular: 171 172 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review - without risk to water, air, soil and plants and animals. - without causing a nuisance through noise or odours. - without adversely affecting the countryside or places of special interest. of Scoping Establish an integrated and adequate network of disposal Policies, installations.
The overall aim of the Landfill Directive is to prevent or reduce as far Report as possible negative effects on the environment, in particular the Plans pollution of surface water, groundwater, soil and air, and on the global environment, including the greenhouse effect as well as any resulting and (2016) risk to human health, from the landfilling of waste, during the whole life cycle of the landfill. Programmes The directive has provisions covering the location of landfills, and technical and engineering requirements for aspects such as water control and leachate management, protection of soil and water and methane emissions control.
It bans certain types of waste from landfill and the most current target is:
By 2020 to reduce biodegradable municipal waste landfilled to 35% of that in 1995.
On 2nd July 2015 the EC adopted a legislative proposal to review waste-related targets in the Landfill Directive. The proposal aims at phasing out landfilling by 2025 for recyclable waste (including Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
plastics, apper, metals, glass and biowaste) in non-hazardous waste landfills corresponding to a maximum landfilling rate of 25%. Appendix
Table 26 Biodiversity and Geodiversity
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan A: Sustainability Programmes requirements might
be taken on board Review throughout the Sustainability Appraisal of
Convention on We will take effective and urgent action to halt the loss of habitats and The SA will assess The Plan should aim for net gains Policies, Appraisal Biological species in order to ensure that by 2020 our natural environment is whether the plan in biodiversity and recognise the Diversity: 2010 resilient and can continue to provide the essential services that we contributes to the value of ecosystem services Nagoya agreement would otherwise take for granted resilience of the natural environment. Plans
Scoping Our life insurance, Acknowledges that the 2010 target to achieve a significant reduction The assessment In addition to the intrinsic value of our natural capital: in biodiversity loss would not be met and therefore the strategy aims should take into biodiversity, the Plan should and an EU Biodiversity to meet the following long term 2050 vision: account the multiple recognise that biodiversity and the Strategy to 2020 benefits of biodiversity. services it provides have significant Programmes Report (2011) "By 2050, European Union biodiversity and the ecosystem services economic value. The Plan should it provides — its natural capital — are protected, valued and ensure no further deterioration of appropriately restored for biodiversity's intrinsic value and for protected species and habitats and
(2016) their essential contribution to human wellbeing and economic seek opportunities to restore prosperity, and so that catastrophic changes caused by the loss ecosystems and contribute to the of biodiversity are avoided." consolidation and connectivity of 173 174 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review And the following 2020 target: ecological networks through creation of Green Infrastructure. Halting the loss of biodiversity and the degradation of ecosystem services in the EU by 2020, and restoring them in so far as feasible, of Scoping while stepping up the EU contribution to averting global Policies, biodiversity loss.
In order to meet the 2020 target the following further targets have been Report set: Plans
1. To halt the deterioration in the status of all species and habitats and
(2016) covered by EU nature legislation and achieve a significant and measurable improvement in their status so that, by 2020,
compared to current assessments: (i) 100% more habitat Programmes assessments and 50% more species assessments under the Habitats Directive show an improved conservation status; and (ii) 50% more species assessments under the Birds Directive show a secure or improved status. 2. By 2020, ecosystems and their services are maintained and enhanced by establishing green infrastructure and restoring at least 15 % of degraded ecosystems.
Future targets have been set relating to agriculture, forestry, fisheries, combating invasive alien species and addressing the global biodiversity crisis. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
EC Directive The aim of this Directive shall be to contribute towards ensuring SA objectives on The Plan will need to be subject to 92/43/EEC on the bio-diversity through the conservation of natural habitats and of wild biodiversity will need to a Habitats Regulations assessment Conservation of fauna and flora in the European territory of the Member States to which take account of the to ensure that the Plan will not Natural Habitats the Treaty applies. findings of the HRA. adversely affect the integrity of and of Wild Fauna European Protected Sites and Appendix and Flora 1992 A coherent European ecological network of Special Areas of wildlife. (Habitats Directive) Conservation shall be set up under the title Natura 2000. This network, composed of sites hosting the natural habitat types listed in Annex I and habitats of the species listed in Annex II, shall enable the natural A: Sustainability habitat types and the species' habitats concerned to be maintained or, where appropriate, restored at a favourable conservation status in their Review natural range.
The directive applies to the listed habitats and species both within and of outwith protected sites. Policies, Appraisal In the UK, the Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations 2010, as amended, embed the Directive into UK Law. Plans
Scoping EU Directive Requires the protection and conservation of bird species by: SA objectives on The Plan will need to be subject to 2009/147/EC Birds Designation of Special Protection Areas (SPAs) for rare or biodiversity will need to a Habitats Regulations assessment Directive 2009 vulnerable species listed in Annex 1. take account of the to ensure that the Plan will not and Banning of deliberate killing or capture, destruction or removal of findings of the HRA. adversely affect the integrity of Programmes
Report nests and eggs, disturbance during breeding or rearing of Article European Protected Sites and 1 species. wildlife. Establishment of a general scheme of protection for all wild birds. (2016) 175 176 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review Marine Strategy The Marine Directive aims to achieve Good Environmental Status SA to take account of The Plan will need include policies Framework (GES) of the EU's marine waters by 2020 and to protect the resource effects of the Plan on which aim to protect County Directive base upon which marine-related economic and social activities depend. the Marine Durham's coastline and marine 2008/56/EC It is the first EU legislative instrument related to the protection of marine environment. waters from pollution from land of Scoping biodiversity, as it contains the explicit regulatory objective that based sources (e.g. such as run Policies, "biodiversity is maintained by 2020", as the cornerstone for achieving off and inadequate sewage GES. The Directive enshrines in a legislative framework the ecosystem treatment infrastructure). approach to the management of human activities having an impact on Report the marine environment, integrating the concepts of environmental Plans protection and sustainable use. and
(2016) In order to achieve GES by 2020, each Member State is required to develop a strategy for its marine waters (or Marine Strategy). In
addition, because the Directive follows an adaptive management Programmes approach, the Marine Strategies must be kept up-to-date and reviewed every 6 years. Table 27 Landscape
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
European The European Landscape Convention (ELC) is the first international convention The SA will need to The Plan should include Landscape to focus specifically on landscape, and is dedicated exclusively to the protection, assess the impact of Plan policies to ensure the Convention management and planning of all landscapes in Europe. policies and site conservation of protected
2000 – ratified allocations on landscape landscapes and the Appendix by UK in 2006 The ELC was signed by the UK government on 24 February 2006, ratified on character. appropriate conservation, the 21 November 2006, and became binding on 1 March 2007. enhancement and/ or restoration of other The convention highlights the need to recognise landscape in law, to develop landscapes in the County. A: Sustainability landscape policies dedicated to the protection, management and creation of
landscapes, and to establish procedures for the participation of the general Review public and other stakeholders in the creation and implementation of landscape policies. It also encourages the integration of landscape into all relevant areas of policy, including cultural, economic and social policies. Specific measures include: of Policies, Appraisal Raising awareness of the value of landscapes among all sectors of society, and of society's role in shaping them. Promoting landscape training and education among landscape specialists,
other related professions, and in school and university courses. Plans
Scoping The identification and assessment of landscapes, and analysis of landscape change, with the active participation of stakeholders. Setting objectives for landscape quality, with the involvement of the public. and The implementation of landscape policies, through the establishment of Programmes
Report plans and practical programmes. (2016) 177 178 Sustainability
Table 28 Economy, Education & Skills Appendix
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal Review European Commission The following EU benchmarks for 2020 for The SA framework should include The Local Plan has a vital role to play in (2012), 'Europe 2020: education are set-out in this document: objectives and sub-objectives with the improving educational qualifications and The Strategic At least 95% of children (from 4 to aim to improve education and skills skills of it residents. In particular, policies Framework for compulsory school age) should participate across the County. For example: and allocations should provide a positive of Scoping Education and in early childhood education. Improving education attainment. framework for: Policies, Training' Improving the quality and quantity of Fewer than 15% of 15-year-olds should Improvement in quality and educational/ training services and be under-skilled in reading, mathematics quantity of educational facilities/ facilities. Report
and science. services/ training for children, Ensuring access to educational Plans young people, and adults (e.g. services/ facilities is good via a The rate of early leavers from education Primary, secondary, tertiary, and variety of sustainable modes of and
(2016) and training aged 18-24 should be below life-long learning). transport (access via walking, cycling 10%. and public transport will be
Accessibility of educational particularly important for those on Programmes At least 40% of people aged 30-34 should establishments and facilities. lower incomes and young people). have completed some form of higher Raising education and employment education. aspirations. Ensuring capacity of educational/ At least 15% of adults should participate training facilities meet existing and in lifelong learning. new residents' needs. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
At least 20% of higher education graduates and 6% of 18-34 year-olds with an initial vocational qualification should have spent some time studying or training abroad.
The share of employed graduates (aged Appendix 20-34 with at least upper secondary education attainment and having left education 1-3 years ago) should be at
least 82%. A: Sustainability Review European Commission The Strategy puts forward three mutually The SA framework should reflect These EU targets should be supported by (2010), 'Europe 2020: reinforcing priorities: these strategic priorities and help to Local Plan policies. In particular policies A European strategy ensure that Local Plan policies should seek to increase the quality and of for smart, sustainable Smart growth: developing an economy contribute towards meeting them. quantity of employment opportunities, Policies,
Appraisal and inclusive growth' based on knowledge and innovation. reduce unemployment rates, raise educational aspirations and grow a low Sustainable growth: promoting a more carbon economy across the County. resource efficient, greener and more competitive economy. Plans Scoping Inclusive growth: fostering a high-employment economy delivering and social and territorial cohesion. Programmes Report
The EU needs to define where it wants to be by 2020. To this end, the Commission proposes (2016) the following EU headline targets: 179 180 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
75% of the population aged 20-64 should A: Appraisal be employed. Review
3% of the EU's GDP should be invested in R&D. of Scoping The "20/20/20" climate/energy targets Policies, should be met (including an increase to 30% of emissions reduction if the conditions are right). Report Plans The share of early school leavers should be under 10% and at least 40% of the and (2016) younger generation should have a tertiary degree. Programmes
20 million less people should be at risk of poverty. Table 29 Transport and Accessibility
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and might be taken on board Programmes throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
European The guiding principle of this White Paper is the commitment to grow The SA should assess how the Plan The Local Plan should seek Commission transport and support mobility whilst still reaching the 60% carbon seeks to contribute to these goals and to contribute to these EU (2010), 'White emissions reduction target (from 2010 levels by 2050). To do this, encourage the move towards a more goals by requiring new Paper on it establishes 10 goals for a competitive and resource-efficient sustainable and resource-efficient development to deliver
Transport: A transport system: transport system. Particular sustainable travel by: Appendix Roadmap to a consideration should be given to Single Developing and deploying new and sustainable fuels and propulsion goals 1, 3, 8 & 9. Delivering, Transport systems accommodating and Area, Smart, facilitating investment A: Sustainability Mobility for 1. Halve the use of ‘conventionally fuelled’ cars in urban transport in walking, cycling, bus
People and by 2030; phase them out in cities by 2050; achieve essentially and rail transport, Review Business' CO2-free city logistics in major urban centres by 2030. alternative fuel vehicles and car sharing. 2. Low-carbon sustainable fuels in aviation to reach 40% by 2050; Providing appropriate, also by 2050 reduce EU CO2 emissions from maritime bunker fuels well-designed of by 40% (if feasible 50%). permeable and direct Policies, Appraisal routes for all modes of Optimising the performance of multi-modal logistic chains, including transport, so that new by making greater use of more energy-efficient modes. developments clearly
link to existing routes Plans
Scoping 3. 30% of road freight over 300 km should shift to other modes such for the convenience of as rail or waterborne transport by 2030, and more than 50% by all users.
2050, facilitated by efficient and green freight corridors. To meet and this goal will also require appropriate infrastructure to be developed. The Local Plan should also Programmes
Report encourage and support the 4. By 2050, complete a European high-speed rail network. Triple shift from road to rail when the length of the existing high-speed rail network by 2030 and moving freight. maintain a dense railway network in all Member States. By 2050
(2016) the majority of medium-distance passenger transport should go by rail. 181 182 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and might be taken on board Programmes throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
5. A fully functional and EU-wide multi-modal TEN-T ‘core network’ A: Appraisal by 2030, with a high-quality and capacity network by 2050 and a Review corresponding set of information services.
6. By 2050, connect all core network airports to the rail network, preferably high-speed; ensure that all core seaports are sufficiently of Scoping connected to the rail freight and, where possible, inland waterway Policies, system.
Increasing the efficiency of transport and of infrastructure use with Report information systems and market-based incentives. Plans
7. Deployment of the modernised air traffic management and
(2016) infrastructure (SESAR) in Europe by 2020 and completion of the European common aviation area. Deployment of equivalent land
and waterborne transport management systems (ERTMS), (ITS), Programmes (SSN and LRIT), (RIS). Deployment of the European global navigation satellite system (Galileo).
8. By 2020, establish the framework for a European multi-modal transport information, management and payment system.
9. By 2050, move close to zero fatalities in road transport. In line with this goal, the EU aims at halving road casualties by 2020. Make sure that the EU is a world leader in safety and security of transport in all modes of transport.
10. Move towards full application of ‘user pays’ and ‘polluter pays’ principles and private sector engagement to eliminate distortions, including harmful subsidies, generate revenues and ensure financing for future transport investments. National
Table 30 Sustainable Development
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Securing the Identifies four UK priorities for action which include: Sustainability Appraisal framework Principles should be used to shape Plan Future: UK must embody principles and policies. Government Sustainable consumption and production. priorities to cross check against Appendix Sustainable Climate change and energy. Plan policies as they develop. Development Natural resource protection and environmental Strategy (2005) enhancement.
Creating sustainable communities and a fairer A: Sustainability world. Review
The strategy also sets out five guiding principles that will be used to achieve sustainable
development in the UK. These are as follows: of Policies,
Appraisal Living within environmental limits. Ensuring a strong healthy just society. Achieving a sustainable economy. Promoting good governance. Plans Using sound science responsibly. Scoping
National Planning Sets out that the purpose of the planning system The SA will play a crucial role in The Plan should include policies which and Policy Framework is to contribute to the achievement of sustainable advising upon the sustainability define what sustainable development looks
(2012) (Para 6-15) development. Social, economic and environmental issues of the County that the Plan like in County Durham and how developers Programmes Report gains should be sought jointly and simultaneously should aim to address and the can demonstrate their proposals contribute through the planning system. Sets out a criteria by which developers towards its achievement. The Plan in itself presumption in favour of sustainable development should demonstrate that their should contribute towards the achievement
(2016) so that it is clear that development which is proposals contribute to sustainable of sustainable development by: sustainable can be approved without delay. development. Ensuring that sufficient land of the right type is available in the right places and 183 184 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
at the right time to support growth and A: Appraisal innovation. Review Providing the supply of housing required to meet the needs of present and future generations and by creating of a high quality built environment with Scoping accessible local services. Policies, Contributing to protecting and enhancing the natural, built and historic environment. Report Plans
Table 31 Climate Change and Adaptation and (2016) Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan
and Programmes requirements might be taken Programmes on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Climate Change Commits the UK to reducing emissions by at least 80% in The SA will need to assess the Greenhouse gas emission targets are Act (2008) 2050 from 1990. Also requires the Government to set legally Plan's individual and cumulative fundamental to sustainable binding carbon budgets (i.e. a cap on the amount of contribution towards reducing development and therefore to the Plan greenhouse gases emitted in the UK over a five year period). greenhouse gas emissions. as a whole. Particularly in relation to the location and nature of development and the potential to reduce energy demand (and carbon dioxide emissions) associated with development. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Reducing the need for transport, and encouraging sustainable transport and sustainable construction and design in new development are key ways the Plan can contribute. Appendix UK Low Carbon Plan aims to deliver emission cuts of 18% on 2008 levels by The SA will need to assess plan Plan policies should require high Transition Plan 2020. Key steps include: policies in relation to their standards of energy efficiency and (National Strategy Getting 40% of electricity from low carbon sources by compatibility and contribution use of renewable and low carbon for Climate and 2020. with the aims and targets set out technologies. Policies should support A: Sustainability Energy) (2009) Producing around 30% of electricity from renewables in the UK's Carbon Plans. the development of infrastructure that by 2020. will enable the mass roll out of Review technology e.g. Electric charging The Carbon Plan: Sets out the plan to put the UK on a path towards an 80% points for vehicles. Delivering our reduction by 2050: of Low Carbon In order to meet 2020 targets need to complete the Policies,
Appraisal Future (2011) 'easy wins' that have helped emission to fall by a quarter since 1990 e.g. insulating all remaining cavity walls and lofts. 2020's require a change of gear, requiring mass development of technology. Plans Scoping By 2030 aim is for up to around of the half of the heat used in buildings may come come form low carbon and technologies such as air or ground source heat pumps, more electric or hydrogen fuel cell cars, new low carbon Programmes
Report power station, a mix of carbon capturer and storage, renewables and nuclear power. (2016) 185 186 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
National Planning Local planning authorities should adopt proactive strategies Requirement to take account of Allocation of sites for development A: Appraisal Policy Framework to mitigate and adapt to climate change, taking full account these issues in the assessment within the Plan should take account Review (2012) (Para 94 of flood risk, coastal change and water supply and demand to inform decisions about the of flood risk, coastal squeeze and and 95) considerations. To support the move to a low carbon future, allocation of sites. The SA will water availability. Sites should be local planning authorities should: also need to assess the Plans allocated in locations which reduce of Plan for new development in locations which reduce contribution towards building the need to travel and design criteria Scoping greenhouse gas emissions. standards and their contribution should be included within policy that Policies, Actively support energy efficiency improvements to to improving upon current levels sets the standards for energy existing buildings. of energy efficiency and efficiency and low carbon, renewable When setting any local requirement for a building's generation from either energy generation. Report sustainability, do so in a way which is consistent with renewable or low carbon Plans the Government's zero carbon buildings policy and sources. adopt nationally described standards. and (2016) National Government's long term strategy to address the main risks To assess how policies The Plan should include policies Adaptation and opportunities identified in the UK Climate Change Risk contribute towards improving which will help County Durham adapt Programmes Programme (2013) Assessment. Acknowledges that every £1 spent on resilience to climate change and to the impacts of climate change. adaptation represents 4 times its value in potential damages. encourage acknowledgement Overarching vision is for: and understating of the issues.
A society which makes timely, far-sighted and well informed decisions to address the risks and opportunities posed by a changing climate.
Four broad overarching objectives include:
Increasing awareness. Increasing resilience to current extremes. Taking timely action for long-lead time measures Addressing major evidence gaps.
The specific objective for Spatial Planning is: Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
To provide a clear local planning framework to enable all participants in the planning system to deliver sustainable new development, including infrastructure that minimises vulnerability and provides resilience to the impacts of climate change. Appendix Table 32 Energy
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken A: Sustainability on board throughout the
Sustainability Appraisal Review
National Acknowledges that the UK is starting form a very low level of The SA should assess the Plan's The Plan should encourage the Renewable renewable energy consumption compared to other EU members. contribution towards improving uptake and use of a range of Energy Action However, delivering 15% renewable energy by 2020 is feasible upon existing levels of energy renewable energy technologies of
Plan for the UK through domestic action and could be achieved with the following generation by renewable and set criteria by which Policies, Appraisal proportion of energy consumption in each sector coming from sources. renewable energy proposals will renewable: be determined. In addition, the Plan should encourage use of
Around 30% of electricity demand, including 2% from small renewable technologies to Plans scale sources. generate heat. This may be of Scoping 12% of heat demand. particular importance to reducing
10% of transport demand. carbon emissions in off gas areas and across the County.
Key areas for renewable energy development for the Government Programmes Report include offshore wind, marine energy and anaerobic digestion. (2016) 187 188 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
House of Aims to give local communities the final say on wind turbines. The SA should identify social, Suitable areas for wind energy will A: Appraisal Commons: Requires that when determining planning applications of wind economic and environmental need to be clearly allocated within Review Written energy development involving one or more wind turbines, local constraints related to the the Plan. Statement planning authorities should only grant planning permission if: identified areas and ensure that (HCWS42) DCLG The development site is an area identified as suitable for any associated policy criteria is of (June 2015) wind energy development in a Local or Neighbourhood Plan. robust enough to address the Scoping Following consultation, it can be demonstrated that the potential implications identified. Policies, planning impacts identified by affected local communities have been fully addresses and therefore the proposal has their backing. Report Plans The Energy Act The Act establishes a legislative framework for delivering secure, The SA will need to assess how Plan policies should address the (2013) affordable and low carbon energy and includes the following far the Plan contributes towards objectives set out in the NPPF. and (2016) provisions that may be of relevance to the Plan: meeting the objectives set out in Opportunities for example for Enables the Secretary of State to set a 2030 decarbonisation the NPPF. district heating should be sought. target range for the electricity sector in secondary legislation. Programmes Puts in place measures to attract investment which is needed to replace current generating capacity and upgrade the grid by 2020, and to cope with a rising demand for electricity. Includes a provision to allow the FITs scheme to include community energy projects with a capacity of up to 10MW (an increase of 5MW).
National To help increase the use and supply of renewable and low carbon The SA will need to assess how Plan policies should address the Planning Policy energy local planning authorities should: far the Plan contributes towards objectives set out in the NPPF. Framework Have a positive strategy to promote energy from renewable meeting the objectives set out in Opportunities for example for (2012) (Para 97) and low carbon sources. the NPPF. district heating should be sought. Design their policies to maximise renewable and low carbon energy development while ensuring that adverse impacts are addressed. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Consider identifying suitable areas for renewable and low carbon energy sources, and supporting infrastructure. Support community-led initiatives for renewable and low carbon energy. Identify opportunities where development can draw its energy supply from decentralised, renewable or low carbon Appendix energy supply systems and for co-locating potential heat customers and suppliers.
Table 33 Air Quality A: Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Review and Programmes requirements might be taken Plan on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal of
Air Quality This Strategy describes the plans drawn up by the Government and the The SA should assess how far The Plan should Policies, Appraisal Strategy for devolved administrations to improve and protect ambient air quality in the UK the Plan contributes to contain air quality England, in the medium-term. protecting and improving air policies to set a Scotland, Wales quality. Cumulative and trans strategic framework to
and Northern “Standard” and “Objective” concentrations of a range of air pollutants are set boundary effects will be an deal with air quality in Plans
Scoping Ireland, DEFRA out in the strategy as a guide for local authorities and regulatory authorities important consideration. the local planning 2007 (e.g. the Environment Agency) to identify problems. In particular for local system.
authorities, this means identifying specific areas which need to be designated and as Air Quality Management Areas, and for which an Air Quality Action Plan
is needed to ensure improvements in air quality are made. Programmes Report
The proposals aim to protect people’s health and the environment (vegetation, soils and water) without imposing unacceptable economic or social costs.
(2016) There are moves to incorporate the consideration of the protection of sensitive ecosystems within the standards and objectives in the future. 189 190 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken Plan on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
The planning systems across the UK for land use and transport planning are A: Appraisal an important part of an integrated approach to air quality improvements. The Review UK Government provide planning authorities with guidance when considering new developments with emphasis on accessibility for public transport, park and ride schemes, walking and cycling. These can all help reduce the number of journeys by car and the emissions to air. of Scoping Policies,
Air Pollution, Highlights the additional health benefits that can be achieved through closer The SA should highlight any Plan policies on air Action in a integration of air quality and climate change policies in future. In particular, inconsistencies in approach i.e quality and climate Report
Changing the publication includes the following key messages: where tackling climate change change should be Plans Climate Defra Air pollution often originates from the same activities that contribute to is to the detriment of air quality integrated to maximise (2010) climate change (notably transport and electricity generation) so it makes and seek to recommend the benefits of tackling and
(2016) sense to consider how the linkages between air quality and climate measures which are mutually both issues together. change policy areas can be managed to best effect. beneficial.
The UK’s commitment to build a Low Carbon Economy by 2050 will Programmes reduce air pollution but the choices made to get there will affect the extent of air quality improvements. Optimising climate policy decisions to account for air pollution could yield additional benefits of approximately £24 billion by 2050. Air quality/ climate change co-benefits can be realised through actions such as promoting low-carbon vehicles and renewable sources of energy that do not involve combustion. At the same time, actions that tackle climate change but damage air quality must be avoided. Action will be needed at international, EU, national, regional and local levels to make sure air quality and climate change policies are integrated to maximise the co-benefits of tackling both air pollution and climate change together and ensure ambitious but realistic air quality targets are set for the future. Table 34 Water
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and SA might be taken on board Programmes throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
The Water Act Amongst other aspects, objectives include: The SA should assess the Plans The Plan should ensure Policies require (2003) The sustainable use of water resources. contribution towards water new development to incorporate water The promotion of water conservation. neutrality. efficiency measures and contributes to water neutrality. Appendix Future Water – National strategy setting out a vision for water policy and The SA should assess the Plan's The Plan should include policies on A Water management, where by 2030 at the latest, England has: contribution to meeting the aims of protecting ground and surface water Strategy for Improved the quality of the water environment and the Strategy. Objectives on water resources, flood risk and sustainable England 2008 the ecology which it supports and continued to provide quality, efficiency, surface flooding water use and management in A: Sustainability high levels of drinking water quality. will be included within SA development.
Sustainably managed risks from flooding and coastal objectives. Review erosion, with greater understanding and more effective management of surface water. Ensured a sustainable use of water resources, and of implemented fair, affordable and cost-effective water charges. Policies, Appraisal Cut greenhouse gas emissions. Embedded continuous adaptation to climate change and other pressures across the water industry and water uses. Plans Scoping National Local planning authorities should adopt proactive strategies The SA will need to take into The Plan should minimise the risk of Planning Policy to mitigate and adapt to climate change, taking full account account evidence on water supply, pollution and damage to surface, and Framework of flood risk, coastal change and water supply and demand demands and infrastructure ground and coastal waters through Programmes
Report (2012) (Paras considerations. requirements as part of the careful location of infrastructure, roads 94, 109, 156 assessment. and new development and appropriate and 162) The planning system should contribute to and enhance the mitigation. natural and local environment by preventing both new and (2016) existing development from contributing to or being put at Promote sustainable water use and discharges in new development. 191 192 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and SA might be taken on board Programmes throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
unacceptable risk from, or being adversely affected by In addition account should be taken of A: Appraisal unacceptable levels of soil, air, water or noise pollution or existing water supply and demand and Review land instability. how this may change with an increased population and climate change along Local planning authorities should set out the strategic with the need for any new or improved priorities for the area in the Local Plan. This should include water / wastewater infrastructure to of Scoping strategic policies to deliver the provision of infrastructure meet existing and planned growth. Policies, for transport, telecommunications, waste management, water supply, wastewater, flood risk and coastal change management and the provision of minerals and energy Report (including heat). Plans
Local planning authorities should work with other authorities and
(2016) and providers to assess the quality and capacity of infrastructure for transport, water supply, wastewater and
its treatment, energy (including heat), telecommunications, Programmes utilities, waste, health, social care, education, flood risk and coastal change management and its ability to meet forecast demands.
Flood and Local authorities to act as lead local flood authorities and The SA should ensure that The Plan will need to take account of Water take a lead role in managing flood risk from surface water, vulnerable development is sited measures and issues identified within Management groundwater and ordinary water courses. By 2015 they outside of flood risk areas and that the Flood Risk Management Strategy Act 2010 must: the measures outlined within the and ensure that Plan Policies direct Apply and monitor a Local Flood Risk Management Surface Water Management Plan development to locations at little or no Strategy. are incorporated into mitigation risk of flooding and that development Maintain a register of local structures and features measures. For instance, SUDs does not contribute to increasing flood likely to have a significant effect on flood risk. strategies should be included in risk elsewhere. Act as a Sustainable Drainage Approving Body. development as recommended in the Surface Water Management Plan and as required to alleviate Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and SA might be taken on board Programmes throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
flooding from surface water systems.
Table 35 Soil
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Sustainability Appraisal Review Safeguarding our Acknowledges that soil in England continues to face three main threats The SA will need to The Plan should seek to protect Soils: A Strategy from soil erosion by wind, compaction and organic matter decline, all assess the Plans better quality agricultural land and for England of which may be magnified by climate change. Sets out the following impact upon soil peatland and seek opportunities to
(2009) vision and objectives: resources. remediate degraded/ contaminated of
land. Guidance to developers on Policies, Appraisal "By 2030, all England's soils will be managed sustainably and how to best protect and manage soil degradation threats tackled successfully. This will improve the quality could be provided within the Natural of England's soils and safeguard their ability to provide essential services environment SPD. for future generations." Plans
Scoping Better protection for agricultural land.
Protecting and enhancing stores of soil carbon. and Building the resilience of soils to a changing climate.
Preventing soil pollution. Programmes Report Effective soil protection during construction and development. Dealing with our legacy of contaminated land. (2016) 193 194 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review The National The planning system should contribute to and enhance the natural and The SA will include The Plan should ensure the Planning Policy local environment by preventing both new and existing development objectives on soil protection of soil from pollution (run Framework from contributing to or being put at unacceptable risk from, or being quality, effective use of off contribute to this), encourage the (2012) (Paras adversely affected by unacceptable levels of soil, air, water or noise land and land use of brownfield land, protect better of Scoping 109,111,112 and pollution or land instability. remediation. quality agricultural land and ensure Policies, 143) policies are in place which require Planning policies and decisions should encourage the effective use of the restoration of land following the land by re-using land that has been previously developed (brownfield cessation of, for example, minerals Report land), provided that it is not of high environmental value. Local planning working. Plans authorities may continue to consider the case for setting a locally appropriate target for the use of brownfield land. and (2016) Local planning authorities should take into account the economic and
other benefits of the best and most versatile agricultural land. Where Programmes significant development of agricultural land is demonstrated to be necessary, local planning authorities should seek to use areas of poorer quality land in preference to that of a higher quality.
Put in place policies to ensure worked land is reclaimed at the earliest opportunity, taking account of aviation safety, and that high quality restoration and aftercare of mineral sites takes place, including for agriculture (safeguarding the long term potential of best and most versatile agricultural land and conserving soil resources), geodiversity, biodiversity, native woodland, the historic environment and recreation. Table 36 Minerals and Waste
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Minerals Mineral planning authorities should plan for the steady and The SA will need to assess The Plan should take account of what Planning adequate supply of minerals. the impact of mineral sites supply of minerals are likely to be Practice Guide and policies against all the required over the Plan period and
(17/10/2014) The environmental issues of mineral working that should be factors listed. where possible allocate specif sites Appendix addressed include: to address need. Prior to allocating sites, consideration should be given Noise to whether potentially adverse effects Dust can either be avoided or minimised. A: Sustainability Air quality Policies should include details of Lighting restoration requirements. Review Visual impact Landscape character
Archaeological and heritage features of
Traffic Policies,
Appraisal Risk of contaminated land Soil resources Geological structure
Impact on best and most versatile agricultural land Plans
Scoping Blast vibration Flood risk
Wildlife and Impact on nationally protected landscapes Programmes
Report Impact on nationally protected geological sites Site restoration and aftercare Surface and ground water issues
(2016) Water abstraction 195 196 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal Mineral plans should include policies to ensure worked land is Review reclaimed at the earliest opportunity and that high quality restoration and aftercare of mineral sites take place. of Scoping National Since minerals are a finite natural resource, and can only be worked The SA will assess policies When determining likely supply of Policies, Planning Policy where they are found, it is important to make best use of them to against the need to ensure mineral resource over the Plan period Framework secure their long-term conservation. the efficient use of minerals due regard should be given to the (2012) (Par 142 resources. In addition, the quantities of available secondary and Report
and 143) So far as practicable, take account of the contribution that substitute SA will ensure that policies recycled materials. The Plan should Plans or secondary and recycled materials and minerals waste would and criteria are suitably also include policies and associated make to the supply of materials, before considering extraction of detailed and robust in environmental criteria by which and
(2016) primary materials, whilst aiming to source minerals supplies relation to the potential planning applications will be decided. indigenously set out environmental criteria, in line with the policies social and environmental
in this Framework, against which planning applications will be effects of mineral Programmes assessed so as to ensure that permitted operations do not have development. unacceptable adverse impacts on the natural and historic environment or human health.
Put in place policies to ensure worked land is reclaimed at the earliest opportunity.
Planning for Mineral planning authorities are encouraged to make appropriate The SA will need to assess The Plan should make clear the Hydrocarbon provision for hydrocarbons in local mineral plans the approach outlined and approach to fracking and Extraction: any alternatives. underground coal gasification. Planning Practice Guidance (2014) Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Waste Acknowledges that the way in which waste is managed has The SA should assess The Plan should compliment the Management changed dramatically over the last twenty years in the UK, as have Policies against their ability Waste Management Plan for England Plan for England attitudes to waste management. There has been a major decrease to reduce waste and by setting out within Policy how the (2013) in waste being disposed of to landfill and an increase in recycling. encourage the sustainable Plan will contribute towards a more The key aim of the Plan is to set out the work towards a zero waste and efficient use of sustainable and efficient approach to economy as part of the transition to a sustainable economy. The resources. resource use and management. Appendix Plan incorporates the following obligations of the Waste Regulations 2011 which have been transposed from the revised Waste Framework Directive. Measures will be taken to ensure that by 2020: A: Sustainability At least 50% by weight of waste from households is prepared for reuse or recycled. Review At least 70% by weight of construction and demolition waste is subjected to material recovery. of National This document sets out detailed waste planning policies. The SA will assess the The Plan should contribute to waste Policies,
Appraisal Planning Policy Acknowledges that positive planning plays a pivotal role in delivering Plan's contribution towards management by ensuring that: for Waste (2014) the country’s waste ambitions through: sustainable waste Development enables easy Delivery of sustainable development and resource efficiency, management. storage and recycling of waste. including provision of modern infrastructure, local employment New waste facilities are located opportunities and wider climate change benefits, by driving in line with the proximity Plans Scoping waste management up the waste hierarchy; principle.
New waste facilities avoid or and Ensuring that waste management is considered alongside minimise their impact upon other spatial planning concerns, such as housing and communities and the Programmes Report transport, recognising the positive contribution that waste environment. management can make to the development of sustainable communities; (2016) 197 198 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal Providing a framework in which communities and businesses Review are engaged with and take more responsibility for their own waste, including by enabling waste to be disposed of or, in the case of mixed municipal waste from households, recovered, in line with the proximity principle; of Scoping Policies, Helping to secure the re-use, recovery or disposal of waste without endangering human health and without harming the environment; and Report Plans Ensuring the design and layout of new residential and commercial development and other infrastructure (such as and (2016) safe and reliable transport links) complements sustainable waste management, including the provision of appropriate storage and segregation facilities to facilitate high quality Programmes collections of waste. Table 37 Biodiversity and Geodiversity
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
The Natural Acknowledges that the National Ecosystem Assessment shows that over 30% The SA should Development allocated within Choice: of the services provide by the natural environment are in decline. Whilst the inform the best the Plan should be guided to
securing the Lawton Report (Making Space for Nature) found that nature in England is highly locations for new locations which avoid harm Appendix value of nature fragmented and unable to respond effectively to new pressures such as climate development and where possible or can be - The Natural and demographic change. ensure policies mitigated. Opportunities for Environment within the Plan enhancement of ecosystems White Paper Recognises that focusing on individual species and sites remains important but stipulate and ecological networks should A: Sustainability (2011) this needs to happen at a larger scale so that habitats are better able to support requirement to be sought. In addition Policies
more species and conservation action focuses on whole natural systems. In contribute towards should set out the the Review order to recover nature the White Paper intends to move from net biodiversity net gains at an expectations of new loss to net gain by: ecological network development in relation to scale. enhancing biodiversity in order Establishing Local Nature Partnerships. to provide net gains. of Creating Nature Improvement Areas. Policies, Appraisal Take a strategic approach to planning for nature.
The approach will guide development to the best locations, encourage greener
design and enable development to enhance natural networks. (concept of Plans
Scoping biodiversity offsetting is also introduced). and Biodiversity Aims to build on the Natural Environment White Paper and set the strategic SA to take account The Plan should contribute to
2020: A strategy direction for biodiversity policy for the next decade. Compliments the EU of targets and targets and policies are to set Programmes Report for England's commitments by providing a National vision for England and 2020 mission: baseline conditions out approach to protecting and wildlife and in the assessment. improving SSSI's, protected ecosystem Vision: and priority species and
(2016) services (2011) coherent and resilient ecological networks. 199 200 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and requirements Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review By 2050 our land and seas will be rich in wildlife, our biodiversity will be valued, conserved, restored, managed sustainably and be more resilient and able to adapt to change, providing essential services and delivering benefits for everyone. of Scoping Mission: Policies,
Our mission is to halt overall biodiversity loss, support healthy well-functioning ecosystems and establish coherent, resilient ecological networks, with more and Report better places for nature for the benefit of wildlife and people. Plans
Outcome 1 - Habitats and ecosystems on land by 2020: and (2016) 1A. Better wildlife habitats with 90% of priority habitats in favourable or
recovering condition and at least 50% of SSSIs in favourable condition, Programmes while maintaining at least 95% in favourable or recovering condition.
1B. More, bigger and less fragmented areas for wildlife, with no net loss of priority habitat and an increase in the overall extent of priority habitats by at least 200,000 ha.
1C. By 2020, at least 17% of land and inland water, especially areas of particular importance for biodiversity and ecosystem services, conserved through effective, integrated and joined up approaches to safeguard biodiversity and ecosystem services including through management of our existing systems of protected areas and the establishment of nature improvement areas.
1D. Restoring at least 15% of degraded ecosystems as a contribution to climate change mitigation and adaptation. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Outcome 2 – Marine habitats, ecosystems and fisheries
2A. By the end of 2016 in excess of 25% of English waters will be contained in a well-managed Marine Protected Area network that helps deliver ecological coherence by conserving representative marine habitats; Appendix
2B. By 2020 we will be managing and harvesting fish sustainably;
2C. By 2022 we will have marine plans in place covering the whole of A: Sustainability England’s marine area, ensuring the sustainable development of our seas, integrating economic growth, social need and ecosystem management. Review
Outcome 3 – Species of Policies,
Appraisal By 2020, we will see an overall improvement in the status of our wildlife and will have prevented further human-induced extinctions of known threatened species.
Outcome 4 – People Plans
Scoping By 2020, significantly more people will be engaged in biodiversity issues, aware of its value and taking positive action. and Programmes
Report National The planning system should contribute to and enhance the natural and local The principles of the The Plan should set out the Planning Policy environment by: NPPF should be approach to protecting and Framework taken into account improving different tiers of (2012) (Paras Minimising impacts on biodiversity and providing net gains in biodiversity throughout the SA. biodiversity protection but at (2016) 109, 113, 114, where possible, contributing to the Government's commitment to halt the the same time ensure that a 117) 201 202 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and requirements Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review overall decline in biodiversity, including by establishing coherent ecological positive approach to protecting networks that are more resilient to current and future pressure. and enhancing biodiversity and ecological networks at a Local planning authorities should set criteria based policies against which landscape scale is taken, of Scoping proposals for any development on or affecting protected wildlife or geodiversity taking into account cross Policies, sites or landscape areas will be judged. Distinctions should be made between boundary issues. the hierarchy of international, national and locally designated sites, so that protection is commensurate with their status and gives appropriate weight to Report their importance and the contribution that they make to wider ecological networks. Plans
To minimise impacts on biodiversity and geodiversity, planning policies should: and (2016) Plan for biodiversity at a landscape-scale across local authority boundaries. Programmes Identify and map components of the local ecological networks, including the hierarchy of international, national and locally designated sites of importance for biodiversity, wildlife corridors and stepping stones that connect them and areas identified by local partnerships for habitat restoration or creation.
Promote the preservation, restoration and re-creation of priority habitats, ecological networks and the protection and recovery of priority species populations, linked to national and local targets, and identify suitable indicators for monitoring biodiversity in the plan.
Aim to prevent harm to geological conservation interests.
Where Nature Improvement Areas are identified in Local Plans, consider specifying the types of development that may be appropriate in these Areas. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Marine Coastal Through the act the UK Government introduced a number of measures to deliver N/A The Plan is to have regard to Access Act 2009 its vision of a clean, healthy, safe, productive and biologically diverse oceans the Marine Plan and associated and seas. These measures included providing for the introduction of a marine planning process. planning system, the functions of which were delegated to the Marine Management Organisation in 2010. Marine Plans, together with the Marine Policy Appendix Statement underpin the new planning system for England's seas.
The North East Inshore and Offshore Plans are yet to be produced. A: Sustainability Review Table 38 Landscape
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be of
taken on board Policies, Appraisal throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
National Planning Great weight should be given to conserving landscape and The SA will consider the Plan policies should set out the Plans Policy Framework scenic beauty in National Parks, the Broads and Areas of effect of policies upon approach to protecting the North Scoping (2012) (Paras 115, Outstanding Natural Beauty, which have the highest status of protected landscapes. Pennines AONB. Policies should
116 and 125) protection in relation to landscape and scenic beauty. The also promote good design to ensure and conservation of wildlife and cultural heritage are important new development relates well to its
considerations in all these areas, and should be given great setting and does not impact upon Programmes Report weight in National Parks and the Broads. the character, wildlife and amenity value of landscapes. Planning permission should be refused for major developments
(2016) in these designated areas except in exceptional circumstances and where it can be demonstrated they are in the public interest. 203 204 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal By encouraging good design, planning policies and decisions Review should limit the impact of light pollution from artificial light on local amenity, intrinsically dark landscapes and nature conservation. of Scoping Policies,
Table 39 Heritage
Report Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Plans and Programmes requirements might be taken on board
throughout the and (2016) Sustainability Appraisal Programmes Planning (Listed Buildings which are listed or which lie within a conservation area are SA to assess the impact of Plan policies to be in conformity Buildings and protected by law under this Act. Prior consent is required for the the Plan on designated with law and set out approach Conservation following: assets including to protecting and enhancing Areas) Act (1990) All works affecting a scheduled monument or the ground Conservation Areas. listed heritage and assets within surrounding it require scheduled monument consent. a Conservation Area. The demolition or alteration of a listed building and historic structures within its grounds requires listed building consent. The demolition of an unlisted building in a conservation area requires Conservation Area consent. Alterations to the exterior of all buildings may also require planning permission and an application may be needed for some works to houses in conservation areas.
Ancient Section 61(12) defines sites that warrant protection due to their being SA to assess the impact of Plan policies to be in conformity Monuments and of national importance as 'ancient monuments'. These can be either the Plan on ancient with law and set out approach Scheduled Ancient Monuments or "any other monument which in the Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Archaeological opinion of the Secretary of State is of public interest by reason of the monuments and to protecting and enhancing Areas Act (1979) historic, architectural, traditional, artistic or archaeological interest archaeological features ancient monuments and attaching to it". Damage to an ancient monument is a criminal offence archaeological areas and any works taking place within one require Scheduled Monument Consent from the Secretary of State. Appendix The Government’s This document is intended to help Government to realise its vision for SA to ensure policies Plan to recognise the need to Statement on the the historic environment and to assist us in working jointly with others provide sufficient levels of protect and manage heritage for Historic to achieve our aims. In it we set out our understanding of the value of protection and to assess present and future generations Environment for the historic environment and the many roles that Government and others the Plan's impact upon and ensure that all heritage A: Sustainability England 2010 can play. designated and non assets are afforded an
designated heritage appropriate level of protection. Review The key points from the statement are: assets. Encourage re-use of buildings and heritage assets. Strategic Leadership: Ensure that relevant policy, guidance, and standards across Government emphasize our responsibility to of manage England’s historic environment for present and future Policies, Appraisal generations. Protective Framework: Ensure that all heritage assets are afforded an appropriate and effective level of protection, while allowing,
where appropriate, for well managed and intelligent change. Plans
Scoping Local Capacity: Encourage structures, skills and systems at a local level which: promote early consideration of the historic environment; ensure that local decision makers have access to and the expertise they need; and provide sufficiently skilled people to Programmes
Report execute proposed changes to heritage assets sensitively and sympathetically. Public Involvement: Promote opportunities to place people and communities at the centre of the designation and management of (2016) 205 206 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal their local historic environment and to make use of heritage as a Review focus for learning and community identity at all levels. Direct Ownership: Ensure all heritage assets in public ownership meet appropriate standards of care and use while allowing, where of appropriate, for well managed and intelligent change. Scoping Policies, Sustainable Future: Seek to promote the role of the historic environment within the Government’s response to climate change and as part of its sustainable development agenda. Report Plans
National Planning Local planning authorities should set out in their Local Plan a positive SA to help identify Plan to set out a positive and
(2016) Policy Framework strategy for the conservation and enjoyment of the historic environment, opportunities for the strategy for the conservation of (2012) (Para 126) including heritage assets most at risk through neglect, decay or other positive conservation and the County's heritage assets,
threats. In doing so, they should recognise that heritage assets are an management of heritage recognising the wider social, Programmes irreplaceable resource and conserve them in a manner appropriate to assets. economic and environmental their significance. In developing this strategy, local planning authorities benefits that conservation of the should take into account: historic environment can bring. The desirability of sustaining and enhancing the significance of Policies to require that new heritage assets and putting them to viable uses consistent with development makes a positive their conservation. contribution to local character and distinctiveness. The wider social, cultural, economic and environmental benefits that conservation of the historic environment can bring.
The desirability of new development making a positive contribution to local character and distinctiveness.
Opportunities to draw on the contribution made by the historic environment to the character of a place. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCMS (2010) Sets out the government’s vision for the historic environment in that it Ensure appropriate weight Policies should seek to preserve Government is an asset of enormous cultural, social, economic and environmental is given in the SA process and enhance the Historic Vision Statement value. to the historic environment Environment. on the Historic and suggest suitable Environment Strategic aims include: mitigation where impacts may occur. Appendix Ensure that all heritage assets are afforded an appropriate and effective level of protection, while allowing, where appropriate, for well managed and intelligent change. Seek to promote the role of the historic environment within the A: Sustainability Government’s response to climate change and as part of its sustainable development agenda. Review
Table 40 Housing of
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Policies, Appraisal Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal Plans DCLG (2014) PPG: This provides guidance to local authorities in SA should support the sustainable Due to the rural nature of County Durham Scoping Rural Housing how to consider rural housing policies in their growth of rural communities across the Local Plan should give particular
Local Plans. the County by taking into attention to helping to ensure the future and consideration the particular vitality of local villages/ hamlets by
It is important to recognise the particular issues implications of housing allocations and supporting sustainable growth through Programmes Report facing rural areas in terms of housing supply policies in rural areas (e.g. West policies and allocations. and affordability and the role of housing in Durham). The need for housing that supporting the broader sustainability of villages meets the needs of older people The Local Plan should undertake a housing
(2016) and smaller settlements. need assessment and identify thresholds for the different Delivery Areas across the 207 208 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
A thriving rural community in a living, working should also be taken into County, with particular consideration given A: Appraisal countryside depends, in part, on retaining local consideration so that there is an affordability and potential site size Review services and community facilities such as appropriate mix of housing. thresholds for West Durham. schools, local shops, cultural venues, public houses and places of worship. Rural housing is essential to ensure viable use of these local of Scoping facilities. Policies,
Assessing housing need and allocating sites should be considered at a strategic level and Report through the Local Plan and/ or neighbourhood Plans plan process. However, all settlements can play a role in delivering sustainable development in and
(2016) rural areas – and so blanket policies restricting housing development in some settlements and
preventing other settlements from expanding Programmes should be avoided unless their use can be supported by robust evidence.
The National Planning Policy Framework also recognises that different sustainable transport policies and measures will be required in different communities and opportunities to maximise sustainable transport solutions will vary from urban to rural areas. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCLG (2012) To boost significantly the supply of housing, The SA should assess proposed The Local Plan should be consistent with National Planning local planning authorities through their housing allocations to determine their national policy with regards to: Policy Framework: plan-making processes should: relative sustainability so such A robust housing evidence base (e.g. Delivering a wide Ensure the Local Plan meets the full, considerations are taken forward in SHMA including an objective needs choice of high objectively assessed needs for market and decision-making. assessment of market and affordable quality homes affordable housing in the housing market housing). Appendix area. Consider the potential to improve a Identification of key housing sites Identify and update annually a supply of site's sustainability, particularly which are critical to the deliver of the specific deliverable sites sufficient to larger-scale proposals, through County's housing strategy (e.g. provide five years' worth of housing mitigation and the provision of a mix SHLAA). of uses (e.g. retail, employment, against their housing requirements with A supply of specific deliverable sites A: Sustainability an additional 5% buffer. The same should health/ recreation opportunities which make up a 5-year housing land Review be achieved for 6-10 years and, where on-site). supply which includes a 5% buffer possible, 11-15 years. (including windfall sites). For market and affordable housing, Ensure the proposed policies which Illustrate the expected rate of housing cover affordable housing and the illustrate the expected rate of delivery and delivery through a housing trajectory of range of types, size and tenures meet
set-out a housing implementation strategy for the plan period and establish a Policies,
Appraisal for the full range of housing. local need and set appropriate targets housing implementation strategy. relative to specific delivery areas. Set out own approach to housing density Ensure the plan allocates a range of to reflect local circumstances. housing types, size and tenures to Make allowances for windfall sites in the meet local need and be responsive Plans five-year supply. Any allowance should be to local circumstance (i.e. Urban and Scoping realistic having regard to the SHLAA, rural).
historic windfall delivery rates and Include a specific policy to address and expected future trends. affordable housing and meet needs
Plan for a mix of housing needs. through both on-site and off-site Programmes Report Identify the size, type and tenure and provision. range of housing that is required in Consider allocation of large-scale particular locations. developments (e.g. Urban
(2016) Consider that the supply of new homes extensions) to facilitate the delivery can sometimes be best achieved through of new housing and whether green 209 210 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
planning for larger scale development, belt boundaries should be established A: Appraisal such as new settlements or extensions around or adjoining any such new Review that follow the principles of Garden Cities. development. In doing so, they should consider whether it is appropriate to establish green belt boundaries around or adjoining any such of Scoping new development. Policies, In rural areas, housing should be located where it will enhance or maintain the vitality of communities. Report Plans DCLG (2012) The Government’s overarching objective is to Ensure policies through the SA Plan should reflect the needs of the Planning Policy for ensure fair and equal treatment for travellers in process, promote peaceful and Travellers community and ensure new sites and (2016) Travellers Sites a way that facilitates the traditional and nomadic integrated coexistence including are located in sustainable locations. The way of life of travellers while respecting the easier access to health and education allocation of any new sites should be best
interests of the settled community. services, ensure sites are sustainable on need and informed by the latest Programmes reducing the need for long distance Traveller's Needs Assessment. The Government’s objectives for planning in travelling, flood risk and promote live respect of traveller sites are: work opportunities.
That local planning authorities should make their own assessment of need for the purposes of planning. To ensure that local planning authorities, working collaboratively, develop fair and effective strategies to meet need through the identification of land for sites. To encourage local planning authorities to plan for sites over a reasonable timescale. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
That plan-making and decision-taking should protect Green Belt from inappropriate development. To promote more private traveller site provision while recognising that there will always be those travellers who cannot provide their own sites. Appendix That plan-making and decision-taking should aim to reduce the number of unauthorised developments and
encampments and make enforcement A: Sustainability more effective. Review For local planning authorities to ensure that their Local Plan includes fair, realistic and inclusive policies.
To increase the number of traveller sites of
in appropriate locations with planning Policies,
Appraisal permission, to address under provision and maintain an appropriate level of supply. To reduce tensions between settled and Plans traveller communities in plan-making and Scoping planning decisions.
To enable provision of suitable and accommodation from which travellers can
access education, health, welfare and Programmes Report employment infrastructure. For local planning authorities to have due regard to the protection of local amenity
(2016) and local environment. 21 1 212 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCLG (2011), Although published under the Coalition Ensure policies provide high-quality Supports the key aim of the Plan to build A: Appraisal 'Laying the Government the strategy remain relevant as it sustainable and efficient homes, in more homes linked to need. This will Review Foundations: A aims to get the housing market moving again. sustainable locations with reference require the Plan evidence base to include Housing Strategy for It seeks to do so through the following four main to local need. 'needs assessments' based on most recent England aims: PPG: Housing and Economic Development Needs Assessment. of Scoping 1. Support to deliver new homes and support Policies, aspiration:
New funding schemes for house buyers. Report Providing infrastructure funds to support Plans housing including an investment fund for small building firms. and (2016) Freeing up public sector land with Build Now Pay Later scheme. Support and encourage more individuals Programmes to build their own homes through a Custom Homes programme. New Homes Bonus. Simplifying planning through draft NPPF. Community Right to Build.
2. Supporting choice and quality for tenants:
Supporting investment in private rented housing market. Supporting Build to Let schemes. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Local authorities who have council housing stock to be given more freedom. Reinvigorating Right to Buy; for every Right to Buy house bought Government commit to build new affordable house.
3. Tackling empty homes: Appendix
Funding made available to bring empty homes back into use. A: Sustainability 4. Better quality homes, places and housing support: Review
Will provide support to struggling households and prioritise protection for of the vulnerable. Policies,
Appraisal New deal for older people’s housing. Building quality homes not just building more. Improving design and sustainability of housing, including committing to delivering Plans Scoping Zero Carbon Homes standard for all new homes from 2016. and Programmes Report (2016) 213 214 Sustainability
Table 41 Health and Social Issues Appendix
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal Review The Care Act 2014 The Act signifies a shift from existing duties on Ensure that the requirement to The Local Plan should ensure it meets the local authorities to provide particular services, promote wellbeing is reflected in the requirement to promote wellbeing through to the concept of ‘meeting needs. SA Framework. the delivery of 'healthy' and sustainable places to live and work, the provision of of Scoping It establishes the requirement to promote When assessing policies and easily accessible healthcare/ support Policies, wellbeing, but enables local authorities to be allocations the SA should be mindful facilities and services and improvements flexible in how this is delivered because it of the need to address health in the quality and quantity of training recognises that everybody's needs are different. inequalities to help prevent the need opportunities. Report
for care and support, improve quality Plans The Act is divided in five main parts which and quantity of healthcare facilities/ broadly cover the following: services as well as easy sustainable
access to to them, and seek to and (2016) Part 1: Care and Support: encourage the provision of 'lifetime'
or adaptable homes. Programmes Promoting individual wellbeing. Preventing the need for care and support. How to meet and assess needs. Duty and power to meet needs.
Part 2: Care Standards:
Quality of services.
Part 3: Health:
Health education. Improve quality and quantity of healthcare training and education nationally and locally. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Part 4: Health and Social Care:
Integration of care and support with healthcare services.
Part 5: General Appendix Powers to make consequential changes, etc.
PPG (2014): Health This document sets out and explains the role The SA should help to integrate these Local planning authorities should ensure A: Sustainability and Wellbeing of health and wellbeing (including health objectives across Local Plan policies that health and wellbeing and health infrastructure) in planning and how it should be and objectives. infrastructure are considered in local and Review taken into account. Broadly it recommends that neighbourhood plans and in planning the plan-making process should seek to ensure: It is important that the capacity of decision making. Development proposals can support health/ recreation services/ facilities of strong, vibrant and healthy communities are considered when undertaking SA In preparing the Local Plan local planning assessments so that impacts on authorities should engage with relevant Policies, Appraisal and help create healthy living environments which should, where existing and new residents are taken organisations/ bodies (e.g. Public Health, possible, include making physical activity into consideration. NHS etc.) to help ensure policies improve easy to do and create places and spaces health and wellbeing and make provision to meet to support community for the required health infrastructure. This Plans
Scoping engagement and social capital. is important in terms of meeting future The local plan promotes health, social and population growth and addressing health cultural wellbeing and supports the inequalities across the County. and reduction of health inequalities. Programmes
Report The local plan considers the local health and wellbeing strategy and other relevant health improvement strategies in the area.
(2016) The healthcare infrastructure implications of any relevant proposed local development have been considered. 215 216 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Opportunities for healthy lifestyles have A: Appraisal been considered (e.g. planning for an Review environment that supports people of all ages in making healthy choices, helps to promote active travel and physical activity, and promotes access to healthier food, of Scoping high quality open spaces and opportunities Policies, for play, sport and recreation). Potential pollution and other environmental hazards, which might lead to an adverse Report impact on human health, are accounted Plans for in the consideration of new development proposals. and (2016) Access to the whole community by all sections of the community, whether able-bodied or disabled, has been Programmes promoted.
DCLG (2012) The NPPF considers that the planning system When assessing site allocations and The Local Plan should ensure there is an National Planning can play an important role in facilitating social policies the SA should take into adequate provision of community facilities Policy Framework: interaction and creating healthy, inclusive account the impact of new to meet the needs of existing and new Promoting Health communities. In terms of plan-making, local development on community facilities residents (e.g. open space, public rights of Communities authorities should: (e.g. loss, enhancement or creation way, sports facilities, community centres/ Plan positively for the provision and use of open space, community centres, meeting places, local shops, etc) and, of shared space, community facilities and local shops, etc). where possible, avoid loss. other local services. Guard against unnecessary loss of valued To inform planning policies and allocation, facilities and services. officers should work collaboratively to meet Ensure an integrated approach to the requirement for school places. considering the location of housing, Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
economic uses and community facilities/ The Green Infrastructure Strategy and services. Open Space Needs Assessment should Ensure a sufficient choice of school places inform any decision regarding the is available to meet the needs of existing enhancement, creation or loss of open and new communities. space. Ensure policies are based on robust and Appendix up-to-date evidence/ needs assessments. The assessment should identify specific needs and quantitative or qualitative deficits or surpluses.
Ensure existing open space, sports and A: Sustainability recreational buildings/ land are not built Review on unless assessment it is indicated there is a surplus in the area or off- or on-site provision will be included in development
or benefits of development outweigh the of
loss. Policies,
Appraisal Public rights of way are protected and enhanced.
Health and Social Establishes a 'case for change'. Its key The SA should reflect the ambitions Through the provision of healthcare Care Act 2012 ambitions are to: to improve healthcare services and infrastructure and creating 'healthy places' Plans Scoping through the assessment of policies to live, work and play that are accessible Safeguard its future the NHS needs to and allocations seek to ensure a by sustainable modes of transport, the and change to meet the challenges it faces – reduction in inequalities in healthcare Local Plan should help to address health only by modernising can the NHS tackle provision across the County. inequalities across the County. Programmes Report the problems of today and avoid a crisis tomorrow. The capacity of existing health, social and Put clinicians at the centre of recreational facilities and services should
(2016) commissioning, frees up providers to also be taken into account in the IDP to 217 218 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
innovate, empowers patients and gives a ensure proposed population growth does A: Appraisal new focus to public health. no have an adverse impact on service Review delivery and patient/ user care. The key legislative changes it establishes are:
Clinically led commissioning (Part 1). of Scoping Provider regulation to support innovative Policies, services (Parts 3 & 4). Greater voice for patients (Part 5). New focus for public health (Parts 1&2). Report Greater accountability locally and Plans nationally (Parts 1 & 5). Streamlined arms-length bodies (Parts and (2016) 7-10).
The relevant cross-cutting themes are: Programmes
Improving quality of care. Tackling inequalities in healthcare. Promoting better integration of health and care services Choice and competition. The role of the Secretary of State. Reconfiguration of services. Establishing New Bodies. Research. Education and Training.
DWP (2012), This report outlines the current economic and The SA Framework should include The Local Plan should seek to help 'National Social social situation in the UK, highlighting the objectives in order to take into address issues such as worklessness and Report' challenges the UK faces in meeting the consideration the priorities to reduce help to reduce health inequalities, and Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
objectives of the Open Method of Coordination worklessness, address deprivation (all improve the educational/ employment for social protection and social inclusion. Its sets indicies), improve access to ambitions of young people; particularly out the UK priorities: healthcare and quality/ quantity of those from disadvantages backgrounds. Supporting families. community services and facilities. Primarily this will be through improving the Supporting young people from quality and quantity of educational/ training disadvantaged backgrounds. and employment opportunities. Appendix Tackling the problem of worklessness. Supporting the most disadvantaged adults. Providing adequate and sustainable pensions. A: Sustainability Ensuring accessible, high-quality and
sustainable healthcare and long-term care. Review
UCL (2010), 'The The Marmot review proposes effective Ensure SA process maximises access Ensure plan policies aim to improve health Marmot Review: Fair evidence-based strategies for reducing health to green space, recreation and inequalities improving services and access
Society, Healthy inequalities in England from 2010. Key employment. to services. Access to walking, green of
Lives'. objectives include: space, cycle routes, good housing, Policies, Appraisal Give every child the best start in life. recreation and employment are key Enable all children, young people and aspects in attaining this. adults to maximise their capabilities and
have control over their lives. Plans
Scoping Create fair employment and good work for all.
Ensure a healthy standard of living for all. and Create and develop healthy and Programmes
Report sustainable places and communities. Strengthen the role and impact of ill-health prevention. (2016) 219 220 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCLG (2014) PPG: Gives key advice on open space, sports and Site-specific SA site appraisals, The Plan should respond to identified A: Appraisal Open space, sports recreation facilities, public rights of way and the primarily potential housing sites which priority needs for such facilities within local Review and recreation new Local Green Space designation: inform the SHLAA, should take into communities and seek to set and achieve facilities, public Open space should be taken into account account impacts on local green space: standards for their provision / accessibility. rights of way and in planning for new development and i.e. Loss or enhancement in provision of local green space considering proposals that may affect and/ or quality as a result of new Integrating the provision of public open Scoping existing open space (linked to NPPF, development. space and recreation opportunities with the Policies, paras 73-74). delivery of new development should be a It is for local planning authorities to assess key priority to help ensure sustainable the need for open space and opportunities development and help secure a wide-range Report for new provision in their areas. In carrying of social, economic and environmental Plans out this work, they should have regard to benefits. the Duty to Cooperate where open space and (2016) serves a wider area. Local authorities are required to consult Sport England when development impacts Programmes playing field provision. Designating any Local Green Space will need to be consistent with local planning for sustainable development in the area. In particular, plans must identify sufficient land in suitable locations to meet identified development needs and the Local Green Space designation should not be used in a way that undermines this aim of plan making. To designate new areas of local green space, sites need to meet the criteria set out in para 77 of the NPPF (there is no lower size limit). The proximity of a Local Green Space to the community it serves will depend on Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
local circumstances, including why the green area is seen as special, but it must be reasonably close. For example, if public access is a key factor, then the site would normally be within easy walking distance of the community served. Land designated as Local Green Space Appendix may potentially also be nominated for listing by the local authority as an Asset of Community Value. Listing gives
community interest groups an opportunity A: Sustainability to bid if the owner wants to dispose of the land. Review
Table 42 Economy, Education & Skills of
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Policies, Appraisal Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal Plans HM Treasury (2015), This document sets out the government’s Ensure the SA assessments help The Plan should reflect the economic Scoping 'Fixing the framework for raising productivity is built around encourage plan policies and ambitions set out in this report and help to
Foundations: two pillars: allocations to improve the skills of the improve the economic profile of the and Creating a More County's workforce, raise educational/ North-East; with the potential to link up with
Prosperous Nation' 1. Encouraging long-term investment in employment aspirations, support the the Northern Powerhouse. Programmes Report economic capital, including infrastructure, skills expansion of high-quality educational and knowledge: facilities, encourage a low carbon Ensure that in the assessment of land economy and create sustainable suitable for development (housing and
(2016) An even more competitive tax system. places to live with good access to economic land availability assessments in 221 222 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Rewards for saving and long-term employment opportunities via a variety accordance with PPG) includes potential A: Appraisal investment Skills and human capital. of transport options. However, the SA brownfield sites and that this evidence is Review A highly skilled workforce. should ensure that such policies and part of the evidence base to inform World-leading universities, open to all who allocations do not achieve this at the decision-making. can benefit Economic infrastructure. expense of social and environmental factors. of
Scoping A modern transport system. Policies, Reliable and low carbon energy. Ensure that potential brownfield land World-class digital infrastructure Ideas and proposed for development is not of knowledge 'high ecological value' in accordance
Report High-quality science and innovation. with the NPPF. Plans 2. Promoting a dynamic economy that encourages innovation and helps resources and (2016) flow to their most productive use: Programmes Planning freedoms, more houses to buy. A higher pay, lower welfare society. More people able to work and progress Openness and competition. Competitive markets with less regulation. A trading nation open to international investment Productive finance. Financial services that lead the world in investing for growth Resurgent cities. A rebalanced economy and a thriving Northern Powerhouse.
Within this there are specific planning reform proposals whereby the government intend: Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
To introduce a new zonal system which will effectively give automatic permission on suitable brownfield sites. Take tougher action to ensure that local authorities are using their powers to get local plans in place and make homes available for local people, intervening to Appendix arrange for local plans to be written where necessary.
DCLG (2014) PPG: Local planning authorities should plan positively, When undertaking appraisals SA When considering town employment and A: Sustainability Ensuring the Vitality to support town centres to generate local should be mindful of impacts of retail policies and allocations, the Local of Town Centres employment, promote beneficial competition proposals on the vitality of town Plan should apply the sequential test and Review within and between town centres, and create centres (e.g. housing, employment adopt a 'town centre first' approach to attractive, diverse places where people want to and retail allocations) and support the ensure compliance with national policy and
live, visit and work. 'town centre first approach'. Such an guidance. of approach is likely to be more Policies,
Appraisal Local planning authorities should assess and sustainable by supporting the plan to meet the needs of main town centre long-term viability and vitality of town/ uses in full, in broadly the same way as for their village centres, which in turn will housing and economic needs, adopting a ‘town support the needs of local residents, centre first’ approach and taking account of encourage businesses to locate and Plans
Scoping specific town centre policy. In doing so, local visitors to visit. planning authorities need to be mindful of the different rates of development in town centres and compared with out of centre. Programmes Report The NPPF sets out two key tests that should be applied when planning for town centre uses which are not in an existing town centre and (2016) which are not in accord with an up to date Local Plan – the sequential test and the impact test. 223 224 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
These are relevant in determining individual A: Appraisal decisions and may be useful in informing the Review preparation of Local Plans.
DCLG (2012) The government is committed to securing SA should support objective to The Local Plan should establish a clear of Scoping National Planning economic growth and the NPPF seeks to ensure facilitate a 'step change' in the proactive strategy for improving the Policies, Policy Framework: that the planning system supports sustainable County's economy and the performance of the County's economy. Building a strong, economic growth. As such it seeks to ensure regeneration of it settlements and competitive local authorities: communities. However, economic The allocation/ safeguarding and Report
economy benefits should always be weighed deallocation of employment land should Plans Place significant weight on the need to against social and environmental be based on robust evidence (e.g. support economic growth through the considerations. Employment Land Review), which will also and
(2016) planning system. help to determine strong existing and Plan proactively to meet the development Assessments should identify where growing market areas.
needs of business and support and proposals safeguard and create Programmes economy fit for the 21st century. employment opportunities as well as Strategic and local allocations should help highlight the benefits of co-location of to re-balance the economy and encourage And specifically in terms of plan-making, local businesses. Where appropriate, SA inward investment from a variety different authorities should: should also consider/ encourage sectors. When considering allocations, the home-working and live-work units on continued protection of particular sites Set out a clear economic vision and new sites. should be reviewed and whether there is strategy for their area which proactively need/ market interest for alternative uses. encourages sustainable economic growth. Set-criteria or identify strategic sites for local and inward investment. Support existing business sectors and identify and plan for new or emerging sectors likely to locate in their area. Policies should be flexible enough to accommodate needs not anticipated in Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
the plan and to allow a rapid response to changes in economic circumstances. Plan positively for the location, promotion and expansion of high-technology industries. Identify priority areas for economic Appendix regeneration, infrastructure provision and environmental enhancement. Facilitate flexible working practices. Planning policies should avoid long-term A:
Sustainability protection of sites allocated for employment uses where there is no Review reasonable prospect of a site being used for that purpose.
DCLG (2012) The NPPF seeks to ensure that planning SA to ensure the viability and vitality The Local Plan should support the viability of
National Planning policies are positive and promote competitive of town centres through the and vitality of town centres by: Policies,
Appraisal Policy Framework: town centres. In drawing up Local Plans, local assessment of plan proposals, with Meeting residents', employers/ Ensuring the vitality authorities should: consideration given to the fact that employees', and visitors' needs of town centres Set-out policies for the management and residential development can have a through the allocation of a range of growth of centres over the plan period. positive effect in smaller towns and suitable development in town/ village Plans Recognise that town centres are the heart villages. centres across the County. Scoping of their communities and pursue policies Using an up-to-date Retail Study to SA should help to ensure that retail
to support their viability and vitality. evidence allocations and determine and Define a network and hierarchy of needs are met in various towns across what the specific retail need is in the County and that, where town centres. different areas of the County (e.g. Programmes Report Define the extent of town centres that centre sites cannot be found for such comparison, food, bulky goods, etc). provide customer choice and a diverse uses, development in edge of centre retail offer. (2016) 225 226 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Retain and enhance existing markets. and out of centre locations are Adopting a sequential approach A: Appraisal Allocate a range of suitable sites to meet appropriate, easily-accessible and allocations. Review the scale and type of retail, leisure, well-connected to the town centre by Establishing criteria-based policies commercial officer, tourism, cultural and a variety of transport options. to provide clarity on the County's residential needed in town centres, and retail hierarchy and the extent of its of where viable town centre sites are not town centres/ primary shopping areas Scoping available allocate appropriate edge of based on a clear definition of primary Policies, centre sites. and secondary frontages in Recognise that residential development designated centres. plays an important role in ensuring the Report vitality of town centres. Plans Apply the sequential test to ensure the appropriateness of allocations/ proposals and (2016) in town centres locations, in edge of centre locations, and out of centre locations. Programmes DCLG (2012) The NPPF recognises the need to support and The SA should help to ensure that Given the rural nature of County Durham, National Planning promote a strong rural economy. It therefore these requirements are met. When the Local Plan should ensure it meets Policy Framework: requires local authorities to: undertaking policy assessment, SA these requirements by providing clarity on Supporting a Support sustainable growth and expansion should make recommendations how development in the countryside will prosperous rural of all types of businesses and enterprises regarding opportunities to promote be determined. Such a policy should seek economy in rural areas, both through the conversion sustainable development in the to promote sustainable economic growth of existing buildings and well-designed countryside and promote the retention/ whilst also ensuring environmental new buildings. expansion of local services to support protection and social amenity. Promote development and diversification rural communities. of agricultural and other land-based rural businesses. Support sustainable tourism and leisure development that benefit businesses in rural areas and which respect the character of the countryside. This should include supporting the provision and Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
expansion of tourist and visitor facilities in appropriate locations where identified needs are not met by existing facilities in rural service centres. Promote the retention and development of local services and community facilities in villages. Appendix
HM Treasury & BIS Although introduced by the Coalition The SA should ensure polices help to Ensure policies positively promote (2011) The Plan for Government, the intent established in this achieve growth in a sustainable way sustainable growth, whilst being reflective Growth statement remain relevant. The economic policy rather than at the expense of the of local views. A robust, local definition of A: Sustainability objective is to achieve sustainable growth that environment. The assessment helps what constitutes 'sustainable development' is more evenly shared across the country and to ensure that, when weighing up the to be provided within policy. Review between industries. Key implications for evidence and the impacts of policies planning are: and allocations, there is a balance
Radical changes to the planning system between social, economic and of to support job creation by introducing a environmental determinants. Policies,
Appraisal presumption in favour of sustainable development. Localise choice about the use of previously developed land, removing targets, while retaining existing controls Plans Scoping on greenbelt land. Produce shorter, more focused and and inherently pro-growth NPPF to deliver more development is suitable and viable Programmes Report locations. Clear expectations that decisions should prioritise growth and jobs.
(2016) Powers to bring forward neighbourhood plans and development orders. 227 228 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Enterprise zones with lower levels of A: Appraisal planning control. Review Speed up planning system and decision making. Extend permitted development rights. of Scoping DCLG (2011), The Government is firmly committed to ensuring The SA should help support this policy The Local Plan should plan positively for Policies, 'Planning for there is sufficient provision to meet growing by identifying opportunities for plan the provision of state-funded schools in Schools demand for state-funded school places, policies and allocations to improve the order to support the objective increase Development increasing choice and opportunity in quality and quantity of state-funded choice in education and raise educational Report Policy'. state-funded education and raising educational schools and ensure positive effects standards. Plans standards. The Government wants to enable are maximised. new schools to open, good schools to expand However, regarding the 'presumption in and (2016) and all schools to adapt and improve their favour of state-funded schools', policy facilities. It is the Government’s view that the makers should ensure that when taking creation and development of state-funded decisions to help meet their statutory Programmes schools is strongly in the national interest and obligation development is consistent with that planning decision-makers can and should national policy (e.g. Deliver development support that objective, in a manner consistent that has a positive impact and mitigates with their statutory obligations. adverse impacts).
The Government believes that the planning system should operate in a positive manner when dealing with proposals for the creation, expansion and alteration of state-funded schools, and that the following principles in relation to plan-making should apply with immediate effect:
There should be a presumption in favour of the development of state-funded schools. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Local authorities should give full and thorough consideration to the importance of enabling the development of state-funded schools in their planning decisions. Local authorities should make full use of their planning powers to support Appendix state-funded schools applications. This should include, where necessary, the use of planning obligations to help to mitigate
adverse impacts and help deliver A: Sustainability development that has a positive impact on the community. Review
Table 43 Transport and Accessibility of
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Policies, Appraisal Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal Plans DCLG (2012) The NPPF considers transport policies have an The SA should ensure that new When considering the distribution of new Scoping National Planning important role to play in facilitating sustainable development is allocated in locations development the Local Plan should support
Policy Framework: development, but also in contributing to wider in order to reduce the need to travel a pattern of development which, where and Promoting sustainability and health objectives. In terms of and can facilitate the use of reasonable to do so, facilitates the use of
Sustainable planning-making, its key requirements are: sustainable modes of transport (e.g. sustainable modes of transport and Programmes Report Transport The transport system needs to be Walking, cycling and public transport). minimises the need to travel (for goods and balanced in favour of sustainable transport people). modes, giving people a real choice about Assessment should consider
(2016) how they travel. However, it is recognised opportunities to create/ enhance multi-user routes that provide a 229 230 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
that different policies and measures will well-connected network to encourage Under the 'duty', Durham County Council A: Appraisal be required in different communities. easy and safe access via alternative should work with neighbouring authorities Review Encouragement should be given to modes. and other key stakeholders to develop solutions which support reductions in large-scale strategic facilities (e.g. rail greenhouse gas emissions and reduce Ensure that the social, economic and freight interchanges, growth of ports and of congestion. environmental impacts of traffic airports). Scoping Local authorities should work with movements, and any proposed Policies, neighbouring authorities and transport increases, are identified along with The Plan should require proposals which providers to develop strategies for the appropriate mitigation measures. generate significant traffic movements to provision of large-scale transport be supported by a Transport Statement or Report schemes. Assessment and a Travel Plan. Plans All development that generates significant amounts of movement should be Consider the allocation of residential-led and (2016) supported by a Transport Statement/ large mixed-use sites. Assessment and Travel Plan. Plans should ensure development is Consider the allocation and safeguarding Programmes located to minimise the need to travel and of key transport routes and facilities in the maximised the use of sustainable Plan. transport options. Planning policies for larger scale residential developments should promote a mix of uses to provide opportunities to undertaken day-to-day activities, including work, on-site. Local authorities should seek to improve the quality of parking in town centres so that it is convenient, safe and secure. Parking enforcement should be proportionate. Local Plans should identify and protect, where there is robust evidence, sites and Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
routes which could be critical in developing infrastructure to widen transport choice.
DCLG (2012) The NPPF considered advanced, high-quality The SA should assess the potential The Local Plan should include a National Planning communications infrastructure is essential for impacts of allocating/ promoting such criteria-based policy on Policy Framework: sustainable economic growth.In terms of infrastructure across the County in telecommunications which reflects national Supporting planning-making, its key requirements are: order to inform the criteria-based requirements; particularly with regards Appendix high-quality Local authorities should support the policy and avoid/ mitigate potential avoiding/ minimising adverse impacts. communication expansion of electronic communications adverse impacts; particularly with infrastructure networks, including telecommunications regards amenity and visual impacts. and high-speed broadband. A: Sustainability Keep the number of radio and telecommunications masts and the sites Review for such installations to a minimum, consistent with the efficient operation of
the network. of Where new sites are required, equipment Policies,
Appraisal should be sympathetically designed and camouflaged where appropriate. Local authorities should not impose a ban on new telecommunications development in certain areas, impose blanket Article 4 Plans Scoping Directions over a wider area or a range of development or insist on minimum and distances to existing development. Programmes Report (2016) 231 232 Sustainability
Table 44 Spatial Policy Appendix
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal Review DCLG (2014) PPG: This guidance sets out the key requirements Ensure SA considers and identifies The Plan needs to adequately evidence Duty to Co-operate relating to the 'Duty' which was established in cumulative significant effects of plan that it has actively engaged with the Localism Act in 2011. It places a legal duty policies and allocations and how they neighbouring authorities and other public on local planning authorities, county councils may impact on cross-boundary issues. bodies to address strategic cross-boundary of Scoping in England and public bodies to engage This will help to inform policy issues - irrespective if there is ultimate Policies, constructively, actively and on an ongoing basis development and on-going agreement. This is needed in order for the to maximise the effectiveness of Local Plans in discussions with neighbouring Council to meet the legal duty and enable the context of strategic cross-boundary matters. authorities to ensure the requirements the Plan to be found sound at EiP. Report
The Duty to Cooperate is not a duty to of the Duty are met. Plans agree. But local planning authorities should make every effort to secure the and
(2016) necessary cooperation on strategic cross boundary matters before they submit their
Local Plans for examination. Programmes Local planning authorities must demonstrate how they have complied with the duty at the independent examination of their Local Plans. If a local planning authority cannot demonstrate that it has complied with the duty then the Local Plan will not be able to proceed further in examination Local planning authorities will need to satisfy themselves about whether they have complied with the duty. As part of their consideration, local planning authorities will need to bear in mind that the cooperation should produce effective and deliverable policies on strategic cross boundary matters. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
An Inspector will determine whether the specific requirements of the Duty have been met and ultimately if the Plan is sound. Local planning authority councillors and officers are responsible for leading discussion, negotiation and action to Appendix ensure effective planning for strategic matters in their Local Plans. This requires a proactive, ongoing and focused
approach to strategic planning and A: Sustainability partnership working. Review HM Treasury, The 2014 NIP sets-out the government's When assessing Plan the SA should The Local Plan should reflect the principles 'National strategy for UK Infrastructure, which is take into account those identified of the NIP and support the economic case
Infrastructure Plan' underpinned by the principle that there is a schemes (i.e. allocated and for infrastructure investment and delivery of (2014) strong economic case for infrastructure safeguarded routes and facilities) in of priority schemes as identified in the Policies,
Appraisal investment. It brings together for the first time order to better understand the likely Infrastructure Delivery Plan (IDP). The IDP its vision and approach for the key economic social, economic and environmental should identify specific schemes, local and infrastructure sectors – transport, energy, flood impacts of them individually and in cross-boundary, which have or will receive defences, water, waste, communications and combination with other policies and investment (public and/ or private) over the science. allocations. Plan period. Plans Scoping It sets out an ambitious infrastructure vision for The Local Plan should make links with the next parliament and beyond, reinforcing the other high-level strategies (e.g. The North and government’s commitment to investing in East's Strategy Economic Plan and the Programmes
Report infrastructure and improving its quality and NECA's Transport Plan) to ensure performance. It is underpinned by a pipeline of consistency across strategic transport over £460 billion of planned public and private priorities and adequate support. investment. (2016) 233 234 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
The government is prioritising the public funding A: Appraisal of infrastructure, putting in place the right policy Review framework to give investors the confidence to commit to long-term projects, and ensuring the supply chain has the certainty and tools it needs to deliver effectively. It recognises the of Scoping importance of getting the fundamentals right – Policies, delivering our key projects and programmes on time and on budget – while also addressing longer-term challenges: integration, resilience, Report skills and sustainability. Plans
Chapter 16 also sets-out the government’s and
(2016) approach to its ‘Top 40’ priority investments. However, none of which are within the NELEP
area. Programmes
DCLG (2012) The NPPF replaced the requirement for Ensuring that policies and allocations Ensure the NPPF is reflected in Local Plan National Planning Regional Plans (RSS) and the Planning Policy take into account the core principles objectives, policies and allocations. Under Policy Framework: Statements (PPS). It aims to support economic of the NPPF and that they are particular topics the Local Plan should Core Principles growth but also to promote strong communities reflected in the SA Framework. consider specific requirements to ensure and the need to protect and enhance the that they are in accordance with national environment. Core principles (para 17) include: Guidance on particular topics should policy. Support a genuinely plan-led system and be considered when undertaking plan positively for growth. assessments in order to help ensure The Local Plan should ensure a local the Local Plan helps to deliver definition of the 'presumption in favour of Presumption in favour of sustainable sustainable development. sustainable development' is established development. so that development which is considered 'sustainable' can be approved without Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Secure high quality design standards. delay. A local and robust definition of sustainable development will provide Take account of the roles and character certainty to developers. of different areas.
Support transition to a low carbon future. Appendix
Contribute to conserving and enhancing the natural environment and reducing pollution. A: Sustainability Prioritising the use of previously Review developed land
Promote mixed use development. of
Conserve heritage assets. Policies, Appraisal Manage patterns of growth to make full use of public transport, walking and cycling. Plans Scoping Take account of and support local
strategies to improve health, social and and cultural wellbeing and deliver facilities and
services to meet local needs. Programmes Report
Localism Act 2011 The Localism Act retains the idea of a two tier Ensure SA support is provided for the The Plan should reflect the new 'style'
(2016) Development Plan providing coverage over development of Neighbourhood Plans Local Plan as advocated by the Act (i.e. different geographical areas, but rather than and Community Development Orders Local Plan instead of Core Strategy). 235 236 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes plan and SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
having a regional plan for the North-East in order to meet EU obligations and The Plan needs to adequately evidence A: Appraisal (Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS)) with a Local that plans help to contribute towards that it has actively engaged with Review Development Framework for County Durham sustainable development. neighbouring authorities and other public as the Development Plan, the Act abolishes the bodies to address strategic cross-boundary regional level plan, replaces the Local issues - irrespective if there is ultimate Development Framework with a Local Plan and agreement. This is needed in order for the of Scoping introduces the concept of Neighbourhood Ensure SA considers and identifies Council to meet the legal duty and enable Policies, Planning and Neighbourhood Development cumulative significant effects of plan the Plan to be found sound at EiP. Orders for smaller areas (to be designated). policies and allocations and how they may impact on cross-boundary issues. Depending on timescales the development Report The Development Framework therefore now of the Local Plan needs to take into Plans comprises of the Local Plan and Neighbourhood This will help to inform policy account proposals in emerging Plans prepared by local communities. development and on-going Neighbourhood Plans. It is one of the basic and
(2016) discussions with neighbouring conditions of a Neighbourhood Plan to be The Act also established the Duty to Cooperate, authorities to ensure the requirements in 'general conformity' with the strategic
a legal duty to address cross-boundary issues of the Duty are met. elements of the Local Plan. Programmes between neighbouring local authorities and other public bodies.
Planning and Section 19 of the Planning and Compulsory Carry out SA on the Local Plan as per Ensure the development of spatial policy Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 requires a local planning the legislative requirements, which proposals, including allocations, integrate Purchase Act 2004 authority to carry out a Sustainability Appraisal includes those relating to the SEA SA and consider its recommendations at of each of the proposals in a Local Plan during Directive. each stage of the plan-making process. its preparation. Ensure that the SA is iterative and Where recommendations are rejected, More generally Section 39 of the Act requires helps to ensure that Local Plan robust justification must be provided. that the authority preparing a Local Plan must proposals seek to contribute towards do so “with the objective of contributing to the sustainable development. achievement of sustainable development”. Sub-national / Regional
Table 45 Climate Change and Adaptation
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the and Programmes requirements might be Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
North East Identifies the principal climate change related impacts projected for the region To assess how policies The Plan should England Climate by the 2050s as: contribute towards improving include policies Change resilience to climate change which will help Appendix Adaptation Study: Increased frequency of flooding from rivers, streams and the sea. and encourage County Durham Sustaine (2008) Increased adverse health and welfare effects during warmer summers. acknowledgement and adapt to the impacts Increased incidents of wild fires. understating of the issues. of climate change.
Increased frequency of flooding from drainage systems. A: Sustainability Increase in infectious diseases in humans and livestock. Review Increase in pests. Increased damage to fabric and structure of buildings. Loss of business/ service productivity or continuity.
Increased business opportunities associated with adaptation. of
Increased pressure on emergency services. Policies, Appraisal Increased pollution from contaminated land. Increased wildlife impacts. Increased storm related debris.
Increased path erosion. Plans Scoping Recommends the following key adaptation strategies for countering the projected impacts from climate change across the North East: and Programmes
Report Gather and share information on climate change trends, impacts assessments, and adaptation activities across the region. Risk awareness and risk-based management. Inspection, monitoring and maintenance of assets. (2016) Physical adaptation in the use or structure of buildings and in infrastructure. Warnings to enable preventative actions 237 238 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Appendix and Programmes requirements might be Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Resource planning and management A: Appraisal Increased use of novel technology and the need for further innovations Review Influence long-term planning Encourage cross-sectoral, partnership-based awareness and responses.
Exploit the opportunities presented by climate change. of Scoping
Lobby for change. Policies, Review the effectiveness of adaptation approaches and revise as necessary. Report Table 46 Water Plans
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and (2016) and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Programmes Sustainability Appraisal
River Basin Reports against the Water Framework Directive's targets for the status The SA assessment The Plan should: Management of water bodies. Acknowledges that the Northumbria River Basin District should be informed by Take into account the Plan: Northumbria has a very special environment with extreme variation, from highly the Water Cycle Study. objectives of the River Basin River Basin industrialised urban areas to the moors, hills and valleys of Management Plan. District (2009) Northumberland National park, the Heritage Coast and the Pennine Promote water efficiency in Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty. new development and ensure Plan is informed by a Water Water supports these landscapes, their wildlife and it is vital to the Cycle Study. livelihoods of those who live and work here. Promote the wide scale use of sustainable drainage schemes Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
There has been great progress in protecting these natural assets and to reduce the risks of flooding cleaning up many of the water environment problems that people have and of impact upon water created in the past. However, a range of challenges still remain, which quality at times of high rainfall. will need to be addressed to secure the predicted outcomes. Appendix They include:
• Point source pollution from water industry sewage works. A: Sustainability • Physical modification of water bodies. Review • Disused mines, point and/ or diffuse pollution source.
• Diffuse pollution from agricultural activities. of
• Diffuse pollution from urban sources. Policies, Appraisal
At present, because of these pressures and the higher environmental standards required by the Water Framework Directive, only 43% of
surface waters are currently classified as good or better ecological Plans
Scoping status/potential and 37% of assessed water bodies are at good or better biological status now. and Programmes Report (2016) 239 240 Sustainability
Table 47 Biodiversity and Geodiversity Appendix
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the A: Appraisal Sustainability Review Appraisal
County Durham The Durham BAP consists of a series of actions plans for nearly 150 priority The SA will assess the The Plan should contribute Biodiversity habitats and species. These describe the relevant habitats and associated impact of the Plan on towards the protection and of Scoping Action Plan (2007) species, their current status if known and the vision, objectives and action priority habitats and enhancement of priority Policies, priorities for managing them. The partnership responsible for the BAP species. habitats and species. considers it a “work in progress”, given that the habitats and species selected for inclusion are known not to be the only ones under threat. Report Plans
Three Rivers The aims are to: SA to take account of the Plan should reflect the aims
Local Nature Champion the real value of nature, both the intrinsic worth of landscapes, aims throughout of the partnership in relation and (2016) Partnership habitats and species and the economic and social benefits they assessment of the Plan to recognising the multi
generate. benefits of biodiversity and Programmes Lead landscape-scale biodiversity enhancements at all levels, delivering seeking opportunities for integrated outcomes and supporting activities that help to mitigate or landscape scale biodiversity adapt to the impacts of climate change. enhancements.
Influence decision making by organisations such as the North East Local Enterprise Partnerships (NELEP) and business, raising awareness of the vital services a healthy, natural environment can bring for the economy.
To promote the natural environment as a means of improving health and well-being within local communities.
Northern Upland Objectives are to: Chain Local Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Nature Conserve and enhance the natural heritage of the Northern Uplands, Partnership increasing resilience and ensuring these landscapes can meet the challenges of the future. Support the economic and social wellbeing of our upland communities in ways which contribute to the conservation and enhancement of natural Appendix beauty. Promote public understanding and enjoyment of the nature and culture of these areas, encouraging people to take action for their conservation.
Value, sustain and promote the benefits that the NUC provides for A: Sustainability society including, clean air and water, food, carbon storage and other Review services vital to the nation's health and wellbeing.
Durham Heritage The objectives for management are: The SA will assess The Plan should set out
Coast whether Plan policies policies which contribute to of Management Plan 1.To conserve, protect and enhance the natural beauty of the coast, including have taken into account the integrated protection and Policies,
Appraisal (currently under the terrestrial, littoral and marine flora and fauna, geological interest, and its the interlinking social, management of Durham's review) heritage features of architectural, historical and archaeological interest. economic and coastline for biodiversity, environmental factors landscape, water quality, 2. To facilitate and enhance the enjoyment, understanding and appreciation related to coastal heritage and the public's of the public by improving and extending opportunities for recreational, management and enjoyment. Development Plans Scoping educational and tourist activities, including sport and art, that draw on, and protection. which contributes towards are consistent with the conservation of its natural beauty and the protection coastal squeeze should be and of its heritage features. avoided. Programmes
Report 3. To maintain, and improve the environmental health of inshore waters affecting the Heritage Coast and its beaches through appropriate works and management. (2016) 241 242 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review 4. To take account of the needs of agriculture, forestry and fishing, and the economic and social needs of the small communities on the coast, by promoting sustainable forms of social and economic development, which in themselves conserve and enhance natural beauty and heritage features. of Scoping Policies, 5. To promote community participation in the stewardship of the coast, optimising the potential of social and economic regeneration initiatives that are consistent with the conservation of the natural beauty and the protection Report of the heritage features of the Heritage Coast. Plans
6. To integrate fully with adjoining areas and within the region to actively and
(2016) promote Integrated Coastal Zone Management. Programmes
Table 48 Landscape
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
North Pennines AONB Local and Neighbourhood Plans should set out policy for AONBs locally and define The SA should take the The Plan Management Plan 2014 the special qualities of the area; any additional DPD's should specifically reference objectives of the should have - 2019 the AONB Management Plan. Management Plan into specific regard account when undertaking to the The existence of an AONB designation should be considered at the very outset the assessment. objectives of in plan preparation and should influence the plan in terms of the strategic location the AONB of development access issues, green infrastructure, CIL, use of natural resources Management and in terms of landscape and environmental protection. Plan when Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Wider objectives include: drawing up policies and To ensure that the distinctive character and qualities of the North Pennines considering the landscape are understood, conserved, enhanced and restored. allocation of new To ensure the conservation, enhancement expansion and connectivity of development Appendix habitats, creating resilient ecological networks across the North Pennines including and beyond with a focus on Biodiversity 2020 priorities. mineral sites. The Plan should ensure
To reverse the decline in biodiversity amongst populations of characteristic A: Sustainability species. that developers utilise the North Review To ensure the conservation and enhancement of features of geodiversity Pennines interest in line with the North Pennines Geodiversity Action Plan. Planning Guidelines and of the North
To ensure an increase in professional and public knowledge and Policies,
Appraisal understanding of the AONB’s historic environment. Pennies Building Design To ensure effective conservation and management of the North Pennines Guide. historic environment, including historic buildings, archaeological sites and Plans heritage landscapes. Scoping
To ensure that the returns from farming and land management are sufficient and to sustain the farming community and support the conservation of natural
beauty. Programmes Report To ensure that the tourism industry is environmentally and economically sustainable, based on, and actively supports, the special qualities of the
(2016) North Pennines and brings benefits to the community. 243 244 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Appendix Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal To ensure that there are more, greener and better travel and communication Review links in the North Pennines.
To ensure an increase in skills in farming and land management, heritage of management, tourism/ hospitality and outdoor education to help secure the Scoping future of the area. Policies,
To ensure that development in the AONB and its setting, is of a nature, scale, location and design so that it meets community need without compromising Report the special qualities of the North Pennines. Plans
To ensure that people have a wide range of opportunities to explore, enjoy and (2016) and learn about the North Pennines.
To ensure that a wide range of opportunities exists for everyone to get Programmes involved in conserving and celebrating the North Pennines.
National Character SEO 1: Protect, manage and enhance the moorlands and moorland fringes of the The SA will take into The plan Area Profile 10: North North Pennines, with their internationally important habitats and wildlife, their sense account the special should take Pennines (March 2013) of wildness and remoteness, and the contribution they make to climate mitigation, characteristics and into account (Statement of water quality and availability, and water flow. objectives of the North the objectives Environmental Pennines NCA when of the relevant Opportunity SEO) SEO 2: Protect, manage and conserve the distinctive historic and geological undertaking assessments. National environment and features of this area, providing access and recreation along with Character imaginative interpretation, to improve understanding of the landscape and its Areas cultural development. Environmental enhancement SEO 3: Manage and enhance the pastoral character of the broad dales, with their opportunities patchworks of pastures and meadows, their strong field patterns defined by should be drystone walls, and their stone-built field barns, farmsteads and small villages – sought through Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
to strengthen local distinctiveness, and to contribute to food provision, climate the Plan where change mitigation, the conservation and connectivity of important habitats and the possible. sense of history.
SEO 4: Manage the diverse streams, becks, rivers and reservoirs to maintain their high water quality, enhance their biodiversity interest, and strengthen their Appendix contribution to the landscape character and recreational opportunities of the North Pennines, while managing water flows and maintaining water supplies. A: Sustainability National Character SEO 1: Protect and connect native broadleaved woodland, parkland and veteran The SA will take into
Area Profile 22: trees to maximise their value for wildlife, flood risk alleviation, water account the special Review Pennine Dales Fringe characteristics and (Aug 2013)(Statement quality, climate regulation recreation, sense of place and sense of history. objectives of the Pennine of Environmental Dales Fringe NCA when Opportunity SEO) ■ SEO 2: Encourage management of farmland to retain the pastoral and mixed undertaking assessments. of agricultural character and to benefit biodiversity and the wider environment Policies, Appraisal
while maximising the value of food production.
■ SEO 3: Protect the area’s rich historic environment and geodiversity and Plans Scoping Manage development pressure to preserve tranquillity, sense of place and sense
of history, and to enhance recreational opportunities. and
■ SEO 4: Protect and enhance the area’s many major rivers, riparian habitats and Programmes Report wetlands to reduce flood risk, improve water quality and conserve the
valuable contribution they make to sense of place,biodiversity, recreation and
(2016) sense of history. 245 246 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Appendix Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal National Character SEO 1: Protect, manage and enhance the major rivers, including the Wear and The SA will take into Review Area Profile 16: Derwent rivers, and their tributaries, to improve water quality, reduce flood risk account the special Durham Coalfield and enhance their wildlife value and recreational use. characteristics and Pennine Fringe (July objectives of the Durham 2013) (Statement of SEO 2: Protect, expand and connect semi-natural habitats, particularly heathland, Coalfield Pennine Fringe of Scoping Environmental and enhance the management of agricultural land to provide a range of benefits NCA when undertaking Policies, Opportunity SEO) to people, wildlife and the wider environment. assessments.
SEO 3: Protect, enhance and connect trees and woodland in the area to improve Report their wildlife value, climate regulation capacity, biomass production and potential Plans for access and recreation. and
(2016) SEO 4: Protect, restore and enhance ex-industrial and brownfield sites, particularly former coal mines, for their historic and wildlife value, and improve access and
interpretation in order to celebrate local tradition and culture and increase Programmes understanding of the area’s industrial history and geodiversity.
SEO 5: Seek to ensure that where there is new development it retains tranquil areas, is appropriate in a changing climate, provides high-quality green infrastructure and improves quality of life for local residents.
National Character SEO 1: Reverse the fragmentation of semi-natural habitats due to the industrial The SA will take into Area Profile 14: Tyne account the special and Wear Lowlands and urban expansion of Tyneside by extending, creating and linking habitats characteristics and (September 2013) objectives of the Tyne and (Statement of in rural areas, developing or regenerating urban green spaces/urban fringe and Wear Lowlands NCA when Environmental undertaking assessments Opportunity SEO) protecting brownfield sites with high biodiversity interest. Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
SEO 2: Enhance and manage the Tyne and Wear river network and Tyneside coastal area to improve water quality and reduce flood risk, and to mitigate the
effects of climate change.
SEO 3: Conserve and enhance the network of green infrastructure – broadleaved Appendix woodlands characteristic of the Tyne and Wear river valleys, country estates in and around urban settlements and restored coal mining sites to increase biodiversity, improve water and soil quality, provide tranquillity and recreation and enhance landscape character. A: Sustainability
SEO 4: Use an understanding of the unique historic landscape and heritage Review features of the Tyne and Wear Lowlands NCA to provide opportunities for interpretation, education,wellbeing, recreation and tourism, and to inform good design in new development that respects the setting of heritage assets. of Policies, Appraisal National Character SEO 1: Protect, expand and connect semi-natural habitats, particularly The SA will take into Area Profile 15: account the special Durham Magnesian limestone grassland, and enhance management of agricultural land characteristics and
Limestone Plateau objectives of the Durham Plans
Scoping (April 2013) (Statement to provide a range of benefits to local people, wildlife and the wider Magnesian Limestone of Environmental Plateau NCA when
Opportunity SEO) environment. undertaking assessments. and
SEO 2: Protect and enhance the coast as a place of tranquillity and inspiration Programmes Report that supports wildlife and illustrates the area’s industrial past.
SEO 3: Protect, manage and enhance waterbodies, particularly the River Wear,
(2016) to improve water quality and enhance their wildlife value. 247 248 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications Appendix Programmes requirements might be for the Plan taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal SEO 4: Protect and promote the area’s rich archaeology and geology to enhance Review appreciation of its mining heritage, significant role within British industry, and important fossil record and prehistoric sites.
SEO 5: Seek to ensure that where there is new development it preserves the of Scoping area’s strong sense of place, retains tranquil areas, is appropriate in a changing Policies, climate and improves quality of life for local residents. Report
National Character SEO 1: Protect and enhance the unique landscape of the Tees Estuary with The SA will take into Plans Area Profile 23: Tees account the special Lowlands (May 2013) its mosaic of internationally important intertidal, wetland and brownfield characteristics and and
(2016) (Statement of objectives of the Tees Environmental habitats. Lowlands NCA when
Opportunity SEO) undertaking assessments. Programmes SEO 2: Incorporate semi-natural habitats within the farmed environment, and use innovative farming techniques in order to improve the value of food provision alongside biodiversity, flood water storage capacity, and the ability of the landscape to adapt to the impacts of climate change.
SEO 3: Ensure that there is a well-connected network of high-quality green infrastructure throughout the Tees Lowlands which will enable people to understand and enjoy the natural environment, as well as providing a range of other benefits including biodiversity enhancement, food provision and flood risk mitigation. Table 49 Economy, Education & Skills
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or Implications for the Plan and Programmes SA requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
North East Local The SEP considers that the North East Local Enterprise The SA process should take The Local Plan should help to support and Enterprise Partnership area is a globally competitive economy, with the strategic economic deliver the aims and objectives of the SEP. Partnership more and better jobs being created through making, trading priorities of the SEP into By seeking to improve the economic
(2014), 'More and and innovating across a range of sectors by a broad account. However, potential of Durham City, secure a 'step Appendix Better Jobs: A diversity of businesses. With a concerted effort to invest assessments should also change' in the County's economy and Strategic in what is best for businesses and communities it feels the seek to balance them allocate a range of professional/skilled new Economic Plan for area can go even further. against other social and employment opportunities the Local Plan the North-East, environmental determinants, will reflect these aims and help contribute A: Sustainability 2014-2024' Its vision is that by 2024 our economy will provide over one giving equal weighing to to the new jobs target.
million jobs. Representing 100,000 new jobs and equivalent social, economic and Review to an 11% increase in employment from today, the vision environmental issues. for our strategic economic plan builds on the North East Independent Economic Review chaired by Lord Andrew Adonis. It reflects the determination of local partners to of provide opportunities for businesses and residents in a Policies, Appraisal modern and diverse economy, developing a strong entrepreneurial and innovative spirit.
In addition to the increase in job numbers, we intend that Plans
Scoping as a minimum, 60% of our employment growth will be in better paid and higher skilled jobs, helping to close the
productivity gap that remains between our local economy and and the best performing areas of the UK. Programmes Report
North East Local This is fundamental of the Strategic Economic Plan, but is The SA framework should The Local Plan should support the North Enterprise considered as a distinct element that requires a distinct include objectives and East Education Challenge by seeking to
(2016) Partnership approach. sub-objectives with the aim improve educational qualifications and skills 249 250 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes SA requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal (2014), 'The North This document recognises that young people today are to improve education and of it's residents. In particular, policies and Review East Education the employees of the future. As such the Education skills and access to such allocations should provide a positive Challenge' Challenge has the single-minded drive to increase the skills facilities across the County. framework for: of school leavers in the North East. Working in partnership with schools, businesses, head teachers, training Improving the quality and quantity of of Scoping academies and the Department for Education to design an educational/ training services and Policies, Education Challenge that will: facilities. Ensuring access to educational Abolish illiteracy and innumeracy at primary school services/ facilities is good via a variety Report level. of sustainable modes of transport Plans Close the attainment gap within schools. (access via walking, cycling and Increase the number of young people progressing public transport will be particularly and (2016) onto higher education and advanced apprenticeships. important for those on lower incomes It will also create stronger collaboration between and young people). education institutions and businesses – ensuring the Raising education and employment Programmes future needs of business are an integral part of the aspirations. North East education system. Ensuring capacity of educational/ training facilities meet existing and new residents' needs.
This will support and reflect the strategic objective to close the skills gap at a sub-national level. Table 50 Transport and Accessibility
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
NECA (2015), 'Our This draft Vision sets out the key transport infrastructure The SA should support these aims The Local Plan should seek to Journey: A 20 priorities for the NELEP area which will inform the emerging and help to encourage walking and ensure that proposed Year Transport Transport Plan. The guiding principles are: cycling along with use of public allocations are in locations Manifesto for the transport options when assessing whereby they can encourage
North East' Drive economic growth - more and better jobs. policies and in particular allocations. walking, cycling and public Appendix Enhance access to local workplaces, services, shops and Proposed mitigation measures for transport use. This will leisure in all our communities. proposed site allocations are likely to involving ensuring links to Ensure public transport meets people's needs and be key in reflecting the principles of existing infrastructure and expectations. the Vision. creating new routes and A: Sustainability Improve air quality. services. Contribute to public health through more walking and Review cycling. Maintain all our transport assets to an appropriate
standard. of
Make the most efficient use of existing transport networks Policies,
Appraisal through technology and network management. Ensure land-use patterns are compatible with sustainable transport. Plans The vision includes objectives under the following topics: Scoping Walking. and Cycling.
Bus services - strong local connections. Programmes Report Local rail services. National rail services. Making journeys easy: smart travel information. (2016) Ports: getaways to a world of trade. Flying the flag for the region: the future for air travel. 251 252 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Moving freight. A: Appraisal Innovation. Review Roads fit for purpose. of Scoping Policies, Report Plans and (2016) Programmes Local
Table 51 Sustainable Development
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
County Durham The Sustainable Community Strategy (SCS) is the overarching plan The SA Framework The County Durham Plan is the Appendix Partnership for County Durham. It sets out our shared long-term vision for the should reflect the aims spatial expression of the SCS and (2014) The county, our ambitions for the area and the priorities that partners and of the SCS and through outlines where development will take Sustainable communities believe are important. It provides the blueprint to deliver site and policy place up to 2030. It should therefore Community long lasting improvements and sets the scene for the County Durham assessments should set out the strategy for the future A: Sustainability Strategy for Plan. ensure the Plan physical development of the county County Durham contributes towards and identify where new housing, Review 2014-2030 The strategy sets out the Partnership's vision of an Altogether Better meeting them. employment and jobs and retail Durham, by realising our five priority themes and high level objectives: development should take place and which areas need to be protected and of Altogether wealthier: enhanced. Policies, Appraisal Thriving Durham City. The SCS vision and objectives are Vibrant and successful towns. therefore key to the framing of Sustainable neighbourhoods and rural communities. policies across all topics. The Plan Improve the mental and physical wellbeing of the population. should demonstrate how social, Plans
Scoping A top location for business. economic and environmental priorities will be delivered. Altogether better for children and young people: and Programmes
Report Children and young people realise and maximise their potential. Children and young people make healthy choices and have the best start in life.
(2016) A think family approach is embedded in our support for families.
Altogether healthier: 253 254 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review Children and young people make healthy choices and have the best start in life. Reduce health inequalities and early deaths. of Improve the quality of life, independence and care and support Scoping for people with long term conditions. Policies, Improve mental health and wellbeing of the population. Protect vulnerable people from harm.
Report Support people to die in the place of their choice with the care and support they need. Plans
Altogether safer: and (2016) Reduce anti-social behaviour. Programmes Protecting vulnerable people from harm. Reducing re-offending. Alcohol and substance misuse harm reduction. Embed the Think Family approach. Counter terrorism and prevention of violent extremism. Reduce road casualties.
Altogether greener:
Deliver a cleaner, more attractive and sustainable environment. Maximise the value and benefits of Durham’s natural environment. Reduce carbon emissions and adapt to the impact of climate change. Promote sustainable design and protect Durham's heritage. Table 52 Climate Change and Adaptation
Plans, Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Policies and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
County Reducing our Emissions: The SA will need to The Plan should take Durham assess the Plan's account of the Council's
Climate County Durham will reduce CO2 emissions by 40% by 2020 from 1990 levels, individual and cumulative ambitious carbon targets
Change ensuring year on year reductions. contribution towards and contribute towards Appendix Strategy We will reduce the demand for energy, ensure homes and businesses are reducing greenhouse gas their achievement. In (2015) energy efficient and will promote alternative low carbon forms of energy emissions. addition, the design and generation. location of development should take into account A: Sustainability Adapting to Climate Change: the need to adapt to
climate change. Review County Durham will be a highly resilient place to live. We will build upon the County Council's Adaptation Action Plan and ensure that individuals and organisations are more prepared for the challenges of a of more extreme environment. Policies, Appraisal Other:
County Durham will have a strong and flexible public sector, working together
to ensure emissions are reduced on an annual basis, and resilience is Plans
Scoping embedded into services.
County Durham will be known for its thriving low carbon economy, and helping and to encourage innovation, new products and services. It will be a leading Programmes
Report location for green business growth capitalising on the key strengths of the area.
County Durham will have a strong and resilient built environment, with high (2016) quality, innovative and above all, sustainable development adding to the vibrancy of towns and villages. 255 256 Sustainability
Plans, Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Policies and requirements might be Programmes taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal County Durham will have a comprehensive and sustainable network of Review multi-functional green spaces and corridors throughout the County that, whilst being accessible to the public, connect and enhance bio-diverse habitats, enhance the quality of place and serve to ensure the County is more resilient to extremes of weather. of Scoping Policies,
County Durham will aim to reduce CO2 emissions from transport, through the promotion of travel choices and alternatives to private car travel, ultra low carbon vehicles, walking, cycling and more integrated travel planning. Report Plans County Durham is a highly engaged and proactive area, with the Council and its partners delivering upon priority actions. and (2016) Residents of County Durham are aware of the impacts that are faced by communities from outside of the County. We will endeavour to ensure that Programmes climate related impacts are not increased as a result of County Durham operations. Table 53 Air Quality
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Durham City Air A Plan is yet to be produced. Monitoring and detailed assessment of The SA will need to assess Plan is to take account of Quality Action Plan air quality across Durham City has determined that levels of nitrogen the impact of Plan policies the Air Quality Management dioxide from road traffic emissions exceed standards set in National upon the existing AQMA's. Area and any subsequent
Air Quality Objectives and EU limits. Cars are the single most Action Plan. Plan policies Appendix significant source. should seek to promote alternative modes of transport to the private car Chester-Le-Street Air A Plan is yet to be produced. The review and assessment of air quality and ensure new A: Sustainability Quality Action Plan to the west of Chester-le-Street town centre (at Menceforth Cottages) development is accessible
has determined that levels of nitrogen dioxide exceed the long term to such alternatives. Review national objective and EU limit for this pollutant. High concentrations of Nitrogen Dioxide in the Air Quality Management Area have been attributed to highly localised street canyon effects. However, increases in traffic flow could potentially exacerbate the situation. of Policies, Appraisal Table 54 Water
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken Plans Scoping on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal and
County Durham The following surface water principles should be incorporated into SA to assess how successfully Plan to include a policy on Programmes
Report Surface Water planning policies: any policies incorporate such surface water Management Plan Surface water runoff to be managed at source (avoid disposal principles. management that (2011) to public sewer systems wherever possible). incorporates the principles set out.
(2016) Run off rates should not exceed Greenfield rates wherever possible. Measures of source control should be actively encouraged. 257 258 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Measures that provide water quality improvements should be A: Appraisal actively encouraged. Review Developers should be encouraged to set part of their site aside for surface water management to contribute to flood risk management in the wider area and supplement green of infrastructure networks. Scoping Surface water should be removed from combined sewer systems. Policies, Developers should be encouraged to maximise permeable surfaces. Report Plans Table 55 Waste and
(2016) Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Programmes might be taken on board
throughout the Sustainability Programmes Appraisal
Waste Objectives include: The SA should assess Policies The Plan will be able to Management Provide sustainable integrated waste collection and against their ability to reduce waste contribute towards integrating Strategy disposal services that protect human health and the and encourage the sustainable and new development and waste Addendum 2010 environment. efficient use of resources. facilities and ensuring that waste Provide value for money in all waste management is managed within County services while achieving and exceeding government Durham's boundaries. targets for waste. Manage materials, as far as possible in accordance with the waste hierarchy, maximising the amount managed at higher levels of the hierarchy. Manage municipal waste as far as possible, within the boundaries of County Durham. Enable flexibility to allow for new technology developments and changing legislation. Table 56 Landscape
Plans, Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Policies and requirements might Programmes be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
County Assigns Landscape Description Units with one of six strategies: The SA should have The allocation of sites within the Durham regard to the Strategy Plan are to be informed by the
Landscape Conserve. through the Strategy and seek opportunities Appendix Strategy Conserve and enhance. assessment of the for landscape renewal to address (2008) Conserve and restore. Plan's effect upon mineral and waste legacies. Restore or enhance. landscape quality and character. Policies are to:
Enhance. A: Sustainability
This helps users of the strategy understand the amount of change desirable in Encourage high standards Review the landscape (low to high) and the broad direction that change should take of design (i.e back to former state or forward to new state). Protect mature landscape of Broad objectives of the strategy linked to new development include: features Policies, Appraisal To inform Plan policies and housing allocations. Promote traffic reduction
To inform and support the development of Supplementary Planning Set out the approach to Documents dealing with design issues. restoration of mineral sites Plans Scoping To encourage the preparation of ‘Village Design Statements’ by local Seek to protect features communities. which relate to the County's and mining and mineral Programmes
Report To encourage the retention and safeguarding on mature landscape features heritage. – and particularly mature trees and hedges – on development sites.
(2016) To encourage off-site mitigation of impacts on local landscape character. 259 260 Sustainability
Plans, Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Policies and requirements might Programmes be taken on board throughout the Sustainability A: Appraisal Appraisal Review To encourage positive contributions to the sustainability and quality of life of local communities from new development. of To encourage high standards of design and detailing in the landscaping Scoping of new development Policies,
To encourage improvements to the environment of industrial sites. Report To encourage positive management of vacant industrial land to improve Plans its appearance and wildlife value. and (2016) To ensure that new transport infrastructure is designed to minimise its impact on the character of the local landscape. Programmes
To support measures which reduce or manage traffic on rural roads.
To support and promote the development of Quiet Lanes
To support and encourage initiatives which promote cycling and walking.
To support the creation of Greenways between towns and villages.
To encourage improvements to the appearance of active and dormant mineral workings.
To encourage the creative restoration of mineral workings to restore or enhance landscape character and biodiversity and bring benefits to local communities. Plans, Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Policies and requirements might Programmes be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
-To promote an understanding of the importance of mining heritage to the character of local landscapes and to
secure the conservation of key features. Appendix
To promote and support landscape renewal initiatives which seek to improve the character and biodiversity of areas affected in the past by mineral working. A: Sustainability To promote the use of re-used or recycled material in landscaping works. Review
Table 57 Heritage of
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Policies, Appraisal Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the
Sustainability Appraisal Plans Scoping Durham Cathedral The Management Plan provides a strategy for conserving the World SA to assess the Plan's The objectives of the
and Castle World Heritage Site that meets the needs of the Site’s users and visitors. It is not impact upon the WHS Management plan should and Heritage Site a statutory document but an advisory framework to inform decisions about taking into account be taken into consideration
Management Plan the management of the Site. cumulative effects. when developing Programmes Report (2006) approaches and policies for The Management Plan’s key aims and objectives are as follows: the Plan that affect Durham City and the ‘setting’ of the
(2016) To enable the definition of the significance of the WHS, in line with World Heritage Site. World Heritage Committee procedures. 261 262 Sustainability
Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Appendix Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal A: Appraisal To maintain the quality and local distinctiveness of the WHS and its Review environment. To understand the processes and history of the WHS and use this knowledge to better inform plans for the current use and enjoyment of of the Site for its resident religious and educational establishments, Scoping as a visitor attraction and as a local community resource and for Policies, future uses and enjoyment of the Site. To set out guidelines for the use of land, buildings, landscape, townscape and cultural assets of the WHS, and include guidance for Report their sustainable conservation and maintenance. Plans To recommend how the educational and interpretational potential of the Site could be realised further, to better inform the public as well and (2016) as the formal users of the various buildings and functions housed within the WHS. To develop sustainable tourism and a positive visitor experience. Programmes To develop a programme of projects to implement the above, conserving and enhancing the WHS for all. To sustain the current uses of the WHS as the most appropriate way of maintaining and enhancing its significance.
Durham County Conservation Area designation is the main instrument available to local The SA will refer to the The Plan will need to have Council authorities to give effect to conservation policies for a particular Conservation Character regard to the conservation Conservation Area neighbourhood or area. There are 93 conservation areas within County Appraisals in order to help area character appraisals Character Durham and Conservation Area Character Appraisals have been determine effects. undertaken. Appraisals undertaken for: Bishop Auckland Shildon Eggleston Shotley Bridge Bolam Plans, Policies and Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or Implications for the Plan Programmes requirements might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Trimdon Village Newbiggin Annfield Plain (draft) Chester-Le-Street (draft)
Crook (draft) Appendix Gainford (draft) Sherburn House (draft)
Table 58 Housing A: Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Review and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal of DCC (2010) The Housing Strategy focuses on economic regeneration, The SA should aim to mitigate the The Plan should be Policies,
Appraisal Durham Housing particularly through facilitating challenging targets for housing harmful impacts of development reflective of the outcomes Strategy, growth and renewal around the main economic centres of Durham through recommendations such as of the housing strategy and 2010-2015 City and a number of our larger towns. improved energy efficiency, aim to transpose the sustainability of sites and climate outcomes into policy. It has three main themes: change adaptation. It should also Plans
Scoping support the general theme of Altogether Better Housing Markets - this is essentially about upgrading existing housing stock and the role housing plays in regeneration & growth as well as support services for vulnerable and affordability. people. Programmes Report (2016) 263 264 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Altogether Better Housing Standards - focuses on the role that housing plays in improving standards in terms of A: Appraisal investment in, and use of, existing stock. Review
Altogether Better at Housing People - addresses the non ‘bricks and mortar’ elements of housing and includes of outcomes that provide more and better support services for Scoping vulnerable groups. Policies,
DCC (2010) Older The Older Person Accommodation Strategy has the strategic The SA should take into account the The Plan should reflect of Report Person vision: needs of older people including the strategy and SA Plans Accommodation measures to support independent recommendations, Strategy Older people across County Durham have Altogether Better Lives: living, provision of appropriate and ensuring that older persons and
(2016) 2010-2015 living as independently as possible in homes that support good decent housing and access to services accommodation is health and wellbeing. and facilities. integrated into new
development in a Programmes sustainable way.
The 5 year strategy has high level, long term outcomes which it is envisaged will significantly contribute to the attainment of the vision:
Accessible and trustworthy information and advice is available to all older people across County Durham and supports choice and control. All older people have access to an affordable, warm, safe and secure home that enables independent living and the lifestyle they prefer. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Homes and neighbourhoods meet the current and future needs of County Durham’s older population and support independence, health and wellbeing. Older people are enabled to maximise their independence and wellbeing through access to support, practical assistance and opportunities to socialise. Appendix Table 59 Health and Social Issues
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes SA might be taken on board A: Sustainability throughout the Sustainability
Appraisal Review
County Durham This Plan was first developed in 2014 and refreshed to The SA should reflect the CYPFP The Plan should support the vision and Children and ensure it was still fit for purpose. It was also informed vision strategic objectives by objectives of the CYPFP by ensuring the Families by evidence in the Joint Strategic Needs Assessment including relevant elements into following: of
Partnership and the Community Safety Strategic Assessment. the SA framework, for example: Allocation of a range of market and Policies, Appraisal (2014), ' Children, Improving the quality and affordable housing (a mix of sizes, Young People The vision for the Children, Young People and Families quantity of educational/ types and tenures). and Families Plan is : training facilities. Built development and design
Plan, 2015-2018' Reduce health inequalities standards that goes beyond Plans ‘All children, young people and families believe, achieve Scoping and addressing deprivation. minimum design standards to help and succeed’ To achieve this vision, three Strategic Easy access to social/ support energy efficient and healthy Objectives have been agreed by the Children and recreational/ community places to live. and Families Partnership, along with ten outcomes. facilities via walking, cycling Educational/ training facilities and Programmes
Report and public transport. health/ recreational facilities have The following objectives were agreed to help meet this Ability to live in decent home capacity to meet the needs of vision: and reduce fuel poverty. existing and new residents'. Creation of safe, healthy and (2016) Children and young people realise and maximise inclusive communities that are their potential. 265 266 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Children and young people make healthy choices well-connected and in sustainable A: Appraisal and have the best start in life. locations. Review A Think Family approach is embedded in our support for families.
DCC (2014), 'The The vision for the Joint Health and Wellbeing Strategy SA should reflect these objectives The Local Plan and the IDP should of Scoping Joint Health and is to: by considering the health impacts ensure that there is adequate capacity of Policies, Wellbeing of plan proposals and encourage healthcare facilities to meet existing and Strategy for ‘Improve the health and wellbeing of the people of a reduction in health inequalities, proposed population growth. Considering County Durham County Durham and reduce health inequalities’. promote health lifestyles and a planning can have a significant impact on Report 2015-2018' reduction in social isolation. helping to promote healthy lifestyles and Plans Central to this vision is that decisions about the services reducing health inequalities through good that will be provided for service users, carers and design. As such policies and allocations and (2016) patients, should be made as locally as possible, should support these objectives by involving the people who use them. seeking to create 'healthy' places that
seek to improve people's quality of life. Programmes The following 6 Strategic Objectives are the medium term aims for the Joint Health and Wellbeing Strategy 2015-18:
Children and young people make healthy choices and have the best start in life. Reduce health inequalities and early deaths. Improve the quality of life, independence and care and support for people with long term conditions. Improve the mental and physical wellbeing of the population. Protect vulnerable people from harm. Support people to die in the place of their choice with the care and support that they need. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
County Durham The aim of our implementation plan is to reflect the 'No The SA Framework should include The Local Plan should seek to address Mental Health Health without Mental Health' outcome. The strategy objectives on mental as well as and minimise the factors that are likely Partnership sets the following objectives for County Durham: physical health. contributors to poor mental health: e.g. Board (2014), More people will have good mental health. mental illness is consistently associated 'County Durham More people with mental health problems will SA assessment should consider with deprivation, low income, Mental Health recover. the impacts of plan proposals on unemployment, poor education, poorer Appendix Implementation More people with mental health problems will have mental health (e.g. Social physical health and increased health-risk Plan, 2014-2017' good physical health. exclusion, access to services/ behaviour. More people will have a positive experience of facilities, impacts of traffic, etc) care and support. and seek ways to avoid/ minimise The Plan should ensure adequate impacts in relation to policies and provision of health/ social/ recreational A:
Sustainability Fewer people will suffer avoidable harm. site allocations. services and facilities for all members of
Fewer people will experience stigma and Review the community. Such services and a discrimination. facilities should be easily accessible.
New development, including transport of infrastructure improvements, should also Policies,
Appraisal help to minimise social exclusion.
DCC (2012) Green The Green Infrastructure Strategy aims to manage the The SA process should take into The County Durham Plan should plan
Infrastructure considerable change that is planned over the Plan account and highlight the pro-actively with GI as a central theme in Plans
Scoping Strategy period, minimising detrimental impact upon the outcomes of the GI strategy within policy development considering the social, (2012-2030) environment through: its recommendations. A good economic and environmental benefits Be an essential component of good planning, understanding of the level of open multi-functional GI. Policy refinement and particularly in the face of climate change, creating space provision across the County should also take into account SA Programmes
Report the right settings to support sustainable is important, particularly when recommendations: e.g. Increase in quality development and capitalising on opportunities for assessing potential housing and quantity of provision, mitigating the environmental enhancement. allocations, as this will determine loss of playing pitches/ open space, etc. Provide the strategic context for the regeneration the significance of impacts. (2016) of more deprived parts of the County and to 267 268 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes SA might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
sustain the economic and tourism potential of the A: Appraisal area. Review Provide a framework of green spaces and corridors to improve awareness and access to open space for local communities. of Identify opportunities to restore and improve Scoping landscapes and protect and enhance habitats. Policies, Advise and direct developers as to the green infrastructure that can be incorporated into or connected to their development, helping to ensure Report that built development is sustainable in terms of Plans its location, design, materials and whole life costs. and (2016) DCC (2011) The sport and leisure strategy aims to: SA to ensure access to sport and Plan to ensure sport and leisure facilities County Durham Raise the profile of sport and leisure being able leisure facilities are sustainable are accessible to existing and especially Sport and Leisure to contribute to meeting the county’s wider and that policies address existing to new communities. The Plan should also Programmes Strategy aspirations. deficiencies across the County. seek to address existing deficiencies in 2011-2014 Provide a framework so we can identify key provision. objectives and co-ordinate the delivery of services. Ensure partners are co-ordinated to deliver sport and leisure-related services. Determine targets for future sport and leisure investment. Identify required resources and potential sources of funds. Support the development of more detailed individual service plans. Table 60 Economy, Education & Skills
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2014), The Durham City masterplan outlines the strategic context SA should take into account the The Plan should help to deliver 'Durham City for how the city is developing. The purposes of the ambitions for growth as set-out in the the priorities set out in the Regeneration masterplan are to: Durham City Masterplan to provide masterplan, particularly around Plan' more context to the Plan. When housing need and the toursim Focus and co-ordinate regeneration activity and undertaking assessments the SA offer and help to achieve the
projects in Durham and to enable their delivery. should ensure that such ambitions are economic ambitions for Durham Appendix Contribute to the delivery of the emerging County not at the expense of social and City. Durham Local Plan and the Infrastructure Delivery environmental factors. Plan. Inform consultation with partners, stakeholders and A: Sustainability the community. Help to progress proposals with investors, developers Review and landowners. Raise Durham’s profile in order to attract and stimulate
further investment in the city. of Policies,
Appraisal The masterplan is based upon a three strand approach to achieving growth for Durham:
Establishing a central business quarter to accommodate emerging high growth sectors and to increase private sector Plans
Scoping employment to create a more balanced economy.
Releasing land for new homes to support the needs and of a growing population. Programmes
Report Developing Durham’s leisure tourism offer to broaden what Durham has to offer to a larger range of tourists including young people and families, in order to make it a genuine ‘48 hour stay’ visitor destination. (2016) 269 270 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2013), The key priorities to facilitate the regeneration of Peterlee SA should take into account the The Local Plan should help to 'Peterlee are as follows: priorities and actions as set-out in the deliver the priorities set out in the A: Appraisal Regeneration Encourage new business investment and activity and masterplan to provide more context to masterplan. The key way in Review Masterplan' the improvement of the industrial estates. plan policies and allocations. Ensure which the Plan can support To increase quality and choice of new homes. assessments take into account the regeneration in Peterlee is need to regenerate Peterlee and through the allocation of
Tackle the decline of North East Industrial Estate by of surrounding area but also seek much-needed new housing,
Scoping encouraging business relocation and reuse for Policies, housing. protection of the natural environment; employment and retail Work with the private sector to increase choice in and in particular the European wildlife development. supermarket provision and to encourage the town site designations along Durham's centre to cope with its changing role. coast (e.g. Durham Coast SAC and Report Capitalise on the advantages of the rail link through Northumbria Coast SPA). Detailed Plans the area by creating a new station in Horden and mitigation measures required to avoid reviewing public transport provision in Peterlee. adverse effects should be considered and (2016) in more detail through the HRA process. Programmes DCC (2013), This masterplan provides a summary of the programme of SA should take into account the The Local Plan should help to 'Shildon regeneration and investment activity that is taking place or priorities and actions as set-out in the deliver the priorities set out in the Regneration is planned in Shildon. It is intended that the masterplan will regeneration framework to provide regeneration framework. The key Framework' cover a 3 to 5 year window over a period of continuing more context to plan policies and way in which the Plan can economic volatility. It provides the strategic context which allocations. SA to help ensure support regeneration in Shildon underlies delivery and seeks to establish key principles to proposed development supports the is through the allocation of co-ordinate and focus investment in the town for housing, vitality and viability of Shildon to serve much-needed new housing, retail, leisure and tourism. The aim of the plan is to: existing and new residents' and employment and retail Encourage the development of new housing. visitors' needs. This is particularly development. Encourage new business activity and allocate space important considering Shildon is a key for new employment opportunities. tourist destination with the Locomotion Seek to maximise the economic benefits to the Town Museum and has links to key service/ from visitors to Locomotion. employment centres in the Enhance the quality, appearance and function of the surrounding area. town centre. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2013), Newton Aycliffe is a major regional employment centre; the SA should take into account the Plan proposals should support 'Newton Aycliffe masterplan will support its current businesses and priorities and actions as set-out in the the strategic case for on-going Regeneration encourage new expansion. Housing continues to expand masterplan to provide more context to regeneration activity in Newton Masterplan' to create an attractive town to live and work in with good plan policies and allocations. SA to Aycliffe and its rural hinterland. links to other employment centres. New housing should help ensure proposed development The Plan should recognise the build upon the new town qualities of open space and layout. supports the vitality and viability of role played by Newton Aycliffe as The town centre needs to adapt to fulfil its role as the local Newton Aycliffe to serve existing and a key service and employment service centre for the existing and growing population. The new residents' and visitors' needs. centre for the surrounding area Appendix aim of the plan is to: This is particularly important in South Durham. Support Aycliffe Business Park, company expansion considering Newton Aycliffe is a key and the Hitachi Rail development as a major service/ employment centre from the surrounding area.
employment opportunities. A: Sustainability Seek to double the number of jobs in the supply chain. Review Work with the private sector to deliver successful and sustainable housing expansion. Work with partners to deliver the Aycliffe Shopping
Centre Masterplan. of Policies,
Appraisal DCC (2013), The town is in an excellent transport location, remains an SA should take into account the Plan proposals should support 'Spennymoor employment centre and has expansion opportunities created priorities and actions as set-out in the the strategic case for on-going Regeneration through the Durham Gate development. It is a good place regeneration masterplan to provide regeneration activity in Masterplan' to live with access to employment and can act as a service more context to plan policies and Spennymoor and its rural centre for the settlements surrounding it. The town centre allocations. SA to help ensure hinterland. The Plan should Plans Scoping needs to adjust to changing patterns of retail provision to proposed development supports the recognise the role played by function in a challenging market. The aim of the Masterplan vitality and viability of Spennymoor to Spennymoor as a key service and is to: serve existing and new residents' and and employment centre for the Support Spennymoor as a major employment centre visitors' needs. This is particularly surrounding area in South Programmes Report including the Green Lane Industrial Estate and the important considering Spennymoor is Durham. Durhamgate development. a key service/ employment centre from Work with the private sector to deliver successful and the surrounding area.
(2016) sustainable housing expansion. 271 272 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Work with the private sector to bring about an effective sustainable solution for the future of Festival Walk. A: Appraisal Encourage adaption and change for the town centre. Review
DCC (2012) The Regeneration Statement underpins the 'Altogether Ensure SA fully-considers the The plan should reflect the Regeneration Wealthier' strand of the SCS, focusing on shaping a County economic implications of plan economic priorities set-out in the Statement Durham where people want to live, work, invest and visit proposals and ensures that they reflect Regeneration Statement and of Scoping 2012-2022 whilst enabling residents and businesses to achieve their the scope of regeneration proposed. help to achieve its economic Policies, potential. The 2012 update recognises the progress made The SA should also help to ensure that ambitions for Durham City and since 2009 and looks forward over the next ten years to a the plan supports the revitalisation of the County. challenging integrated programme of activity which takes the small towns and villages across Report advantage of our key assets and tackles any constraints to the County, as well as enabling Plans growth. In a partnership approach we will: Durham city to meet its economic Lift constraints on development and stimulate potential, by encouraging the and (2016) investment in the infrastructure needed to increase sustainable growth of communities. economic activity and wealth. Capitalise on Durham City’s business and tourism Programmes potential to drive forward economic growth for County Durham. Invest in our major towns, continuing with our ‘Whole Town’ approach. Drive forward the delivery of new homes with the right mix of services to support our growth aspirations. Improve the choice and standard of existing public and private housing. Invest in our human capital as a direct contributor to growth. Address the needs of our most vulnerable residents, mitigating the impact of welfare reform. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2012) The Tourism Strategy has six main aims which aim to The SA should ensure that the Reflect the aims of the County Durham increase the number of visitor numbers, spend and improve priorities of the Management Plan are Management Plan through the Tourism economic vitality of the County through improved tourism. taken into account during the SA the Durham city centric Management Plan The main aims: process, with all positive and negative approach. Adopt 2012-2016 Optimise the potential of Durham City to attract visitors impacts assessed under the SA recommendations from the SA to the county and the region. framework. In particular reference report to mitigate potential Increase spend by implementing a step change in the should be made to the main aim of adverse impact upon natural Appendix quality of the visitor experience. attracting people to rural areas and environment. Develop local distinctiveness in line with the image the advantages to the rural economy and identity of the county utilising the destination name that this will bring against potential "Durham‟ and its brand themes. negative impacts upon the natural environment. A:
Sustainability Tackle seasonality by focusing on two areas of development: events and business tourism. Review Grow the profile of the county regionally and nationally by developing products with national resonance. Extend stay by optimising the potential of town centres
to draw visitors into rural areas and provide service of
centres to visitors staying in rural locations. Policies, Appraisal DCC (2012), Chester-le-Street has strengths as convenient place to live SA should take into account the Ensure the Local Plan supports 'Chester-le-Street with strong local services and offers ease of commuting to priorities as set-out in the masterplan the masterplan's approach and Development employment centres. It is well placed to benefit from housing to provide more context to plan sets the strategic policy Plans Masterplan' development, major change at the Emirates cricket ground policies and allocations. SA should framework under which these Scoping and potentially on the Lambton Estate. It needs ensure that plan policies and localised objectives sit. The CDP
strengthening to ensure that its retail centre benefits from allocations seek to and support the will also be a key delivery and local development and that current adverse economic improvement of the retail offer, mechanism for proposed
impact is minimised. economic viability and vitality as well regeneration in Chester-le-Street Programmes Report as the general environment of town centre. Officers should The core aims of the masterplan are to: Chester-le-Street town centre. ensure that there is on-going consultation on plan proposals to
(2016) Focus and co-ordinate the regeneration activities in keep local people involved and Chester-le-Street and assist the enabling of a delivery engaged in the policy mechanism for the various regeneration projects. development process. 273 274 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
To input into the delivery of the emerging Local Plan and Community Infrastructure Plan and draw together A: Appraisal the strategic and policy drivers for development and Review regeneration within Chester-le-Street. Assist in the consultation process with partners, stakeholders and the community. of Assist in taking proposals forward with investors, Scoping developers and landowners. Policies, Raise Chester-le-Street’s profile in order to stimulate further investment activity. Report DCC (2012), This development framework provides a summary of the SA should take into account the Plan proposals should support Plans 'Barnard Castle detailed programme of regeneration and investment activity priorities and actions as set-out in the the strategic case for on-going Development that is taking place or is planned in Barnard Castle. It development framework to provide regeneration activity in Barnard and (2016) Framework' provides the strategic context which underlies delivery and more context to plan policies and Castle and its rural hinterland. seeks to establish key principles to co-ordinate and focus allocations. SA to help ensure The Plan should recognise the investment in the town for housing, retail, leisure and proposed development supports the role played by Barnard Castle as Programmes tourism. The core aims of the framework are to: vitality and viability of Barnard Castle a key service and employment Focus and co-ordinate the regeneration activities in to serve existing and new residents' centre for the surrounding area Barnard Castle and assist the enabling of a delivery and visitors' needs. This is particularly in rural West Durham. mechanism for the various regeneration projects. important considering Barnard Castle To input into the delivery of the emerging Local Plan is a key service/ employment centre and Community Infrastructure Plan and draw together from the surrounding area. the strategic and policy drivers for development and regeneration within Barnard Castle. Assist in the consultation process with partners, stakeholders and the community. Assist in taking proposals forward with investors, developers and landowners. Raise Barnard Castle’s profile in order to stimulate further investment activity. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2012), The purpose of the Masterplan is to secure a successful SA should take into account the Plan proposals should support 'Consett future for the town centre by developing its substantial priorities and actions as set-out in the the strategic case for on-going Development strengths and addressing its weaknesses. In particular it development framework to provide regeneration activity in Consett Framework' establishes a vision for Consett Town Centre to guide its more context to plan policies and and its rural hinterland. The Plan development and improvement to 2025: allocations. SA to help ensure should recognise the role played Incorporates improved links to and within the town proposed development supports the by Consett as a key service and centre for pedestrians and cyclists. vitality and viability of Consett to serve employment centre for the Appendix Creates a linked system of high quality public spaces. existing and new residents' and surrounding area in North Provides a clear design structure for new development visitors' needs. This is particularly Durham. with an emphasis on sustainable design principles. important considering Consett is a key Offers specific proposals for key sites based on sound service/ employment centre from the surrounding area. A:
Sustainability commercial principles.
Identifies other sites and buildings which should be Review retained and those where redevelopment and improvement will be encouraged. Provides the basis on which development proposals
for the town centre would be judged. of
Sets out how the proposals will be funded, Policies, Appraisal implemented and programmed.
DCC (2012), The masterplan identifies a number of key strategic issues SA should take into account the The Local Plan should support
'Crook that need effective intervention to allow the town centre to strategic issues and actions as set-out the priorities in the masterplan Plans Masterplan' redefine its offer and establish a strong and distinctive range in the masterplan to provide more and help to deliver them. The Scoping of complimentary uses and activities. context to plan policies and need to improve the retail offer
Support the retail offer in the town to increase the allocations. Through assessments the and employment opportunities in and catchment area SA should identify opportunities to Crook should be recognised in
support the delivery of town centre the Plan. Programmes Report Improve movement patterns in an around the town improvements along with new retail centre and employment development. (2016) 275 276 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Develop the role of the centre as an employment and enterprise hub A: Appraisal Develop a high quality, distinctive and attractive town Review centre environment Short term intervention for public realm improvements will be focused on linking and improving pedestrian access of routes to proposed new retail areas. Targeted Business Scoping Improvement grant support will be operating within the town Policies, centre with a focus on Commercial Street.
DCC (2012), Given the passage of time, the successful delivery of the SA should take into account the The Local Plan should take Report 'Seaham and majority of the projects proposed under the Seaham priorities as set-out in the development account of the priorities set out Plans Murton Regeneration Strategy of 1994 and the established links framework to provide more context to in the Seaham and Murton Development between the two settlements, the Council has sought to plan policies and allocations. Ensure Development Framework to and (2016) Framework' develop a refreshed strategy to encompass both Seaham assessments take into account the inform and use them to inform and Murton. The core aims of the framework are to: need to regenerate Seaham and the level of proposed housing, Focus and co-ordinate the regeneration activities of Murton but also seek protection of the employment and retail allocations Programmes Durham County Council and its partners and assist natural environment; and in particular as well as the need for the enabling of a delivery mechanism for the various the European wildlife site designations regeneration.In particular the regeneration projects. along Durham's coast (e.g. Durham Plan should ensure there is a To input into the delivery of the emerging Local Coast SAC and Northumbria Coast strong focus on the vitality and Development Framework and Community SPA). Detailed mitigation measures quality of the settlement centres Infrastructure Plan and draw together the strategic required to avoid adverse effects together with the promotion of a and policy drivers for development and regeneration should be considered in more detail number of key under-utilised within Seaham and Murton. through the HRA process. Specific sites for a mix of redevelopment Assist in the consultation process with partners, consideration should be given to the and regeneration purposes. stakeholders and the community. proposal to extend the coastal park Assist in taking proposals forward with investors, and enhancing coastal path links as developers and landowners. this is likely to increase recreational Raise the profiles of Seaham and Murton to stimulate pressure on the European further investment activity. designations. Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2012), The Council's Regeneration Statement defines Stanley as SA should take into account the Ensure the Local Plan supports 'Stanley Town one of Durham County Council's key regeneration priorities priorities as set-out in the masterplan the masterplan's 'whole town Masterplan' and identifies the town centre as requiring improvements. to provide more context to plan approach' and sets the strategic The masterplan identifies a number of key strategic issues policies and allocations. SA should policy framework under which that need effective intervention to allow the town centre to ensure that plan policies and these localised objectives sit. The redefine its offer and establish a strong and distinctive range allocations seek to and support the CDP will also be a key delivery of complimentary uses and activities. improvement of the retail offer, mechanism for proposed Transforming the shopping environment to one which economic viability and vitality as well regeneration in Stanley town Appendix is well designed, safe and easy to get around. as the general environment of Stanley centre. Officers should ensure Setting a clear framework to guide new development, town centre. that there is on-going whilst refurbishing the shops and premises that already consultation on plan proposals to keep local people involved and serve Stanley. A: Sustainability Improving the economic viability of the town through engaged in the policy Review increased footfall and ensuring more linked trips. development process. Improving links between the town centre and the surrounding local residential areas, visitor attractions,
heritage sites and wider countryside. of
Encouraging viable development opportunities and Policies, Appraisal new uses for development sites to support a more vibrant centre. Seeking to widen the range of existing services and
facilities provided in the town centre to improve its Plans vitality and viability. Scoping Improving the night time economy and community
safety in the centre. and Ensuring local people are involved in the regeneration
process and have confidence to take ownership of the Programmes Report Masterplan.
DCC (2012), The County Council has prepared this development SA should take into account the Plan proposals should support
(2016) 'Bishop Auckland framework is to establish a strategy for the future priorities and actions as set-out in the the strategic case for on-going development and regeneration of Bishop Auckland. To date, 277 278 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Development a detailed analysis of existing social, economic and development framework to provide regeneration activity in Bishop Framework' environmental conditions has been undertaken. The core more context to plan policies and Auckland and its rural hinterland. A: Appraisal aims of the framework are to: allocations. SA to help ensure The Plan should recognise the Review Focus and co-ordinate the regeneration activities of proposed development supports the role played by Bishop Auckland Durham County Council and its partners and assist vitality and viability of Bishop Auckland as a key service and employment the enabling of a delivery mechanism for the various to serve existing and new residents' service for the surrounding area of regeneration projects. and visitors' needs. This is particularly in South Durham. Scoping To input into the delivery of the emerging Local important considering Bishop Policies, Development Framework and Community Auckland is a key service/ employment Infrastructure Plan and draw together the strategic centre from the surrounding area. and policy drivers for development and regeneration Report within Bishop Auckland. Plans Assist in the consultation process with partners, stakeholders and the community. and (2016) Assist in taking proposals forward with investors, developers and landowners. Programmes Raise the profile of Bishop Auckland.
County Durham Our ambition is to create sustainable places where people Ensure SA fully-considers the This strategy should inform the Economic want to live, work, invest and visit. socio-economic implications of plan policy and allocations included in Partnership proposals and that they harness the the Local Plan and help to meet/ (2011), 'Business, Opportunities: opportunities, meet the challenges and deliver its objectives. Enterprise and objectives as set out in this strategy. Fundamentally the Local Plan Skills Strategy' Harnessing the potential of Durham City to drive The SA Framework should include should tackle areas of growth. objectives and sub-objectives on the socio-economic weakness and Plentiful supply of good value development sites and following: harness the opportunities to business premises. Improving the quality and stimulate growth and prosperity A large workforce with a diverse and improving skills quantity of and access to over the plan period.In particular base and competitive incomes. educational opportunities. the Local Plan should: Attractive towns and villages in a variety of attractive Improving the skill-base of Create and Safeguard a semi-rural and rural locations. current and future workers wide-range of employment across the County. opportunities to facilitate a Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
A high quality of life offer High profile developments Create opportunities to 'step change' in the such as Durham Gate, NETPark, and Amazon Park. encourage young people to stay County's economy. A history of partnership-led delivery and a profile of in the County following end of Ensure Durham City and functioning partnerships. education/ training. key areas of employment Functioning enterprise networks which support new Creation/ safeguarding of a reach their economic and small businesses. wide-range of employment potential. Expertise in engineering and manufacturing which can opportunities; particularly in Allocate new high-quality Appendix support an export-led economy Establishment of growth sectors. employment sites in mechanisms for collecting and communicating labour The SA should ensure the desired sustainable locations that market intelligence. socio-economic benefits of this are attractive to the market. Good schools and colleges and a world-class strategy are not at the expense of Reduce worklessness and
broader social and environmental raise economic aspirations A: Sustainability university for education and research which supports strategic partnerships with innovative companies and considerations. and perceptions of the Review hi-tech spin-out businesses. County. Well-placed within the UK to attract and develop Improve the skills-base of emerging industries and technology. the County's current and
Challenges: future workforce. of
Identifying and addressing skills gaps that are Help to address social Policies, Appraisal constraining the economy. issues that contribute to the Maximising labour market intelligence to demonstrate socio-economic challenges opportunities and support service planning. described.
Increasing graduate retention. Support the necessary Plans development to maintain Scoping Increasing the number of high-technology businesses. Maintaining a supply of good value business and encourage the growth accommodation Identifying supply and demand issues industries. and relating to succession planning for businesses. Harness the economic
opportunities associated Programmes Report Tackling negative external perceptions of County Durham and places within it. with the County's unique and diverse natural, built Identifying emerging technology and sectors. and historic environment. Growing a diverse private sector. (2016) Officers should also work closely The strategy therefore identifies the following objectives: with delivery partners and 279 280 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and SA How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and Programmes might be taken on board throughout the Sustainability Appraisal
Ensure young people and adults gain the skills and stakeholder to ensure the experience needed for successful careers and to meet implementation of priorities and A: Appraisal employer needs. co-ordinate activities. Review Overcome the complex mix of factors that cause worklessness and social problems. Raise the demand for skills by businesses and improve of economic competitiveness by raising the number of Scoping people with higher level skills. Policies, Align the provision of training and education to support the needs of businesses. Develop infrastructure that enables people to access Report training and education, and employment and supports Plans businesses. Harness the unique qualities of Durham City to and (2016) maximise its role as a driver for change and economic growth. Programmes Work in partnership to coordinate activities that stimulate enterprise and attract investment. Share knowledge, experience and good practice to improve the effectiveness of County Durham Economic Partnership.
Table 61 Transport and Accessibility
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and SA might be taken on board throughout Programmes the Sustainability Appraisal
DCC (2012) The Cycling Strategy aims to promote cycling as a visible, The SA should take into account the The Plan should reflect of the aims County Durham normal, everyday activity. The strategy and action plan Draft Cycling strategy and promote of the cycling strategy and take a Cycling will help County Durham to: accessible routes as mitigation for positive approach to encouraging development. When conducting Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan and SA might be taken on board throughout Programmes the Sustainability Appraisal
Strategy and Become more widely recognised as a cycling friendly assessments officers should be residents and visitors alike to access Action Plan county. mindful of the 'pedestrian hierarchy' facilities and services by bike. The 2012-2015 Provide a high quality cycling network that’s and seeking to promote/ safeguard Plan through the IDP should also look accessible, well maintained, signed, recorded and walking and cycling before other to create and enhance local and promoted. modes of transport. strategic cycle routes. Increase opportunities for sustainable travel to work, school and key services and reduce reliance on Appendix cars. Encourage drivers to become more aware and tolerant of cyclists. Contribute to the quality of people's lives, their A:
Sustainability fitness, health and well-being.
Encourage visitors on active breaks and increase Review opportunities to enjoy tourist destinations and the countryside. Enhance the environment and contribute to reducing
climate change. of Policies,
Appraisal DCC (2011) The LTP3 Strategy document refers to the possible need The SA should help to deliver the New development should be sited in Local Transport to prioritise LTP3 goals in the case of severe funding goals of the LTP3 by considering the areas that have good access by Plan 3 restrictions. need for the transport network to meet public transport, walking and cycling; 2011-2021 social and economic needs without should not increase road congestion; Plans The main goals of the LTP3 are: damaging the environment in which it and should contribute to improving Scoping operates. SA should also ensure the accessibility in the county.
Stronger economy through regeneration. impacts of proposed schemes are and Carbon Reduction. appropriately mitigated through The CDP should also plan for the
Safer and Healthier Travel. recommendations. programme of measures set out in Programmes Report Better Accessibility to Services. LTP3 Delivery Plan, with the Improve Quality of Life and a Healthy Natural Infrastructure Delivery Plan reflecting Environment. the key funding priorities. (2016) 281 282 Sustainability
Plans, Policies Key objectives or requirements relevant to plan and How objectives or requirements Implications for the Plan Appendix and SA might be taken on board throughout Programmes the Sustainability Appraisal
The Delivery Plan sets out how Local Transport Plan 3 will be delivered. It identifies the funding streams that A: Appraisal support capital investment in the transport asset, the Review selected interventions (the physical schemes and measures) to be implemented, the delivery programme framework containing the planned budgets and how performance and achievement of the LTP3 objectives will of Scoping be monitored. Policies, Report Plans and (2016) Programmes Appendix B: Review of Baseline Data
Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) 283 Appendix B: Review of Baseline Data
Appendix B: Review of Baseline Data
This section sets out the baseline indicators, their trends and data sources in detail. It also includes some commentary and an indication of the future baseline trend in the absence of the County Durham Plan. The baseline data was collected and organised under the following broad topics:
Social Welfare and Communities Health Housing Crime Economic Vitality Education and Skills Access and Transport Climate Change Air, Water and Soil Quality Biodiversity and Geodiversity Landscape Heritage Resource Efficiency
The following table shows how the various indicators and their trends have been rated in this appendix:
Table 62 Indicator Key
Indicator Status
Indicator status unclear
Indicator for the County is significantly better than either comparators, targets and/or historical trends
Indicator for the County is better than either comparators, targets and/or historical trends
Indicator for the County is below either comparators, targets and/or historical trends are getting worse
Indicator for the County significantly below either comparators, targets and/or historical trends are getting significantly worse
↑ Trend is improving
<--> No change to trend
↓ Trend is declining
? Trend is unclear
284 Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) Table 63 Social Welfare and Communities
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Status Plan Source
Total 2001 - 493,700 49,138,831 N/A ↑ The County's population is increasing It is anticipated that the Census Population in line with and in proportion with population will continue to Data, ONS (countywide) 2006 - 499,300 (England, 2001) national statistics. increase, albeit perhaps at a slower rate. Services 2011 - 513,000 51,092,000 and facilities must be developed in line in order 2014 - 517,800 (England,2007) to support communities.
53,100,000
(England, 2011) Sustainability 54,300,000
(England, 2014) Appendix
Total Central: - N/A ↑ This is a breakdown of the countywide It is anticipated that the Census
Appraisal Population population data and so the same population will continue to Data, ONS per Area 100,244 increasing trend has been identified. increase, albeit perhaps at
(2001-2011) a slower rate. Rates of B: (2001) It can also be determined which are growth will be different the largest to the smallest areas in area by area. Review
Scoping 106,734 terms of population and that the rankings have remained the same 2001-2011:
(2011) of
North: 1: South Baseline Report
126,141 2: North
3: Central (2016) (2001) Data
133,510 4: East 285 286 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Appendix Status Plan Source
(2011) 5: West B: Appraisal
South: Review
140,888
(2001) of Scoping Baseline 144,764
(2011) Report
East: Data
93,923 (2016) (2001)
95,131
(2011)
West:
32,229
(2001)
33,103
(2011)
Population County: England: N/A ↑ All areas across the County have It is anticipated that the Census Change: % experienced an increase in population population will continue to Data, ONS Increase 4% 8% as per the data noted above. Even Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Status Plan Source
(2001-2011) Central: though these percentage increases are increase, albeit perhaps at below the national average this is not a slower rate. 6.5% considered an issue as population does not have an associated target North: and it is understood that other areas of the country will have experienced 5.8% more significant increases in comparison to County Durham. South: Interestingly, Central and North Durham experienced a higher 2.8% percentage increase than the County average. East: Sustainability
1.3%
West: Appendix
2.7% Appraisal County 0-4 years: North East: N/A ↑ The estimated population of the County It is anticipated that the County
Durham increased by 3.1% between 2005 and population will continue to Durham B: Population 2010, an increase of over 15,100 age in line with national Area Action 11.8% 0-4 years: Review Change people. As with other areas and the trends. Partnership
Scoping 2005-2010 (% 5-15 years: 10.6% nation, the county has an increasingly Profile Age aging population, with the retired Breakdown) population (people aged 65 and over)
-7.6% 5-15 of years:-8.9% increasing by 7.1% in the county since 2005. This continually aging population Baseline 16-64 years: Report has and will continue to have a 16-64 significant impact on resources and 3.5% years:3.4% services provided to the residents in the county. (2016) 65 years+: 7.1% 65 years+: Data 4.4% 287 288 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Appendix Status Plan Source
85 years+: 85 years+: There is, interestingly a large increase
in the 0-4 years age range, which is B:
Appraisal larger than the regional average. 20.5% 22.6% Review
England and Wales: of
Scoping 0-4 years: Baseline
12.7%
5-15 years: Report Data -4.8%
16-64 years: (2016)
3.4%
65 years+:
6.9%
85 years+:
20.4%
Resident Barnard Castle: 2001 - N/A ↑ Resident population of the main towns It is anticipated that the 2001 and Population in 5,300 in the County has generally increased. population in the main 2011 Main Towns The biggest increase over the census centres will likely continue Census 2011 - 7,040 period has been in Consett where this upward trend, around 8000 residents now live. Bishop therefore it is essential that Bishop Auckland: Aukland has also seen a large increase retail, employment, in population. Perhaps surprisingly housing and social and 2001 - 16,500 Durham has only seen an increase of green infrastructure is Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Status Plan Source
2011 - 23,325 around 1200, whilst Peterlee has seen planned proportionately in a decrease of nearly 2000. these areas. Chester-Le-St: 2001 - 23,900
2011 - 24,433
City of Durham: 2001 - 42,000
2011 - 43,200
Consett: Sustainability 2001 - 27,400
2011 - 35,226 Appendix Crook:
Appraisal 2001 - 8,300
2011 - 11,873 B: Review Newton Aycliffe: 2001 -
Scoping 25,500
2011 - 25,727 of
Peterlee: Baseline Report
2001 - 30,100 (2016) 2011 - 28,251 Data
Seaham: 289 290 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Appendix Status Plan Source
2001 - 21,700 B: Appraisal
2011 - 24,079 Review
Shildon:
2001 - 10,100 of Scoping Baseline 2011 - 10,363
Spennymooor: 2001 - 17,200 Report Data 2011 - 17,982
Stanley (2016)
2001 - 16,300
2011 - 16,879
Levels of net 2008 - 5,300 N/A ↑ After a large increase in rates of net Whilst rates of inward Census, inward inward migration between 2008 and migration remain positive, ONS migration 2010 - 7,700 2011, 2012 saw a decrease in the it is likely that inward rates of 37% from the previous year. migration will continue 2011 - 8,400 given national migration trend. 2012 - 5,300
Population 2012 - 517,800 N/A ↑ The long term scenario , preferred by Population is likely to DCC Projections DCC is one of an increased population continue to rise in line with 2030 - 560,077 of 8.2%. population projections. Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without the Data Status Plan Source
Durham 2011 - 12,857 N/A <--> The projected level of increase in The figure comes from Durham University student numbers to 2020 is 359. Durham University, University Student 2014/15 - 13,482 therefore accommodation, Population should be planned in a Projections 2019/20 - 13,841 way that recognises this number.
Age 2001 - 16.5% 2007 - 16.9% N/A ↓ There has been an increase in the It is anticipated that this Census Breakdown retired (plus 65+) age range as a trend will continue to Data, ONS (65+) as a 2007 - 17.6% 2011 - 17.2% percentage of population. This increase, albeit perhaps at percentage of coincides with the national and regional a slower rate. total 2011 - 17.8% average. population Sustainability Appendix Appraisal B: Review Scoping of Baseline Report (2016) Data 291 292 Sustainability
Table 64 Health Appendix
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future without Data Source Durham Status Baseline Condition the Plan
Life 75.6 - England No target set but an <--> There has been no Potential for life ONS, B: expectancy at 2003-05 increase in life change in the life expectancy to improve, if Appraisal Review birth (Males) 76.9 expectancy that narrows expectancy for males domestic development is http://www.hscic.gov.uk/ 77.0 - the gap between the from the previous co-located with 2008-10 2003-05 regional and national dataset. Moreover the appropriate social and picture would indicate trend is worse in County health and environmental of 77.0 - 2012 78.5 good performance. Durham than the average considerations. Scoping for England. Baseline 2008-09
78.6 - 2012 Report Data
Life 80.7 England No target set but an ↑ There has been a slight Potential for life ONS, expectancy at increase in life improvement in the life expectancy to improve if http://www.hscic.gov.uk/ (2016) birth (08-10) 82.6 expectancy that narrows expectancy for females domestic development is (Females) the gap between the over the dataset period. co-located with 81.0 (2012) regional and national However, the trend is still appropriate social and picture would indicate worse than the national health and environmental (2012) good performance. average. considerations.
Mortality rates 92.51 England No target set but a ↑ Whilst the data is still Potential for mortality ONS, from all reduction in mortality worse than the national rates to reduce, through http://www.hscic.gov.uk/ circulatory (05-07) 68.0 rates that narrows the average, the trend is one co-locating domestic diseases gap between the of significant development with under 75 79.0 (08-10) regional and national improvement. appropriate social and years (Rate picture would indicate health and environmental per 100,000 (08-10) 56.0 good performance. considerations. population) 71.5 (2012)
(09-11)
59.3 Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future without Data Source Durham Status Baseline Condition the Plan
(2012)
Mortality rates 131.6 England No target set but a ↑ There has been an Potential for mortality ONS, from all (05-07) reduction in mortality improving trend in the rates to reduce, through http://www.hscic.gov.uk/ cancers under 115.5 rates that narrows the mortality rates from co-locating domestic 75 years 121.9 gap between the cancers for those under development with (Rate per (08-10) (05-07) regional and national 75. However, the trend is appropriate social and 100,000 picture would indicate still above the national health and environmental population) 117.6 110.1 good performance. average. considerations.
(09-11) (08-10)
122.0 - 105.0 -
Sustainability (2012) (2012)
Obesity 9.7% England No target set but a ↓ The obesity trend Potential for obesity trend National Child
among reduction in obesity amongst school children to continue to worsen Measurement Appendix primary (2006-07) 9.4% rates that narrows the in reception is increasing, considering local and Programme data tables school gap between the and increasing in rate national trend. Targeting
Appraisal children in 9.5% (2010-11) regional and national above the national of support to worst reception year picture would indicate average. performing communities good performance. and increasing Health and (2010-11) 9.5% B: leisure services and
infrastructure. Review 10.7% (2013-14) Scoping (2013-14) of
Obesity 19.7% England No target set but a ↑ The obesity rate amongst Potential for obesity trend National Child Baseline Report among reduction in obesity primary school children to worsen considering Measurement primary (06-07) 19.0% rates that narrows the in year 6 has improved local and national trend. Programme data tables school gap between the since 2010/11. However, Targeting of support to children in 21.6% (2010-11) regional and national the rate is still above the worst performing (2016) Year 6 picture would indicate national average. communities and Data (10-11) 19.1% good performance. increasing Health and 293 294 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future without Data Source Appendix Durham Status Baseline Condition the Plan
21.3% (2013-14) leisure services and infrastructure.
(2013-14) B: Appraisal Review
Prevalence of 22.3% North East Four week smoking ↑ The North East has the Potential for trend to NHS information centre: smoking in quitters per 100,000 highest rate of cigarette continue to improve given Statistics on Smoking adults (2010-11) 22.3% smokers aged 16+: smoking in England and local and national Cessation Services in of 2,939 (2015/16). whilst County Durham is statistics for quitting. England Scoping 20.9% (2014) lower than the north east Baseline average it is still higher 2011-12) England than the national trend. Report
27% Data
(2000) (2016) 19%
(2013) Table 65 Housing
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
Housing 2,051 North East Target should be to ↓ Completions over this period have Housing development Durham Completions ensure that housing fallen. will be market led, County (2006) 7,170 completion meet developing where sites Council housing demand are most viable and 1,230 (2006) across the County have the highest return (requirements to be on investment. (2011) established by the County Durham Plan). 1,165
(2014) Sustainability Housing South-491 Target should be to ? Completions are highest in the South Some areas will Durham completions ensure that housing and lowest in the West. Whilst the continue to suffer from County per area North- 279 completion meet completions in the west are expected lack of investment in a Council
housing demand to be low due to the larger rural market led approach. Appendix (2014) West-61 across the population, the distributions gives an County(requirements interesting picture of where to be established by development is being targeted. Appraisal East-98 the County Durham Plan). Central-236 B: Review
Scoping Proportion of (2001) Target should be to ↑ House types across the County vary The majority of house 2011 household ensure that the correct significantly, with the majority of types are likely to be Valuation types across Terraced type and mix of dwellings being terraced and a those that offer most on Office the County housing across the relatively small number being investment. May Agency of
40.9% County is achieved. detached, although this number is on contribute to a Baseline Report the increase. reduction in certain Semi-Detached types.
36.6% (2016) Data
Detached 295 296 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
17.0%
Flats B: Appraisal Review 5.4%
(2011) of
Scoping Terraced Baseline
40.1%
Semi Detached Report Data 38.1%
Detached (2016)
19.8%
Flats
4.8%
Affordable 88 Target should be to ↓ The amount of affordable housing Affordable homes are Durham homes ensure that affordable being delivered decreased in the unlikely to be delivered, County delivered (2007) housing demand year ending 2014. However, this in terms of the numbers Council across the County is does coincide with a decrease in needed, without a local 369 met (requirements to housing completions seen over this focus. be established by the period also. (2011) County Durham Plan).
143
(2014) Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
Tenure Central North East - <--> The number of owner occupiers in Ownership levels are Census, breakdown the County remains steady with a likely to follow the same Durham (percentage 65.9% 62.2% range of between 63.8% of residents trend. County owned) owning their property in the South Council North England & compared to 69.6% in the West. Wales Generally this compares favourably 68.3% when compared against both the 64.0% regional and national picture. Of interest is the decrease in owner South occupiers shown in the national trend (2011) over the period 2001 - 2011. This 63.8% may be due to the economic England recession and an associated Wales East increase in the private rented sector.
Sustainability 63.9% 69.0%
West (2001)
69.6% Appendix
(2011) Appraisal
Empty Central 1.5% N/A Target should be to ? Empty homes percentage is lowest The number of empty Census, B: Homes% reduce the % of empty in the Central area and highest in the homes could increase Durham Review North homes. west. This perhaps shows that the in a market led County
Scoping (longer than market is buoyant in the Central approach as some Council 6 months) 1.8% area, whereas in the more rural parts areas will be saturated of the west it is less so. with housing. of South Baseline Report 2.6%
East (2016) Data 2.0% 297 298 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
West
3.2% B: Appraisal Review (2014)
Average £100,000 North East ↑ Comparatively, County Durham has The market generally Census, of House Price one of the lowest average house decides house prices. Durham Scoping (2011) £117,000 prices in the UK and whilst this has County Baseline risen since 2011, it has still risen at Council £105,000 (2011) a lower rate than that of the North East. Report
(2014) £123,000 Data
(2014) (2016) Table 66 Crime
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Data Status Condition Plan Source
Level of 2009 - 4.0 England Target ↑ There has been a significant While the downward trend HMIC domestic should be reduction in the level of may continue, it could slow burglaries per 2010 - 3.0 2009 - 4.0 to reduce domestic burglaries over the as overall number of 1,000 levels. period. Whilst this is also a burglaries reduce towards population 2011 - 2.6 2010 - 4.6 national trend, the change in zero. County Durham is quite 2012 - 2.4 2011 - 4.5 significant.
2013 - 2.1 2012 - 4.1
2014 - 2.1 2013 - 3.8 Sustainability 2014 - 3.5
North East Appendix 2011 - 5.0
Appraisal 2014/15 - 5.9 B: Level of vehicle 2009 - 7.7 England Target ↑ Vehicular crime has decreased While the downward trend HMIC Review crimes per 1,000 should be significantly in line with both may continue, it could slow
Scoping population 2010 - 5.9 2009 - 9.2 to reduce regional and national targets as overall number of vehicle levels. and is now below the national crimes reduce towards zero. rate.
2011 - 5.8 2010 - 8.1 of
2012 - 5.6 2011 - 7.6 Baseline Report
2013 - 5.5 2012 - 7.0 (2016) 2014 - 4.6 2013 - 6.6 Data
2014 - 6.1 299 300 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Data Appendix Status Condition Plan Source
North East B: Appraisal
2014 - 4 Review
Total recorded 2009 - 69.6 England & Wales 5% year on ↑ Recorded offences has While the downward trend HMIC
offences per year decreased significantly since may continue, it could slow of 1000 population reduction 2009 and is below the national as overall number of
Scoping 2010 - 59.4 2008/09 - 85.8 County Durham rate. average. However a rise in rates recorded offences reduce Baseline only 2011 - 57.3 2009 - 78.9 from 2014 shows that the trend towards lower levels and it may not be stable and the becomes increasingly 2012 - 50.1 2010 - 73.8 targets have not been met. difficult to make further
Report improvements. Data 2013 - 50.9 2011 - 68.7
2014 - 53.7 2012 - 62.7 (2016)
2013 - 60.7
2014 - 61.4
North East
2014 - 54.0
2014/15 - 56.6
Levels of 2007/08 - 106 North East Target ↑ Levels of Anti-social behaviour While the downward trend ONS Anti-Social should be have declined significantly since may continue, it could slow Behaviour per 2008/09 - 106 2007/08 - 117 to reduce records began, with County as overall number of 1000 population levels. Durham being below the recorded anti-social across Durham 2009/10 - 109 2008/09 - 106 regional average for behaviours reduce towards police area occurrences. Whilst reporting lower levels and it becomes changes may be in part increasingly difficult to make further improvements. Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Data Status Condition Plan Source
2010/11 - 91 2009/10 - 97 responsible for the decline, the rate is still near to 1 in 20. 2011/12 - 68 2010/11 - 89
2012/13 - 49 2011/12 - 73
2013/14 - 48 2012/13 - 61
2014/15 - 46 2013/14 - 57
2014/15 - 57 Sustainability Appendix Appraisal B: Review Scoping of Baseline Report (2016) Data 301 302 Sustainability
Table 67 Economic Vitality Appendix
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source B:
Appraisal Workplace 1997 - £8,216 UK 87% of the ↑ There has been a steady Growth is likely to be ONS Review based GVA regional (or increase in GVA per head in more sporadic without the per head at 2000 - £9,216 1997 - £13,502 68% of the UK County Durham as has been plan and lower overall. It current basic figure) by seen across the North East. is less likely that the gap prices 2030. However, the gap between between County Durham
2003 - £10,850 2000 - £15,472 of County Durham and the rest and the rest of the North Scoping 2006 - £12,683 2003 - £17,880 of the North East is quite East will close. Baseline stark with a difference of over £3000 seen in 2013. 2009 - £13,047 2006 - £20,699
Report Considering the targets, the
2010 - £13,443 2009 - £21,604 Data County contributed approximately 60% of the 2011 - £13,227 2010 - £22,318 National GVA and 81% of
(2016) the regional GVA leaving a 2012 - £13,315 2011 - £22,779 respective performance gap of 6-8%. 2013 - £14,225 2012 - £23,168
2013 - £23,755
North East
2000 - £10,878
2006 - £15,046
2009 - £15,986
2012 - £16,908
2103 - £17,381 Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
Employment 2004/05 - 67.7% UK 73% of the <--> The employment rate in As there is no clear trend NOMIS rate working age County Durham and the in the employment rate it (Economically 2007/08 - 69.3% 2004/05 - 72.7% population North East is generally static is unlikely that this will Active - In (pre-recession between 73% and 75%, significantly change in the Employment) 2009/10 - 66.4% 2007/08 - 72.7% levels). although the region generally absence of the plan. outperforms the County. 2011/12 - 65.5% 2009/10 - 70.3% Both the County and the North East are below the national average. 2013/14 - 66.5% 2011/12 - 70.1%
2014/15 - 68.1% 2013/14 - 71.9%
2014/15 - 73.4% Sustainability
North East
2004/05 - 68.7 Appendix
2007/08 - 68.8%
Appraisal 2009/10 - 66.2%
2011/12 - 65.2% B: Review 2013/14 - 67.7% Scoping 2014/15 - 69.2% of Baseline Number on 2000 - 19.2% UK - ↑ The number of residents on Improvement of services, NOMIS Report Main Benefit a main benefit has reduced employment and good as % of 2003 - 18.0% 2000 - 13.6% over the period and is in line quality housing is likely to working age and indeed a slight continue to improve (2016) population 2006 - 16.2% 2003 - 12.6% improvement upon the North trend. Future Government Data East average, although revisions of the benefits 303 304 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
2008 - 15.0% 2006 - 11.9% significantly above the UK system is also likely to
rate. show an impact. B: Appraisal
2010 - 16.6% 2008 - 11.1% Review
2011 - 15.6% 2010 - 12.7%
2012 - 16.2% 2011 - 12.1% of Scoping Baseline 2013 - 15.4% 2012 - 12.3%
2014 - 13.9% 2013 - 11.7% Report
2015 - 13.0% 2014 - 10.6% Data
2015 - 9.7% (2016) North East
2000 - 19.8%
2003 - 18.2%
2006 - 16.2%
2008 - 15.2%
2010 - 16.7%
2011 - 16.0%
2012 - 16.4%
2013 - 15.7%
2014 - 14.2% Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
2015 - 13.2%
Incapacity 2000 - 12.6% UK - ↑ The number of residents Improvement of services, NOMIS benefits claiming incapacity benefit employment and good claimants as 2003 - 12.9% 2000 - 7.3% has reduced significantly quality housing is likely to % of working over the period indicated and continue to improve age population 2006 - 11.6% 2003 - 7.4% whilst it is slightly above the trend. Future Government North East trend, both rates revisions of the benefits 2008 - 10.6% 2006 - 7.0% are significantly above the system is also likely to UK Trend. show an impact. 2010 - 10.0% 2008 - 6.7%
Sustainability 2011 - 9.4% 2010 - 6.6%
2012 - 9.2% 2011 - 6.5%
2013 - 8.6% 2012 - 6.4% Appendix
2014 - 8.4% 2013 - 6.2% Appraisal 2015 - 8.9% 2014 - 6.1% B:
2015 - 6.3% Review
Scoping North East
2000 - 11.2% of Baseline 2003 - 11.4% Report
2006 - 10.3% (2016) 2008 - 9.4% Data
2010 - 9.0% 305 306 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
2011 - 8.5% B: Appraisal
2012 - 8.4% Review
2013 - 8.0%
2014 - 7.9% of Scoping Baseline 2015 - 8.3%
Total 2010 - 11,445 North East The number of ↑ There was a significant This trend is likely to NOMIS Report
Enterprises businesses in increase in the number of continue given continued Data 2011 - 11,295 2010 - 55,865 the County to enterprises existing in government incentives for increase by County Durham in 2015, business start-ups. 2012 - 11,490 2011 - 54,770 4,300 by 2030 reflecting the overall picture (2016) in the North East. 2013 - 11,435 2012 - 56,420 contributing towards the 2014 - 11,810 2013 - 56,430 rise in the employment rate. 2015 - 13,040 2014 - 59,340
2015 - 65,735
Gross Weekly 2010 - £436.8 North East - ↑ There was an increase in the Gross Weekly Pay is NOMIS Pay (All full gross weekly pay throughout likely to continue time workers) 2011 - £439.0 2010 - £443.4 the period, in relative increasing assuming the conformity with the rest of labour market continues 2012 - £457.8 2011 - £448.5 the region, although slightly to improve and less. competition for workers 2013 - £466.1 2012 - £454.9 increases. However, the gap with the wider region may not necessarily 2014 - £476.7 2013 - £472.2 close. Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
2014 - £477.1
Household Central To rise within ↓ Household income has Household income is CACI Income the next 20 reduced significantly over the likely to start increasing 2013 - £34,423 years to a period in all areas other than assuming the labour position that is the West where it has stayed market continues to 2014 - £34,299 103.0% of the relatively stable. improve and competition regions for workers increases. 2015 - £34,165 values/ or However, the gap with 87.4% of the the wider region may not national figure. necessarily close. North
Sustainability 2013 - £32,248
2014 - £31,525
2015 - £31,095 Appendix
South Appraisal 2013 - £28,899 B:
2014 - £27,462 Review
Scoping 2015 - £27,187
East of Baseline 2013 - £30,238 Report
2014 - £29,416 (2016) 2015 - £29,151 Data
West 307 308 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
2013 - £32,110 B: Appraisal
2014 - £32,194 Review
2015 - £32,534 of Scoping Baseline Report Data (2016) Table 68 Education and Skills
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
Achievement 2009/10 - 52.9% England 58.8% ? The attainment of pupils has Access to education Department of 5 or more (2015/16). been steadily improving. and training services is for A*-C GCSEs 2010/11 - 60.0% 2009/10 - 53.5% However following two major a key priority. Without Education (inc English 59.5% reforms of the data and the Plan linking and Maths) 2011/12 - 62.5% 2010/11 - 59.0% (2016/17). collection in 2013/14, the trend communities with has worsened due to provision, trend likely 2012/13 - 63.1% 2011/12 - 59.4% restrictions placed upon the to worsen. number and type of qualifications counted as 2013/14 - 53.4% 2012/13 - 59.2% GSCE equivalents (Wolfe review). It is therefore difficult 2014/15 - 54.4% 2013/14 - 53.4% to discern a trend at this stage. Sustainability Meeting the 2015/16 and 2014/15 - 52.8% 2016/17 targets are likely to be challenging. North East Appendix 2009/10 - 52.9%
Appraisal 2010/11 - 56.8%
2011/12 - 58.5% B: Review 2012/13 - 59.3% Scoping 2013/14 - 54.6% of 2014/15 - 52.8% Baseline Report
16-18 year 2007 - 10.4% North East To increase ↑ The trend both within County Access to education Department olds who are participation Durham, Regionally and and training services is for (2016) not in 2010 - 8.5% 2011 - 9.2% amongst 16 yr Nationally is one of a key priority. Without Education Data education, olds to 97.5% improvement, in that the the Plan linking 309 310 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
training or 2011 - 8.5% 2012 - 8.8% and 17 year number of young people not in communities with
employment olds to 93% training or employment has provision, trend likely B:
Appraisal by 2016. decreased. County Durham is to worsen. 2012 - 7.5% 2013 - 8.3% Review below the regional trend but 2013 - 10.4% 2014 - 7.6% above the national average.
2014 - 7.1% 2015 - 7.0% of Scoping Baseline 2015 - 6.7% England
2011 - 6.6% Report
2012 - 6.1% Data
2013 - 5.8% (2016) 2014 - 5.3%
2015 - 4.7%
Percentage of 2004 - 17.8% GB Target should ↑ The percentage of working age Access to education NOMIS working age be to adults with no qualifications and training services is adults with no 2006 - 14.3% 2004 - 15.1% decrease the has reduced significantly since a key priority. Without Qualifications % of working 2004 and is currently below the the Plan linking 2008 - 13.8% 2006 - 13.9% age adults regional but above the national communities with with no average. Significant progress provision, trend likely 2010 - 13.1% 2008 - 13.5% qualifications. looks to have been made since to worsen. 2012. 2012 - 13.6% 2010 - 11.3%
2014 - 9.7% 2012 - 9.7%
2014 - 8.8%
North East Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
2004 - 17.1%
2006 - 14.3%
2008 - 14.9%
2010 - 13.1%
2012 - 11.9%
2014 - 10.0%
Sustainability Percentage of 2004 - 60.1% GB Target should ↑ Whilst the trend is improving, Access to education NOMIS working age be to increase it is noticeable that the average and training services is adults with 2006 - 64.0% 2004 - 62.1% the %. is below that of both the a key priority. Without NVQ Level 2 or national and regional average. the Plan linking
above 2008 - 62.8% 2006 - 63.6% communities with Appendix qualifications provision, trend likely 2010 - 64.9% 2008 - 64.2% to worsen. Appraisal 2012 - 64.9% 2010 - 65.3% B:
2014 - 69.2% 2012 - 71.8% Review
Scoping 2014 - 73.3%
North East of Baseline 2004 - 61.0% Report
2006 - 64.1% (2016) 2008 - 64.0% Data
2010 - 66.0% 31 1 312 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
2012 - 68.5% B: Appraisal
2014 - 71.7% Review
Percentage of 2004 - 23.2% GB Target should ↑ Whilst the trend is improving it Access to education NOMIS
working age be to increase is again noticeable that the and training services is of adults with the %. average number of people a key priority. Without
Scoping 2006 - 21.0% 2004 - 26.1% NVQ Level 4 or achieving level 4 qualifications the Plan linking Baseline above 2008 - 23.1% 2006 - 27.5% is below that of the national communities with qualifications and regional average. provision, trend likely 2010 - 24.3% 2008 - 28.6% to worsen. Report Data 2012 - 24.0% 2010 - 31.2%
2014 - 26.4% 2012 - 34.2% (2016)
2014 - 36.0%
North East
2004 - 21.9%
2006 - 22.8%
2008 - 23.5%
2010 - 25.5%
2012 - 26.8%
2014 - 28.4% Table 69 Access and Transport
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without Data Status the Plan Source
% of users of 2007 - 78.3% ↓ Whilst 100% of users of hospitals were within Trend is likely to DfT Hospitals within 30mins by private transport, the numbers continue to worsen. 30 minutes by 2010 - 72.4% within 30mins via public transport or walking public transport / has reduced significantly over the period. walk 2013 - 67%
% of users within 2009 - 50.8% ↑ Whilst around 98% of users live within 15 Trend is likely to DfT 15 minutes of a minutes of a Town centre by private worsen in the absence Town Centre by 2011 - 51.9% transport, the numbers living within close of a Local Plan public transport / proximity to a Town centre has improved
Sustainability walk 2013 - 52% over the period
% of users within 2007 - 80.4% <--> Whilst 100% of users were within 20mins of Trend is likely to DfT
20 minutes of an employment centres , the numbers worsen in the absence Appendix employment 2010 - 79.7% accessing the employment centres by public of a Local Plan centre by public transport stayed generally static
Appraisal transport / walk 2013 - 80% B: % of users within 2007 - 89.2% <--> Whilst 100% of users were within 20mins of Trend is likely to DfT 20 minutes of a a Secondary School , the numbers worsen in the absence Review secondary school accessing the employment centres by public of a Local Plan Scoping 2010 - 88.4% by public transport stayed generally static transport / walk 2013 - 89% of Baseline
Report Average distance 2001 - 16.1km England and Target ↓ There has been an average increase of This trend is likely to ONS travelled to work Wales should be 1.3km in the distance travelled to work, worsen in the absence (km) 2011 - 17.4km to reduce which is an increase of 8% over the period. of a Local Plan. 2001 - 13.4km distances This is above both the regional and national (2016) travelled to average, but is likely to be down to the rural Data 2011 - 16.5km work. dispersed nature of the County. 313 314 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without Data Appendix Status the Plan Source
North East B: Appraisal
2001 - 15.7km Review
2011 - 16.5km of
Scoping Bus passenger 2009/10 - 51.9 England Maintain ↓ Bus passenger journey per head of The trend is likely to DfT journeys on local or improve population is significantly lower in County worsen further in the Baseline services per head 2010/11 - 50.8 2009/10 - 88.8 upon the Durham than in the North East and the absence of a Plan but of population total national average. This is likely to be down may stabilise at a lower 2011/12 - 48.2 2010/11 - 88.2 number of the general rural nature of the County and minimum level of bus
Report local lack of large city, which assists in improving services. Data 2012/13 - 44.9 2011/12 - 87.8 passenger passenger numbers. Of concern however journeys is that the trend is also downward. This is on the bus likely to be due to a combination of factors 2013/14 - 45.0 2012/13 - 85.8 (2016) network. e.g. Fare price, number and quality of services, car ownership increase. 2014/15 - 44.0 2013/14 - 86.8
2014/15 - 85.6
North East
2009/10 - 80.4
2010/11 - 79.5
2011/12 - 76.5
2012/13 - 73.1
2013/14 - 72.1
2014/15 - 70.6 Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Condition Likely Future without Data Status the Plan Source
Cycling to work 2001 - 0.9% England and - ↑ As a percentage of the population only 1.0% Further improvements ONS (% of population) Wales of residents travel to work by cycling a rise in the proportion of 2011 - 1.0% of only 0.1% in 10 years. The proportion of people cycling to work 2001 - 2.8% people cycling to work in county Durham is are less likely in the considerably less than the national average absence of the plan. 2011 - 2.8% (-1.8%) and lower than that of the North East (-0.7%). Currently, the lack of available North East space coupled with high car usage make cycling a difficult option in Durham city. 2001 - 1.6%
2011 - 1.7% Sustainability Walking to work 2011 - 10.4% England - As a percentage of the population, 10.4% of Further improvements ONS (% of population) residents walk to work which is lower than in the proportion of 2011 - 10.9% both the regional average (10.7%) and the people walking to work
national average (10.9%). While Durham are less likely in the Appendix North East - City is a very walkable city, other areas in absence of a plan. 2011 - 10.7% County Durham are quite rural and require
Appraisal other methods of transport. There are also safety concerns and crossing difficulties on some routes which deter pedestrians from B: walking and use other methods of transport. Review Commuting travel 2011: - ? Data from 2011 shows that more people The commuting ONS Scoping patterns (2011) In-commuting to out-commute than in-commute. This is down patterns are unlikely to County Durham to the close proximity of nearby settlements change given the
- 34,530 such as Newcastle, Sunderland and relative employment of Hartlepool as well as the draw of industrial opportunities Baseline
Report Out-commuting settlements such as Teesside. surrounding Country from County Durham. Durham - 69,331 (2016) Difference - Data -34,801 315 316 Sustainability
Table 70 Climate Change Appendix
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source B:
Appraisal Per capita 7.9 (2005) North East: County ↑ A steady decline in per capita Potential for emissions DECC Review
CO2 Durham will CO2 emissions across the to increase if County
emissions 7.7 (2006) 12.2 (2005) reduce CO2 County is depicted with a Durham's economic (t) emissions by decrease of 1.6 tonnes per recovery does not 40% by 2020 capita between 2005 and 2014. pursue a low carbon 7.5 (2007) 11.9 (2006) of from 1990 Per capita emissions for the economy. Scoping 7.4 (2008) 11.8 (2007) levels, ensuring County are less than that for the Baseline year on year North East region. Emissions for 6.6 (2009) 11.4 (2008) reductions. the North East have also decreased overall between 2005
Report and 2013 but an increase
6.9 (2010) 9.9 (2009) Data between 2011 and 2013 is observed. This may be due to 6.3 (2011) 8.8 (2010) the variations in economic
(2016) recovery across the region with 6.5 (2012) 7.8 (2011) County Durham lagging behind.
6.3 (2013) 9.7 (2012)
9.3 (2013)
Emissions 1,601.3 (2005) North East: County ↑ A steady decline in CO2 Potential for emissions DECC
of CO2 from Durham will emissions from County to increase if County
industry 1,539.5 (2006) 22,653.8 (2005) reduce CO2 Durham's sources of industry Durham's economic (kt) emissions by are depicted with a total recovery does not 1,485.3 (2007) 22,050.4 (2006) 40% by 2020 decrease of 375.1 kt since 2005 pursue a low carbon from 1990 (23% on 2005 levels). The economy. 1,476.5 (2008) 22,096.1 (2007) levels, ensuring decline in emissions from year on year sources of industry is also 1,270.7 (2009) 21,377.3 (2008) reductions. mirrored at the Regional level albeit a marginal increased reduction of 25% kt CO on 2005 1,356.3 (2010) 18,385.8 (2009) 2 levels is evident at the regional 1,256.9 (2011) 15,048.3 (2010) level. Reduction is largely due Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
1,283.2 (2012) 13,478.6 (2011) to the decrease in the use of coal and gas for electricity 1,226.2 (2013) 17,870.3 (2012) generation.
17,062.0 (2013)
Emissions 1,333.0 (2005) North East: County ↑ A steady decline in CO2 Potential for emissions DECC
of CO2 (kt) Durham will emissions from County to increase due to the
from 1,324.4 (2006) 6,573.6 (2005) reduce CO2 Durham's domestic sources is withdrawal of the domestic emissions by observed with a total decrease Code for Sustainable sources 1,276.9 (2007) 6,499.8 (2006) 40% by 2020 of 184.2 kt since 2005 (14% on Homes and scrapping (electricity, from 1990 2005 levels). The decline in of the zero carbon Sustainability gas and 1,286.6 (2008) 6,244.4 (2007) levels, ensuring emissions from domestic source homes target which other fuels) year on year is also mirrored at the regional helped to raise housing standards in 1,154.7 (2009) 6,252.8 (2008) reductions. level, albeit a marginal increased reduction of 16% on 2005 levels. relation to energy
The reduction is largely due to efficiency etc and Appendix 1,233.8 (2010) 5,608.9 (2009) the decrease in the use of coal associated carbon and gas for electricity emissions. 1,079.9 (2011) 5,994.4 (2010) generation. Appraisal 1,159.6 (2012) 5,211.2 (2011) B:
1,148.8 (2013) 5,632.4 (2012) Review
Scoping 5,548.1 (2013) of
Emissions 1,033.4 (2005) North East: County ↑ A steady decline in CO2 The decrease in DECC Baseline
of CO2 (kt) Durham will emissions from County emission is consistent Report
from 1,030.9 (2006) 4,949.8 (2005) reduce CO2 Durham's transport sources are with national trends, transport emissions by depicted with a total decrease where transport 1,045.9 (2007) 4,865.4 (2006) 40% by 2020 of 109.9 kt since 2005 (approx emissions changed very little up to 2007 (2016) from 1990 11% on 2005 levels). The Data 989.7 (2008) 4,883.4 (2007) levels, ensuring decline in emissions from but have steadily transport sources is also decreased since, due 317 318 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
962.1 (2009) 4,643.7 (2008) year on year mirrored at the Regional level in part to a reduction
reductions. albeit a marginal increased in emissions from B:
Appraisal reduction of 13% kt CO on 2005 passenger cars. 953.1 (2010) 4,503.3 (2009) 2 Review levels is evident at the regional 939.8 (2011) 4,440.3 (2010) level. Potential, therefore, for the decline in emissions to stabilise 937.2 (2012) 4,386.8 (2011) of as the up take in Scoping Baseline 923.5 (2013) 4,362.6 (2012) newer fuel efficient, less polluting cars reaches saturation 4,282.9 (2013) point. Report Data
Emissions -26.8 (2005) North East: County ↑ LULUCF activities are both a Assume that their may DECC
of CO2 (kt) Durham will source and sink for atmospheric be minor fluctuations (2016) from Land -29.7 (2006) -2,990.0 (2005) reduce CO2 CO2. Currently LULUCF in emissions from Use, Land emissions by activities are a net sink resulting LLUCF. However, Use -30.8 (2007) -3,012.6 (2006) 40% by 2020 in the removal of emissions from there is unlikely to be Change from 1990 the atmosphere. The data for a significant decrease and -32.1 (2008) -2,934.6 (2007) levels, ensuring County Durham shows an in emissions removed Forestry year on year overall increase in the removal from the atmosphere as woodlands and (LULUCF) -30.3 (2009) -2,925.6 (2008) reductions. of emissions since 2005, (2.3kt, 8.5%) albeit a reduction forests are generally occurred between 2007 and already afforded -27.9 (2010) -2,894.5 (2009) 2010. Conversely, at the protection through the regional level there has been an planning system. -28.9 (2011) -2,744.8 (2010) overall reduction in the removal of emissions from 2005. -29.6 (2012) -2,719.3 (2011)
-29.1 (2013) -2,627.4 (2012)
-2,575.2 (2013) Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
Total Industry: North East County ↑ Data shows that the greatest Please see the DECC emissions Durham will decreases in emissions in terms commentary for
per source 12,495.9 Industry: reduce CO2 of physical amount and individual sources
CO2 (kt) emissions by proportion between 2005 and above. between (decrease of 375.1kt / 170,022.6 40% by 2020 2013 have emanated from 2005 and 23.0%) from 1990 industry sources, followed by 2013 and (decrease of 5,592 kt / levels, ensuring domestic, transport and LULCF. change in Domestic: 25.0%) year on year With the exception of LULUCF, emissions reductions. (where performance betters the regional picture) the proportion from 2005 10,997.7 levels. of decrease has lagged ever so slightly behind the regional (decrease of 184.2 kt / Domestic: picture. However, this may be 14.0%) due to factors such as the Sustainability 53,565.6 (decrease of recession and associated 1025.5 / 16.0%) closure of industry, reductions in house building etc. having a Transport: greater impact upon emissions at the regional scale as opposed Appendix 8,815.6 (decrease of Transport: to the local. 109.9kt / 11.0%)
Appraisal 41,318.2 LULUCF:
(decrease of 666.9kt / B: -265.2 13.0%) Review
Scoping (Increased reduction of 2.3kt / 8.5%)
LULUCF: of
-25,724 Baseline Report
(Reduced reduction of 414.8kt / 14.0%) (2016) Data 319 320 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
Change in Electricity: North East County ↑ Whilst there are fluctuations in Potential for emissions DECC
emissions Durham will the yearly data, the overall trend to increase due to the B:
Appraisal CO (kt) reduce CO for the County is that of withdrawal of the 2 451.1 (2005) Electricity: 2 Review from emissions by decreasing domestic emissions Code for Sustainable domestic 475.4 (2006) 6,573.6 (2005) 40% by 2020 from electricity, gas and other Homes and scrapping sources from 1990 fuel use. This mirrors the of the zero carbon levels, ensuring regional picture. On average, homes target which 471.7 (2007) 6,499.8 (2006) of year on year gas use constitutes 50% of total helped to raise Scoping domestic emissions. Emissions housing standards in Baseline 452.1 (2008) 6,244.4 (2007) reductions. form electricity use constitute relation to energy 42% and other fuels are 8%. efficiency etc and 410.4 (2009) 6,252.8 (2008) associated carbon
Report emissions.
421.0 (2010) 5,608.9 (2009) Data
404.1 (2011) 5,994.4 (2010) (2016) 425.2 (2012) 5,211.2 (2011)
392.6 (2013) 5,632.4 (2012)
Gas: 5,548.1 (2013)
768.9 (2005) Gas:
742.7 (2006) 3,845.5 (2005)
701.8 (2007) 3,686.0 (2006)
721.8 (2008) 3,477.1 (2007)
644.5 (2009) 3,568.9 (2008)
704.6 (2010) 3,178.5 (2009)
577.4 (2011) 3,487.4 (2010) Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
638.4 (2012) 2,839.2 (2011)
656.3 (2013) 3,150.7 (2012)
Other Fuels: 3,233.0 (2013)
112.9 (2005) Other Fuels:
106.3 (2006) 355.1 (2005)
103.5 (2007) 334.1 (2006)
112.8 (2008) 319.1 (2007) Sustainability
99.8 (2009) 346.4 (2008)
108.2 (2010) 308.7 (2009) Appendix
98.4 (2011) 335.7 (2010)
Appraisal 96.1 (2012) 301.0 (2011)
99.9 (2013) 295.3 (2012) B: Review 311.2 (2013) Scoping
Change in Electricity: North East County ↑ Whilst there are fluctuations in Potential for emissions DECC of emissions Durham will the yearly data, the overall trend to increase if County Baseline
CO2 (kt) 727.0 (2005) Electricity: reduce CO2 for the County is that of Durham's economic Report from emissions by decreasing industrial emissions recovery does not industrial 771.7 (2006) 4877.6 (2005) 40% by 2020 from electricity, gas, other fuel pursue a low carbon sources from 1990 use, large installations and economy. agriculture. This mirrors the (2016) 734.5 (2007) 5139.6 (2006) levels, ensuring Data year on year regional picture. On average, electricity use constitutes 41% 729.9 (2008) 4925.3 (2007) reductions. 321 322 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
604.3 (2009) 4724.7 (2008) of total industrial emissions.
Emissions from gas use B:
Appraisal constitute 24%, large industrial 627.8 (2010) 3898.4 (2009) Review sources constitute 20%, other 583.8 (2011) 4032.0 (2010) fuels are 12% and agricultural sources constitute 3%.
611.8 (2012) 3676.1 (2011) of Scoping Baseline 570.4 (2013) 4021.3 (2012)
Gas: 3794.2 (2013) Report
345.6 (2005) Gas: Data
324.0 (2006) 2507.9 (2005) (2016) 301.5 (2007) 2,267.9 (2006)
292.1 (2008) 2,079.4 (2007)
257.8 (2009) 2,039.6 (2008)
299.1 (2010) 1,778.3 (2009)
252.0 (2011) 1,988.8 (2010)
276.4 (2012) 1,594.1 (2011)
284.7 (2013) 1,727.7 (2012)
Other Fuels: 1,817.2 (2013)
177.6 (2005) Other Fuels:
167.3 (2006) 688.4 (2005) Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
164.4 (2007) 659.3 (2006)
148.5 (2008) 658.4 (2007)
134.9 (2009) 616.9 (2008)
137.0 (2010) 548.8 (2009)
122.0 (2011) 576.8 (2010)
119.5 (2012) 498.8 (2011)
111.6 (2013) 489.4 (2012) Sustainability
Large Installations: 453.3 (2013)
307.6 (2005) Large Installations: Appendix
234.8 (2006) 14,393.5 (2005)
Appraisal 244.3 (2007) 13,804.6 (2006)
266.6 (2008) 14,258.6 (2007) B: Review 232.5 (2009) 13,828.2 (2008) Scoping 251.2 (2010) 11,984.7 (2009) of 256.5 (2011) 8,274.6 (2010) Baseline Report 234.8 (2012) 7,527.8 (2011)
220.8 (2013) 11,457.5 (2012) (2016) Data Agriculture: 10,831.9 (2013) 323 324 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
43.4 (2005) Agriculture: B: Appraisal
41.7 (2006) 186.4 (2005) Review
40.7 (2007) 179.0 (2006)
39.4 (2008) 174.6 (2007) of Scoping Baseline 41.1 (2009) 167.8 (2008)
41.2 (2010) 175.5 (2009) Report
42.6 (2011) 176.1 (2010) Data
40.9 (2012) 181.7 (2011) (2016) 38.7 (2013) 174.5 (2012)
165.3 (2013)
Total Electricity: North East: County ↑ Shows that County wide Potential for emissions DECC emissions Durham will emissions from electricity use to increase due to the
CO2 (kt) 1,178.1 (2005) Electricity: reduce CO2 are greater than gas use, which withdrawal of the from emissions by in turn produces greater Code for Sustainable electricity, 1,247.1 (2006) 11,451.2 (05) 40% by 2020 emissions from other fuels. Homes and scrapping gas and from 1990 Average emissions from of the zero carbon other fuel 1,206.2 (2007) 11,639.4 (06) levels, ensuring electricity use comprise 50% of homes target which use year on year the total, whereas, gas use is helped to raise 39% and other fuels constitute housing standards in 1,182.0 (2008) 11,169.7 (07) reductions. 11%. relation to energy efficiency etc and 1,0147.7 (2009) 10,977.5 (08) associated carbon emissions. 1,048.8 (2010) 9,507.3 (09) Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Status Condition the Plan Source
987.9 (2011) 10,026.4 (10) Also potential for emissions to increase 1037.0 (2012) 8,887.3 (11) if County Durham's economic recovery 963.0 (2013) 9653.7 (12) does not pursue a low carbon economy. 9,864.8 9342.3 (13)
Gas: Gas:
1,114.5 (2005) 6,353.4 (05)
1,066.7 (2006) 5,953.9 (06) Sustainability
1,003.3 (2007) 5,556.5 (07)
1,013.9 (2008) 5,608.5 (08) Appendix
902.3 (2009) 4,956.8 (09)
Appraisal 1003.7 (2010) 5,476.2 (10)
829.4 (2011) 4,956.8 (11) B: Review 914.8 (2012) 5,476.2 (12) Scoping 941.0 (2013) 4,433.3 (13) of 7,789.6 Other Fuels: Baseline Report Other Fuels: 1043.5 (05)
290.5 (2005) 993.4 (06) (2016) Data 273.6 (2006) 977.5 (07) 325 326 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Status Condition the Plan Source
267.9 (2007) 963.3 (08) B: Appraisal
261.3 (2008) 857.5 (09) Review
234.7 (2009) 912.5 (10)
245.2 (2010) 799.8 (11) of Scoping Baseline 220.4 (2011) 784.7 (12)
215.6 (2012) 764.5 (13) Report
211.5 (2013) Data
2220.7 (2016) Table 71 Air, Water and Soil Quality
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
Average Air Former District of Chester-Le-Street: N/A National Air ↑ Whilst average Specific 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening Quality Quality emissions at sites actions and Assessment for Durham County Council Concentrations 37.2 (2007) Objectives monitored are measures will of Nitrogen and decreasing in the be identified in 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for Durham Dioxide in 30.7 (2008) European former district of the Air Quality County Council. specific areas. Directive Chester-le-Street, Action Plan to - (2009) Limit and the assessment of reduce Durham County Council Air Quality Further (Annual mean Target specific monitoring emissions to Assessment: Chester-Le-Street AQMA Values locations to the within national concentrations 34.6 (2010) μgm3) west of objectives and Nitrogen Chester-Le-Street limit values for 32.7 (2011) town centre have Nitrogen Sustainability dioxide: determined that dioxide within 29.4 (2012) 200 μgm-3 not levels of nitrogen the AQMA. to be dioxide exceed the Therefore, it is 29.9 (2013) exceeded long term national anticipated Appendix more than 18 objective and EU that air quality times a year limits for this at Menceforth (1 hour mean) pollutant. This is cottages will Appraisal due to localised, improve. 40 μgm-3 street-canyon (annual mean) effects occurring In relation to B: near Menceforth air quality Review Cottages due to more widely, it
Scoping the valley and is assumed narrow road that the rate of setting. An Air nitrogen of Quality dioxide
Management area reduction will Baseline Report (AQMA) was slow in line declared to the with national west of trends. Chester-Le-Street Nationally, (2016) town centre in increases in Data May 2013 which road traffic was amended account for 327 328 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
(reduced) in May the steep
2015 to solely climb in B:
Appraisal include nitrogen oxide Review Menceforth (NOx) Cottages. emissions between 1984 and 1989, and of road transport Scoping still accounts Baseline for just under one third of total NOx
Report emissions. Catalytic Data converters and stricter
(2016) emission regulations have resulted in a strong downward trend since 1990 but the rate of reduction has slowed since the large decreases seen in the years 2008 and 2009.
Average Air Former District of Derwentside: N/A National Air ↓ Whilst average Whilst, 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening Quality Quality emissions at sites emissions Assessment for Durham County Council Concentrations 23.4 (2010) Objectives monitored have Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
of Nitrogen 29.6 (2011) and increased since within the 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for Durham Dioxide in European 2010, annual former district County Council specific areas. 28.5 (2012) Directive mean nitrogen of Limit and dioxide Derwentside (Annual mean 29.0 (2013) Target concentrations are likely to concentrations Values have been below fluctuate it is μgm3) national objectives not anticipated Nitrogen and limit values at that emissions dioxide: all sites monitored. will exceed the objectives and 200 μgm-3 not limit values to be set. exceeded
Sustainability more than 18 times a year (1 hour mean)
-3
40 μgm Appendix (annual mean) Appraisal Average Air Former District of Durham City: N/A National Air ↓ The average Durham 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening Quality Quality annual emissions County Assessment for Durham County Council B: Concentrations 31.6 (2007) Objectives across all sites Council have
of Nitrogen and monitored is prepared a 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for DurhamReview Dioxide in 31.8 (2008) European increasing, with draft air quality County Council Scoping specific areas. Directive results between action plan to 38.1 (2009) Limit and 2009 and 2012 improve the DCC Local Air Quality Management: Durham
(Annual mean Target close to the air quality City Further Assessment 2012 of concentrations Values national objectives across the 37.1 (2010) Baseline μgm3) and air quality limit City. Some of Report Nitrogen values. However, the proposed 34.0 (2011) dioxide: a number of actions individual include fitting 38.5 (2012) -3 monitoring sites systems to (2016) 200 μgm not Data to be exhausts on 34.1 (2013) exceeded buses with 329 330 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
more than 18 through the City diesel engines
times a year Centre to reduce B:
Appraisal (1 hour mean) (incorporating emission on Review Highgate, routes within 40 μgm-3 Milburngate and the AQMA and (annual mean) the Gilesgate promoting areas of the City) alternative of recorded forms of Scoping exceedances of transport with Baseline the annual mean businesses in objective leading the city, to to the declaration encourage
Report and designation of large an AQMA for employers to Data Durham City in implement May 2011. eco-friendly
(2016) schemes like The outcome of staff car the detailed sharing. assessment of air Consultation quality has on the draft determined levels action plan of nitrogen dioxide concludes in in other areas of December Durham City are 2015. above national and European air quality standards (an additional 16 locations). Therefore, the declared AQMA was extended in July 2014 to incorporate the western area of the city through Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
the junctions at Crossgate Lights and Neville's Cross to the stonebridge roundabout together with sections of Claypath and New Elvet.
The greatest contributing
Sustainability source to the emissions are cars, as may be expected given they represent the greatest Appendix proportion of overall flow. LGV's Appraisal are not a major component of the
total traffic flow B: and are predicted Review to contribute
Scoping relatively little. The combined emissions from of HGV's and buses
are predicted to Baseline Report contribute approximately the same proportion as cars. (2016) Data 331 332 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
The required
reduction in Road B:
Appraisal NO emissions to x Review meet the air quality objective is calculated to be up to 98%. of However, such a Scoping large decrease is Baseline predicted to be restricted to a very small area,
Report including a small number of Data properties near the Gilesgate
(2016) roundabout, where queing traffic occurs on a steep hill. Elsewhere, reductions of up to approximately 20-25% would ensure no exceedances of the annual mean objective.
Average Air Former District of Easington: N/A National Air ↓ Whilst average Whilst, 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening Quality Quality emissions at sites emissions Assessment for Durham County Council Concentrations 23.0 (2007) Objectives monitored have within the of Nitrogen and increased since former district 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for Durham Dioxide in 18.8 (2008) European 2007, annual of Easington County Council specific areas. Directive mean nitrogen are likely to 24.1 (2009) Limit and dioxide fluctuate it is Target Values Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
(Annual mean Monitoring ceased in 2009 Nitrogen concentrations not anticipated concentrations dioxide: have been below that emissions μgm3) national objectives will exceed the 200 μgm-3 not and limit values at objectives and to be all sites monitored. limit values exceeded set. more than 18 times a year (1 hour mean)
40 μgm-3 (annual mean) Sustainability Average Air Former District of Sedgefield: N/A National Air ↑ The average Whilst, 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening Quality Quality annual mean emissions Assessment for Durham County Council Concentrations 28.2 (2007) Objectives nitrogen dioxide within the
of Nitrogen and emissions at sites former district 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for DurhamAppendix Dioxide in 19.1 (2008) European monitored in the of Sedgefield County Council specific areas. Directive former district of are likely to Limit and Sedgefield have fluctuate it is
Appraisal 23.3 (2009) (Annual mean Target decreased and not anticipated concentrations Values concentrations are that emissions
23.1 (2010) B: μgm3) below national will exceed the
Nitrogen objectives and objectives and Review 19.4 (2011) dioxide: limit values. limit values
Scoping set. 22.1 (2012) 200 μgm-3 not
to be of 19.9 (2013) exceeded Baseline more than 18 Report times a year (1 hour mean)
-3 (2016) 40 μgm Data (annual mean) 333 334 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
Average Air Former District of Teesdale: N/A National Air ↓ Whilst average Whilst 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening
Quality Quality emissions at sites emissions Assessment for Durham County CouncilB:
Appraisal Concentrations Objectives monitored have within the 24.3 (2010) Review of Nitrogen and increased since former district 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for Durham Dioxide in 28.7 (2011) European 2007, annual of Teesdale County Council specific areas. Directive mean nitrogen are likely to Limit and dioxide fluctuate, it is 24.5 (2012) of (Annual mean Target concentrations not anticipated Scoping Values have been below that emissions Baseline concentrations 26.1 (2013) μgm3) national objectives will exceed the Nitrogen and limit values at objectives and dioxide: all sites monitored. limit values
Report set. Data 200 μgm-3 not to be exceeded
(2016) more than 18 times a year (1 hour mean)
40 μgm-3 (annual mean)
Average Air Former District of Wear Valley: N/A National Air ↑ The average Whilst, 2012 Air Quality Updating and Screening Quality Quality annual mean emissions Assessment for Durham County Council Concentrations 32.9 (2007) Objectives nitrogen dioxide within the of Nitrogen and emissions at sites former district 2014 Air Quality Progress Report for Durham Dioxide in 32.1 (2008) European monitored in the of Wear Valley County Council specific areas. Directive former district of are likely to - (2009) Limit and Wear Valley have fluctuate it is (Annual mean Target decreased and not anticipated Values concentrations are that emissions concentrations 29.3 (2010) μgm3) below national will exceed the Nitrogen objectives and objectives and 27.3 (2011) dioxide: limit values. limit values set. 30.3 (2012) Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
26.8 (2013) 200 μgm-3 not to be exceeded more than 18 times a year (1 hour mean)
40 μgm-3 (annual mean)
% water bodies Wear Catchment N/A Aim to <--> Due to The priority Environment Agency (2015) achieving Water achieve good inconsistencies in issues to deal
Sustainability Framework status for all data from the with in the River Basin Management Plan: Northumbria Directive water bodies previous 2009 Wear River Basin District objectives: There are 56 river bodies and 8 lakes in by 2027. River Basin catchment are the catchment: Management Plan wastewater and following management,
River and lake Appendix water bodies advice taken from industrial River and 2015 Target Target the EA, data from legacy lake for for 2015 will now form including Appraisal water 2021 2027 the baseline mining, bodies position. quarrying and watercourse B: Number at 9 10 57 Information shows modifications, Review Good that water quality urban and
Scoping ecological is at good status rural diffuse Status for only 9 out of pollution. Projects are
the 64 water of Number at 53 53 64 bodies in the Wear taking place to good Catchment, 10 out mitigate some Baseline Report chemical of 87 in the Tees issues in status Catchment and 2 Stanley and out of 11 in the Castle eden Derwent Dene. (2016) Tees Catchment Data catchment. 335 336 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
There are 76 river bodies and 11 lakes The priority
in the catchment: river basin B:
Appraisal management Review issues to deal River and 2015 Target Target with in the lake for for Tees water 2021 2027 catchment are of bodies urban and Scoping diffuse Baseline Number at 10 11 80 pollution, good invasive ecological non-native status
Report species (INNS) and Data Number at 81 82 87 lost good connectivity chemical
(2016) between status estuary and river. Derwent Catchment Projects taking There are 7 river bodies and 4 lakes in place include, the catchment: catchment approaches in Tutta Beck, River and 2015 Target Target restoring the lake for for Skerne and water 2021 2027 reducing rural bodies diffuse pollution. Number at 2 2 11 good ecological status
Number at 10 10 1 good Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
River and 2015 Target Target lake for for water 2021 2027 bodies
chemical status
% water bodies Wear Catchment N/A Aim to <--> Information shows In relation to Environment Agency (2009) achieving Water achieve good little change in the Wear Framework The Wear catchment contains two status for all groundwater catchment, River Basin Management Plan: Northumbria
Sustainability Directive groundwater bodies: water bodies quality to 2015 pressures are River Basin District objectives: by 2015. and a very low having an groundwater The Wear Magnesian Limestone Where this is proportion of impact on the groundwater body - poor chemical not possible groundwater quality of the and quantitative status. and subject to bodies achieving principle Appendix The Wear Carboniferous limestone the criteria set good status. aquifer, and Coal Measures groundwater out in the namely the body -poor chemical but good Directive, aim Magnesian Appraisal quantitative status. to achieve Limestone. good status by This aquifer is
2021 or 2027. the sole B: Tees Catchment supply of Review potable water The Tees catchment contains three
Scoping for Hartlepool groundwater bodies: and it fails due to rising trends The Tees Carboniferous in sulphate. of
Limestone and Millstone Grit - Baseline
Report good chemical and quantitative The Wear status. Magnesian Limestone (2016) Data 337 338 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
Tees Sherwood Sandstone groundwater
Groundwater - good chemical and body in B:
Appraisal quantitative status. particular has Review The Tees Mercia Sandstone and been Redcar Mudstone - poor chemical classified as but good quantitative status. poor quantitative of River Basin: status due to Scoping abstraction Baseline pressures and Groundwater Now 2015 reduced base flow to surface % at good quantitative 89 89
Report waters. status Data This % assessed as good 33 33 groundwater chemical status (2016) body is also at poor chemical % at good status 33 33 status due to overall saline intrusions caused by historic coastal abstractions and also due to rising trends in nitrate.
In relation to the Tees catchment, discharges from old workings in the Saltburn Gill causes the Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
Tees Mercia Sandstone and Redcar Mudstone groundwater body to fail to meet good status.
Trends in groundwater quality may improve slowly
Sustainability as the Environment Agency continues to work with the Coal Authority Appendix (re mine water pollution), Appraisal water companies to
manage B: abstractions Review and local
Scoping authorities, site owners and of developers to
prevent further Baseline Report land contamination and groundwater (2016) pollution. Data 339 340 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
Bathing water Bathing water profile for Crimdon: N/A The Bathing ↓ Whilst water Bathing water Environment Agency:
quality water quality at both at both water B:
Appraisal regulations water sampling sampling 2011 - excellent http://environment.data.gov.uk/bwq/profiles/Review 2012 - good 2013 locations have points is 2013 - sufficient implement the declined since subject to Directive and 2011, the short term 2014 - good require that by regulations pollution. of the end of the requiring that by Short term Scoping Bathing water profile for Seaham Hall bathing the end of the pollution is Baseline Beach: season in bathing season in caused when 2015 all 2015 all bathing heavy rainfall 2011 - good bathing waters waters are washes faecal
Report 2012 - sufficient are classified classified as material into 2013 - sufficient as 'sufficient'. 'sufficient' is likely the sea from Data 2014 - sufficient to be met. Water livestock, quality at Crimdon sewage and
(2016) is better than that urban at Seaham. This is drainage via likely to be due to rivers and a higher streams. At concentration of both sampling population near to points, the risk the Seaham Hall of Beach sampling encountering point and reduced water increased risks of quality sewage and urban increases after drainage outputs rainfall and washing into the typically sea during heavy returns to rainfall events. normal after 1-3 days.
Natural population growth may increase the Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
risk and frequency of reduced water quality. However, there is uncertainty as to whether water quality will fail the Bathing water regulations in future. Sustainability
Remediation of No further updates available. N/A To identify ? No information is It is assumed Durham County Council (2011) Contaminated contaminated those sites available. General that Land Strategy land where land acceptance that remediation of contamination there still exists land where Appendix is presenting large tracts of land contamination unacceptable with contamination is presenting Appraisal risks and issues due to the unacceptable ensure that heavy industrial environmental
remediation past of the risks will B: takes place, County. continue in Review using a line with
Scoping process of Council prioritisation to objectives. concentrate resources on of
the most Baseline
Report serious sites.
Agricultural No further updates available. N/A N/A <--> No further Agricultural EDAW/AECOM (2009) County Durham - land information land quality Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report (2016) available. across the Data County is not likely to 341 342 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Likely Future Data Source Appendix Status Baseline without the Condition Plan
change and
will continue to B:
Appraisal be lower in Review County Durham than in the North East region or of England. Scoping Baseline Report Data (2016) Table 72 Biodiversity / Geodiversity
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Component North Pennine N/A By 2020, the ↑ Whilst a marginal improvement in Slight improvements may Natural SSSI Moors Government’s objective is the condition of component SSSI's continue to be made England condition SAC/SPA: to see that 50% of the is evident, there is a very low owing to management but of total area of SSSIs is in a proportion of component SSSI's it is considered that European favourable condition, while currently meeting the 2020 50% meeting the 2020 target Protected at least 45% of the favourable condition target. will present a significant Sites remaining area of SSSIs (vi) Area challenge. favourable are in a stage of recovery and can be expected to 9.8% (2013) reach favourable condition, once management plans have Sustainability 11.0% (2015) taken effect. Unfavourable Recovering Appendix 89.2% (2013)
Appraisal 88.0% (2015)
Unfavourable, B: No change Review
Scoping 0.5% (2013)
0.9% (2015) of
Unfavourable, Baseline Report declining
0.4% (2013) (2016) Data
vi Please note that whilst component SSSI condition provides some indication of the condition of a SAC/ SPA it cannot be relied upon owing to differing reasons for designation. Further information will be provided in the HRA of the Plan. 343 344 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
0.1% (2015) B: Appraisal Review
Component Moor House N/A As above. ↓ A marginal decline in the condition Slight fluctuations in As above
SSSI Upper of component SSSI's is evident and condition are likely to of condition Teesdale there is a very low proportion of continue and it is Scoping of SAC: component SSSI's currently considered that meeting Baseline European meeting the 2020 50% favourable the 2020 target will Protected Area condition target. present a significant Sites favourable challenge. Report Data 8.0% (2013)
8.0% (2015) (2016)
Unfavourable Recovering
90.0% (2013)
9.0% (2015)
Unfavourable, No change
1.4% (2013)
1.0% (2015)
Unfavourable, declining
0.6% (2013) Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
1.0% (2015)
Component North Pennine N/A As above. <--> Data shows no change in condition Potential for stable As above SSSI Dales since 2013. However, the condition conditions to persist condition Meadows status of the component SSSI's owing to management. of SAC: combined exceeds Government However, management European targets. regimes may need to be Protected adapted to maintain Sites stability owing to the Area impact of climate change favourable upon upland hay meadows and associated
Sustainability 79.0% (2013) species.
79.0% (2015)
Unfavourable Appendix recovering
Appraisal 19.0% (2013)
19.0% (2015) B: Review Unfavourable,
Scoping no change
1.6% (2013) of
1.6% (2015) Baseline Report
Unfavourable, declining (2016) Data 0.0% (2013) 345 346 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
0.0% (2015) B: Appraisal Review Component Castle Eden N/A As above. <--> Data shows no change in condition There is potential for As above SSSI Dene SAC: since 2013. There is a very low some improvements to be condition proportion of component SSSI's made to the area of currently meeting the 2020 50% favourable status owing
Area of European favourable favourable condition target. to management of the site Scoping Protected as a National Nature Baseline Sites 6.8% (2013) Reserve.
6.8% (2015) Report Data Unfavourable Recovering
(2016) 93.2% (2013)
93.2% (2015)
Unfavourable, No change
0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015)
Unfavourable, declining
0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015) Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Component Teesmouth N/A As above. ↓ Data shows a decline in the Potential for further As above SSSI and Cleveland condition of component SSSI's with decline to occur as a condition Coast SPA: a 4% increase in the proportion result of for example, of declining and a 5% decrease in recreational pressure. European Area units considered to be favourable. Protected favourable Sites 35.7% (2013)
30.0% (2015)
Unfavourable Recovering Sustainability 44.1% (2013)
41.5% (2015) Appendix Unfavourable, No change Appraisal 2.7% (2013) B: 16.6% (2015) Review
Scoping Unfavourable, declining of 6.2% (2013) Baseline
Report 10.5% (2015)
Destroyed (2016) Data 1.0% (2013) 347 348 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
1.0% (2015) B: Appraisal Review Component Northumbria N/A As above. ↓ Data shows a slight decline in Potential for further As above SSSI Coast SPA: condition since 2013. However, the decline to occur as a condition condition status of the component result of for example, of SSSI's currently exceeds recreational pressure.
Area of European favourable Government targets. Scoping Protected Baseline Sites 62.8% (2013)
61.9% (2015) Report Data Unfavourable Recovering
(2016) 37.2% (2013)
38.1% (2015)
Unfavourable, No change
0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015)
Unfavourable, declining
0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015) Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Component Durham Coast N/A As above. ↓ Data shows a slight decline in Potential for further As above SSSI SAC: condition since 2013. However, the decline to occur as a condition condition status of the component result of for example, of Area SSSI's currently exceeds recreational pressure. European favourable Government targets. Protected Sites 62.8% (2013)
61.9% (2015)
Unfavourable Recovering
Sustainability 37.2% (2013)
38.1% (2015)
Unfavourable, Appendix No change
Appraisal 0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015) B: Review Unfavourable,
Scoping declining
0.0% (2013) of
0.0% (2015) Baseline Report
Component Thrislington N/A As above. <--> Data shows no change in condition Potential for stable As above SSSI SAC: since 2013. However, the condition conditions to persist (2016) Data condition status of the component SSSI's owing to management of of 349 350 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
European Area combined exceeds Government the site as a National
Protected favourable targets. Nature Reserve. B:
Appraisal Sites Review 100.0% (2013)
100.0% (2015) of
Scoping Unfavourable Recovering Baseline
0.0% (2013) Report
0.0% (2015) Data
Unfavourable, No change (2016)
0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015)
Unfavourable, declining
0.0% (2013)
0.0% (2015)
County 16.9% (2009) North East As above. ↓ A very low proportion of SSSI's in Whilst many sites are now Natural Durham: County Durham are currently in subject to management England 12.4% (2012) 25.8% (2009) favourable condition compared to agreements and are % SSSI the regional and national picture. recovering, the rate of area in recovery has declined favourable slightly. This may be due condition to pressures on habitats Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
14.5% (2015) 23.9% (2015) County Durham is unlikely to meet and species which are the 2020 50% favourable condition difficult to manage such England target. The proportion in favourable as climate change, condition has also decreased since recreational pressure, 50.0% (2009) 2009. The decline is reflected at illegal persecution and the regional and national level. levels of nitrogen and acid 37.5% (2015) deposition affecting sites.
County 66.5% (2009) North East As above. ↓ Data shows a high proportion of Potential for the rate of As above Durham: sites in a recovering situation. This recovery to decline further 86.1% (2012) 63.5% (2009) is likely to be due to the number of due to pressures on % SSSI in management agreements with habitat and species such Sustainability unfavourable 83.4% (2015) 74.6% (2015) landowners now in place. However, as climate change, recovering the data also shows a slight decline recreational pressure, condition England in the proportion recovering since illegal persecution and 2012. This is not reflected at the levels of nitrogen and acid
regional level where the proportion deposition affecting sites. Appendix 58.3% (2015) recovering has increased.
Appraisal County 14.2% (2009) North East As above. ↓ Data shows a low proportion of Potential for the rate of As above Durham: SSSI area that are in an recovery to decline further
0.7% (2012) 8.7% (2009) unfavourable condition and are not due to pressures on B: % SSSI in improving. However, the proportion habitat and species such Review unfavourable 1.0% (2015) 0.9% (2015) not improving has increased slightly as climate change,
Scoping no change from 2012. recreational pressure, condition England illegal persecution and levels of nitrogen and acid deposition affecting sites. of 2.4% (2015) Baseline Report
County 2.1% (2009) North East As above. ↓ Data shows a low proportion of Potential for the rate of As above Durham: SSSI area that are declining decline to increase further However, the proportion declining due to pressures on (2016) 0.8% (2012) 1.8% (2009) Data has increased slightly from 2012. habitat and species such 351 352 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
% SSSI in 1.0% (2015) 0.6% (2015) as climate change,
declining recreational pressure, B:
Appraisal condition illegal persecution and England Review levels of nitrogen and acid 1.7% (2015) deposition affecting sites. of
Scoping County 0.4% (2009) North East As above. ↑ Data shows a reduction in the Given that there has been As above Durham: proportion of SSSI area partially an increase in SSSI's not Baseline 0.0% (2012) 0.2% (2009) destroyed since 2009 and this recovering and in a % SSSI proportion is comparatively lower declining condition there partially 0.0% (2015) 0.0% (2015) than the English figure. is potential for an increase
Report in area that could become
destroyed Data England partially destroyed.
0.01% (2015) (2016)
County 0.03% (2015) North East As above. ? Data shows a low proportion of Given that there has been As above Durham: SSSI area in the County that is an increase in SSSI's not 0.01% (2015) destroyed. However, this figure is recovering and in a % SSSI marginally higher than the regional declining condition there destroyed England and English figures. is potential for an increase in area that could become 0.02% (2015) destroyed.
BAP County Contribution Overarching target: ? Shows that a significant proportion Threats to priority habitats A Priority Durham to regional of the North East’s broadleaf such as agricultural Biodiversity Habitat contains the habitat area On an annual basis, woodland, upland hay meadows, intensification, drainage Audit of the following Other ensure that there is no upland calcareous grassland, and recreational North East Priority broadleaf loss in the extent or blanket bogs and fen priority habitat pressures are likely to (NE Habitats listed woodland quality of the North East occurs in County Durham. Lowland continue to threaten the Biodiversity in the UK (50.0%) Region’s existing resource Acid grassland and reedbeds are survival of priority Forum of UK BAP habitats. rare priority habitats in the County. habitats. 2001) Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Biodiversity Ancient Targets for UK BAP In terms of trends for each habitat Durham Action Plan semi-natural Habitats in County type in the BAP area: Biodiversity (BAP): woodland Durham. Action Plan Other and Broadleaf woodland cover is low. broadleaf PAWS Broadleaf woodland - Wet woodland is rare and has woodland (36.0%) Expand by 850ha and declined through natural (75,225.5 Lowland increase the area under succession, Ancient woodland is ha) meadows active management by widespread but fragmented, Wet (14.0%) 100ha. Lowland meadows are extremely woodland Upland rare and fragmented and upland Ancient Hay Wet woodland – Maintain hay meadows are still declining in semi-natural meadows and increase extent by terms of quality and extent. woodland (72.0%) 50ha. Lowland heath is rare and
Sustainability and Upland combined with upland calcareous PAWS calcareous Ancient woodland– grassland, blanket bog (important (4,115 grassland Achieve carbon sink), fens and reedbeds ha (99.0%) favourable/recovering are under threat from drainage, agricultural intensification and
Lowland Lowland condition of 100 ha and Appendix meadows acid restore 150ha to native recreation pressures. (45.4ha) grassland woodland. Upland (0.5%) Appraisal hay Lowland Lowland meadows – meadows heath Restore 200ha and (525.5ha) (24.4%) expand extent by 100ha. B:
Upland Upland Review calcareous heath Upland hay meadows – Scoping grassland (37.0%) (436.0ha) Blanket Increase area in good
Lowland bog condition and increase of
acid (57.0%) extent by 50ha. Baseline
Report grassland Fens (125.9 (61.0%) Upland calcareous ha) Reedbeds grassland - Targets being Lowland (5.0%) revised. (2016) heath Data (105.0 ha) 353 354 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Upland Lowland acid grassland
heath – Restore 10ha and B:
Appraisal (19,129.1ha) re-establish 5ha of Review Blanket grassland of wildlife value. bog (22,530.9ha) Lowland heath – Increase extent by 30ha.
Fens of (3,072.9ha) Scoping Reedbeds Upland heath – Maintain Baseline (3.0ha) extent. Coastal soft cliffs Blanket Bog – Maintain
Report and extent. Data slopes Fens – Restore 30ha of fen habitats on former (2016) known sites.
Reedbeds – Expand extent by 30ha and increase the number of sites of 2ha+ by 1 sites.
Coastal Soft Cliffs and Slopes – No target set.
BAP County Not Targets for UK BAP ? Water Vole – current population Potential for an increase As above. Priority Durham applicable. species in County trend is uncertain. in disturbance and road Species contains the Durham: fatalities of priority following Brown Hare – Little information on species from increased Priority Species Badger: To maintain population trends but believed to traffic levels and other listed in the UK range. be widespread. sources of disturbance. Biodiversity Action Plan Hedgehog: Maintain Otter – Widespread on the (BAP): population. Derwent, Wear and Tees. Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Mammals: Water Vole: To expand Pipistrelle Bat – ubiquitous the current range of water throughout the whole of the DBAP Badger vole in the Durham BAP area. area by 50%. Hedgehog Skylark – numbers are down by Brown Hare: No target about 38% since 1994 in the region Water Vole set as widespread. as a whole.
Brown Hare Otter: Expand current Linnet – very common and well range of breeding otter. distributed species. European Otter Bats: No target set. Reed Bunting – declined nationally Bats by over 60% since the 70’s but Sustainability Red squirrel: Maintain remains widespread in lowland areas. The DBAP breeding Red Squirrel current range. population is between 500 and 800 pairs. Birds: Skylark: To maintain the
range of breeding skylark. Appendix Corn Bunting – have decreased by Skylark Barn owl: Expand range. at least 95% in the North East since the 70’s. Appraisal Barn owl Curlew: Maintain range Spotted Flycatcher – in sharp and number of wintering B: Curlew curlew. decline. Review Lapwing Lapwing: Maintain Tree Sparrow – have decreased by Scoping number of breeding at least 50% in the North East since Nightjar territories. the 70’s. Locally common but sparsely distributed in Durham. of Linnet Nightjar: Expand Baseline
Report breeding range. Grey Partridge – no trend found. Reed Bunting Linnet: To maintain the Bullfinch – no trend found. Corn Bunting range of Linnet. (2016) Data 355 356 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Spotted Reed Bunting: Target not Song Thrush – populations are
Flycatcher set yet. fairly stable at low numbers. B:
Appraisal Suffered a slight decline since Review Tree Sparrow Corn Bunting: To 2004. increase the range in the Grey Partridge Durham BAP area. Great Crested Newt – suffered a decline in recent years. Studies of Spotted Flycatcher: No indicate a national rate of colony Scoping Bullfinch target set. loss of approximately 2% over 5 Baseline Black Grouse years. Tree Sparrow: To Song Thrush increase the range in the White Clawed Crayfish – thought
Report Durham BAP area. to have declined dramatically over Data recent decades in the DBAP area. Amphibian: Grey Partridge: No target Great Crested found. (2016) Newt Bullfinch: No target Invertebrates: found.
Northern brown Black Grouse: Expand argus population to 1000 displaying males. Chalk carpet moth Song Thrush: To maintain the range. White Clawed Crayfish Great Crested Newt: To maintain and expand the range. Round mouthed whorl snail Northern Brown Argus: To maintain range.
Chalk Carpet: No target set. Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
White Clawed Crayfish: To maintain and expand the range
Round mouthed whorl snail: To maintain range.
Local Local Nature Not Not applicable. ? The number of locally designated The number of locally County Wildlife Reserves:. applicable. sites and reserves may change designated sites and Ecologist Sites over time. reserves may change There are 32 over time. Durham LNR’s in Wildlife
Sustainability County Trust Durham Woodland Durham Trust
Wildlife Trust Appendix Reserves:
There are 23 Appraisal reserves in County B: Durham
(approx 333 Review ha). Scoping
Woodland
Trust Woods: of Baseline
Report There are 18 Trust woods in County Durham (2016) (approx 438 Data ha). 357 358 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan Source
Improved Total Number Not Target should be to ↑ Shows an improvement in the the Year on year County
Local of local wildlife applicable. increase the proportion of proportion of local sites where improvements are Ecologist B:
Appraisal Biodiversity sites in the sites where positive positive conservation management anticipated. Review Local Authority conservation management has been or is being implemented. area: 379 is being undertaken. However, there is a relatively low proportion overall at only 20%. Proportion of of local sites Scoping where positive Baseline conservation management has been or is
Report being implemented: Data
6.3% (2008/09) (2016) 10.05% (2009/10)
20% (2010/11). Table 73 Landscape
Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Source
National A distinctive upland landscape of upland Only limited uptake of agreements between Climate change could result in general Natural Character plateau divided by broad pastoral dales, 1993 and 2003 to extend woodland area. shift of species northwards and to England: Area: each with its own distinctive character, most However in recent years some areas of higher altitudes. Warmer summers of it designated as an Area of Outstanding woodland have been created. could result in accelerating the move NCA North Natural Beauty (AONB). Significant restructuring of coniferous away from hay meadows and could Profile Pennines Strong landform of summits capped by plantations have taken place. cause the drying out of blanket bog 10: North Millstone Grit, with underlying alternating An increase from 7% to 32% of dry stone wall and loss of montane species. Wetter Pennines limestones, sandstones and shales of the is now under management. summers would increase the rate of Yoredale Series,creating stepped profiles Sheep numbers have dropped by 22% and soil erosion, reducing water quality and to the dales. cattle by 24%. incur more frequent flooding of valley Igneous intrusions of dolerite forming Whin Development pressures are generally low. bottoms.
Sustainability Species-rich hay meadows will remain Sill, with striking crag outcrops and By 2003 significant uptake of countryside vulnerable to pressures to increase waterfalls. A dramatic scarp slope along the stewardship agreements for upland habitats silage making in preference to hay western edge, falling to the Eden valley. including enhancing and managing heather making. Much of the area is designated as a moorlands. UNESCO European and Global Geopark Changes in government policy may The North Pennines AONB's Peatlands Appendix promote improved management of for its many geological sites and features, Programmes has been supporting peat existing woodlands and increase including minerals. restoration and management works. Remote and extensive moorlands of blanket woodland cover.
Appraisal The North Pennines AONB Hay time project Likely to be a continuing lack of bog, heathland and acidic grassland, aims to restore and enhance upland hay managed for sheep and grouse. These maintenance of dry stone walls.
meadows. Locally harvested seed has been B: moorlands support internationally important spread on 193 ha of hay meadow. Continuing need to understand and
habitats, including arctic-alpine flora and manage Phytopthora austrocedrae Review About 64% of traditional farm buildings have populations of waders and raptors. which affects Juniper. not been converted and most are still intact Scoping A long tradition of livestock rearing structurally. Anticipated that populations of black combined with mining has created a grouse and certain birds of prey may Ecological status of river waters and lakes
landscape of enclosed pastures and remain low or continue to decline. of within the area is generally good or meadows within the dales, with strong field Pressure to restore, convert and moderate, although some watercourses carry Baseline patterns defined by drystone walls. extend traditional buildings is likely to Report a high volume of peat solids in suspension Significant grassland habitats, including and in places there is pollution from mining continue. Recent improved building limestone grasslands, upland hay meadows, spoil. design guidance should influence the and calamarian grasslands on mining spoil, quality of development within the Mining and quarrying has over time had a (2016) along with extensive acid grasslands. AONB. Data significant impact on the landscape. Area of high rainfall, with many fast-flowing Large-scale quarrying of sandstone, streams and several major rivers flowing limestone and dolerite is likely to 359 360 Sustainability
Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Appendix Source
outwards from the hills, down the wide continue with pressure to extend the
dales. These provide clean water and create area and time limit of existing B:
Appraisal a range of freshwater habitats. workings. Review A very tranquil landscape, with a sense of remoteness. A low population, little light pollution, a slow rate of change, extensive open moorlands with panoramic views and of a unique sense of wildness, all providing an Scoping inspirational recreational experience. Baseline The use of local sandstone and gritstone, with stone or slate for roofs, gives a strong vernacular character and unity to the
Report villages, farmsteads and field barns. Data Tree cover is limited to river gorges, gills and stream sides, with copses around dispersed farmsteads. There are fragments
(2016) of juniper scrub and some large conifer plantations on moorland fringes. A rich cultural history – from prehistoric settlements and defensive bastle houses to more recent industrial activity – with extensive evidence of early lead mining, extraction of other minerals and quarrying.
Condition Pennine Dales uplands, predominantly There has been significant uptake of Climate Change is likely to result in Natural of National sloping down to the east, but with locally Woodland Grant Scheme agreements for more frequent and more extreme England Character varied topography formed by several restocking of conifer plantations within the rainfall, leading to increased flooding Areas: significant river valleys running from west area, with the rate of uptake increasing after and ‘flashiness’ of flows in river valleys, to east. 1999 to around 80 ha/year. Recent survey resulting in increased bankside Pennine A transitional landscape between the work by the Forestry Commission (2011) erosion. Warmer winters will lead to Dales Pennine uplands to the west and the indicates an increase in woodland cover to increased tree growth and an Fringe (ha) low-lying fertile landscape of the Vale of nearly 10 per cent cover, with an increase in increased suitability of new non-native York to the east; mainly pastoral in the west, the proportion of broadleaves. species. Drying out and oxidation of with rough grazing on the moorland edge, Agri-environment schemes have supported peatland soils, possibly leading to both merging into mixed farming, with arable on substantial restoration and enhancement of wind and water based erosion, loss of the lighter soils in the east. the boundary network. Between 2005 and carbon stores and coloration of water. 2013 Environmental Stewardship agreements Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Source
A well-wooded landscape, with many included 1.47 km of hedgerow restoration, There is likely to be continued demand copses and plantations on the side slopes, 4.8 km of drystone wall restoration and for sand, gravel and limestone. and hedges with hedgerow trees in the creation of 1.52 km of new hedgerows and The NCA has good potential for new lowerlying arable areas. 12.54 km of fencing. woodland creation. New woodland Several historic parklands, with woodlands The number of agricultural holdings greater could strengthen the provision of a and veteran trees. than100 ha increased by 16 per cent, while number of ecosystem services in the Field boundaries of drystone walls on higher the number of smaller farms fell. area. ground and hedges in lower areas. Between 2005 and 2013 Environmental A generally tranquil and rural area, with a Stewardship agreements in the area included distinctly ancient character in some parts, options to restore 773 ha of moorland, 337 with several small, historic market towns ha of “rough grazing for birds”, 214 ha of including, Middleham and Barnard Castle. species-rich grassland and 70 ha wet Vernacular buildings predominantly built of grassland for breeding waders. They also
Sustainability Millstone Grit, mingling with Magnesian included options to maintain 166 ha of “rough Limestone in the east, with roofs of stone grazing for birds”, 73 ha of species-rich flags, Welsh slate and some pantiles, grassland and 58 ha of woodland, as well as creating strong visual unity to rural to create 5 new ponds covering an area of 10,590 m2.
settlements and farmsteads. Appendix Many rivers, including the Tees, Ure, Nidd The area is particularly important for its and Wharfe, forming important landscape historic parkland, with 22 parklands, 15 of features along with their broad, glacially which are Registered Parks and Gardens Appraisal widened valleys. Smaller rivers, such as the and cover 1,771 ha. Burn, Laver, Kex Beck and the Skell flow through steep-sided valleys following B:
courses cut by glacial meltwaters. Review Historically rich area with many parklands, Scoping abbeys and historic buildings, well visited by adjacent urban populations, as well as
medieval and Roman earthworks. of Baseline
Report Condition A rolling upland landscape of broad, open Between 1999 and 2003 there was a Drier summers could lead to Natural of National ridges and valleys with a strong west–east significant increase in the rate of uptake of drought-stress for semi-natural habitats England Character grain. Woodland Grant Scheme grants for and agricultural crops. This in turn Areas: A transitional landscape with pastoral management (~118 ha/yr), new planting (~56 could lead to degradation and loss of (2016) farming on higher ground in the west giving ha/yr) and restocking (~28 ha/yr) of certain habitats and species and Data way to arable and mixed farming in the woodland, especially in the Great North increased abstraction of water for valleys and to the east. Forest Area around Stanley. 361 362 Sustainability
Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Appendix Source
Durham A landscape heavily influenced by the Between 2005 and 2013 Environmental irrigation, with greater pressure on the
Coalfield mining and steel industries, in particular to Stewardship agreements in the NCA included Rivers Derwent and Wear, and the B:
Appraisal Pennine the north and east, with scattered mining options to: plant 3.29 km, restore 6.6 km and Kielder Water Scheme more widely. Review Fringe (ha) and industrial settlements of terraced and sympathetically manage 489.5 km of hedges; Increased levels of water abstraction estate housing occupying prominent sites and restore 0.1 km and protect/maintain and higher water temperatures could linked by a network of main roads. 397.5 km of drystone wall. have negative consequences for water Open cast coal workings forming intrusive Countryside Quality Counts evidence shows quality, fish and other aquatic species of features in some areas, and restored open that there has been some expansion of urban and may cause greater incidences of Scoping cast areas giving a manmade feel to parts fringe areas, and development in the rural algal blooms. Baseline of the landscape. Early restoration sites are areas beyond, especially in the north-east If summers become hotter and drier often lacking in character, topography and between Consett and Newcastle, which may as predicted, this may lead to a drying natural and historic features, while later be further affected by the additional housing out of peat soils beneath wetlands and
Report schemes are of more value for wildlife and development in the Newcastle-Gateshead moorland/heathland, which could lead amenity. Growth Point, similarly, in the south around to locally significant carbon loss (albeit Data Numerous small plantations of conifers or Bishop Auckland. from a relatively small area) as well as mixed woodland, as blocks or shelterbelts, greater risk of wind/water erosion and
(2016) on hillsides; in places more extensive In terms of habitat creation, HLS agreements colouration of drinking water supplies. conifer woodlands on ridgetops and between 2005 and 2013 included 22 ha of Development pressure is likely to hillsides. arable reversion by natural regeneration, 21 continue with demand for additional Wide, open, windswept ridges of regular, ha of floristically enhanced field margins, 20 housing and commercial premises large fields bounded by drystone walls and ha wet grassland for breeding waders and 2 bringing increasing urbanisation to fences and crossed by straight roads, with ha of lowland heathland from arable and parts of the landscape. isolated farmsteads. improved pasture. Activities such as vandalism, Broad valleys of arable and mixed farmland inappropriate use of motorbikes, graffiti with low hedges, with hedgerow trees, strips The water quality in the River Wear has and fly-tipping are a problem in some of broadleaved woodland following rivers improved dramatically in the 21st century, parts of the NCA. Lighting fires is a and streams, and conifer plantations on and was named by the Environment Agency particular threat to heathland sites. valley sides. in 2011 as one of the most improved rivers Narrow, steep-sided river valleys sheltering in England and Wales. fragments of ancient woodland. A number of former open cast coal mines have been recently restored to create new semi-natural habitat (grassland, native woodland, heathland and ponds) and access routes, as well as agricultural land. These Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Source
include a 55 ha site at Stoneyheap (completed in Oct 2007) and a 104 ha site at Southfield (completed in Oct 2005).
Condition Undulating landform incised by the river Data from Countryside Quality Counts for the Climate Change is likely to have a Natural of National valleys of the Tyne and the Wear and their period 1999 to 2003 shows a reduction in the range of impacts, including increased England Character tributaries. uptake of Woodland Grant Scheme flooding events, changing agricultural Areas: Widespread urban and industrial agreements for management of established practices and drought leading to the development with a dense network of major woodlands. However, there may be scope loss of certain habitats and landscape Tyne and road and rail links and the spreading for new urban fringe planting (to extend and features. Wear conurbations of Tyneside in the north. reinforce woodland patterns), that could be Industrial pollution of the rivers has Lowlands Dispersed towns and villages further south. taken up through the introduction of new reduced in recent years, although
Sustainability (ha) Historic riverside cities of Newcastle upon Community Forest schemes. some remain polluted. The potential Tyne and Durham, strategically located at Data from Natural England (March 2011), for further pollution from mine water, bridging points of the rivers Tyne and Wear. shows that there has been a large increase should the pumping of the deep mines Between settlements, wide stretches of from 4 per cent to 19.5 per cent of the cease, remains a potential threat. estimated boundary length of the NCA being agricultural land with large, regular, arable Improvements in upland land Appendix fields bordered by hedgerows with few managed under Environmental Stewardship management practices in the North hedgerow trees, often with large farmsteads agreements. These cover ditches, Pennines NCA may help to reduce and urban fringe pasture land with pony and hedgerows, stone walls, stone-faced run-off and this area is also a priority Appraisal cattle grazing. hedgerows and woodland protection. for woodland planting for reducing Strong legacy of mining, much restored to Increased arable cropping in previously downstream flood risk. B: agriculture, forestry, industry, housing and pastoral areas has led to loss of old pasture, There has been a significant expansion
amenity uses such as country parks, linking meadows, hedgerows, hedgerow trees, ridge of urban fringe areas around major Review urban areas with countryside and coast by and furrow and other archaeological features. settlements. The retention of the rural Scoping transforming wagonways to cycle routes character of the countryside between and footpaths. Hedgerow decline and some grassland loss settlements is important, and
Industrial prosperity reflected in the large continue as agricultural land is lost to other consideration should be given to the of uses. improvement of the urban fringe
number of 18th- and 19th-century country Baseline environment and the creation of new,
Report houses, set within parkland in the vicinity of major settlements. Urban edge farming is generally influenced accessible quality green spaces, Mixed woodland estates and plantations on by increasing numbers of horse and pony particularly in urban areas. restored spoil heaps provide woodland infrastructure such as post-and-wire fences Securing and enhancing more green (2016) cover in some areas, although sparse and stables. infrastructure including the urban fringe Data elsewhere. Oak or oak/birch broadleaved and good networks in and out of urban woodland, a characteristic feature on steep areas, will provide opportunities to 363 364 Sustainability
Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Appendix Source
sides of narrow river valleys, with some river Pressure for new development has extended deliver health benefits by improving
flood plains holding pockets of fen, reedbed the urban fringe into open countryside, with accessibility to a high quality natural B:
Appraisal and species-rich grasslands. light industry, retail and housing development environment. Review Important relic of lowland heath survives at often poorly integrated into the surrounding Waldridge Fell, one of few remaining areas landscape. of common land.
The decline of the deep coal mining industry of left locally-prominent pitheads and spoil Scoping heaps, most of which have been restored Baseline over recent years. These, along with recently restored, open cast mining sites left a legacy of immature and somewhat featureless
Report landscapes. Data
Over recent years, the quality of the River Tyne has improved and it is now home to (2016) kingfishers and otters as well as being a migratory route for salmon.
Condition Open, large-scale landscape with big fields, From 1999 to 2003 there is some evidence Climate Change is likely to have a Natural of National low hedges and few trees on the plateau of expansion of new woodlands in the former range of impacts, including increased England Character tops, incised with stream valleys along Great North Community Forest and the flooding events, changing agricultural Areas: limestone escarpment to the west and limestone areas to the south of the National practices and drought leading to the denes running down to the coast to the east. Character Area. loss of certain habitats and landscape Durham Dramatic coastline with exposed cliffs of Historically there has been widespread features. It will also lead to greater Magnesian limestone and boulder clay, undulating removal of hedgerows and other field pressure on the Durham Magnesian Limestone series of small, sheltered bays and boundaries to create larger fields, particularly Limestone Aquifer and the River Wear. Plateau headlands, flower-rich Magnesian in arable areas. This trend has reduced, and Increased levels of water abstraction (ha) Limestone grassland, steep-sided wooded in some cases, been reversed since the late and higher water temperatures could coastal denes, and sand dunes and 20th century. Between 2005 and 2012 there have negative consequences for water beaches that support large populations of was strong uptake of environmental quality, fish and other aquatic species waders and seabirds. stewardship, with agreements including and may cause greater incidences of Striking west-facing limestone escarpment options for hedgerows amounting to 651.8 algal blooms. forming a series of spurs and vales, heavily km of maintenance, 9.5 km of restoration and Sea level rise and more frequent storm quarried but still supporting a mosaic of 9.5 km of planting of hedges. events may lead to increased rates of limestone grassland, scrub and woodland. coastal erosion with sediment deposit Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Source
Strong influence of historic mining industry The number and size of farm holdings has dumped further down the coast. on both local culture and the landscape, in remained largely constant. Impacts of this could include greater the form of ex-coal mining towns and Between 2000 and 2009 an increasing risk of contamination from landfill sites villages with distinctive surrounding areas amount of land was farmed by owners rather close to the coast, loss of rare coastal of allotments and pony paddocks, reclaimed than tenants, with a 12 per cent decrease in habitats, loss of property and erosion colliery sites, disused and existing railways, tenanted land. of coastal footpaths. and industrial archaeology. Data suggests there is evidence of urban Development pressure is likely to A productive farmed landscape with a high expansion and infilling, especially around continue with demand for additional proportion of large arable fields and some Main towns in the East. There also appears housing and commercial premises pasture for sheep and cattle grazing. to have been significant development in the bringing increasing urbanisation to Small, fragmented patches of limestone rural areas along the coast between parts of the landscape. This would also grassland supporting unique combinations Hartlepool and Peterlee, and along the A19 present positive opportunities such as of rare plant and invertebrate species. between Hartlepool and Wingate. creation of new green infrastructure
Sustainability Historic villages subject to a high degree of Following the development of the Limestone and installation of more permeable 20th-century expansion with widespread Landscape and Durham Heritage Coast surfaces and sustainable drainage or urban and industrial development in the partnerships, considerable creation of rainwater harvesting schemes. north and major transport corridors species-rich limestone grassland has Small and fragmented areas of throughout. occurred ( approximately 250 ha on former semi-natural habitats are likely to Appendix arable and brownfield sites), in some remain at risk of neglect, if their circumstances utilising agri-environment management continues to be schemes, along the coast and escarpment economically unviable. Scrub Appraisal spurs. encroachment of Magnesian Neglect and lack of management continues Limestone grassland is a particular to be a threat to some habitats and species risk. This combined with increased B:
such as small Magnesian Limestone movement (and possibly local loss) of Review grassland sites which are difficult to graze species and diseases, climate change
Scoping and the little tern site at Crimdon which has and genetic isolation of certain species become overgrown with marram grass, could represent a severe threat to some rare habitats. making tern chicks vulnerable to predation. of The River Wear was named by the Coastal erosion and more frequent Baseline Environment Agency as one of the most storm events are likely to be a threat Report environmentally improved rivers in England to valuable coastal habitats, and Wales in 2011, and salmon catches particularly the cliff-top habitats and increased from 2 in 1965 to 1,531 in 2010. Magnesian Limestone grassland that exist in narrow strips along the coast. (2016) Substantial investment via the Durham Data Heritage Coast partnership and the Turning Work to remove colliery waste from the Tide Project (1997–2002) delivered a long stretches of coastline is continuing 365 366 Sustainability
Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Appendix Source
successful programme of waste removal and to have a beneficial effect on marine
beach cleaning along stretches of the coast. and coastal species. As marine habitat B:
Appraisal Once formerly polluted from coal mining continues to recover, populations of Review spoil, 80 ha of beaches and associated marine species will continue to off-shore habitats have been restored. increase, with prey species having a Although most of the small-scale limestone beneficial effect on marine predators quarries are no longer active, and are now and some coastal species such as of more important for nature conservation than wading birds Scoping mineral extraction (many now designated as Baseline SSSI for their geological and biodiversity interest) the area still has some major limestone quarrying complexes (including
Report Bishop Middleham and Thrislington) producing stone for construction. Data
Condition A broad, low-lying and open plain of Boundaries have generally been maintained, Climate Change is likely to have a Natural
(2016) of National predominantly arable agricultural land, with but poorly managed and hedgerows range of impacts, including increased England Character low woodland cover and large fields, defined represent by far the greatest extent of flooding events, changing agricultural Areas: by wide views to distant hills. boundary features under Environmental practices and drought leading to the Slow-moving rivers Tees and Leven Stewardship. loss of certain habitats and landscape Tees meander through the landscape with steep, Temporary grassland has declined, with an features. It will also lead to greater Lowlands well-wooded banks. increase in the area under arable. General pressure on the Durham Magnesian (ha) A distinctive area of low-lying farmland with cropping declined significantly between 2000 Limestone Aquifer and the River Wear. remnants of former wetland habitat in the and 2009. Cereal cropping decreased Increased levels of water abstraction flood plain of the River Skerne to the slightly, but still represented 44 per cent of and higher water temperatures could north-west. the total farmed area. There has been an have negative consequences for water Principal transport corridors, power lines increase in oilseed rape, but this still quality, fish and other aquatic species and energy infrastructure are conspicuous represented only 10 per cent of the overall and may cause greater incidences of elements in the landscape. area. algal blooms. Brownfield sites where semi-natural There has been significant investment in the There is continued pressure for vegetation has started to regenerate on energy sector in recent years, with ongoing housing development on the urban previously developed land. development of, onshore and offshore wind fringe and often on greenfield sites, Green corridors such as minor valleys and farms and their associated infrastructure, particularly in and around Sedgefield. former railway lines provide links between such as the Butterwick and Walkway Wind Following on from the work of the Tees urban areas and the surrounding Farms to the East of Sedgefield. Forest, the Tees Valley Green countryside. There is continued demand for housing Infrastructure Strategy and other development on the urban fringe of Teesside. borough-wide green infrastructure Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Source
However, the demand for housing and other strategies have been prepared with the development is on a relatively small scale in aim of creating a strategic network of a national context. green infrastructure corridors, Historic parklands and farm buildings have providing links between green spaces generally been eroded. for local communities.
Heritage The Durham Heritage Coast is an attractive Until recently this was one of the most heavily Within the built heritage of the coast Coast coastal landscape of magnesian limestone polluted coastlines in Britain, a legacy from and its inland corridor, there are areas grasslands, cliffs, pebble and sandy over a hundred years of dumping colliery of unappealing or derelict buildings. beaches stretching between the two main waste from its six coal mines along the Many of the interesting historical conurbations of Tyne and Wear and beaches. Following the closure of the local buildings are in private hands and not Teesside. coal mines in the 1980s, the 'Turning the accessible by the general public, thus Tide' project was implemented, which has reducing the potential for enhancement
Sustainability The physical shape and composition of the seen the successful transformation of the and access. shoreline has been drastically altered by coastline. The removal of the spoil heaps and The separation of the coast from its the impact of the coal industry extending debris from the beaches and cliff tops, and hinterland by the railway, and the need and raising the beaches through the the conversion of large areas of arable land to access many sites through narrow, to magnesian limestone grassland has dark entrances or to park at a distance dumping of spoil. These physical processes Appendix shape the environment of the coast and rejuvenated the coastline. from the coast does not give the visitor have an impact on the biological and visual Agricultural land has been purchased and a sense of security or comfort and appeal of the area. converted a further 225 hectares of land for requires investment in physical Appraisal habitat creation. infrastructure. The Durham Coast hosts 92% of the total Further enhancements included working with There is a lack of existing visitor B: area of para-maritime magnesian limestone local communities to reduce the impact of attractions in the general area of the
grassland habitat in Britain. eyesores such as allotment fences. More coast and no real tradition of ‘visiting Review substantial works have completely the coast’ aside from Crimdon and
Scoping regenerated the sea front at Seaham. The Seaham Many of the areas have been designated coastal car parks and promenade were as Sites of Special Scientific Interest and Many of the coastal sites are currently
overhauled in a project to provide much of National Nature Reserve. Two foreshore used to a great extent for local improved facilities for this gateway to the dog-walking which has an impact on
areas to the extreme north and south have Baseline coast.
Report the European designation, SPA (Special (2016) Data 367 368 Sustainability
Indicator Key Characteristics Commentary on baseline condition Likely Future without the Plan Data Appendix Source
Protected Area) for species such as the the sites and on the enjoyment of them
Purple Sandpiper in the north and the Little by other users. B:
Appraisal Tern in the south. Balancing increasing biodiversity and Review habitat sensitivity with greater visitor Differential erosion rates along faults in the numbers needed to develop economic limestone cliffs are responsible for the sustainability.
indented coastline with its series of of headlands and bays. Stacks, sea caves and Scoping arches occur frequently along this coastline. Baseline The best examples of these occur at Blackhall Rocks. Cliffs are less pronounced south of Blackhall as the beach widens into
Report sandy stretches towards Hartlepool. Between Seaham and Crimdon, steep Data wooded valleys bisect the cliff line, and extend some distance offshore. (2016) Table 74 Heritage
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Source Durham Status Condition the Plan
Number of listed 2009 - 31 42 Remove for positive ↑ The number of listed buildings at Assumed that further Historic buildings at risk reasons 25% of risk has decreased from 31 to 28 decreases in numbers England (all designations) 2011 - 30 (2015 nationally designated across county Durham since 'at risk' will occur as 'Heritage at national heritage at risk assets 2009 displaying a positive trend. solutions that have been Risk' register 2015 - 28 average) from the baseline 2010 The number of listed buildings at agreed are Heritage at Risk risk in Durham is also implemented. register. significantly less that the national average (42).
Proportion of 2008 - 8% N/A Remove for positive ↑ The overall trend is positive as Assumed that further Historic Grade I and II* reasons 25% of there has been a reduction (2%) decreases in proportion England listed buildings nationally designated in the proportion of Grade I and 'at risk' will occur as 'Heritage at
Sustainability 2011 - 11% on the “At Risk” heritage at risk assets II* listed buildings on the “At solutions that have been Risk' register register 2015 - 6% from the baseline 2010 Risk” register in the last four agreed are Heritage at Risk years. The proportion is also low. implemented. register. Appendix Proportion of 2009 - 14% 8 Remove for positive ? Overall, the proportion of Uncertain trend, Historic conservation reasons 25% of conservation areas "At risk" has particularly given that England
Appraisal areas on the "At (13 out of 93) (2015 nationally designated decreased slightly since 2009. there is no reason 'Heritage at Risk" register national heritage at risk assets However, the number of recorded for the Risk' register
2011 - 6% average) from the baseline 2010 conservation areas "At Risk" has Conservation Areas B: Heritage at Risk increased by 5% over the last being listed on the Review (6 out 93) register. four years. register. Potential for
Scoping further decline assumed. 2015 - 11% of (10 out of 93) Baseline Report
Proportion of 2009 - 20% N/A - ↑ Improving situation, likely to Situation likely to Durham conservation continue to improve. However a continue to improve. County (2016) areas with an 2012 - 32% low proportion (less than half) of Council Data appraisal the Conservation Areas currently conducted and 369 370 Sustainability
Indicator County Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without Data Source Appendix Durham Status Condition the Plan
management 2015 - 42% have a management Plan in
plan produced place B: Appraisal Review Proportion of 2009 - 16.8% N/A Remove for positive ? The proportion of scheduled Uncertain trend but it is Historic Scheduled reasons 25% of monuments at risk has assume that the overall England Monuments on (38 out of 226 nationally designated decreased by 4.8% across proportion on the 'Heritage at the “At Risk” heritage at risk assets county Durham since 2009, register will decrease as Risk' register
) of register from the baseline 2010 displaying a positive trend. solutions that have been Scoping 2011 - 8% Heritage at Risk However, over the last four years, agreed are Baseline register. a greater proportion (4%) of implemented. (22 out of 273) scheduled monuments have appeared "At Risk". Report
2015 - 12% Data
(28 out of 230) (2016) Table 75 - Resource Efficiency
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Plan Data Source Status Condition
Water 2001/01 - 147.0 150 130 litres ? While the average water Water consumption data is Northumbrian consumption (approximately) consumption (litres/day) reduced largely based on factors such as water: water per household 2002/03 - 145.0 by 2.07 litres/day from 2000 to weather conditions and building resources (litres/day) 2013, there was no consistent regulations. Stricter building management 2003/04 - 150.0 trend in the data. regulations may improve levels plan of water efficiency. 2004/05 - 146.0
2005/06 - 148.0
2006/07 - 150.0 Sustainability 2009/10 - 138.9
2010/11 - 141.4 Appendix 2012/13 - 144.9 Appraisal Domestic gas 2005 - 20,837 North East ↑ Gas consumption in Durham Without the plan, domestic gas Dpt Energy
consumption reduced significantly between consumption is predicted to Climate B: per household 2010 - 15,598 2005 - 19,694 2005 and 2010 represented by a decrease in line with trends. Change per year (kWh) 25% drop. However, gas Review
Scoping 2011 - 14,683 2010 - 15,378 consumption per household per year in Durham was 2% higher than the national average.
2012 - 14,629 2011 - 14,420 of
2013 - 14,243 2012 - 14,433 Baseline Report
2013 - 14,045 (2016) England Data
2005 - 18,921 371 372 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Plan Data Source Appendix Status Condition
Average 2005 - 3,904 North East ↑ There has been a considerable Without the plan, domestic Dpt Energy
domestic reduction of electricity electricity consumption will likely Climate B:
Appraisal electricity consumption in Durham. decrease in line with trends. Change 2010 - 3,758 2005 - 3,887 Review consumption Domestic electricity consumption per year (kWh) 2011 - 3,711 2010 - 3,770 reduced by 14% between 2005 - 2013.
2012 - 3,394 2011 - 3,703 of Consumption in Durham is Scoping Baseline 2013 - 3,383 2012 - 3,309 slightly lower (-2%) than the north east but considerably lower (-16%) than the national average. 2013 - 3,421 Report
England Data
2005 - 4,618 (2016) 2010 - 4,148
2013 - 3,963
Renewable 2008 - 35 N/A ↑ There has been a strong increase It is likely that renewable energy Ofgem & energy in renewable energy generation capacity will continue increasing. Durham capacity (MW) 2012 - 177 / capacity in Durham. Generation However, the rate of increase County capacity has shown an increase may be less than previous years Council 2013 - 203 of 84% between 2008 and 2015 due to cuts to subsidies and new contributing to an extra 179 MW Government guidance relating to 2014 - 212 of power. wind energy.
2015 - 214
Proportion of 2013 - 27.7 2013 -13.9 - ? The proportion of energy Proportionately the trend may Durham energy consumed that is generated from decrease as more households County consumed that 2014 - 27.9 renewable energy shows no are built in the County and Council is generated Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Plan Data Source Status Condition
from 2015 - 26.6 consistent trend from 2013 - subsidies for renewable energy renewable 2015. However, when compared decrease. sources per with the national average, household (%) Durham performs significantly better.
Operational 2013 - 480 N/A - ↓ The overall renewable energy Due to the high proportion of wind Durham renewable output has decreased slightly energy development within the County energy Output 2014 - 444 between 2013 and 2015 but County it is likely that output will Council (MW) shows no consistent trend. vary depending upon climatic 2015 - 461 conditions. However a larger proportion of Solar PV has assisted in increasing output significantly. Other external Sustainability factors will impact upon the output, such as a decrease in energy from landfill.
Residual 2010 - 679 England ↑ Generally, Durham has seen a Reduction of waste is a national Durham Appendix Household reduction in residual household trend that has been led by County Waste per 2011 - 626 2010 - 425 waste by 20% between 2010 - national policy guiding for Council
Appraisal Household 2015. However this is still example minimum packaging (kg) 2012 - 557 2011 - 419 significantly worse than the requirements. It is anticipated that
English average (based off 2013 further reductions could occur in B: figures). line with trends but the County
2013 - 539 2012 - 411 Review may continue to lag behind the
Scoping English average. 2014 - 539 2013 - 403
2015 - 543 of Baseline Report Municipal 2007 - 74 90% ↑ Municipal Waste Landfill has If the Council retains its strategy Durham Waste Landfill diversion dropped significantly between and contracts for waste disposal County (%) 2010 - 60 by 2007 and 2015 showing a it is anticipated that the proportion Council (2016) 2014/15 of waste sent to landfill will Data 373 374 Sustainability
Indicator County Durham Comparator Target Trend Indicator Commentary on Baseline Likely Future without the Plan Data Source Appendix Status Condition
2011 - 54 reduction of 98%. The reason for remain at low levels. Further
this large fall is that Durham has improvements may be very B:
Appraisal shifted its waste strategy towards difficult to achieve. 2012 - 33 Review energy from waste and away from 2013 - 38 landfill.
2014 - 16 of Scoping Baseline 2015 - 2
Household 2008 - 24 UK 50.0 ↑ The amount of household waste It is likely that the proportion of Durham Report
waste sent for sent for reuse, recycling and waste reused/ recycled/ County Data reuse, 2010 - 36 2011 - 42.4 EU/UK composting has generally composted will remain stable at Council recycling and Target increased between 2008 and around 43%/ 44%requiring composting 2011 - 39 2012 - 43.5 2015 with 44% more being changes to be made to for (2016) (%) reused, recycled and composted example waste collection 2012 - 43 2013 - 44.0 over this period. However, when services such as tackling the compared with the national levels of contamination of average, has a slightly lower recyclable waste collected and/ 2013 - 44 2014 - 44.9 percentage of waste that is sent or introducing the collection of for recycling. additional materials to further 2014 - 43 improvements to the trend.
2015 - 43
% waste sent 2011 - 11 ↑ The amount of waste sent for This trend should continue to Durham for energy energy recovery has significantly improve but at a slower rate than County recovery 2012 - 28 increased from 2011 - 2015 with what would be expected under Council 47% more being recovered over the plan. There may be 2013 - 24 the period. This also reflects the opportunities for non domestic reduction seen in waste going to waste, such as animal and food 2014 - 46 landfill. waste to be sent for energy recovery through technologies such as anaerobic digestion. 2015 - 58
For any queries about this report or Sustainability Appraisal please contact us at:
Write to: Sustainability and Climate Change Strategy Team Durham County Council County Hall Floor 5 Room 66-72 Durham DH1 5UQ
Telephone: 03000 265542
Email: [email protected]